Sie sind auf Seite 1von 452

User’s Guide

Home
Design
Architectural
Series 4000
© 2006 Punch! Software, L.L.C.
PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide
All rights reserved. This document, as well as the software described in it, is furnished under license and
can only be used or copied in accordance with the terms of the license.
Portions of the software described in this document © 1995-2006 Microsoft Corporation.
Except as permitted by such license, no part of this document can be reproduced, stored in a retrieval
system, or transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, recording, or otherwise,
without the prior written permission of Punch! Software, L.L.C.
Punch! Software, L.L.C. reserves the right to improve, enhance and revise its products without notice.
Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 is a registered trademark of Punch! Software, L.L.C.
Microsoft Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. All other product names
mentioned in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective manufacturers.
The information in this document is furnished for informational use only, is subject to change without
notice and should not be construed as a commitment by Punch! Software, L.L.C. Punch! assumes no
liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this document.
Second edition, 2006
Printed in the United States of America
Table of
Contents

Part 1: Nuts & Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1


Welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Window Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
A Quick Tour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
File Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Punch! Updater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Punch! Software Primer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Plan Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Part 2: From the Ground Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47


Topo Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Room Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Foundation Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Floor Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Part 3: Utilities in Your Home Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83


Electrical Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Plumbing Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
HVAC Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Part 4: Working on Your Home’s Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99


Roofing Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Roofing Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Deck Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Deck Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Landscape Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Detail Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide i


Contents

Part 5: Customizing Your Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149


Editing Your Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Working with LiveView . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Personalizing Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Material Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Part 6: Design Aid PowerTools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191


Site Planner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Door Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Window Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Cabinet Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Fireplace Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Plant Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Trim Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Pool Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Part 7: General PowerTools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249


FloorPlan Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
PhotoView & PhotoView Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
DXF/DWG Export & Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Fence Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Elevation Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Framing Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Estimator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Part 8: Presentation & CAD PowerTools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291


RealModel® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Layout Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Symbol Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Section Detailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Global Sun Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

ii PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Contents

Part 9: Punch! Animator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323


File Management and Editing Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
KeyPoints and Animation Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Segment Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Video Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337

Part 10: 3D Custom Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341


Window Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
File Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Drawing Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Drawing in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Drawing in 2D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Converting 2D Objects to 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Editing 3D Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Controlling Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Applying Color and Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide iii


Chapter i

iv PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Part 1

Nuts & Bolts

Chapter 1: Welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Chapter 2: Window Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Chapter 3: A Quick Tour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Chapter 4: File Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Chapter 5: Punch! Updater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Chapter 6: Punch! Software Primer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Chapter 7: Plan Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Chapter 1

Welcome
Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 is a professional-level home design system developed for anyone who
needs fast, accurate home drawings and wants the flexibility to view and edit their plan in 3D.
Uses for Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 include:
■ Architectural drawings
■ Presentations
■ Kitchen design
■ 3D visualization
■ Plumbing planning
■ DXF/DWG Import and Export
■ Electrical plans
■ Framing customization
■ Interior design
■ Landscaping
In addition, Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 contains a variety of useful PowerTools that each perform a
specific task. For instance, Framing Editor lets you customize almost every facet of your framing, like the material, spacing
and even the direction studs and trusses are to be placed and Layout Manager makes it easy to make professional
presentations of your designs to an architect or builder. Once you’re finished with your design, you can even record an AVI
movie to send to your friends, architect, builder and so on.
It’s simple to get started designing the home of your dreams. Take a few minutes to familiarize yourself with the contents
of this manual, so you’ll know where to quickly find the answers. Be sure to see Chapters 2 and 3 for an overview of the
screen layout and a quick tour of the program.
See the chapter titled “Punch! Software Primer”, which begins on page 27 for a basic overview of tools and techniques that
you’ll use throughout the design process.
The most important thing to do before beginning work with Punch! AS4000 will be setting your display to 32-bit color. To
do this, right-click the Desktop, then click Properties on the pop-up menu. Click the Settings Tab on the Display Properties
dialog box, then select True Color (32-bit); if this is not available on your computer, select 24-bit.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 3


Chapter 1 Welcome

Contents of Package 3 Define your design’s exterior walls. For more


information, see “To convert interior walls to exterior
Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 comes with
walls”, which begins on page 71.
everything you need to install and use the software. The
package includes the following items: 4 Use the Wall Segment Properties dialog box to match all
roof sections. For more information, see “Defining
■ Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 Gable Wall Segments”, which begins on page 71.
Installation Set of three (3) CDs
■ PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s 5 Use the Automatic Flooring feature on the upper floors.
Guide For more information, see “To control automatic
flooring”, which begins on page 70.
■ Homeplan booklet
6 (optional) Draw flooring on the upper floors. For more
System Requirements information, see “Adding Flooring”, which begins on
page 81.
In order to run Punch! Home Design Architectural Series
4000, it is recommended that you have a Pentium-based 7 Customize any complex roofing sections. For more
computer. In addition, your system should include the information, see “Using the Freehand Roof Tools”,
following: which begins on page 103.
Tip: The most important thing to remember when beginning
System Requirements a new drawing is to complete your foundation or exterior
■ Intel® Pentium®,Celeron®, Xeon™ or Centrino™ or walls first. A completely-closed exterior perimeter will
AMD® Athlon™, Duron™ or Opteron™ Processor ensure that floor square footage measurements will be
■ Windows® 98 or higher correctly calculated.
■ 64 MB of RAM
■ 1.4 GB of hard disk space Installing Punch! Home Design
■ VGA video card displaying at least 800x600 with 24-bit Architectural Series 4000
color (32-bit, if available)
To install Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000,
■ CD-ROM drive
you must run Setup. You can’t install or reconfigure Punch!
■ Mouse or other pointing device
AS4000 by copying files directly from the distribution CD to
■ 32 MB Video Card Memory
your hard drive.
■ (optional) Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.0 or above to use
Content Updater
To install Punch! AS4000

Tips for Users of Other Punch! Programs 1 Insert Punch! AS4000 Installation CD #1 into your
CD-ROM drive. Installation begins as soon as you insert
Punch! AS4000 will open all floorplans designed with the CD.
previously-released Punch! programs. One major difference
from very early Punch! programs involves the use of interior, 2 Follow the installation prompts that appear.
exterior and foundation walls. Walls drawn in some previous 3 Insert Installation CD #2 when prompted to do so.
Punch! programs, like Punch! Super Home Suite and Punch!
Note: If Windows Explorer launches and shows you the
5 in 1 Home Design, may import as interior walls, so these
contents of CD #2, just close that window. You will not need
walls will need to be customized in Punch! AS4000.
to launch any further files until the installation is completed.
In addition, you will want to use the Punch! Topo Designer
4 Repeat for the remaining CDs in the installation set.
PowerTool to update all topography drawn in previously-
released Punch! programs. For more information, see “Topo 5 Click OK, making sure you do not change the drive at
Designer”, which begins on page 49. this point.
Note: If installation did not begin when you inserted the
To update a file from a previous Punch! program
Punch! AS4000 Installation CD #1 into your CD-ROM drive,
1 Make a copy of your file. Save the original. Autorun may be turned off on your computer.
2 Open the copied file.

4 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Registering Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000

To install Punch! AS4000 if installation does not ■ Set your Display Settings to 800x600 pixels and High
begin automatically Color (24-bit) or True Color (32-bit). On your Start
1 Insert Punch! AS4000 Installation CD #1 into your menu, select Control Panel>Display>Settings.
CD-ROM drive. ■ If you notice that the 3D display is not clear, set back the
Graphics Acceleration. On your Start menu, select
2 Double-click My Computer. Control Panels> System>Performance>Graphics, then
3 Double-click the CD-ROM drive (most computers will set the acceleration back one notch.
begin the installation at this point). ■ By default, all measurements display in English Units; to
choose Metric Units go to Design>Unit of Measure...
4 Double-click SETUP.
select Metric Units.
Registering Punch! Home Design
Architectural Series 4000 Display Settings
Punch! AS4000 is designed to run effectively based on the
Take a moment to register online during installation. After
system requirements printed on the software packaging.
registering, you are eligible for technical support and for
However, there are some specific settings you can select to
early notification when new product releases become
obtain the best display possible.
available.
Your serial number is located on the Help Menu, under To adjust your display settings
About Punch Home Design. 1 On the Start menu, click Settings, Control Panel. The
You can also register your software by visiting the Customer Control Panel program group is displayed.
Support Center at http://punch.custhelp.com. 2 Double-click Display. The Display Properties dialog box
is displayed.
Speed Tips 3 Click to the Settings page tab.
You can “Speed Up” Punch! AS4000 by changing some of 4 In the Colors list box, click True Color (32-bit).
the program's default settings.
Note: If 32-bit is unavailable, click True Color (24-bit).
■ Close the LiveView window when you are not working
in 3D. No 3D calculations are performed when the 5 In the Screen Area section, move the slider to display at
LiveView window is closed. least 800 x 600 pixels.
■ Choose the Quarter-View window size for LiveView 6 Click OK. The new window settings are applied. You
instead of Full-View to increase 3D rendering speed. 3D may be prompted to restart your computer to apply the
rendering speed increases as the LiveView window new settings. If so, click OK or Yes.
becomes smaller in size.
■ Turn off shadows. For more information, see “Adding Online Help
Lighting and Shadows”, which begins on page 161.
■ Set your Display Screen Settings to 24-bit (32-bit, if Punch! AS4000 includes an extensive online help system.
available), 65,000 colors for optimum rendering speed. This system includes all of the information found in the
■ Hide the floors that are not being drawn. By turning off PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s
the inactive floors, the program will not waste resources Guide.
on them.
■ On the View menu, click Render Options. The Render To access the online help files
Options dialog box is displayed. The lower the render ■ On the Help menu, click Contents or press F1.
quality, the faster LiveView will render your design.
To access help for a specific part of your 2D
Important System Settings drawing
Some of your computer’s settings can impact Punch! 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
AS4000’s efficiency. By changing one (or more) of these
2 Click the Context Help Button.
settings, you can control how the program performs.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 5


Chapter 1 Welcome

3 Click the feature, object or plant that you want help with. 2 Navigate through the Help System until the topic you
The Quick Access menu for that feature, object or plant need is displayed.
is displayed on the right side of the window.

3 Click the Show Me button. A short video will be played,


showing how the tool or feature works.

Technical Support
Before contacting Punch! Technical Support, please verify
4 Click the tool’s Help listing on the pop-up window. Help that the answer to your question is not available from one of
for that feature, object or plant is displayed. the following resources:
5 (optional) Pressing F1, while many tools are active, will ■ Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s
access the help file for that Tool. Guide
■ Punch! AS4000 Help System
Video Tutorials ■ Video Tutorials
■ To automatically launch your browser and visit the
Video Tutorials are available for drawing tools and other Punch! Software website, click the Connect to
commonly-used features. These tutorials can be accessed Punch! button at the upper right of your window.
three ways.
■ The Punch! Online Community is available at
http://forums.punchsoftware.com. At the Online
To access video tutorials from Tool Guides Community, users can post questions and trade useful
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. tips and tricks.
■ The Customer Support Center is available at
2 Click the feature, object or plant that you want help http://punch.custhelp.com. At the Customer Support
with, then click the Tool Guide tool. The Tips and
Center you can register your software, search the
Tricks menu for that tool is displayed. knowledge base or ask a question, if necessary.
The Customer Support Center can only answer questions that
are related to features of Punch! Home Design Architectural
Series 4000. They cannot answer specific questions about
home building, local building codes and so on.
When contacting the Support Center, please provide the
3 Click the Video Tutorial button on the Tips and Tricks following details:
menu. A short video will be played showing how the tool
■ Serial Number - located on the Help > About Punch!
works.
Home Design dialog box
■ Your computer’s operating system
To access video tutorials with a right-click
■ Make and model of your computer
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. ■ Video card manufacturer and model
2 Click the Context Help Button. ■ Video card driver date and version
■ Video RAM
3 Right-click the feature, object or plant that you want ■ Display settings, including hardware acceleration
help with. The Quick Access menu for that tool,
object or plant is displayed. After registering your program, you will receive 60 days of
4 Click Video Tutorial on the pop-up window. A short free technical support. When you call, you should be in front
video will be played, showing how the tool works. of your computer, with the program running, and have the
above information handy. The technical support contact
To access video tutorials from Help information can be located at the Customer Support Center -
http://punch.custhelp.com.
1 On the Help menu, click Contents or press F1.

6 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Chapter 2

Window Layout
The Punch! AS4000 window provides an assortment of features that make it easy to create precise home plans. This
chapter describes the basic components.
In most cases, this chapter does not provide detailed information on standard Windows concepts or on specific menu
items. For information on standard Windows concepts, such as the mouse, the Control menu, the window border, the
maximize button, dialog box controls and so on, refer to Windows online Help.

LiveView Launch Punch!


icons websites
title bar
menu bar
tips & tricks context help button
plan tab plan toolbar snaps button
standard toolbar

annotation and
dimension bar Preview Bar

design window property


bar
virtual
ruler
elevation measurement
slider tools
working floor button vertical
scroll bar
selection filter
compass

status bar horizontal scroll bar


PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 7
Chapter 2 Window Layout

Title Bar Tips & Tricks


The title bar extends across the top of the application Punch! AS4000 makes it easy to get started by providing
window. It displays the name of the program and the name of users with tips and tricks for each Tool. Tips & Tricks
the current drawing file. Using the buttons at the right end of provide information about each tool and some general
the title bar you can minimize, maximize, close or restore the information about the program. Tips & Tricks can be turned
window. You can also maximize or restore a window by off and on to suit your needs.
double-clicking on the title bar. Double-clicking the Control
menu box at the left end of the title bar is a quick way to exit. To access general tips & tricks
If the application is running in a window, rather than ■ On the Standard toolbar, click the Tips & Tricks
maximized, dragging the title bar moves the entire window Button.
on the desktop.

Menu Bar
You can choose menu items using either the mouse or the
keyboard. To use the mouse, click the menu name; when the
menu drops down, click the item you want. Menu items with
an arrow to the right display cascading menus, when you
place the pointer over one of them. When you highlight a To access tips & tricks for a specific tool
menu item, a description is displayed on the status bar. 1 On any plan tab, click the tool you want to learn more
about.
To use the keyboard, press the ALT key and type the
underlined letter in the menu name, then type the underlined 2 Click the Tips & Tricks Button, the Tips and Tricks
letter in the menu item’s name. If there is a cascading menu, menu for that tool is displayed.
you must type another letter. You can also use the arrow keys
to move through menu items and press ENTER to select one. To access tips & tricks for a part of your 2D drawing
The ESC key backs out of the menu items one level at a time. 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
There are single-key or key combination shortcuts for certain 2 Click the Context Help Button.
frequently-used menu items. Each menu lists available
shortcut keys to the right of the item’s name. You can use the 3 Click the feature, object or plant that you want help
techniques for choosing menu items in combination. with. The Quick Access menu for that feature,
object or plant is displayed on the right side of the
window.
Plan Tabs and Toolbars
Clicking one of the plan tabs will activate the toolbar for
that plan layer. For example, if you select the Landscape tab,
the Landscape toolbar will appear. In addition, when you
click
the small arrow next to the title of the tab, you have the
option of viewing or hiding other plans. This will be useful,
for example, if you want to see the foundation plan with
landscaping, but without exterior and interior walls. 4 Click the Tips & Tricks listing at the top of the pop-up
window. The Tips & Tricks Button menu for that feature,
To find out what a certain tool represents, hold the pointer object or plant is displayed.
over the tool and read the description on the status bar at the
bottom of the window.

5 (optional) Click Back or Next to cycle through the tips


available for that feature, object or plant.

8 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Elevation Slider

To turn tool guides on and off You are not constrained to vertical or horizontal; the Vertical
■ To turn off Tool Guides, click (Turn-Off Tool Guides). Ruler can be stretched in any direction necessary.

Snaps Bar
On the Snaps bar, you will find tools that you will
begin to find indispensable. Each tool has a very
specific function and will allow you to place walls,
doors, windows and many other things exactly
where you want them - the first time! For more
information, see “Punch! Software Primer”, which
begins on page 27.
■ To turn on Tool Guides, on the Help Menu click Show
From placing a window exactly 6'4" from a corner to
Tool Guides.
placing a table lamp exactly in the center of the end
table, you will begin to use Snaps in concert with
almost every other drawing tool in Punch! AS4000.

Annotation Bar
On the Annotation bar, there are two tools for text,
straight and angled, and several tools to let you
dimension part of your design where automatic
dimensioning may not be available.
Elevation Slider With these tools, you will be able to measure and label
With Punch! AS4000’s Elevation Slider you can any part of your drawing. If you want, you can store
easily move selected items vertically off “ground these labels on the Detail Tab, so you have the option of
level”. This feature makes it a snap to make sure turning them off when you want to see your design in a
windows, doors, plants and so on are in exactly the more unobstructed state. For more information, see
position you want. Simply select the object or feature “Punch! Software Primer”, which begins on page 27.
to be raised and move slider by clicking and dragging
with the mouse. For a more information, see “Using Measurement Tools
Elevation Slider” on page 156.
The measurement tools include associative dimensions,
window/door callouts and the shortcuts to calculate floor
Virtual Ruler square footage.
The Virtual Ruler works like a real-world tape measure. It
stores away in the corner of the window until you need it.
Then, with one click, it is displayed in the middle of the
window, where you can move it into any position necessary
to make a needed measurement. It then stores away until you
need it again. To move the Virtual Ruler, click and drag
from the center. To resize, click and drag on one of the large
black dots at either end. Associative Dimensioning are the measurements that appear
as you are adding features. For example, the Associative
Dimensioning feature will show how far from the ends of
each wall the window is positioned.
When the Window/Door Callouts option is checked, the
measurements of all window and door openings will be
shown, with the wall measurement,s and be displayed in the
floorplan view.
Drag

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 9


Chapter 2 Window Layout

Selecting one of the three square footage options will cause When you want to focus primarily on your 2D actions while
Punch! AS4000 to make that calculation and display it in the maintaining a clear view of the 3D design, select Split Plan/
Status Bar. 3D View. Then, when you’re ready to add materials and
colors to your Dream Home it will be easier in the 3D Full
Working Floor Button View mode.
Use the Working Floor button to switch the current view
based on the number of floors in your home plan. When
Properties Bar
you click the Working Floor button, a pop-up menu is You can easily modify features you have previously drawn
displayed. Simply click the floor on which you would like to by selecting them and editing their properties on the
work to switch the current working floor. Properties Bar. You can even set the Properties Bar to
automatically display when a feature is selected by clicking
Status Bar Auto Activate.
The status bar is located in the lower left of the window and
displays prompts, program messages and measurements. It is
Selection Filter
a good place to look when you are holding the pointer over There will be times that you will place items atop one
certain buttons or menu items to find their function. another. To make it easier to select each layer use the
Selection Filter. Click the type of feature(s) you want to be
Scroll Bars able to select. When you hold down the CTRL key, you will
only be able to select those features.
Scroll bars provide a way for you to pan across the drawing,
that is, to change the part of the drawing visible in the For example, to select a transom window placed over a door
window, without changing the level of magnification. check “Windows” on the Selection Filter. Hold down the
CTRL key and click where the window and door are placed
■ To pan the drawing in small increments, click the scroll
and you will only select the window.
arrow that points in the direction you want to pan.
■ To pan in larger increments, click the control shaft,
between the scroll box and a scroll arrow.
■ To pan by a custom increment, drag the scroll box in the
direction you want to pan.
■ To position at a specific area of the page, right-click the
scroll bar and click the wanted area on the pop-up menu
that is displayed.

Preview Bars
You can click and drag objects, templates, materials, colors
and so on from their Preview Bars onto your plan. The
Preview Bar changes to reflect your selection. For instance, if
you click the Plant Bar, plant options will be displayed.
Clicking one of the buttons on the PowerTool bar launches
LiveView Icons one of the associated Punch! AS4000 applications. For
It is in the LiveView window where you see your example:
designs come to life! The default view is Plan Full
■ Launch Topo Designer. To learn more about Topo
View. When you load Punch! AS4000, this is the
Designer, see the chapter titled “Topo Designer”, which
view you will see. With the 3D Quarter View option, use
begins on page 49.
most of your window for drawing, yet be able to view your
■ Launch Material Workshop. To learn more about
design in 3D. For a full explanation see the chapter titled
Material Workshop, see the chapter titled “Material
“Working with LiveView”, which begins on page 157.
Workshop”, which begins on page 183.

10 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Compass Setting

■ Launch Roofing Wizard. To learn more about Roofing


Wizard, see the chapter titled “Roofing Wizard”, which
begins on page 111.
All PowerTools launch in this same fashion, whether they
were written by Punch! Software, LLC or by a third-party
developer.

Compass Setting
With the True North compass you can make sure that your
design is placed correctly on your lot. The compass is also
useful to accurately depict the direction of shadows and the
sun’s position.

PunchSoftware.com
With the click of one button, you can visit the Punch! website
at www.punchsoftware.com or the Punch! PowerTool Store
at www.punchsoftware.com/PowerTool_store.htm
■ To automatically launch your
browser and visit the Punch!
home page, click the Punch!
Software Websites button at
the upper right of your
window, then click Punch! Software Home Page.
■ To automatically launch your browser and visit the
Punch! PowerTool Store, click the Punch! Software
Websites button at the upper right of your window, then
click Punch! PowerTool Store.
■ New additions and revisions are being added to the
Punch! content libraries all the time. Use the Punch!
Updater to connect to our server, search for new content
packages, and update your existing content libraries.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 11


Chapter 2 Window Layout

12 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Chapter 3

A Quick Tour
To get the most benefit from Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000, you should take a minute to become
familiar with some of its basic concepts. This chapter describes a few settings you should know, as well as some of the
terms used throughout this guide.
Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 is not just one software application, but several applications that can be
used together. Once you’ve mastered Punch! AS4000, additional tools are available to customize your home plans:
Estimator, Material Workshop, PhotoView, RealModel and 3D Custom Workshop. Information on the use of all these
tools can be found in this User’s Manual.
With Punch! AS4000 you can set a precise drawing scale, define units of measurement and set the reference grid. There are
also many performance settings you can apply to optimize drawing speed and 3D viewing.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 13


Chapter 3 A Quick Tour

About This Guide Graphic Cues


The text and graphics in this guide are tailored to help you This guide uses several types of graphic elements. Some
find the information you need quickly and get the most out of show the window or a dialog box that will appear during an
Punch! AS4000. Each section of this guide is divided into a operation. When this type of graphic illustration is used,
series of step-by-step instructions, making it easy for you to every effort is made to show the element exactly as it is
scan a page to find exactly what you need. You can also refer displayed on the window.
to the index for additional topics on the same subject, if
Graphic Cues Used in this Guide
necessary.
Convention Meaning
Instructions for installing and using Microsoft Windows do
not appear in this guide. If you’re uncomfortable with your mouse click that selects a point—the
knowledge of Windows or with the concepts associated with number, when present, specifies the mouse
click’s position in a series of clicks
a user interface object, you should review Windows online
Help before attempting any serious work with Punch! 2
AS4000.
click and drag operation—beginning of
Basic Terms arrow indicates where to start; end of arrow
indicates where to stop
Dr
The following is a list of terms used throughout this guide.
ag
Take a moment to familiarize yourself with the language
a right mouse click —the number, when
used in this guide and to reinforce your understanding of present, specifies the mouse click’s position
basic terminology. in a series of clicks
2
Click
Pressing and releasing the left mouse button once.
Punch! PowerTools™
Right-click Punch! Home Design Architectural Series
Pressing and releasing the right mouse button once. 4000 is PowerTool enabled. Punch!
PowerTools seamlessly add additional
Double-click features and functionality to your program to
Pressing and releasing the left mouse button twice. make it easier to create your dream home!
Whenever more PowerTools become available, they are
Click and drag
offered to users at the Punch! PowerTool Store.
Pressing the left mouse button, holding it down and moving
the mouse, simultaneously. ■ To automatically launch your
browser and visit the Punch!
Drag-and-drop PowerTool Store, click the
Punch! Software Websites
Clicking to select an item, holding down the mouse button,
button at the upper right of
then dragging and releasing.
your screen, then click Punch! PowerTool Store.
Scroll
Defining Your Lot Size and Topography
Using the scroll bars on the sides of the application window
by clicking the slider box, holding down the mouse button With Punch! AS4000 you define lot size and all
and dragging. topographical information in the Site Planner and
Topography Designer PowerTools.
For more information, see “Topo Designer”, which begins on
page 49.
For more information, see “Site Planner”, which begins on
page 193.

14 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Setting the Scale

Setting the Scale 3 (optional) Click the arrow next to Angle Format and
select the number of decimal points you want to use.
Scale is the ratio between real-world size of objects and items
in your drawing and their size when printed.
The default drawing scale is 1/4" = 1', meaning that 1/4" on
your drawing plan equals one foot in real-world size. You
can customize scale settings at any time to suit your needs, as
well as print your drawing to scale.
4 (optional) Click the arrow next to Precision and select the
To set the drawing scale number of decimal points you want to use.
1 On the Design menu, click Plan Scale. The Plan Scale
dialog box is displayed.

5 (optional) Click the arrow next to Readout Format and


2 Click a new scale setting, then click OK. The new scale is
select the format you want.
applied to your plan drawing.

Setting Unit of Measurement


You can set units of measurement in Punch! AS4000 by
selecting either English measurements or Metric
measurements. You can also set the default measurements
and options to be applied when any previously-drawn design
6 Click OK. The unit of measurement and options you
is opened.
selected are applied.
To use English measurements
To use Metric measurements
1 On the Design menu, click Unit of Measure. The
1 On the Design menu, click Unit of Measure. The
Measurement Units dialog box is displayed.
Measurement Units dialog box is displayed.
2 Click English Units.
2 Click Metric Units.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 15


Chapter 3 A Quick Tour

3 (optional) Click the arrow next to Angle Format and Grid properties can also be set by accessing the right-click
select the number of decimal points you want to use. menu with nothing selected.

To define Snap to Grid settings


1 On the Options menu, click Grid Properties or right-
click on your design window and click Grid Properties
on the pop-up menu that is displayed. The Grid
Properties
4 (optional) Click the arrow next to Readout Format and dialog box is displayed.
select the format you want.

5 Click OK. The unit of measurement and options you


selected are applied.

To set defaults for previous designs


2 On the Grid Spacing dialog box, type new measurements
1 Follow the instructions for either English or Metric
into the Snap Grid section, then click OK. Items you
units outlined above, then click the box to set the
draw or drag-and-drop into the design window will now
defaults for all previously-drawn designs.
snap to the measurements you defined.
Note: Initially, the grid is set at 12 inches, making it easy
to visualize each plan square as exactly one square foot, but
can be customized to meet your particular design needs.
Note: Snap settings can be set as low as 0.10 inch (English),
0.002 m (Metric), and still show visible movement along the
grid. Snap settings can be set as high as 500 inches (English),
2 Click OK. The defaults will be applied to any previously- 12.70 m (Metric).
drawn design when it is opened.
To select grid spacing
Using the Grid 1 On the Options menu, click Grid Properties or right-
With Punch! AS4000 you can set specific grid properties that click on your design window and click Grid Properties
aid in drawing your home plan. You can set points, based on on the pop-up menu that is displayed. The Grid
the reference grid, which is useful when you want to make Properties
sure certain points are specified precisely. dialog box is displayed.

Grid settings have a direct impact on the ease of aligning 2 Type new horizontal and vertical measurements in the
objects, snapping objects to the grid and so on. When using Grid Dots/Lines section of the Grid Spacing page, then
the Snap to Grid feature, items that are dragged and dropped click OK. The new grid spacing measurements are
on the design window are automatically snapped, or placed, applied.
to align with the current grid. By default, Snap to Grid is
turned on.
You can customize grid settings by selecting grid spacing,
grid style and whether the grid is hidden from view or
displayed.

16 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Using the Grid

disabled. To enable Snap to Grid, simply recheck the


menu item.

To display the grid


■ On the Options menu, click to check Grid Visible or
right-click on your design window and click Grid Visible
on the pop-up menu that is displayed. The grid is
displayed on the design window.

To change the grid style


1 On the Options menu, click Grid Properties or right-
click on your design window and click Grid Properties
on the pop-up menu that is displayed. The Grid
Properties
dialog box is displayed.
2 Click the Grid Style page tab.
3 Click either Grid Dots or Grid Lines, then click OK. The
new grid style is applied.

Note: Grid Dots/Lines can be set to as low as 1 inch


(English), 0.02 m (Metric), and still be viewable. Grid Dots/
Lines can be set as high as 500 inches (English), 12.70 m
(Metric).

To move objects/features along the grid


1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click the object or feature you want to move.
3 Using the arrow keys on your keyboard, move the object
or feature into position.
Note: Each time you press an arrow key, the object or
feature will move one increment that you have set in “To
define Snap to Grid settings” on page 16.

To turn off Snap to Grid


■ On the Options menu, click to uncheck Snap to Grid,
press CTRL+R or right-click on your design window and
click Snap to Grid on the pop-up menu. The feature is

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 17


Chapter 3 A Quick Tour

18 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Chapter 4

File Management
When you start Punch! AS4000, a new blank drawing file is displayed. If you are returning to work on an existing drawing,
you must open it, or display it on the screen. Opening a file involves clicking Open on the File menu and specifying the
name of the file you want to open. Once you have opened a file, you can edit, import, export, print, view and save it.
You can have more than one file open at a time. The exact number of files you can have open depends on the amount of
memory in your system and the complexity of the home plan file. When you open a file, Punch! AS4000 displays it in a
new window.
The changes you make to a plan drawing occur only in your computer’s memory until you save them. To preserve a
drawing for later use, you must save it to a file. If you want to save a drawing using its current name or if you want to save
a new, untitled drawing, use Save. If you want to save a drawing using a new name, use Save As.
At any point during the design process you can import objects created in 3D Custom Workshop to further customize your
design. In addition, you can export a 3D LiveView rendering to make it easy to share your design with friends.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 19


Chapter 4 File Management

Opening a File To save an existing file


Opening a file copies the data it contains into memory, ■ On the File menu, click Save or right-click, then click
making it available for you to edit or print the plan drawing. Save on the pop-up menu that is displayed or press
Ctrl+S.
To open an existing file
To save a new, unnamed file
1 On the File menu, click Open. The Open dialog box is
displayed. 1 On the File menu, click Save As. The Save As dialog box
is displayed.
2 In the File Name box, type the name of the file you want
to open, or search for the file by switching folders or 2 Type a file name in the File Name text box. Punch!
drives. AS4000 automatically adds the PRO extension, unless
you specify another extension.
3 When you see the name of the file you want to open,
click to select it. 3 Click OK.
4 Click OK.
To save a file to a different name, drive, or folder
To see a list of recently opened files 1 On the File menu, click Save As. The Save As dialog box
is displayed.
1 On the File menu, highlight Open Recent. The Open
Recent listing is displayed. 2 If you want to save the drawing under another name, type
a name in the File Name text box.
2 On the Open Recent pop-up, click the file you want to
open. The file loads into memory. 3 If you want to save the drawing to a different drive or
folder, click a different drive and folder, or type the
To clear the recently opened files listing complete path in the File Name text box.
1 On the File menu, highlight Open Recent. The Open 4 Click OK.
Recent listing is displayed.
2 On the Open Recent pop-up, click Clear Recent Designs
Closing a File
List. A warning box is displayed. When you finish working with a file, close it to remove the
3 Click Yes to delete all files from the listing. Click No to window from the screen and to free up your computer’s
leave the listing unchanged. memory. When you are done working in Punch! AS4000,
close all your files and exit the program.
Saving a File To close a file
When you open a file, Punch! AS4000 copies the file to your
■ On the File menu, click Close. If you have unsaved
computer’s memory. As you work, you modify the copy
changes in your plan drawing, Punch! AS4000 prompts
stored in memory. Any system failure or loss of power
you to save them before it closes the file.
destroys that copy. To save your work permanently, you must
save it to a file on a disk. A good rule of thumb is to save
To close all open files and exit Punch! AS4000
every 15 minutes or after you’ve completed any work you
wouldn’t want to redo. ■ On the File menu, click Exit. If any open drawings have
unsaved changes, Punch! AS4000 prompts you to save
When you click the Save command, Punch! AS4000 saves them before it closes their files.
the active drawing using the name and location you last gave
it. You can create more than one version of a drawing or save Accessing the Pre-Drawn Homeplans
copies on another disk for safekeeping. You can save each
version under a different name, or you can save them under Punch! AS4000 includes a wide variety of homeplans for
the same name in different folders or on different disks. you to alter. The included homeplans are located in the
directory where you installed the program, in a subdirectory
called
“Plans”.

20 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Importing Files

To open a pre-drawn homeplan Exporting Files


1 Open the Punch software and click File>Open. You can export a rendering of your LiveView window to
2 On the screen that appears, click the down arrow beside BMP, JPG, PDS, PNG, TGA and WMF format. Files can be
My Documents and select C Drive. exported in Textured, Wire-Frame and ClearView modes.
The exported file will appear just as your LiveView window
3 From the folders that appear in the window, double-click
does. Be sure to render your drawing in high-resolution
Program Files.
before exporting. Size is also controlled by how your
4 From the next set of folders that appear, click Punch! LiveView window appears; the larger the LiveView window,
5 Select Plans from the next set of folders. the larger the file will be. For more information on
controlling the LiveView environment, see “Working with
6 The 20 plans will appear in the window. Double-click the LiveView”, which begins on page 157.
plan you wish to view.
By exporting your design to VRML, it becomes available for
Note: All plans included with Punch! AS4000 are the viewing with a VRML viewer or through a web browser
copyright of Wolfgang Trost Architects. The plans and 3D (provided an appropriate plug-in is installed). These helper
computer images are for conceptual purposes only. You must applications and plug-ins are available as free downloads on
have any plans provided in, or generated by, Punch! Home the Internet.
Design Architectural Series 4000 checked by a licensed
architect before you build. Punch Software LLC and Note: The 3D design will appear without the materials,
Wolfgang Trost Architects are not liable for errors, omissions when viewed from a VRML file.
or any other deficiencies in these conceptual plans. Complete
sets of building plans for these homes are available by To export
contacting Wolfgang Trost Architects at 1 On the File menu, click Export 3D>LiveView Image.
www.wolfgangtrost.com The Export Options dialog box is displayed.

Importing Files
Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 is actually
many programs in one. All of these programs integrate
seamlessly; objects created with Punch! 3D Custom
Workshop and cabinets designed in Punch! Cabinet Wizard
are available for import into your floor plan.
2 Click the radio button next to the format you want to use,
To import a 3D Custom Workshop object then click OK. The Save As dialog box is displayed.
1 On the File menu, click Import>Punch! 3D Custom 3 (optional) Click the radio button next to the Export
Workshop Object. The Import Punch! 3D Object dialog Quality that is needed, then click OK.
box is displayed.
4 (optional) Set a size for the exported image, then click
2 In the File Name box, type the name of the file you want OK.
to open or search for the file by switching folders or
5 Type a file name in the File Name text box. Punch!
drives.
AS4000 automatically adds the extension.
3 When you see the name of the file you want to open,
6 If you want to save the drawing to a different drive or
click to select it.
folder, click a different drive and folder, or type the
4 Click OK. The object is placed in the center of your 2D complete path in the File Name text box.
design.
7 Click OK.
Note: Double-click the object to re-open it in 3D Custom
Workshop. To export to VRML
1 On the File menu, click Export 3D>VRML.
2 In the File Name text box, type a name. Punch! AS4000
automatically adds the extension, then click OK.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 21


Chapter 4 File Management

Sharing Files Using the Content Folder 5 Click OK.

Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 will look for To print to scale
anything missing from a drawing in the Contents Folder.
Missing components could be custom textures, custom 1 On the Design menu, click Plan Scale. The Plan Scale
plants, the topography grid files, PhotoView images, and so dialog box is displayed.
on.
To share a design that has customized components, those
components need to be collected and placed in the Content
Folder, then the Content Folder will be emailed with your
home design plan. 2 Click the radio button next to the scale you want to use.
Click OK.
Printing Floorplans Note: Gridlines will print if they are visible when the
Punch! AS4000 prints using the current Windows printer drawing is printed.
drivers. You can, however, print using any installed printer. 3 On the File menu, click Print to Scale. A Print Manager
Using the Print dialog box you can specify a printer or plotter menu will ask if you want to print your drawing in color.
from those currently installed. Your can print your drawing Click Yes to print in color; click no to print in greyscale.
in color or in black and white; it can be printed to scale or
you can print it all on one page, whatever you require. Follow 4 The Print dialog box is displayed.
these steps to print your 2D drawing. 5 Click the printer you want to use.
6 (optional) Change the paper orientation and size.
To print to fit page
7 Click OK.
1 On the File menu, click Print to Fit Page or press Ctrl+P.
A Print Manager menu will ask if you want to print your
drawing in color. Click Yes to print in color; click no to Printing a 3D LiveView Rendering
print in greyscale. Punch! AS4000 streamlines the process used to print the 3D
LiveView images. With just a couple of clicks, you can print
beautiful, full-color renderings of your design.

To print a 3D LiveView rendering


1 On the File menu, click Print 3D LiveView, then select
Note: Gridlines will print if they are visible when the the quality needed.
drawing is printed. 2 The print dialog box is displayed.
2 The Print dialog box is displayed. 3 Click the printer you want to use.
4 (optional) Change the paper orientation and size.
5 Click OK.

3 Click the printer you want to use.


4 (optional) Change the paper orientation and size.

22 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Chapter 5

Punch! Updater
New additions and revisions are being added to the Punch! content libraries all the time. Use the Punch! Updater to connect
to our server, search for new content packages, and update your existing content libraries.
Note: The Punch! Updater utility compares the content packages you’ve downloaded to those on the server. Punch! does
not collect or transmit information about you or your system over the Internet.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 23


Chapter 5 Punch! Updater

Updating your Punch! content 4 Click the link. Punch! Updater searches for available
updates and a list is displayed.
Punch! Updater offers a list of available updates for you to
download. Not only does Punch! Updater allow you to
choose which updates you want, but Updater recommends
additional downloads to complement your initial selection.
Updating your software, using Punch! Updater, allows you to
receive the maximum performance from your software.

To search for available updates


1 Make sure your computer is connected to the Internet,
then click the Punch! Software Web site button in the top
right-hand corner. A drop-down menu is displayed.

5 Click the check box next to each package you want to


install. The Total Download Size and Total Installation
2 Click Punch! Updater. The Punch! Updater Package Size is displayed. The Install button is activated.
Manager displays the packages you’ve downloaded.
Note: Some updates are designed to work in conjunction
with other updates. In such cases, Punch! lists the packages
designed to accompany your selections in the Recommended
Updates section. Failure to download these additional
packages may impact the appearance or performance of your
new content.
6 (optional) To select all the recommended packages, click
the Select All button.
7 Click the Install button to begin the installation process.
Your selection(s) downloads to your hard drive.
8 When installation is complete, click OK. The initial
search page is displayed.

3 Click the Search for Updates button. The initial search


page is displayed.

Note: Once you have downloaded a package, it appears in


the Package Manager and no longer appears in the available
updates list.

To uninstall an update
1 Click the Package Manager button. The packages you’ve
downloaded are displayed.
2 Select the package you want to uninstall then click the
Uninstall button. The uninstall confirmation box is
displayed.

24 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Updating your Punch! content

To customize update manager options


1 Click the Program Settings button. The Install Manager
Options are displayed.
■ To automatically select the Punch! Updater
recommendations, click the checkbox next to
Automatically select recommended package updates.
3 Click YES to uninstall the package. When uninstallation
■ Your library may already contain a file that exists in
is complete, a dialog box will be displayed.
the package you are downloading. Specify the action
you want Punch! Updater to take in this situation.
2 To save your settings, click the Save button. Your
updated Program Settings are saved.
3 To restore Updater’s original Program Settings, click the
Default button, then click the Save button. The Program
Settings return to their default setting.
4 Click OK to return to the Package Manager.
To customize network options
To customize install manager options 1 Click the Program Settings button. The Install Manager
1 Click the Program Settings button. The Install Manager Options appear.
Options are displayed. 2 Click the LAN Proxy Server drop-down box. The proxy
use options appear.
■ Click Do not use a proxy server to disable Punch!
Updater from using a proxy server when accessing
the Internet.
■ Click Use system’s proxy settings to use your current
Internet settings to access the Internet.
■ Click Use custom proxy settings to enter HTTP
Proxy, Port and No Proxy for.
Note: A proxy server acts as a buffer between your
computer and the information you are accessing on the
Internet. Proxy settings can be customized to restrict your
computer from certain information.
3 To save your settings, click the Save button. Your
■ To remove all files upon uninstallation, select the updated Program Settings are saved.
checkbox next to Remove empty categories from the
software when uninstalling packages. 4 To restore Updater’s original Program Settings, click the
■ To prompt a warning before uninstalling packages, Default button, then click the Save button. The Program
click the checkbox next to Warn me before Settings return to their default setting.
uninstalling packages
2 To save your settings, click the Save button. Your
updated Program Settings are saved.
3 To restore Updater’s original Program Settings, click the
Default button, then click the Save button. The Program
Settings return to their original setting.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 25


Chapter 5 Punch! Updater

26 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Chapter 6

Punch! Software Primer


This chapter contains concepts and procedures that you will need throughout your design process.
Many features are drawn the same way throughout Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 and the PowerTools that
are included with it. Whether you are drawing a rectangle to mask part of a tree in PlantEditor or a rectangle to tint a custom
material in Material Workshop, it will always be drawn in the same way. The icons may different slightly, but the
process is the same.
Plus, Punch! AS4000’s powerful Snaps Toolbar has many tools that make precision placement easier. On the Snaps
Toolbar there are a wide variety of precision drawing aids that will help in exact placement of walls, doors, windows and so
on. The Snaps functions are also available in a variety of the included PowerTools.
Often, drawing a plan to scale is not enough to convey precise measurements. In such cases, you must notate the
measurements using manual dimension notes. Punch! AS4000, by default, automatically displays dimensions, as you draw.
This makes it easy to create accurate drawings from the start.
In addition to the Virtual Ruler you can use a variety of dimension tools available in Punch! AS4000 to measure items that
are not automatically dimensioned. You can also obtain total square footage measurements for each floor of your home
design with the Square Footage menu item.
With the text tools you can add either straight or angled text to any area of your drawing. This feature is useful if you’d like
to name your home plan or add your address to the final drawing, for instance. You can select from any font installed on
your computer, as well as select style and size.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 27


Chapter 6 Punch! Software Primer

Drawing Shapes
Many features are drawn the same way throughout Punch!
Home Design Architectural Series 4000 and the PowerTools
that are a part of it. Whether you are drawing a rectangle to
mask part of a tree in PlantEditor or a rectangle to tint a
custom material in Material Workshop, it will always be 1
drawn in the same way. The icons may different slightly, but 2
the process is the same.
Drag

To draw rectangles and squares

1 Click the Rectangle Tool. The pointer changes to 5 Release the mouse button.
reflect drawing mode.
To draw a polygon
Note: If you want to draw several rectangles, on the Edit

menu, click Keep Tool Selected. To deactivate the tool, click 1 Click the Polygon Tool. The pointer changes to
the Selection tool on the Standard Toolbar. reflect drawing mode.

2 (optional) Click the editing mode that you want to apply, 2 (optional) Click the editing mode that you want to apply,
then select a color or material from the Preview Bar. then select a color or material from the Preview Bar.

3 Click on the design window to define the start point of 3 Click on the design window to define the start point of
the rectangle. A rubber-band rectangle is displayed and the polygon. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows
follows the pointer. Dimensions are displayed, as you the pointer. Dimensions are displayed, as you draw.
draw. 4 Click and move the mouse to the next cornerpoint.
4 Hold the mouse button down, as you extend the rectangle Repeat until you have drawn the necessary shape.
to the size you want.

2 12

12

52 42

Dr 32 2
ag

5 Release the mouse button. 5 Right-click to end drawing mode.

To draw circles and ovals To draw a multigon

1 Click the Circle/Oval Tool. The pointer changes to


reflect drawing mode.
2 (optional) Click the editing mode that you want to apply,
then select a color or material from the Preview Bar.
3 Click on the design window to define the start point of
the shape. A rubber-band shape is displayed and follows
the pointer. Dimensions are displayed, as you draw.
4 Hold the mouse button down, as you extend the shape to
the size you want.
1 Click the Multigon Tool. The pointer changes to 2 (optional) Click the editing mode that you want to apply,
reflect drawing mode. then select a color or material from the Preview Bar.
Note: On the Options menu, click Multigon Options to 3 Click on the design window to define the start point of
change the number of sides. the multigon. A rubber-band multigon is displayed and
follows the pointer.

28 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Changing Curve Tension

4 Hold the mouse button down, as you extend the multigon


to the size you want.

3 Type the amount of tension that you want.


4 Click OK. The Curve Tension you specified is applied.
Dr Examples:
ag
12
Default Curve Tension (8):

5 Release the mouse button.

To draw a curve
Curve Tension set at 2:
1 Click the Curve Tool. The pointer changes to
reflect drawing mode.
2 (optional) Click the editing mode that you want to apply,
then select a color or material from the Preview Bar.
3 Click on the design window to define the start point of
the curve. A rubber-band curve is displayed and follows
the pointer. To remove curve tension
4 Click and move the mouse to the next point. Repeat until 1 Click an object to select it.
you have drawn the needed shape. 2 On the Property bar, click Straighten, in the Curve
section. The curve is changed to a polyline.
Note: Although the lines will initially appear angular, they
will become curved when you end drawing mode.
Snap Basics
5 Double-click to end drawing mode.
With snaps, you can define exactly what distance interior
walls are placed from other walls or begin exactly at the end
Changing Curve Tension of the wall when drawing a roof section. You can move
To further control the look of the shapes drawn with any of through the Snaps Toolbar with the Tab key. Each time you
the arc or curve tools, you have control over the degree of press Tab, the next Snap Tool is activated, Shift-Tab reverses
curve assigned to them. With the Straighten feature, it is easy the process.
to create angular shapes and with Curve Tension you can
The following examples show a few ways that Snaps will
change the appearance. Curve Tension is measured between
1 and 10. Specifying 1 in the dialog box results in very little help you during the design process; each Snap Tool works in
concert with many other tools in Punch! AS4000.
tension being applied, while specifying 10 causes a slightly-
exaggerated curve.
Accessing the Snaps toolbar
To change curve tension ■ Click the Snaps On Tool. The Snaps
1 Click an object to select it. toolbar is displayed.

2 On the Property bar, click Adjust, in the Curve section.


The Smooth dialog box is displayed.
PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 29
Chapter 6 Punch! Software Primer

To snap a wall from the end of another wall To snap a roof


1 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Interior Wall 1 On the Roofing Plan tab, click one of the Roof
Tool. Tools. The Preview Bar displays the pitches that
2 On the Snaps toolbar, click the Snap to Endpoint are available.
Tool or press TAB. 2 Click the roof pitch to select it.
3 Click a wall on the design window. The wall will “snap 3 On the Snaps toolbar, click the Snap to Endpoint
to” the endpoint nearest where you clicked. Tool or press TAB.
4 Click a wall on the design window. The roof will “snap
to” the endpoint nearest where you clicked.

4 Hold down the mouse button and drag. Notice that the
wall follows the pointer and automatically displays the
wall length.

5 Hold down the mouse button and drag until the cursor
touches another wall.

5 Release the mouse button when the wall length you want
is reached.

6 Press Tab to re-activate the Snap to Endpoint Tool. The


roof will automatically extend to cover the entire
perimeter.
Note: Each Snap Tool defaults back to “No Snap” after it is
used; double-click the Snap Tool to lock it in active mode. If
you have locked a Snap Tool and use the Tab key to activate
another tool, it will also be locked as active. To unlock it,
click “No Snap”.
Note: Walls are drawn from a centerline. When moving or
otherwise manipulating them, you are always working from
the centerline and snapping to them will do the same.

30 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Snap to Segment Centerpoint

5 Release the mouse button when the wall length you want
is reached.

7 Release the mouse button.

Snap to Segment Centerpoint


Snap to Segment Centerpoint will be useful when drawing
walls, placing doors or windows, and so on. You can move
through the Snaps Toolbar with the Tab key. Each time you
press Tab, the next Snap Tool is activated, Shift-Tab reverses
the process.
Note: Each Snap Tool defaults back to “No Snap” after it is
To snap a wall from the center of another wall used; double-clicking the Snap Tool will lock it in active
1 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Interior Wall mode. If you have locked a Snap Tool and use the Tab key to
Tool. activate another tool, it will also be locked as active. To
unlock it, click “No Snap”.
2 On the Snaps toolbar, click the Snap to Segment
Centerpoint Tool or press TAB to move through To snap a window in the center of a wall
the tools on the Snaps toolbar.
1 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Window Tool. The
3 Click a wall on the design window. The wall will “snap Preview Bar displays the styles that are available.
to” the centerpoint of the wall.
2 On the Snaps toolbar, click the Snap to Segment
Centerpoint Tool or press TAB to move through
the tools on the Snaps toolbar.

4 Hold down the mouse button and drag. Notice that the
wall follows the pointer and automatically displays the
wall length.

3 Click a wall on the design window. The window will


“snap to” the centerpoint of the wall.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 31


Chapter 6 Punch! Software Primer

4 (optional) Customize the window properties as shown in 4 Hold down the mouse button and drag until the cursor
the section “To add a window” on page 76. touches the outside perimeter of the room. Notice that a
red arrow is displayed showing the centerline of the
Snap to Object Center stairway. The stairway will automatically move to the
center of the room when the cursor touches the perimeter.
Snap to Object Center will make placing items in the center
of rooms easy. Details down to placing a coffee table exactly
in the center of the floor rug just take a couple of clicks.

To snap a stairway to the center of a room


1 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Stairway Tool.

2 On the Snaps toolbar, click the Snap to Object


Centerpoint Tool or press TAB to move through
the tools on the Snaps toolbar.

5 Release the mouse button.

3 Click a stairway on the design window. The cursor will


“snap to” the centerpoint of the stairway.

32 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Snap to Object Corner

Note: Each Snap Tool defaults back to “No Snap” after it is 7 Hold down the mouse button and drag until the cursor
used; double-clicking the Snap Tool will lock it in active touches the outside perimeter of the table.
mode. If you have locked a Snap Tool and use the Tab key to
activate another tool, it will also be locked as active. To
unlock it, click “No Snap”.

To snap a lamp to the center of a table


1 Click the Object Tab. The Preview Bar displays
furnishing objects.
2 Click the arrow next to “Objects” at the top of the
Preview Bar to display the object library list, then click
another object library.
3 Scroll to view the available objects. Drag and drop a
table and a lamp onto your design window.
4 On the Snaps toolbar, click the Snap to Object Note: The lamp will automatically move to the center of the
Centerpoint Tool or press TAB to move through table when the cursor touches the perimeter of the table.
the tools on Snaps toolbar.

8 Release the mouse button.


5 Click the lamp on the design window. The cursor will
“snap to” the centerpoint of the lamp. Note: For more information on placing objects, see
“Objects Preview Bar”, which begins on page 170.
6 Press TAB to move through the tools on the Snaps
toolbar until the Snap to Object Centerpoint is again
active. Snap to Object Corner
Snap to Object Corner makes it easy to grab an object or
other element by its corner and move it precisely into
position. You can use any snap tool in conjunction with
other snaps to move features and objects into the perfect
position, the first time.

To snap a planter to the corner of a deck


1 Click the Object Tab. The Preview Bar displays
furnishing objects.
2 Click the arrow next to “Objects” at the top of the
Preview Bar to display the object library list, then click
another object library.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 33


Chapter 6 Punch! Software Primer

3 Scroll to view the available objects. Drag and drop a


planter onto your design window.
4 On the Snaps toolbar, click the Snap to Object
Cornerpoint Tool or press TAB to move through
the tools on the Snaps toolbar.

Note: The planter will automatically move to the corner of


the deck when the cursor touches the perimeter of the deck.
8 Release the mouse button.
Note: For more information on placing objects, see
“Objects Preview Bar”, which begins on page 170.
5 Click the planter on the design window. When you drag
the planter the cursor will “snap to” the cornerpoint. Snap to Intersection
6 Press TAB to move through the tools on Snaps toolbar Using the Snap to Intersection control, you can position
until the Snap to Object Cornerpoint is active again. walls, objects and other features where you want them the
first time.

To snap a wall exactly opposite another wall


1 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Interior Wall
Tool.
2 On the Snaps toolbar, click the Snap to
Intersection Tool or press TAB to move through
the tools on the Snaps toolbar.
3 Click a wall on the design window. The wall will “snap
to” the endpoint nearest where you clicked.

7 Hold down the mouse button and drag, until the cursor
touches the outside perimeter of the deck.

4 Hold down the mouse button and drag. Notice that the
wall follows the pointer and automatically displays the
wall length.

34 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Snap to Perpendicular

Snap to Segment-Offset
You can easily place walls, objects, and so on, where you
want them the first time with Snap to Segment-Offset.

To snap a planter 18" from the corner of a deck


1 Click the Object Tab. The Preview Bar displays
furnishing objects.
5 Release the mouse button when the wall length you want 2 Click the arrow next to “Objects” at the top of the
is reached. Preview Bar to display the object library list, then click
Note: Each Snap Tool defaults back to “No Snap” after it is another object library.
used; double-clicking the Snap Tool will lock it in active 3 Scroll to view the available objects. Drag and drop a
mode. If you have locked a Snap Tool and use the Tab key to planter onto your design window.
activate another tool, it will also be locked as active.
4 On the Snaps toolbar, click the Snap to Segment-
Note: Walls are drawn from a centerline. When Offset Tool. The Snap to Segment-Offset dialog
manipulating them, you are always working from the box is displayed.
centerline and snapping to them will do the same.

Snap to Perpendicular
Snap to Perpendicular makes it easy to add a CAD line
perpendicular to a circle or oval. For instance, if you want to
5 Type 18 in the text box. Click OK.
draw a pathway at a perpendicular angle to a curved retaining
wall. 6 On the Snaps toolbar, click the Snap to Object
Cornerpoint Tool or press TAB to move through
To snap a perpendicular line the tools on the Snaps toolbar.
1 On the Detail Plan tab, click the Line Tool.
2 On the Snaps toolbar, click the Snap to
Perpendicular Tool or press TAB to move
through the tools on the Snaps toolbar.
3 Click the perimeter of a circle or oval drawn previously.
The line will “snap to” an angle perpendicular to the
edge.

7 Click the planter on the design window. The cursor will


“snap to” the cornerpoint of the planter.
8 Press TAB to move through the tools on the Snaps
toolbar until the Snap to Segment-Offset tool is active.

4 Hold down the mouse button and drag. Notice that the
line follows the pointer and automatically displays
dimensions.
5 Release the mouse button when the length you want is
reached.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 35


Chapter 6 Punch! Software Primer

Reshaping Elements
Punch! AS4000 lets you manipulate many straight elements
in your design to make your dreams a reality. A few of the
elements that can be reshaped are railings, roof panels,
flooring, and 2D CAD objects.

To fillet (round) a corner


1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click the feature you want to fillet. Selection
handles appear around the object.
9 Hold down the mouse button and drag until the cursor 3 On the Property bar, click Points, in the Edit Level
touches the outside perimeter of the deck. section, or right-click and click Point Selection.
4 On the Snaps toolbar, click the Fillet Corner Tool.
5 Click a cornerpoint of the feature; hold down the
mouse button and move the pointer toward the center of
the feature.

Dr
ag

Note: When the cursor touches the deck perimeter, the


planter will automatically move to the distance from the
corner of the deck specified in Step 4.
10 Release the mouse button. 6 Release the mouse to stop filleting the corner.

Note: Each Snap Tool defaults back to “No Snap” after it is To inversely fillet (round) a corner
used; double-clicking the Snap Tool will lock it in active
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
mode. If you have locked a Snap Tool and use the Tab key to
activate another tool, it will also be locked as active. 2 Click the feature you want to fillet. Selection
handles appear around the object.
Adding and Deleting Points 3 On the Property bar, click Points, in the Edit Level
You can add or delete points to walls, 2D CAD objects, and section, or right-click and click Point Selection.
so on at any time to quickly reshape them. 4 On the Snaps toolbar, click the Inverted Fillet
Corner Tool.
To add a point 5 Click a cornerpoint of the object; hold down the mouse
1 On the Snaps toolbar, click the Add Point tool. The button and move the pointer toward the center of the
pointer changes to reflect drawing mode. feature.

2 Click on a wall, or anywhere you want to gain flexibility.

To remove a point

1 On the Snaps toolbar, click the Remove Point tool.


The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.
2 Click on any point you want to remove.
36 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide
Using Flip and Mirror

To flip a feature vertically


1 Click the feature you want to flip.

2 On the Snaps toolbar, click the Flip Vertical Tool or


Dr
on the Edit menu, click Flip Vertical.
ag

To mirror a feature horizontally


1 Click the feature you want to mirror.
2 On the Snaps toolbar, click the Mirror Horizontal
Tool or on the Edit menu, click Mirror Horizontal.
6 Release the mouse to stop filleting the corner.
3 Move the feature into position.
To chamfer a corner
To mirror a feature vertically
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
1 Click the feature you want to mirror.
2 Click the feature you want to chamfer. Selection
handles appear around the object. 2 On the Snaps toolbar, click the Mirror Vertical Tool
3 On the Property bar, click Points, in the Edit Level or on the Edit menu, click Mirror Vertical.
section, or right-click and click Point Selection. 3 Move the feature into position.
4 On the Snaps toolbar, click the Chamfer Corner
Tool. Dimensioning
5 Click a cornerpoint of the object; hold down the mouse Punch! AS4000 automatically displays dimensions as you
button and move the pointer toward the center of the draw, making it easy to precisely place walls, doors and other
feature. items in your plan drawing. The powerful Dimension Wall
tool will be especially useful to add interactive dimensions
between walls, where they are not automatically generated.
Dimensions drawn with the Dimension Wall tool are
Dr automatically updated when either wall is moved. You’ll find
ag
this tool extremely useful when measuring between the main
house and the walls of other buildings, like a garden shed or
playhouse. In some instances, you might want to print your
plan drawing without dimension annotation. You have the
option of turning off automatic dimensioning if you don’t
want it displayed on the drawing page or as you draw.

6 Release the mouse to stop filleting the corner. To use the wall-spacing dimension tool
1 On the Annotation toolbar, click the Dimension
Using Flip and Mirror Wall Tool.
The Flip function takes the original feature and reverses it 2 Click a wall on the design window to define the starting
either horizontally or vertically. Mirror works much like the point; hold down the mouse button and drag to the
Flip function. The difference is that mirror leaves the original second wall.
and makes a duplicate. Mirror creates two identical objects
3 Release the mouse button to set the measurement.
facing one another.
To use the offset dimension tool
To flip a feature horizontally
1 On the Annotation toolbar, click the Offset
1 Click the feature you want to flip.
Dimension Tool.
2 On the Snaps toolbar, click the Flip Horizontal Tool
2 Click on the design window to define the starting point;
or on the Edit menu, click Flip Horizontal.
hold down the mouse button and drag to the ending
point of the measurement you require.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 37


Chapter 6 Punch! Software Primer

1
2
12 Drag

Drag

3 Release the mouse button.


3 Release the mouse button.
4 Move the mouse in the direction you want to offset the
4 Move the mouse in the direction you want to offset the dimension.
dimension.

5 Click to end.
5 Click to end.

To use the zero-offset dimension tool


To use the length dimension tool
1 On the Annotation toolbar, click the Zero-Offset
1 On the Annotation toolbar, click the Length Dimension Tool.
Dimension Tool.
2 Click on the design window to define the starting point;
2 Click on the design window to define the starting point; hold down the mouse button and drag to the ending
hold down the mouse button and drag to the ending point of the measurement you require.
point of the measurement you require.

38 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Using the Virtual Ruler

3 Release the mouse button to set the measurement. 2 Click to select the endpoint style you want to use, then
click OK.
To use the diameter dimension tool
1 On the Annotation toolbar, click the Diameter Using the Virtual Ruler
Dimension Tool. The Virtual Ruler is a handy feature for measuring items in
2 Click one edge of a circle drawn on the Details Tab to your home plan that are not automatically dimensioned. You
define the starting point. The dimension will can “undock” the ruler at any time, leaving it active, or hide
automatically snap to the opposite edge of the circle. it from view with one mouse click. The Virtual Ruler is an
easy way to measure at an angle, too.
3 (optional) Move the mouse clockwise or counter-
clockwise to position the diameter dimension before
To measure using the Virtual Ruler
releasing the mouse button.
1 Click the Virtual Ruler button at the bottom of the
To use the leader dimension tool design window. The Virtual Ruler is displayed on
1 On the Annotation toolbar, click the Leader the drawing page.
Dimension Tool. 2 Click one of the black circles on the ruler edges and drag
2 Click on the design window to define the starting point; in the direction you want to measure. The measurement
hold down the mouse button and drag to draw the first is displayed in the center of the Virtual Ruler.
segment of the dimension. 3 (optional) Click the center of the Virtual Ruler and drag it
3 Release the mouse button and move the mouse in the to a new location on the design window.
direction you want the second segment to be placed.
To hide the Virtual Ruler
4 Click to end.
■ Click the Virtual Ruler button at the bottom of the
To turn off automatic dimensioning design window. The Virtual Ruler is “docked.”
■ On the Options menu, click to uncheck Automatic
Dimensioning. Calculating Square Footage
OR Punch! AS4000 can automatically calculate square footage of
each floor of your home plan. This feature makes it easy to
■ At the bottom of the window, click the Dimension figure how much carpet you’ll need to cover the first floor,
button, then click to uncheck Automatic for instance, or simply estimate your overall home size. If
Dimensioning on the pop-up menu that is displayed. square footage is incorrect, check to make sure the exterior
perimeter is intact. For more information, see “Defining the
To hide window and door dimensions Foundation Perimeter”, which begins on page 62.

■ At the bottom of the window, click the Dimension To calculate floor square footage
button, then click to uncheck Window/Door
callouts on the pop-up menu that is displayed. ■ At the bottom of the window, click the Dimension
button, then click First Floor Square Footage (or
To change the endpoint style Second or Third floor). Punch! AS4000 calculates the
square footage and the total is displayed on the status bar.
1 On the Options menu, click Dimension Properties. The
Dimension Properties menu is displayed. Note: The square footage calculation is based on wall
centerline measurements.

Adding Text
Use text to add information to your drawing. For example,
you might add text to annotate rooms, specify a home
address, the date the drawing was created or a specific feature
in your plan. Punch! AS4000 gives you the flexibility to
place text anywhere in your plan drawing, using different

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 39


Chapter 6 Punch! Software Primer

formatting techniques for each text instance. Text you place or


in your drawing is displayed on all 2D printed output.
■ Click the text you want to edit, then click Edit
To place text in your drawing on the Properties Bar.
1 On the Annotation toolbar, click the Multi-Line To place text at an angle
Text tool.
2 Click the area where you want to place text on the 1 On the Annotation toolbar, click the Rotated Text
tool.
drawing page. An Edit Text dialog box is displayed.
2 Click the area where you want to place text on the
drawing page. An (optional) dialog box is displayed.

3 Type the annotation in the text box. Click OK to end edit


mode.
4 (optional) Click Font, the Font dialog box is displayed.
Choose the Font, Style and Size, then click OK.
3 Type the notation in the text box.
4 Click the radio button next to the angle you want or enter
a custom angle in the dialog box.
5 Click OK to end edit mode.
6 (optional) Click Font, the Font dialog box is displayed.
Choose the Font, Style and Size, then click OK.

To change alignment of multi-line text


1 Using the selection tool, click the text you want to
change.
2 Click Center on the Properties Bar.

To change formatting of existing text


1 Using the selection tool, click the text you want to
change. Selection handles appear around the text.
3 (optional) Click Right on the Properties Bar.
2 On the Options menu, click Text or double-click the
To edit text selected text. The Font dialog box is displayed.

■ Double-click the text you want to edit. 3 To change the text font, click a new font on the Font list.

40 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Adding Text

4 To change the text style, click a new style on the Font


style list.
5 To change the text size, click a new size on the Size list.
6 Click OK.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 41


Chapter 6 Punch! Software Primer

42 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Chapter 7

Plan Tabs
Punch! AS4000 utilizes a collection of layers which are accessible by clicking the tabs along the top and right side of the
design window. Clicking a plan tab accesses a set of tools that you can use to design your floorplan, for example clicking the
Electrical Tab accesses outlets, switches and ceiling fans while clicking the Landscaping Tab accesses tools for edging,
fencing, ground fill, excavation and so on. Clicking a Content Bar accesses features like furniture objects, materials, colors
and so on.
Once placed, each feature like a door, window, plant, outlet and so on can be altered at any time. Click the feature and the
Properties Toolbar is brought to the top (a default that can be changed) and displays the customizable properties of that
feature.
You can further customize which plan layer or combination of plan layers you want to be active. In addition, you can make
each plan layer a different color so you can tell at a glance which layer a specific feature is on. You can even move features
to a different plan when necessary.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 43


Chapter 7 Plan Tabs

Selecting a Plan Tab


Using the easily-accessible plan tabs, you can quickly access
each tool set at any time.

To select a plan tab


1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click the plan tab you want to use. The plan tab is
selected and the tools available on that tab appear.

Customizing Visible Plans


To customize the color of plan layer
During the design of your floorplan, there may be times when
you want certain layers, that by default are hidden, to be 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
visible. For example, while working on your electrical plan, 2 Click the plan tab you want to customize. The plan tab is
you may need to see where plumbing lines will be. Punch! selected and the tools available on that tab appear.
AS4000 makes it easy to customize how you view your plan
layers.

To hide a plan layer from view


1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click the plan tab you want to use. The plan tab is
selected and the tools available on that tab appear.
3 Click the arrow to the right of the plan name, then click
the plan layer you want hidden.

3 Click the arrow to the right of the plan name, then click
Floor Plan Color. The Color matrix will appear.

Note: Items on a hidden plan layer are not available during


a Select All process and will not be altered with the other
items and features in your drawing.

To view a plan layer


4 Click a color from the Basic Color list. Click OK.
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
Note: The Color|Solid preview box will display the chosen
2 Click the plan tab you want to use. The plan tab is color.
selected and the tools available on that tab appear.
5 (optional) Click a color from the Custom Colors list.
3 Click the arrow to the right of the plan name, then click Click OK.
the plan layer you want to appear.
6 (optional) Move the arrow to the right of the colorbar at
the right of the Color dialog box. Click OK.

44 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Moving Features to Different Plans

7 (optional) On the Color Spectrum box, click a color or


click-and-drag the color marker. Click OK.
8 (optional) Type Hue, Saturation and Luminosity
variables. Click OK.
9 (optional) Type Red, Green and Blue variables. Click
OK.

Moving Features to Different Plans


With Punch! AS4000 you can move selections to different
plan layers; while Move to Plan deletes these objects from
their original position. Features moved to other plan tabs will
automatically change color to the color assigned to the new
location.

To move features from one plan to another


1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click the feature or object you want moved. To
select more than one object, press the SHIFT key, while
clicking objects.
3 On the Edit menu, click Move to Plan, then specify the
plan where you want the feature to appear, in the pop-up
menu that is displayed.
4 (optional) Right-click the selection and click Move to
Plan on the pop-up menu that is displayed, then click
which plan. The selection is moved to the plan you
specified.
Note: Items on a hidden layer are not available during a
Select All process and will not be moved along with the other
items and features in your drawing.

Selecting the Properties Bar


The Properties Bar is easily accessed by clicking a feature on
your floorplan. For example, clicking a door accesses the
customizable properties for doors and clicking a plant
accesses the properties for plants.

To select the properties bar


1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click the feature you want to customize. The
Properties Bar is displayed.
Note: If the Properties Bar does not
automatically display, it may be set to
“Manual Activate”. To reset the toggle,
click the arrow after “Properties”, then
click Auto Activate on the pop-up menu
that is displayed.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 45


Chapter 7 Plan Tabs

46 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Part 2

From the
Ground Up

Chapter 8: Topo Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49


Chapter 9: Room Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Chapter 10: Foundation Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Chapter 11: Floor Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Chapter 8

Topo Designer
Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000’s Topo Designer lets you incorporate information about your lot’s
contours into your design then display that information in 3D. You can use complex curves or simple geometric shapes to
represent your topography. You can even use existing topography drawings to trace the contours of your lot. All
modifications made in Topo Designer can be applied back to Punch! AS4000. Your topo lines will be displayed on the
Landscape tab and their visibility can be turned on and off.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 49


Chapter 8 Topo Designer

Adding Topography Objects


Topo Designer allows you to create topography objects using
a variety of methods. You can create sloped lots, draw
custom contours from scratch with simple 2D tools, even
import a topographical image of your lot and trace the exact
contours.

Launching Topo Designer


■ Launch Topo Designer by clicking the Topo
Designer icon on the PowerTool Bar.

Tips for Users of Other Punch! Programs


2 Type the new lot size in the text boxes, then click OK.
Topography that was drawn in a previous Punch! program
The lot is altered
was cumulative. Topo Designer draws all elevations as
absolute. 3 (optional) If you change your lot size after you begin
drawing your topography contours, click the Scale
Example: If, in a previous version, you had drawn a circular Contours box to ensure that your existing topo contours
area and set its elevation to four feet, then you drew an are scaled up or down by the ratio of the new lot size.
overlapping area and set its elevation to three feet, the result
would have been a seven foot hill. Topo Designer will 4 (optional) Click to select meters if you want to use metric
display this as a four foot hill with a one foot depression at measurements.
the top.
Setting the Working Elevation
Tips for converting topography Before you draw topography objects, be sure to set your
■ Topo lines should not be overlapped. working elevation. All other topography objects are drawn in
■ The new topo will not be relative to zero automatically. If relation to this elevation.
the only topo contour is set to 4', the whole lot will be 4'.
■ Sloped Lot objects and Sloped Lot Section Objects need To set the working elevation
to be converted to topo contours. 1 On the Design menu, click Set Working Elevation. The
■ Select the Sloped Lot object, set the contour spacing, the Set Working Elevation dialog box is displayed.
descent angle, then press the “convert to contours”
button.
■ Select the Sloped Lot Section object, set the descent
angle, then press the “convert to contours” button.

Setting the Lot Size


2 (optional) In the Working Elevation edit box, type a new
With Topo Designer you can define a lot size that matches
value.
your physical lot. The default lot size is 200 x 200 feet.
3 Click OK.
To set the lot size
1 On the Design menu, click Lot Properties or press
Using 2D Drawing Tools
CTRL+L. The Lot Properties dialog box is displayed. Contour lines represent a series of connected points that share
the same elevation. Using Topo Designer’s 2D drawing tools,
you can draw open or closed contours to represent the
topography of your lot.
Note: Elevations for topography objects are not cumulative,
each is relative to the working elevation of your drawing.

50 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Using 2D Drawing Tools

Tip: When drawing multiple instances of a topography 6 Click and move the mouse to the next point. Repeat until
object, be sure to turn Auto Reset off. On the Options menu, you have drawn the needed shape.
click to uncheck Auto Reset Tools. When Auto Reset Tools 7 Double-click to end drawing mode.
is unchecked, you can draw concurrent topography objects
without selecting the corresponding topography tool each To draw rectangle topography objects
time.
1 Click the Rectangle Topography Tool. The pointer
To draw curved topography objects changes to reflect drawing mode.
1 Click the Curved Topography Tool. The pointer 2 The Topo Object Properties bar is displayed,
changes to reflect drawing mode. showing the customizable options for this tool.
2 The Topo Object Properties bar is displayed, 3 (optional) In the Elevation edit box, type a new
showing the customizable options for this tool. value.
3 (optional) In the Elevation edit box, type a new 4 (optional) Click the Method button to access a
value. different drawing style, then select an option
from the pop-up menu that is displayed.
4 (optional) Click the Method button to access a
different drawing style, then select an option Note: The four predefined drawing methods are draw
from the pop-up menu that is displayed. rectangle from corner, draw rectangle from center, draw
square from corner and draw square from center.
Note: The two predefined drawing methods are closed
curve and open curve. 5 Click on the design window to define the start point of
the rectangle. A rubber-band rectangle is displayed and
5 Click on the design window to define the start point of follows the pointer. Dimensions are displayed as you
the curve. A rubber-band curve is displayed and follows draw.
the pointer.
6 Hold the mouse button down, as you extend the rectangle
6 Click and move the mouse to the next point. Repeat until to the size you want.
you have drawn the needed shape.
Note: Although the lines will initially appear to be angular,
they will become curved when you end drawing mode.
12
7 Double-click to end drawing mode.

To draw straight-edge topography objects


1 Click the Straight-Edge Topography Tool. The
pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.
Drag
2 The Topo Object Properties bar is displayed,
showing the customizable options for this tool.
7 Release the mouse button.
3 (optional) In the Elevation edit box, type a new
value. To draw circle and oval topography objects
4 (optional) Click the Method button to access a 1 Click the Circle/Oval Topography Tool. The
different drawing style, then select an option pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.
from the pop-up menu that is displayed.
2 The Topo Object Properties bar is displayed,
Note: The two predefined drawing methods are closed showing the customizable options for this tool.
polygon and open polygon. 3 (optional) In the Elevation edit box, type a new
5 Click on the design window to define the start point value.
of the polygon. A rubber-band polyline is displayed 4 (optional) Click the Method button to access a
and follows the pointer. different drawing style, then select an option
from the pop-up menu that is displayed.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 51


Chapter 8 Topo Designer

Note: The four predefined drawing methods are draw oval


from corner, draw oval from center, draw circle from corner
and draw circle from center.
1
2
5 Click on the design window to define the start point of
the shape. A rubber-band shape is displayed and follows
the pointer. Dimensions are displayed as you draw.
Drag
6 Hold the mouse button down, as you extend the shape to
the size you want.

7 Release the mouse button.

To draw circular arc topography objects

1 Click the Circular Arc Topography Tool. The


pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.

12 2 The Topo Object Properties bar is displayed,


showing the Elevation edit box.
Dr 3 (optional) In the Elevation edit box, type a new
ag
value.
7 Release the mouse button. 4 Press the mouse button, on the design window, to define
the centerpoint of the circular arc. A rubber-band line is
To draw arc topography objects displayed and follows the pointer. This line signifies the
1 Click the Arc Topography Tool. The pointer radius of your arc.
changes to reflect drawing mode.
2 The Topo Object Properties bar is displayed,
showing the customizable options for this tool.
3 (optional) In the Elevation edit box, type a new
Drag
value.
4 (optional) Click the Method button to access a
different drawing style, then select an option
from the pop-up menu that is displayed.
1
Note: The two predefined drawing methods are 2

free-form arc and 90 degree arc. Each can be drawn either


open or closed.
5 Click on the design window to define the start point of
the arc. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows the
pointer. Dimensions are displayed, as you draw. 5 Hold the mouse button down and extend the radius to
the size you want. Dimensions appear in the position
6 Hold the mouse button down, as you extend the arc to the
readout bar, as you draw.
size you want.
6 Release the mouse button.
7 Move the mouse clockwise or counter-clockwise to
create the shape you want.
52 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide
Creating a Building Pad

Creating a Building Pad


Use the Building Pad tools to draw level ground for your
foundation. You can draw the building pad, using a special
polygon tool or convert another topography object to a
2 building pad. When you return to Punch! AS4000, you can
make your building pad visible on the Foundations tab by
turning the Landscape layer on.

To draw a building pad


1 Click the Building Pad Area Tool. The pointer
changes to reflect drawing mode.
2 (optional) In the Elevation edit box, type a new
value.
8 Click to end drawing mode. 3 Click on the design window to define the start
point of the polygon. A rubber-band curve is
To draw multigon topography objects displayed and follows the pointer.
1 Click the Multigon Topography Tool. The pointer 4 Click and move the mouse to the next point. Repeat until
changes to reflect drawing mode. you have drawn the needed shape.
2 The Topo Object Properties bar is displayed, 5 Double-click to end drawing mode.
showing the customizable options for this tool.
3 (optional) In the Elevation edit box, type a new To convert an existing topography object to a
value. building pad
4 On the Properties bar, type the number of equal 1 Click a contour shape in the design window. The Topo
sides you want to draw. Object Properties bar is displayed, showing the
customizable options for this contour.
5 Click on the design window to define the start point of
the multigon. A rubber-band multigon is displayed and 2 Click the Convert to Build Pad button.
follows the pointer.
6 Hold the mouse button down, as you extend the multigon Adding Slopes
to the size you want. Many topographical maps show slope, rather than complex
topography shapes. You can use Topo Designer to to create
multiple slopes, with individual angles of descent. Once
you’ve defined the slope, you can move selected topography
lines to create plateaus or otherwise customize your
topography design.

To define slope sections


1 Click the Slope Lot Section Tool.
Dr
ag
12 2 (optional) On the Topography Slope Properties
bar, type a different Descent Angle in the
dialog box.
3 Click on the design window; hold down the
mouse button and drag.

7 Release the mouse button. 4 Release the mouse button.

Note: To change the multigon’s size, but constrain its 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4, until the topography is
drawn to your lot’s specifications.
orientation, press CTRL while drawing.
PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 53
Chapter 8 Topo Designer

4 Click OK. The trace image is repositioned.

To resize a trace image


1 Click the Trace Topography Properties Tool. The
Image Trace Properties bar is displayed, showing
the customizable options for this tool.
2 In the Scale Section, type a new value in the
Horizontal or Vertical text box, then press
ENTER. The trace image is resized.
OR
1 On the Design menu, click Resize Topography
Trace Image. The Resize Topography Trace
Image dialog box is displayed.
Tracing a Topography Image
If you already have an image that shows the topology of your
lot—for instance a scanned topology drawing or an aerial
photograph—Topo Designer lets you trace topography
objects directly over that image. Simply import the image,
position it in the drawing, then use one of the topography
tools to trace the image.

To import a trace image 2 Type a new value in the Horizontal or Vertical text box,
1 On the Design menu, click Load Topography then click OK. The trace image is resized.
Trace Image or click the Trace Topography Note: You can click Original Size on the Resize
Properties Tool. The Open dialog box is displayed.
Topography Trace Image dialog box, or on the Image Trace
2 In the File Name box, type the name of the image file Properties bar, to return the trace image to its original size.
you want to open or search for the file by switching
folders or drives. To stretch a trace image to fit the design window
3 When you see the name of the file you want to open, 1 Click the Trace Topography Properties Tool. The
click to select it. Image Trace Properties bar is displayed, showing
4 Click OK. the customizable options for this tool.
2 In the Scale Section, click the Horizontal or
To move a trace image Vertical stretch tool. The trace image is
1 Click the Trace Topography Properties Tool. The stretched accordingly to fit the page.
Image Trace Properties bar is displayed, showing OR
the customizable options for this tool.
1 On the Design menu, click Resize Topography
2 Click the Offset Trace tool. A pop up dialog Trace Image. The Resize Topography Trace
box is displayed. Image dialog box is displayed.

3 Click the horizontal or vertical scroll arrows to reposition


the trace image.

54 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Controlling Lot Properties

2 Check the Stretch Horizontal or Stretch Vertical 3 (optional) Click to raise or lower the Patch Resolution. A
checkbox, then click OK. The trace image is stretched lower value results in a more accurate 3D rendering of
accordingly to fit the page. your topography, but may also impact performance.
Note: You can click Original Size on the Resize 4 (optional) Check the Render Patch Lines checkbox to
Topography Trace Image dialog box, or on the Image Trace include patch lines, when rendering in ClearView.
Properties bar, to return the trace image to its original size. 5 (optional) Check the Render Lot Base checkbox to render
the subsurface as a solid.
To control the visibility of a trace image
6 (optional) In the Topography Generation section, click
1 Click the Trace Topography Properties Tool. The to raise or lower the Generation Quality. Higher
Image Trace Properties bar is displayed, showing generation quality reduces rendering speed.
the customizable options for this tool.
7 (optional) Check the Automatically Generate When
2 Check the Visible checkbox at the bottom of Needed checkbox to update the LiveView window every
the property bar. When the checkbox is not time you add or change a topography object.
checked, the trace image is not visible.
8 Click OK.
OR
■ On the Design menu, click Topography Trace Editing Topography Objects
Image Visible. When Topography Trace You can control the precision of your topography drawing by
Image Visible is not checked, the trace image changing the elevation or adding and deleting specific
is not visible. topography points to the topography objects you have
created.

Controlling Lot Properties To increase or decrease elevation


The Lot Properties dialog box allows you to control not only 1 Click a topography object in the design window.
the size of your lot, but how it is rendered in 3D. 2 (optional) On the Topo Objects Properties bar,
type a different elevation in the dialog box.
To modify the lot properties
1 On the Design menu, click Lot Properties or click To add a topography point
the Lot Properties Tool. The Lot Properties dialog 1 Click the Add Topography Point Tool. The
box is displayed. pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.
2 (optional) Type a value in Width or Depth text boxes, 2 Click to enter a new point on one of the topography
then select a unit of measurement from the drop-down objects you have created.
box.
To remove a topography point
1 Click the Remove Topography Point Tool. The
pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.
2 Click to remove a point from one of the topography
objects you have created.

Using Nudge, Snap Tools and the Grid


Once you’ve placed a roof object, you can precisely move it
into position using Nudge. Nudge utilizes the arrow keys to
move selected objects, or features, a specified distance. For
more information on using Nudge, see “Using Nudge”,
which begins on page 153.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 55


Chapter 8 Topo Designer

Nudge works in tandem with the Snap Grid. To learn more To view drawing layer combinations
about the Snap Grid, see “Using the Grid”, which begins on
page 16. 1 On the Design menu, click Visible plans or click
the Visible Plans button at the left bottom of the
With snaps, you can define exactly where topo objects are design window. A drop-down menu will appear.
placed. You can move through the Snaps Toolbar with the
Tab key. Each time you press Tab, the next Snap Tool is 2 Click the plan you want to view.
activated, Shift-Tab reverses the process. For more 3 (optional) Repeat until the combination you
information, see “Punch! Software Primer”, which begins on want is reached.
page 27.
Grid settings have a direct impact on the ease of aligning
topo objects, snapping objects to the grid and so on. When
using the Snap to Grid feature, items that are dragged and
dropped on the design window are automatically snapped, or
placed,
to align with the current grid. By default, Snap to Grid is
turned on. For more information, see “Using the Grid”,
which begins on page 16.

Viewing the Topography Drawing


While designing your topography plan, you will probably
want to view the 2D plan view only. Once completed, you
can view your plan in a combination of 2D and 3D or in 3D
only.

To view the 2D topography plan only


■ On the Window menu, click Plan Full View. The 2D plan
view is displayed.

To work on a selected floor

■ On the Design menu, click Work on Floor or


click the Working Floor button at the left bottom
of the design window, then click to check the floor on
which you want to work.

To view all 2D floor plan views at once

■ On the Design menu, click Visible Floors or click


the Working Floor button at the left bottom of the
design window, then click to check View All Floors.

To view the working floor only

■ On the Design menu, click Visible Floors or click


the Working Floor button at the left bottom of the
design window, then click to check View Working Floor
Only.
56 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide
Chapter 9

Room Wizard
For many people, visualizing their dream home does not start with the outside shape of the building, but with a wish list of
individual rooms. Now you can create complex floorplans from the inside out by laying out your home design room by
room. Create entire rooms with one click of the mouse! Build an entire floor in just minutes with Punch! Room Wizard.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 57


Chapter 9 Room Wizard

Launching Room Wizard 4 Choose the Method to draw your room.


■ Launch Room Wizard by clicking the Room ■ To draw a rectangular room, starting from
Wizard icon on the PowerTool Bar. the upper left-hand corner, select the first
rectangle option.
Adding Rooms ■ To draw a rectangular room, starting from
the center, select the second rectangle
You can create rooms with a few simple clicks of the mouse.
option.
Punch! Room Wizard allows you to use pre-designed room
■ To draw a square room, starting from the upper left-
dimensions, customize these dimensions or create your room
hand corner, select the first square option.
from scratch. When you want to see your design with the
■ To draw a square room starting from the center, select
overlapping walls trimmed away, just click the “Walls” tab.
the second square option.
The Rooms toolbar features twelve color-coded room types, 5 Create your room by clicking and dragging in the design
as well as one general room type that can be customized to window to draw your walls.
your wishes. Simply select your room type, change your
room’s dimensions (if you wish), and place your room on the To create a room from scratch
design window. When you’re finished placing rooms, simply
exit Room Wizard to update your design! 1 Click the Rectangle button. The Room Properties bar
appears on the right-hand side of the Room Wizard.
Tip: It is best to use Room Wizard only once per design. If
2 Choose the Method to draw your room.
you have added walls using the tools in your design program,
there is the possibility that those walls will be removed by ■ To create a rectangular room, starting from
re- launching Room Wizard. the upper left-hand corner, select the first
rectangle option.
To create auto-sized rooms ■ To create a rectangular room, starting from
the center, select the second rectangle
1 Click the corresponding button for the room type that
option.
you want to create. The Room Properties bar appears on
■ To create a square room, starting from the upper left-
the right-hand side of the Room Wizard.
hand corner, select the first square option.
2 Click the radio button next to auto-sizing on the Room ■ To create a square room starting from the center,
Properties bar. select the second square option.
3 (optional) In the Width text box, enter the width of the 3 In the Room Name text box, type your room’s name and
room, in feet and inches, and press ENTER. press ENTER.
4 (optional) In the Height text box, enter the length of the 4 Create your room by clicking and dragging in the design
room, in feet and inches, and press ENTER window to draw your walls.
5 Click in the drawing area to place your room.
Tip: You can resize an auto-sized room by clicking on a
wall and expanding it to the length you want.

To draw rooms
1 Click the corresponding button for the room type that
you want to create. The Room Properties bar appears on
the right-hand side of the Room Wizard.
2 Click the radio button next to Manual Sizing on the
Room Properties bar.
3 Click the Method button and select your design method.

58 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Modifying Room Properties

Modifying Room Properties 2 Select the room you want to modify. To select more than
one room, press the SHIFT key while clicking rooms.
Modifications to your room(s) are performed
The Room Properties bar appears on the right-hand side
on the right-hand side of the Room Wizard in
of the Room Wizard.
the Room Properties bar. You can modify
properties such as room dimensions, name, 3 (optional) Click Increase Priority to make the selected
even the viewing priority of overlapping rooms, room appear on top of any overlapping rooms.
at any time during the building process. 4 (optional) Click Lower Priority to make the selected
Note: The Room Properties bar will appear room appear beneath any overlapping rooms.
each time you create a room. Note: When you want to see your design with the
overlapping walls trimmed away, just click the “Walls” tab.
To change room dimensions
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection To calculate the area of a room
Tool. 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Select the room you want to modify. The 2 Select the room you want to calculate. To select more
Room Properties bar appears on the right- than one room, press the SHIFT key while clicking
hand side of the Room Wizard. rooms.
3 (optional) In the Width text box, enter the width of the 3 Click the Calc. Area button on the Room Properties bar.
room, in feet and inches, and press ENTER.
4 The calculation is displayed in the space under the Calc.
4 (optional) In the Height text box, enter the length of the Area button.
room, in feet and inches, and press ENTER
To calculate the area of an entire floor
To change room names
1 Click on the Walls tab. Your design is displayed in
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. blueprint form.
2 Select the room you want to modify. The Room 2 (optional) Click Calc. Floor Area to calculate the total
Properties bar appears on the right-hand side of the Room area of the current floor.
Wizard.
3 Type the name of the room you want in the Room Name Controlling Drawing Settings
text box and press ENTER. The drawing settings appear on the Property bar when you
first open Room Wizard, and again when you click on any
To align a room to the grid part of the Design Window where you have not placed a
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. room.
2 Select the room you want to modify. The Room Note: Before you draw rooms, be sure to set your working
Properties bar appears on the right-hand side of the Room elevation. All other rooms are drawn in relation to this
Wizard. elevation.
3 Click one of the Align to Grid buttons to
reposition the room. To set the working elevation
Note: When you draw a room, by default, it is ■ On the Property bar, type a new value in the Working
aligned to the grid. However, if you resize the Elevation edit box, then press ENTER.
room using the properties bar to something other
then a 6" increment, you can use the Align to Grid tool to To set ceiling heights
position the room more precisely. 1 On the Property bar, type the height you want the first
floor ceiling to be, in the First Floor text box, and press
To control the visibility of overlapping rooms ENTER.
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Type the height you want the second floor ceiling to be,
in the Second Floor text box, and press ENTER.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 59


Chapter 9 Room Wizard

3 Type the height you want to third floor ceiling to be, in 3 On the Edit menu, click Move. The Move dialog box is
the Third Floor text box, and press ENTER. displayed.
4 Click either Cartesian or Polar, then type amount you
To work on a selected floor want the room moved in the appropriate text boxes.
■ On the Design menu, click Work on Floor, or 5 Click OK. The room is moved, based on the coordinates
click the Working Floor button at the left bottom you specified.
of the design window, then click to check the floor on
Note: Coordinates are measured in inches or they can be
which you want to work.
measured in feet and inches, separated by a hyphen.

Editing Your Design To rotate a room by specifying an amount


Room Wizard provides you with editing tools to help you 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
modify your interior floorplan. You must select the room(s)
you want to edit before clicking on the Edit menu. 2 Click the room(s) you want rotated. To select more than
one room, press the SHIFT key while clicking rooms.
To copy a room from one floor to another 3 On the Edit menu, click Rotate. The Rotate dialog box is
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. displayed.
4 Click either Degrees or Radians, then type the angle you
2 Click the room(s) you want duplicated.To select more
want to rotate the plan in the Angle text box.
than one room, press the SHIFT key while clicking
rooms. 5 Click OK. The room is rotated based on the angle
measurement you specified.
3 On the Edit menu, click Copy to Floor, Upper Floor.
Select Lower Floor if you want to copy the original down
To flip a room
one level.
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
Note: The first floor is set as your default working floor.
2 Click the room(s) you want flipped. To select more than
To move rooms from one floor to another one room, press the SHIFT key while clicking rooms.

1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 3 On the Edit menu, click Flip Vertical or Flip Horizontal.
The room is flipped.
2 Click the room(s) you want moved. To select more than
one room, press the SHIFT key while clicking rooms.
To mirror a room
3 On the Edit menu, click Move to Floor, Upper Floor.
Select Lower Floor if you want to move the original 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
down one level. 2 Click the room(s) you want mirrored. To select more
than one room, press the SHIFT key while clicking
To move a room using the Nudge feature rooms.
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 3 On the Edit menu, click Mirror Vertical or Mirror
2 Click the room to select it.To select more than one room, Horizontal. The room is mirrored.
press the SHIFT key while clicking rooms.
3 On the Edit menu, click Nudge, then click the direction
(up, down, left, right).
Tip: You can also nudge your design by using the arrows on
your keyboard.

To move the a room by a specified amount


1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click the room(s) you want moved. To select more than
one room, press the SHIFT key while clicking rooms.

60 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Chapter 10

Foundation Plan Tab


Just like building in the real world, the best place to start is with a foundation for your design. The Foundation Plan Tab
includes tools to help you add the foundation details to your plan. You will learn to specify wall and footing widths, add
stiffener beams, draw piers and define post tension.
Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 makes creating basements or split-level homes easy. With just one or two
mouse-clicks your basement will be moved into proper elevation position, with the use of the versatile Elevation Slider.

PowerTools to enhance your design


■ “Topo Designer” on page 49
■ “Material Workshop” on page 183

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 61


Chapter 10 Foundation Plan Tab

Defining the Foundation Perimeter Setting the Foundation


Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 provides the Perimeter Options
tools to create a good foundation in your home plan. You Punch! Home Design Architectural Series
have options for wall thickness, footing width, stiffener 4000 draws your first floor walls, as you
beams and foundation piers. define the foundation perimeter. Once you
have defined the foundation perimeter of
Note: As you draw your foundation you are also drawing
your design, you have the option to
your first floor walls.
customize many features. From wall
thickness, floor height and stud spacing to
To define the foundation perimeter
automatic flooring options and footing
1 On the Foundation Plan tab, click the Foundation width, you have alternatives for almost
Perimeter Tool. every feature. You can customize these
2 Click on the design window to define the start point of settings at any time. For information on
the foundation. A rubber-band line is displayed and setting the wall style, see “Defining Gable
follows the pointer. This line signifies the first edge of Wall Segments”, which begins on page 71.
the foundation. Notice that dimensions are displayed, as
you draw. To define the foundation width
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the
Selection Tool.
2 Click the wall of the foundation to
12 2 select it; the Wall Properties bar is
displayed.
3 Click the radio button next to the width of footings you
want to use.
4 (optional) Type in a custom measurement, if needed.

To define stud spacing


42 32
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
Note: Drawing is constrained to 15 degree angles; to release 2 Click the wall of the foundation to select it; the Wall
this constraint hold down the SHIFT key, while drawing. Properties bar is displayed.
3 Click and move the pointer to the next cornerpoint. 3 Type the stud spacing required in the dialog box.
Repeat until you have completely drawn the foundation.
To hide window and door dimensions
4 Right-click to end drawing mode.
■ On the Options menu, click to uncheck Window/Door
Callouts.
OR
■ At the bottom of the window, click the Dimension
button, then click to uncheck Window/Door
callouts on the pop-up menu that is displayed.
OR
■ On the Walls Properties bar, click to uncheck the radio
button next to Callouts.

Note: The dashed lines represent footing width and the faint
blue diagonal lines represent the foundation area.

62 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Editing Foundation Walls

To dimension from wall center To reshape the foundation


By default, measurements are from wall surface to wall 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
surface; to measure walls “on center” follow these steps. 2 Click the wall of the foundation you want to
reshape.
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
3 Click a cornerpoint of the foundation; hold down the
2 Click the wall of the foundation to select it; the Wall mouse button and drag.
Properties bar is displayed.
4 Click the next cornerpoint; hold down the mouse button
3 Click the radio button next to Centers. and drag.
5 (optional) Click a side of the foundation to move two
cornerpoints at once.

To convert foundation walls to interior walls


1 On the Standard toolbar, click
the Selection Tool.
2 Right-click a foundation wall
To change dimension location on your design window. Click
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Convert Wall to Interior on
Selection Tool. the pop-up menu. All
connected walls become interior walls, the footings
2 Click the wall of the foundation to
disappear and the walls are moved from the Foundation
select it; the Wall Properties bar is
Plan Tab to the Floor Plan Tab.
displayed.
3 Click the Flip Dims button. Adding Stiffener Beams
Stiffener beams are used to support the foundation; typically
they run from one end of the foundation to the other. You
can control the length, width and dimension of each beam.

To place stiffener beams


1 On the Foundation Plan tab, click the Stiffener
Beam Tool.
2 On the Beam Properties bar, type the width
and depth of stiffener beam you want.
To control automatic flooring
3 Press the mouse button on the design window
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
to define the start point of the stiffener beam.
2 Click a wall of the foundation to select it; the Wall A rubber-band line is displayed and follows
Properties bar is displayed. the pointer.
3 Check the Automatic Floor checkbox. Flooring is
automatically inserted between joined exterior walls.
4 Uncheck the Automatic Flooring checkbox. The flooring
disappears.
5 (optional) Type a Depth in the dialog box to customize
the flooring depth.
12 2

Editing Foundation Walls


4 Hold the mouse button down, as you extend the stiffener
At any point during design of your new home, foundation beam to the opposite side of the foundation.
walls can be moved, reshaped, removed and so on.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 63


Chapter 10 Foundation Plan Tab

5 Release the mouse button to end drawing mode. foundation to the other and are bolted into the frame and set
in concrete.
Note: Drawing is constrained to 15 degree angles. To
release this constraint hold down the SHIFT key, while
To place a post tension strand
drawing.
1 On the Foundation Plan tab, click the Post-
To change the length of a stiffener beam tension Tool.
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Press the mouse button on the design window to define
2 Click the stiffener beam you want to alter. Selection the start point of the post tension strand. A rubber-band
handles appear. line is displayed and follows the pointer.
3 Click an endpoint of the stiffener beam; hold down the
mouse button and drag. Release the mouse button to stop
lengthening the beam.

To change the dimensions of a stiffener beam 12 2


1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection
Tool. 3 Hold the mouse button down, as you extend the post
tension strand to the opposite side of the foundation.
2 On the Beam Properties bar, type the width
and depth of stiffener beam you want. 4 Release the mouse button to end drawing mode.

Defining Foundation Piers Drawing the Foundation Slope


Foundation piers support the foundation. They are concrete Foundation Slope is typically specified in garages or
pads that add strength under a support column. Even after basement areas where there is a drain. It specifies which
you place piers, you can customize them. direction the floor area slopes.

To place foundation piers To draw the foundation slope


1 On the Foundation Plan tab, click the Piering 1 On the Foundation Plan tab, click the Foundation
Tool. Slope Tool.

2 On the Pier Properties bar, type the diameter of 2 Click once in your plan drawing, then drag in the
piers you want to use. direction you want the floor to slope.

3 Click on the design window. A foundation pier 3 Release the mouse button. The slope is defined.
will be placed at the location of each click.
To change the slope direction
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click an end of the foundation slope indicator.
3 Move the mouse in the direction you want the slope
changed.
4 Release the mouse button.
To resize a foundation pier
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. Creating a Basement
2 On the Pier Properties bar, type the new Basements are easy to create with the Elevation Slider.
diameter of piers you want to use.
To create a basement
Adding Post Tension Strands 1 On the Foundation Plan tab, click the Foundation
Perimeter Tool.
Post tension strands are used to prevent cracking in a
concrete slab foundation. They extend from one edge of the

64 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Creating a Split-Level Foundation

2 Draw a foundation. For specific information on adding foundations. Post tension strands are added to prevent
foundations, see “Defining the Foundation Perimeter” on cracking.
page 62.
3 Press and hold the SHIFT key down, while clicking on To create a slab foundation
each foundation wall, to select all the foundation walls. 1 On the Foundation Plan tab, click the Foundation
4 On the left side of the screen, drag the Elevation Slider Perimeter Tool.
down to the level of the basement. 2 Draw a foundation. For specific information on adding
foundations, see “Defining the Foundation Perimeter” on
page 62.
3 Click the wall of the foundation to select it; the Wall
Properties bar is displayed.
4 Type 4 (or the needed depth) in the flooring depth dialog
box, then click OK.
5 Draw post tension strands. For specific information on
adding post tension strands, see “Adding Post Tension
Creating a Split-Level Foundation Strands” on page 64.
Designing a split-level home is quite simple. The foundation
will need to be drawn in two parts and, with the aid of the
Elevation Slider, moved into place.

To create a split level


1 On the Foundation Plan tab, click the Foundation
Perimeter Tool.
2 Draw the foundation of the part of your home plan that
will be different from the rest of the home. If you need
help drawing a foundation, please refer to “Defining the
Foundation Perimeter” on page 62.
3 Press and hold the SHIFT key down, while clicking on
each foundation wall, to select all the foundation walls.
4 On the left side of the screen, drag the Elevation Slider
down to the level needed for the split.

5 Draw the Foundation of the rest of the home and proceed


with designing your home plan.

Creating a Slab Foundation


A slab foundation is the preferred foundation in many areas.
Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 makes it
easy to draw one. Four inches is a standard thickness for
slab

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 65


Chapter 10 Foundation Plan Tab

66 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Chapter 11

Floor Plan Tab


By beginning with the foundation phase of your design, the exterior walls of the first floor are automatically generated. The
next step is drawing exterior walls of the upper floors and drawing interior walls on all stories. Drawing walls is simple,
just click and drag. Punch! AS4000 automatically displays wall dimensions and connects corners for you. To add
interactive dimensions between walls, where they are not automatically added, see “Accessing the Snaps toolbar”, which
begins on page 29.
Exterior walls, even those automatically generated with the foundation tools and interior walls can be resized, moved or
deleted after they are placed. Punch! AS4000 makes creating the final home plan of your dreams, exactly as you want it,
simple.
You can define your wall thickness before placing and create custom-sized walls in a snap. Further customize your design
by adding windows, doors, stairs, furniture and so on.

PowerTools to enhance your design


■ “Material Workshop” on page 183
■ “Door Designer” on page 197
■ “Window Designer” on page 203
■ “Cabinet Wizard” on page 209
■ “Fireplace Wizard” on page 219

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 67


Chapter 11 Floor Plan Tab

Drawing Exterior Walls 4 Type the length needed, then click OK.
By default, the foundation design process creates eight-foot 5 Repeat steps, drawing horizontal and vertical walls.
exterior walls on the first floor. However, if you want to skip Notice that Punch! AS4000 automatically connects walls
the foundation section, you can begin designing by drawing to form corners.
exterior walls, using the two Exterior Wall tools. With these Note: Dimensions are entered in inches or feet and inches,
tools you can either draw “free form” or to specific separated by a hyphen. For example, 10-0 indicates ten feet,
dimensions, whichever suits your needs best. Walls are while 10 is interpreted as ten inches.
automatically joined when you draw and are placed at right
angles. It is extremely important to use the Exterior Wall Note: To draw the last wall perpendicular to the first wall,
tools to draw a complete exterior wall perimeter so Punch! release the mouse button, while the cursor is atop the start
AS4000 can correctly calculate the floor’s square footage. point of the first wall.

To draw exterior walls Changing Exterior Wall Segment Length


1 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Exterior Wall Once you have drawn exterior walls for your design, you can
Tool. easily change the length of individual wall segments. You
2 Click on the design window; hold down the mouse button can not only change the length of a wall, but move an
and drag. Notice that the wall follows the pointer and adjoining wall with the segment.
automatically displays the wall length.
To change the wall segment length from the center
3 Release the mouse button when the correct wall length is
reached. 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Resize Segment
(Custom Length) Tool.
4 Repeat steps, drawing horizontal and vertical walls.
Notice that Punch! AS4000 automatically connects walls 2 Click an exterior wall. The Change Segment Length
to form corners. dialog box is displayed.

Note: To draw the last wall perpendicular to the first wall,


release the mouse button while the cursor is atop the start
point of the first wall.
Note: Drawing is constrained to 5 degree angles; to release
this constraint hold down the SHIFT key, while drawing. 3 Type the new length in inches or feet and inches,
separated by a hyphen. For example, 10-0 indicates ten
Note: If you don’t see automatic dimensioning while you feet, while 10 is interpreted as ten inches.
draw, it might be turned off. To enable automatic
4 Click Change. The wall segment is resized.
dimensioning, on the Options menu, click Automatic
Dimensioning. To add interactive dimensions between walls,
To resize a wall segment length from the end
where they are not automatically generated, see “Accessing
the Snaps toolbar”, which begins on page 29. 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Resize Segment
(Custom Length) Tool.
To draw exterior walls to exact lengths 2 Click the exterior wall to be resized. The Change
1 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Exterior Wall Segment Length dialog box is displayed.
(Custom Length) Tool.
2 Click on the design window; hold down the mouse button
and drag. Notice that the wall follows the pointer and
automatically displays the wall length.
3 Release the mouse button at any point. The Custom Wall 3 Type the new length in inches or feet and inches,
Length menu is displayed. separated by a hyphen. For example, 10-0 indicates ten
feet, while 10 is interpreted as ten inches.

68 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Drawing Interior Walls

4 Click the radio button for the red dot to change the Note: Drawing is constrained to 5 degree angles; to release
location of the left end of the wall segment, then click this constraint hold down the SHIFT key, while drawing.
Change.
Note: If you don’t see automatic dimensioning, while you
5 (optional) Click the radio button for the green dot to draw, it might be turned off. To enable automatic
change the location of the right end of the wall segment, dimensioning, on the Options menu, click Automatic
then click Change. Dimensioning. To add interactive dimensions between walls,
where they are not automatically generated, see “Accessing
the Snaps toolbar”, which begins on page 29.

To draw interior walls to exact lengths


1 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Interior Wall
(Custom Length) Tool.
Drawing Interior Walls 2 Click on the design window; hold down the mouse button
and drag. Notice that the wall follows the pointer and
Once you’ve drawn your exterior house shell, you can begin automatically displays the wall length.
drawing the interior walls of your home. There are two
interior wall tools; one draws walls on the fly, while using the 3 Release the mouse button at any point. The Custom Wall
other makes it easy to define an absolute length. For more Length menu is displayed.
information on drawing with precision using Snaps, see the
chapter titled “Punch! Software Primer”, which begins on
page 27.

To draw interior walls on the fly 4 Type the exact length needed, then click OK.
1 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Interior Wall 5 Repeat steps above, drawing horizontal and vertical
Tool. walls. Notice that Punch! AS4000 automatically connects
2 Click on the design window; hold down the mouse button walls to form corners.
and drag. Notice that the wall follows the pointer and Note: Dimensions are entered in inches or feet and inches,
automatically displays the wall length. separated by a hyphen. For example, 10-0 indicates ten feet
3 Release the mouse button when the wall length you want while 10 is interpreted as ten inches.
is reached.
Note: To draw the last wall perpendicular to the first wall,
release the mouse button, while the cursor is atop the start
point of the first wall.

12 2

4 Repeat steps above, drawing horizontal and vertical


walls. Notice that Punch! AS4000 automatically connects
walls to form corners.
Tip: Punch! AS4000’s default is to track walls along
adjoining walls; to avoid this constraint, begin drawing from
the center of the room and drag toward the wall.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 69


Chapter 11 Floor Plan Tab

Setting Wall Options 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
Once you have drawn interior or exterior 2 Click a wall to select it; the Wall Properties bar is
walls for your design, you have the option displayed.
to customize many features. From wall 3 Click the radio button next to Surfaces.
thickness, floor height and stud spacing to
automatic flooring options, you have To change dimension location
alternatives for almost every feature.
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
To define wall width 2 Click a wall to select it; the Wall Properties bar is
displayed.
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the
Selection Tool. 3 Click the Flip Dims button.
2 Click a wall to select it; the Wall
Properties bar is displayed.
3 Click the radio button next to the width
of walls you want to use.
4 (optional) Type in a custom
measurement, if needed.
Note: For changes to take effect, press
ENTER after each change.
To control automatic flooring
To define stud spacing
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click a wall to select it; the Wall Properties bar is
2 Click a wall to select it; the Wall Properties bar is displayed.
displayed.
3 Check the Automatic Floor checkbox. Flooring is
3 Type the stud spacing required in the dialog box. automatically inserted between joined exterior walls.
4 Uncheck the Automatic Flooring checkbox. The flooring
To hide all window and door dimensions disappears.
■ On the Options menu, click to uncheck Window/Door 5 (optional) Type a Depth in the dialog box to customize
Callouts. the flooring depth.
OR
Setting Ceiling/Floor Options
■ At the bottom of the window, click the Dimension
button, then click to uncheck Window/Door Once you have drawn exterior walls for your design, you can
callouts on the pop-up menu that is displayed. customize several options. You can create soffit for the
outside, define the depth of the floor, and define the ceiling
To turn off dimension or callouts for a selected wall options. You may also manually draw flooring, whenever it
is needed. For more information, see “Adding Flooring”,
■ On the Walls Properties bar, click to uncheck the radio which begins on page 81.
button next to Auto-Dim.
OR To define ceiling options

■ On the Walls Properties bar, click to uncheck the radio 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
button next to Callouts. 2 Click a wall to select it; the Wall Properties bar is
displayed.
To dimension from wall surface 3 Click the Ceiling/Floor button on the Properties Bar. The
By default, measurements are from wall center to wall center; Ceiling/Floor Builder dialog box is displayed
to measure walls from surface to surface, follow these steps.

70 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Editing Walls

To convert exterior walls to interior walls


1 On the Standard toolbar, click the
Selection Tool.
2 Right-click an exterior wall on
your design window. Click
Convert Wall to Interior on the
pop-up menu. All connected
walls becomes interior walls.
4 Click the Ceiling Options box.
5 Enter the dimensions in the text boxes To convert interior walls to exterior walls
to define the needed ceiling options. 1 On the Standard toolbar, click
6 Click OK. the Selection Tool.
2 Right-click an interior wall on
To define floor options your design window. Click
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. Convert Wall to Exterior on the
pop-up menu. All connected
2 Click a wall to select it; the Wall Properties bar is
walls becomes exterior walls.
displayed.
3 Click the Ceiling/Floor button on the Properties Bar. The Defining Gable Wall Segments
Ceiling/Floor Builder dialog box is displayed
When a wall is drawn that will be roofed by a gable roof
4 Click the Floor Options box. section, you can easily match the wall to the pitch of the roof.
5 Enter the dimensions in the text boxes It does not matter whether you draw the roof first or alter the
to define the needed floor options. wall segment first.
6 Click OK.
To define a gable wall segment
To define soffit options 1 Click the wall section that will be fitted to the gable roof;
the Wall Properties bar is displayed.
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click the Wall Style button, then
2 Click a wall to select it; the Wall Properties bar is
click the Gable Style on the pop-up
displayed.
menu.
3 Click the Ceiling/Floor button on the Properties Bar. The
3 Type the Base Height. The Base
Ceiling/Floor Builder dialog box is displayed
Height, denoted by the blue bar, will
4 Click the Soffit Options box. typically be your ceiling height.
5 Enter the dimensions in the text boxes 4 Type Pitch - A and B to match the
to define the needed soffit options. pitch of the roof section they will
6 (optional) Click the radio button to join meet.
the soffit pieces, if you prefer to work 5 Type Height - C and Height - D (if
with the soffit as one unit or click the necessary, to match your roofline).
radio button for separate soffits to work Click OK.
with each side as a separate piece.
7 Click OK.

Editing Walls
At any point during design of your new home, both exterior
and interior walls can be moved, reshaped, removed and so
on.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 71


Chapter 11 Floor Plan Tab

2 Click the Wall Style button, then


click the Gable Style on the pop-up
menu.
3 Type the Base Height. The Base
Height, denoted by the blue bar, will
typically be your ceiling height.
4 Type Pitch A and B if you are
matching a roofline.
5 Type Height - C and Height - D (if
necessary, to match your roofline).
Click OK.

To elevate walls
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click a wall to select it.
3 Use the Elevation Slider at the left of the window to raise
Drawing Irregular Walls or lower the wall into position.
With Punch! AS4000, you can draw diagonal walls, create
To rotate walls
gable walls and elevate wall segments. You can create a
unique floor plan with just a few clicks. 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click a wall to select it.
To draw diagonal walls
3 Click Rotate on the Edit menu. The Rotate dialog box is
1 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Interior Wall displayed.
Tool.
4 Click either Degrees or Radians, then type the angle you
2 On the Preview Bar, click the wall width you want. want to rotate the wall in the Angle text box.
3 Press and hold the SHIFT key, then click on the design 5 Click OK. The wall segment or wall group you selected
window and drag. Notice that the wall follows the pointer is rotated, based on the angle measurement you specified.
and automatically displays the wall length.
4 Release the mouse button when the diagonal wall length Changing Interior Wall Segment Length
you want is reached.
Once you have drawn exterior walls for your design, you can
easily change the length of individual wall segments. You
can not only change the length of a wall, but move an
adjoining wall with the segment, assuring perpendicular
1
walls.

To lengthen or shorten wall segments

Tip: Punch! AS4000’s default is to track walls along 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
adjoining walls; to avoid this constraint, begin drawing from 2 Click an endpoint on the wall you want to resize, to select
the center of the room and drag toward the wall. it.
3 Hold down the mouse button and drag the endpoint.
To define slanted walls
Notice as you move the pointer, the wall dimensions are
1 Click the wall section that will be fitted to the gable roof; displayed.
the Wall Properties bar is displayed.

72 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Defining Wall Height

5 (optional) Click the radio button for the green dot to


change the location of the right end of the wall segment,
Dr then click Change.
ag
6 (optional) Uncheck the Linked box if you want the wall
to be resized, but do not want the adjoining wall to
4 Continue dragging, until the wall length you want is
remain perpendicular to it.
reached, then release the mouse button.
Note: Dimensions are entered in inches or feet and inches,
To define the wall segment length from the center separated by a hyphen. For example, 10-0 indicates ten feet
1 On Standard toolbar, click the Resize Segment while 10 is interpreted as ten inches.
(Custom Length) Tool.
2 Click an interior wall. The Change Segment Length
Defining Wall Height
dialog box is displayed. Punch! AS4000 makes setting an entire floor’s wall height
easy. In addition, you can define custom wall heights for
individual wall segments.

To change the height of a wall


1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
3 Type the length needed, then click Change. The wall
2 Click a wall segment in your drawing to select
segment is resized.
it. The Wall Properties bar is displayed.
4 (optional) Uncheck the Linked box if you want the wall
3 Type a new height in the Wall Style section of
to be resized, but do not want the adjoining wall to
the Wall Properties bar.
remain perpendicular to it.
4 Press Enter.

To change the height of an entire floor


1 On the Design menu, click Default Ceiling Heights, First
Floor. The First Floor dialog box is displayed.
2 Type a new height measurement in the Height text box,
then press Enter.
Note: Dimensions are entered in inches or feet and inches,
separated by a hyphen. For example, 10-0 indicates ten feet, Note: Changing the ceiling height this way will cause
while 10 is interpreted as ten inches. subsequently-drawn walls to be at the new height. If walls
were drawn before setting the new wall height, they will need
To define a wall segment length from the end to be individually changed.
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Resize Segment 3 (optional) On the Edit Menu click Select All or type
(Custom Length) Tool. Ctrl+A to select all walls on the active floor of your
drawing, then type a new height in the Wall Style section
2 Click the interior wall to be resized. The Change
of the Wall Properties bar.
Segment Length dialog box is displayed.

Drawing a Curved Wall


With Punch! AS4000, drawing bay windows and curved
walls is easy. You could even draw a round house! After
drawing the walls, you can add windows, doors and so on to
3 Type the length needed. suit your need.
4 Click the radio button for the red dot to change the
location of the left end of the wall segment, then click
Change.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 73


Chapter 11 Floor Plan Tab

To draw a curved wall Note: Press SHIFT to reverse the direction the arc is
1 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Curved Wall drawing.
Tool. The Curved Wall Tool Properties dialog
box is displayed. Breaking a Wall
With Punch! AS4000 it’s easy to paint each room in your
design a different color. Once you have drawn exterior and
interior walls to your specifications, you can simulate
different rooms with the Wall Break Tool, making it possible
to apply different colors or materials in each room. For more
information, see “Applying Paint and Color”, which begins
on page 179.

To break a wall
2 Type the Wall Segment length in the text box, then click 1 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Wall Break Tool.
OK. 2 On the Design window, click a wall where you
3 On the Design window, press the mouse button, to define want to position a break.
one end of the circular wall segment, and drag. A rubber-
band line appears and follows the pointer. This line
signifies the diameter of your curved wall.
4 Release the mouse button when the wall is the correct
length.
5 Move the mouse clockwise or counter-clockwise until 3 (optional) Hold the mouse button down and move it back
the wall is the shape you want. and forth to position the break using associative
dimensioning.
6 Click to end.
Note: Press SHIFT to reverse the direction the arc is Adding Doors and Openings
drawing. All doors and cased openings are automatically dimensioned
to neighboring walls, doors and windows. There are three
To draw a bay window types of openings and nine door styles available in Punch!
1 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Curved Wall AS4000 and they are all placed in the same manner. In
Tool. The Curved Wall Tool Properties dialog addition, you can design doors to your exact specifications
box is displayed. using Punch! Door Designer. For more information, see
“Door Designer”, which begins on page 197.
2 Type 4-0 (four feet, zero inches) as the Wall Segment
length in the dialog box, then click OK.
To add a door
3 On the Design window, press the mouse button to define
1 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Door Tool. The
one end of the circular wall segment and drag. A rubber-
Door Properties Bar is displayed.
band line appears and follows the pointer. This line
signifies the diameter of your curved wall. 2 On the Door Properties Bar, click the Door
Style button, then click the door style you want
4 Release the mouse button when the wall is the correct
from the pop-up window that is displayed.
length.
3 On the Design window, click a wall where you
5 Move the mouse clockwise or counter-clockwise until
want to place a door.
the wall is the shape you want.
6 Click to end.
7 Drag and drop windows onto the facets of the bay
window. For more information, see “Adding Windows”,
which begins on page 76.

74 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Changing Door Settings

4 (optional) Click to set the door swing, if necessary. To flip the direction of a door
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection
Tool.
2 Click the door you want to modify.
3 On the Door Properties Bar, click the Flip Door button.
The door flips direction.
5 Type the Width, Height, Elevation and Trim Width to To change door swing
customize them.
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection
6 Type the Door Swing Angle, if necessary. Tool.
Note: Any changes made on the Door Properties bar 2 Click the door you want to modify.
become the default and will be used the next time a door is
placed. 3 On the Door Properties Bar, type the new door swing
angle. The door swing updates.
Changing Door Settings To change the elevation of a door
There is no need to redraw a door just because you need a 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
different size or style. You can control many of its features
through the Custom Door Properties Bar. 2 Click a door to select it.
3 On the Door Properties Bar, type a new elevation in the
To change door type Elevate text box.
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the 4 (Optional) Use the Elevation Slider at the left of the
Selection Tool. screen to raise or lower the selected door into position.
2 Click the door you want to modify.
Adding Double Doors
3 On the Door Properties Bar, click
Door Style button, then click the Double doors add an elegant look to any room. To simulate
door style you want from the pop-up French Doors, use glass doors instead of the wooden ones
window that is displayed. used in this example.

To resize a door by specifying dimensions To draw double doors


1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 1 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Door Tool. The
Door Properties Bar is displayed.
2 Click the door you want to modify.
2 On the Door Properties Bar, click the
3 On the Door Properties Bar, type the Width,
Door Style button, then click the Custom
Height, Elevation and Trim Width to customize
Door style at the bottom of the list. The
them.
Door Preview Bar is displayed.
To resize a door by dragging 3 Click the arrow next to “Doors”
at the top of the Preview Bar to
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
display the door library list, then
2 Click a door to select it. click Double Doors. Available
3 Holding down the mouse button on an endpoint of the double doors are displayed in the
door, drag the endpoint to resize the door, then release Preview Bar.
the mouse button.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 75


Chapter 11 Floor Plan Tab

4 On the Double Door Preview Bar, click the 2 On the Windows Properties Bar, click the
left door. Window Style button, then click the window
style you want from the pop-up window that is
Note: Right and left doors are placed
displayed.
individually.
3 On the Design window, click a wall where you
5 On the Design window, click a wall where want to place a window.
you want to place a door.
6 Click to set the door swing.
7 Repeat steps 4-6 for the right door. Overlap
them slightly to minimize the center post.

4 Type the Width, Height, Elevation and Trim Width to


customize them.
5 (optional) For double-hung or casement/picture
windows, specify the grill spacing.
Note: Any changes made on the Windows Properties bar,
become the default and will be used the next time a window
is placed.

Changing Window Settings


Once windows have been placed, it is easy to resize them.
You can do this by specifying exact dimensions or by
dragging one end, until you have the required size. You have
control over the look of your windows by changing the grill
settings. You can also flip windows vertically or horizontally
to create beautiful groupings to suit any room design.
Adding Windows
Like doors and cased openings, there are an extensive variety To resize a window by specifying dimensions
of windows available in Punch! AS4000. They are
automatically dimensioned to neighboring walls, doors and 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
windows. There are 19 window styles available in Punch! 2 Click a window to select it.
AS4000 and they are all placed in the same manner. In 3 On the Windows Properties Bar, type the
addition, you can design windows to your exact Width, Height, Elevation and Trim Width to
specifications using Punch! Window Designer. For more customize them.
information, see “Window Designer”, which begins on page
203. To resize a window by dragging
For information on precision placement using Snaps, see the 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
chapter titled “Punch! Software Primer”, which begins on 2 Click a window to select it.
page 27.
3 Holding down the mouse button on an endpoint of the
window, drag the endpoint until the window is the size
To add a window
you want, then release the mouse button.
1 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Window Tool. The
Windows Properties Bar is displayed.

76 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Elevating a Window

To flip a window
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click a window to select it.
3 On the Windows Properties Bar, click one of
the flip buttons.
Note: Flip is not available if a Double Hung or
Casement/Picture window is selected.

To change the grill settings of a window Stacking Windows


1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. Punch! AS4000 makes it simple to create window groups or
2 Click a window to select it. transoms. The Elevation Slider makes it almost a one-click
process. For ease in selecting features which are placed
3 On the Windows Properties Bar, click either
close together, use the Selection Filter. For more
Double Hung or Casement/Picture. The Grill
information, see
settings control is displayed.
“Selection Filter”, which begins on page 10.
Note: The Grill settings dialog will appear only
when a Double Hung or Casement/Picture window is To stack windows
selected. 1 Place windows using the technique outlined in “Adding
4 Using the scroll bars in the Grill section of the dialog Windows” on page 76.
box, adjust the grill appearance. The new grill settings 2 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
are applied.
3 Click the window to select it.
Elevating a Window 4 Using the Elevation Slider at the left of the screen, raise
or lower the window into position.
Punch! AS4000 makes it simple to create window groups or
transoms. The Elevation Slider makes it almost a one-click 5 Continue placing and elevating windows, until the look
process. you want is achieved.
Note: Stacked windows will appear on top of one another in
To elevate a window the 2D design window. To select stacked windows, you
1 Place windows, using the technique outlined in “Adding might need to move the most recently-placed windows along
Windows” on page 76. the wall to gain access to those windows placed before.
2 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
Adding Accessories
3 Click the window to select it.
You can easily add drapes, curtains, blinds and so on to any
4 On the Window Properties Bar, type a new elevation in window. Accessories are designed to “track the walls”,
the Elevate text box. meaning they can only be placed on wall segments and will
5 (Optional) Use the Elevation Slider at the left of the move with those walls.
screen to raise or lower the selected window into
position. To add accessories
6 Continue selecting and elevating windows until the look
1 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Accessory Tool.
you want is achieved. The Accessory Properties Bar is displayed.
2 (optional) Click the arrow next to
“Accessory” at the top of the
Preview Bar to display the
accessory library list, then click
Blinds. Available blinds are displayed in the Preview
Bar.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 77


Chapter 11 Floor Plan Tab

3 On the Preview Bar, click the Accessory you To copy all exterior walls from the first floor to the
want to place. second
4 On the Design window, click a wall where you 1 On the Foundation tab,
want to place the accessory. uncheck any other plan
layers you may have
selected to view
simultaneously.
Note: Hold the mouse button down to move the 2 Press SHIFT, while
accessory along the wall. clicking each exterior
wall, until they are all
5 Click to select the accessory. The Properties Bar is
selected.
displayed.
3 On the Edit menu, click
6 Type the Width, Height, Wall Offset and
Copy to Floor, then
Elevation to customize them.
Upper Floor. All exterior walls are copied to the second
floor.

To draw walls on the second floor


1 On the Design menu, click Work on Floor, Second
Floor or click on the Active Floor Icon at the bottom
left-hand portion of the screen, then click Work on
Second Floor on the pop-up menu that is displayed.
2 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Exterior Wall
7 (optional) To create a sheer effect, set the Tool. Using the techniques outlined in “Drawing
translucency. Exterior Walls” on page 68 and “Drawing Interior Walls”
8 (optional) To automatically size the on page 69, draw Exterior and Interior Walls.
accessory, click the Auto/Size button, then Note: The non-working floor is shown in a pale color as
click the window. The accessory will reference, but if you prefer, you can choose to view only the
automatically fit to the dimensions of that window. floor you are working on. Click the Active Floor Icon and
click View Working Floor Only.
Adding a Second Floor
Note: To make it easy to identify which floor is active, you
With Punch! AS4000 you can create a home design with up can assign separate colors to the active and background
to three stories. Once you’ve completed your foundation and floors. For more information on customizing floor colors see
other first floor features, you can begin adding upper stories the chapter titled “Editing Your Drawing”, which begins on
to your home design. For more information on foundation page 151.
design, refer to the chapter titled “Foundation Plan Tab”,
which begins on page 61. To copy everything from one floor to another
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 On the Design menu, click Work on Floor, Second
Floor (or the floor you want to copy) or click on the
Active Floor Icon, then click Work on Second Floor on
the pop-up menu that is displayed.

78 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Creating a Split Level

3 On the Edit menu, click


Select All, or press
CTRL+A.
4 On the Edit menu, click
Copy to Floor, Upper
Floor. Select Lower
Floor if you want to
copy the original down Placing a Staircase
one level.
As you create more than one floor in your design, you’ll
To move everything from one floor to another want to draw a staircase. As you are placing stairs, Punch!
AS4000 displays the stair length so you know the exact
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. measurements, as you draw. To create an opening for the
2 On the Design menu, click Work on Floor, Second stairway in the upper floor, see “Adding a Floor Cutout”,
Floor (or the floor you want to move) or click on the which begins on page 82.
Active Floor Icon, then click Work on Second Floor on
the pop-up menu that is displayed. To draw a straight staircase
3 On the Edit menu, click 1 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Straight Staircase
Select All, or press Tool. The Staircase Properties bar is displayed.
CTRL+A. 2 Click on the design window to define the start point of
4 On the Edit menu, click the staircase. A rubber-band staircase, with dimensions,
Move to Floor, Upper is displayed and follows the pointer.
Floor. Select Lower 3 Extend the staircase to the location you want, then right-
Floor if you want to click to end drawing mode.
move the original down
one level.

Creating a Split Level


With Punch! AS4000’s Elevation Slider, you can easily 2 12
design a split level home. With one or two mouse clicks, your
split level can be perfectly positioned.
4 (optional) Press and hold the SHIFT key, while drawing
to release the 15 degree constraint.
To create a split level
1 On the Design menu, click Work on Floor, Work on To draw a curved staircase
Second Floor or click on the Active Floor Icon, then
1 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Curved Staircase
click Work on Second Floor on the pop-up menu that is
Tool. The Staircase Properties bar is displayed.
displayed.
2 Click and release on the design window to define the start
2 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Exterior Wall
point of the staircase. A rubber-band staircase, with
Tool. Using the techniques outlined in the section
dimensions, is displayed and follows the pointer.
“Drawing Exterior Walls” on page 68, draw an entirely
separate area. 3 Move in the direction you want the stairs to rise, then
click to place the staircase.
3 Select all points of the newly-drawn section, by clicking
on each wall, while holding down SHIFT.
4 On the left side of your window, move the Elevation
Slider to the position needed for the split.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 79


Chapter 11 Floor Plan Tab

6 (optional) Press and hold the SHIFT key, while drawing


to release the 15 degree constraint.

Modifying a Staircase
2 Once you have drawn a staircase, you can modify features
and location to suit your needs. With Punch! AS4000 you
have control over stairway width, riser and tread
dimensions, handrail height and placement and whether the
stairs are open or enclosed.

1 Reversing the direction of a staircase


2
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
4 (optional) Press and hold the SHIFT key, while drawing, 2 Right-click the center line of the
to constrain stairs to a perfect arc. staircase you want to alter.

To create a landing 3 Click Reverse Staircase


Direction on the pop-up menu
1 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Straight Staircase that is displayed. The direction
Tool. The Staircase Properties bar is displayed. of the staircase is reversed.
2 Click on the design window to define the start point of
Note: This works for both curved and straight staircases.
the staircase. A rubber-band staircase, with dimensions,
is displayed and follows the pointer.
Customizing staircase features
3 Click where you want the landing.
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection
4 Extend the staircase to the location you want, then right- Tool.
click to end drawing mode.
2 Click the staircase you want to customize,
to select it. The Staircase Properties bar is
displayed.
3 (optional) Type a new staircase height and
width.
4 (optional) Check the radio button to add
skirt walls.
5 (optional) Type a new step height (riser).
6 (optional) Type a step depth (tread).
7 (optional) Specify handrail height and
location, left or right, as you are looking
from bottom of staircase.

Moving a staircase
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click the centerline of the staircase you want to
reposition.

5 Nudge points into position to refine the look of the


landing.
80 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide
Adding Railings

Note: The railing will appear angular as it is drawn, but will


curve after the next point is set.
3 (optional) Press and hold the SHIFT key, while drawing,
to constrain railing to a perfect arc.

Modifying a Railing
Dr
ag Once you have drawn a railing, you can modify its features.

12 Customizing railing features


1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click the railing you want to customize. The
3 Click again; hold down the mouse button and drag the Railing Properties bar is displayed.
staircase to the new location.
3 (optional) Type a new handrail height.
To copy and paste a staircase 4 (optional) Type a new baluster spacing.
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 5 (optional) Check whether railing posts are
wanted.
2 Click the centerline of the staircase you want to copy.
3 Click Copy on the Edit menu or press CTRL+C on your Adding Flooring
keyboard.
Whether you want to carpet the whole floor with one color or
4 Click Paste on the Edit menu, or press CTRL+V on the you want each room to have an individual feel, Punch!
keyboard. The stairway you copied is displayed. AS4000 helps you experiment with different flooring
options, before spending hundreds of dollars on something
Adding Railings you’re not happy with. Once drawn, you can customize the
After drawing a staircase, you’ll need to draw a railing flooring by applying materials like tile, carpet, wood and so
around the opening to provide a barrier. on. For more information, see “Applying Building
Materials”, which begins on page 180.
To draw a straight railing
To draw flooring
1 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Railing Tool. The
Railing Properties bar is displayed. 1 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Floor Tool. The
Flooring Properties bar is displayed.
2 Click on the design window to define the start point of
the Railing. A rubber-band Railing, with dimensions, is Note: If necessary, you can turn off the automatic flooring
displayed and follows the pointer. option. Click an exterior wall, uncheck the Auto-Floor
option on the Wall Properties bar.
3 Extend the Railing to the location you want, then right-
click to end drawing mode. 2 Click on the design window to define the start point of
4 (optional) Press and hold the SHIFT key, while drawing, the flooring. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows
to release the 15 degree constraint. the pointer. This line signifies the first edge of the
flooring. Notice that dimensions are displayed, as you
To draw a curved railing draw.
1 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Curved Railing
Tool. The Railing Properties bar is displayed.
2 Click on the design window to define the start point of 2 12
the railing. A rubber-band Railing, with dimensions, is
displayed and follows the pointer. 42
52
32 2

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 81


Chapter 11 Floor Plan Tab

3 Click and move the pointer to the next cornerpoint.


Repeat until you have completely drawn the flooring
area.
4 Right-click to end drawing mode.

To reshape flooring
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click a side of the flooring you want to reshape.
3 Click a cornerpoint of the flooring; hold down the mouse
button and drag.
4 Click the next cornerpoint; hold down the mouse button
and drag.
5 (optional) Click a side of the flooring to move the two
cornerpoints at once.

Adding a Floor Cutout


Punch! AS4000, makes it easy to design lofts, creative
staircase openings and so on. You can also easily convert that
space over the garage to a versatile room.

To draw a floor cutout

1 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Floor Cutout Tool.


The Flooring Properties bar is displayed.
2 Click on the design window to define the start point of
the floor cutout. A rubber-band line is displayed and
follows the pointer. This line signifies the first edge of
the flooring. Notice that dimensions are displayed, as you
draw.
3 Click and move the pointer to the next cornerpoint.
Repeat until you have completely drawn the floor cutout
area.
4 Right-click to end drawing mode.
5 (optional) To customize the thickness of the cutout, type
a new thickness on the Properties Bar.

To reshape a floor cutout


1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click a side of the floor cutout you want to reshape.
3 Click a cornerpoint of the floor cutout; hold down the
mouse button and drag.
4 Click the next cornerpoint; hold down the mouse button
and drag.
5 (optional) Click a side of the floor cutout to move the two
cornerpoints at once.

82 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Part 3

Utilities in Your
Home Design

Chapter 12: Electrical Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85


Chapter 13: Plumbing Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Chapter 14: HVAC Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Chapter 12

Electrical Plan Tab


Adding electrical components to your home design is a simple matter of selecting the component you want to place and
clicking on your drawing plan. You can even turn the lights on and off!
Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 provides handy placement features such as associative dimensioning and
wall tracking. Using associative dimensioning or snaps, you can place components a specific distance from a neighboring
wall or other electrical component. Automatic wall tracking makes sure you place components such as outlets and
switches without error.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 85


Chapter 12 Electrical Plan Tab

Placing Outlets and Switches To move a ceiling or floor outlet by a specific


distance
Punch! AS4000 makes it simple to add electrical components
to your home plan. Using the convenient tabbed utility tools, 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
simply select the components you want to place and click. 2 Click to select the outlet you want to move. Selection
Dimension lines automatically appear, making it easy to handles appear.
place components a specific distance from a neighboring
3 On the Edit menu, click Move. The Move dialog box is
electrical component or wall segment. You’ll notice that
displayed.
when placing certain outlets and switches, the object is
automatically “tracked” to the wall segment, making accurate
placement simple. Floor and ceiling outlets are not tracked to
walls. If the outlet is to be placed within 6" of a water source,
for example, in a kitchen, bath or outdoors, always use a GFI
outlet. Ground Fault Interrupters are designed to shut
themselves off if they get wet. 4 Click either Cartesian or Polar coordinates.
For information on precision placement using Snaps, see the 5 Type the X and Y Axis measurements, then click OK.
chapter titled “Punch! Software Primer”, which begins on 6 The outlet is moved to the location you specified.
page 27.
Adding Connector Switches
To place outlets and switches
It’s easy to add ceiling fan switches to your home design.
1 On the Electrical Plan tab, click one of the outlet or
Using the ceiling fan switch tool, just click and drag to define
switch tools.
the connection.
2 Click a wall segment; hold down the mouse
To place connector switches
button and drag. Dimensions will display as
1 On the Electrical Plan tab, click the Connector
you drag the outlet or switch along the wall.
Switch Tool.
The dimension lines indicate the distance
from the center of the outlet or switch to the nearest wall 2 Click a wall segment; hold down the mouse button and
or other electrical component. drag. The wiring is displayed as you drag.

Dr
3 Release the mouse button to place the outlet or switch. ag

Note: To place a 4-Way or 5-Way switch, click the 3-Way


switch button on the Switch Style Preview Bar and click the
needed switch on the pop-up window that is displayed. 3 Click the ceiling fan or light you want to connect. The
wiring is displayed in your drawing.
To place ceiling or floor outlets
1 On the Electrical Plan tab, click the 110 or the 220
Ceiling/Floor Outlet Tool.
2 On the Preview Bar, click either a
Floor Outlet or a Ceiling Outlet.
3 Click on the design window to place
the outlet.
86 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide
Adding Fixture Lighting

2 The Light Properties bar is


displayed, showing the customizable
options for this tool.
3 (optional) Click the Light Style
button to access a different light
style, then select an option from the
pop-up menu that is displayed.
4 Click once in your plan drawing to
place each light.

To move connector switches by a specific distance


1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click to select the connector switch you want to move.
Selection handles appear. Dr
ag
3 On the Edit menu, click Move. The Move dialog box is
displayed. Dr
ag

Note: A lighting fixture will be placed at each click site.


Right-click or select a different tool to end placing light
fixtures.

4 Click either Cartesian or Polar coordinates. To move a light fixture by a specific distance
5 Type the X and Y Axis measurements, then click OK. 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
6 The connector is moved to the location you specified. 2 Click to select the light fixture you want to move.
Selection handles appear.
Adding Fixture Lighting 3 On the Edit menu, click Move. The Move dialog box is
Adding fixture lighting to your design is very similar to displayed.
adding other electrical components; however, they do not
track directly to walls or automatically display dimensioning.
Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 provides
many lights to choose from, including recessed canned lights,
heat/vent lights and so on. In addition, you can control the
amount of illumination that each fixture generates. 4 Click either Cartesian or Polar coordinates.
5 Type the X and Y Axis measurements, then click OK.
To add light fixtures 6 The light fixture is moved to the location you specified.
1 On the Electrical Plan tab, click Light Tool. The
pointer changes to reflect drawing mode. To turn the lights on and off
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection
Tool.
2 Click the light fixture you want to turn on
or off. The Light Style Properties bar is
displayed.
3 Check or uncheck Switch On/Off. The
change is displayed in the LiveView window.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 87


Chapter 12 Electrical Plan Tab

To turn glow on and off 2 Click a wall segment; hold down the mouse button and
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. drag. Dimensions will display as you drag along the wall.
The dimension lines indicate the distance from the center
2 Click the light fixture you want to turn glow on or off. of the light to the nearest wall or other electrical
The Light Style Properties bar is displayed. component.
3 Check or uncheck Switch Glow. The change is displayed
in the LiveView window.

To dim the lights


1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection
3 Release the mouse button to place the flood light.
Tool.
4 (optional) Change the elevation of the light using the
2 Click the light fixture you want to dim. The
Elevation Slider.
Light Style Properties bar is displayed.
3 Click the up and down arrows on the Dimmer Adding a Ceiling Fan
scroll bar or move the slider to customize the
brightness of the lights. The change is displayed in the Placing ceiling fans is as simple as one mouse click. Once
LiveView window. you place a ceiling fan, you can move it by dragging or by
specifying exact coordinates.
To set the radius of the lights
To place a ceiling fan
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection
Tool. 1 On the Electrical Plan tab, click the Ceiling Fan
Tool.
2 Click the light fixture you want to customize.
The Light Style Properties bar is displayed. 2 Click on your plan drawing to place the ceiling fan.
3 Click the up and down arrows on the Radius
scroll bar or move the slider to customize the
radius of the lights. The change is displayed in the
LiveView window.

To set the falloff from the lights


1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection
Tool.
2 Click the light fixture you want to adjust. The
Light Style Properties bar is displayed. To move a ceiling fan by a specific distance
3 Click the up and down arrows on the Falloff 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
scroll bar or move the slider to customize the 2 Click to select the ceiling fan you want to move.
Falloff of the lights. The change is displayed in the Selection handles appear.
LiveView window.
3 On the Edit Menu, click Move. The Move dialog box is
displayed.
Adding Flood Lights
Flood lights are added just like outlets and switches; they
attach to and track along walls and their lighting, which can
be turned off and on, is displayed in LiveView.

To add a flood light


4 Click either Cartesian or Polar coordinates.
1 On the Electrical Plan tab, click the Flood Light
5 Type the X and Y Axis measurements, then click OK.
Tool.
6 The ceiling fan is moved to the location you specified.

88 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Placing Phone and Cable Jacks

Placing Phone and Cable Jacks


Placing phone and cable jacks is exactly like placing wall
outlets and switches. You’ll notice that when placing jacks, 2
the object is automatically “tracked” to the wall segment,
making accurate placement simple. 3 Release the mouse button to place the smoke detector or
thermostat.
To place phone and cable jacks
1 On the Electrical Plan tab, click the Phone or Cable
Jack Tool.
2 Click a wall segment; hold down the mouse button
and drag. The phone or cable jack is displayed with
dimensions as you drag. The dimension lines indicate the
distance from the center of the jack to the nearest wall or
other electrical component.

3 Release the mouse button to place the phone or cable


jack.

Adding Smoke Detectors and Thermostats


Placing smoke detectors and thermostats is exactly like
placing wall outlets and switches. You’ll notice that when
placing these components, the object is automatically
“tracked” to the wall segment, making accurate placement
simple.
For information on precision placement using Snaps, see the
chapter titled “Punch! Software Primer”, which begins on
page 27.

To place smoke detectors and thermostats


1 On the Electrical Plan tab, click the Smoke
Detector or Thermostat Tool.
2 Click a wall segment; hold down the mouse button
and drag. The smoke detector or thermostat is
displayed with dimensions as you drag. The dimension
lines indicate the distance from the center of the smoke
detector or thermostat to the nearest wall or other
electrical component.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 89


Chapter 12 Electrical Plan Tab

90 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Chapter 13

Plumbing Plan Tab


Once you’ve completed your floor plan, the next step in the design process is to plan your utilities. Punch! AS4000 features
a suite of plumbing fixtures from basic toilets to spa tubs. Other important considerations are gas bibs and floor drain
placement, also included in Punch! AS4000. Most plumbing objects are designed to “track the walls”, meaning they can
only be placed on wall segments to offer flawless design. Tubs and showers are automatically annotated and dimensions
appear, as you add plumbing, to ensure accurate placement. Each plumbing symbol is simple to include in your drawing,
with the flexibility to modify it at any time.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 91


Chapter 13 Plumbing Plan Tab

Placing an Outdoor Hose Bib


When you place an outdoor hose bib, dimension lines
automatically appear, making it easy to place objects a Dr
specific distance from a neighboring plumbing fixture or the ag

end of a wall segment. You’ll notice that when placing hose


bibs, the object is automatically “tracked” to the wall
segment, making accurate placement simple. 3 Release the mouse button to place the gas bib.

To place an outdoor hose bib


1 On the Plumbing Plan tab, click the Hose Bib Tool.
2 Click a wall segment; hold down the mouse button
and drag. The hose bib is displayed, with dimensions, as
you drag. The dimension lines indicate the distance from
Note: For information on precision placement using Snaps,
the center of the hose bib to the nearest wall end or
see the chapter titled “Punch! Software Primer”, which
plumbing fixture.
begins on page 27.

Adding Floor Drains


Dr
Once you’ve completed your plumbing plan, the final step is
ag to add floor drains to your design. Adding floor drains is as
simple as a mouse click.

3 Release the mouse button to place the hose bib. To add a floor drain
1 On the Plumbing Plan tab, click the Floor Drain
Tool.
2 Click once in your plan drawing. The floor drain is
placed.

Placing a Gas Bib


When you place a gas bib, dimension lines automatically
appear, making it easy to place objects a specific distance
from a neighboring fixture or the end of a wall segment.
You’ll notice that when placing gas bibs, the object is Placing Toilets
automatically “tracked” to the wall segment, making accurate Punch! AS4000 makes it simple to add plumbing to your
placement simple. home plan. Using the convenient tabbed utility tools, simply
select the fixtures you want to place and click. Dimension
To place a gas bib lines automatically appear, making it easy to place objects a
1 On the Plumbing Plan tab, click the Gas Bib Tool. specific distance from a neighboring plumbing fixture or wall
segment. You’ll notice that when placing toilets, the object is
2 Click a wall segment; hold down the mouse button automatically “tracked” to the wall segment, making accurate
and drag. The gas bib is displayed, with dimensions, as placement simple.
you drag. The dimension lines indicate the distance from
the center of the gas bib to the nearest wall end or For information on precision placement using Snaps, see the
plumbing fixture. chapter titled “Punch! Software Primer”, which begins on
page 27.

92 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Placing Sinks

To place toilets 2 Click to select the sink you want to move. Selection
1 On the Plumbing Plan tab, click the Toilet Tool. handles appear.

2 Click a wall segment; hold down the mouse button 3 Drag the sink to a new location. As you move the sink,
and drag. The toilet is displayed, with dimensions, as associative dimensioning is displayed.
you drag. The dimension lines indicate the distance from 4 Release the mouse button to place the sink in the new
the center of the toilet to the nearest wall or plumbing location.
fixture.
Note: For information on precision movements using
Snaps, see the chapter titled “Punch! Software Primer”,
which begins on page 27.
2
Placing Bathtubs or Spa Tubs
3 Release the mouse button to place the toilet. Tubs and spas are placed in the same manner as sinks. In
addition to associative dimensioning and wall tracking, as
you place a tub or spa, Punch! AS4000 automatically adds
annotation to your design once the tub or spa is placed. This
makes reading home plans at a later date simple. If you don’t
find the exact sized tub or spa you are looking for, simply
place a tub that is similar in size, then adjust the tub or spa
Placing Sinks properties to the exact size you want for your home design.
There are several styles of sinks available in Punch! AS4000.
As with toilets, sinks are automatically tracked to wall To place a bathtub or spa
segments as you place them, as well as automatically 1 On the Plumbing Plan tab, click the
dimensioned to neighboring walls and plumbing fixtures. Bathtub or Spa Tub Tool. The Tub or Spa
associative dimensioning makes it easy to figure pipe Properties bar is displayed.
placement as well. While there are four sink styles available
in Punch! AS4000, they are all placed in the same manner. 2 On the Design window, click on the wall where you
want to place a tub. The dimension lines indicate the
To place sinks distance from the center of the tub to the nearest wall or
plumbing fixture.
1 On the Plumbing Plan tab, click one of the
Sink tools. 3 Drag the tub along the wall until it is in position.

2 Click a wall segment; hold down the mouse


button and drag. The sink is displayed with
dimensions, as you drag. The dimension lines indicate 2
the distance from the center of the sink to the nearest wall
or plumbing fixture. 4 Release the mouse button to place the tub. Notice
annotation automatically is displayed on the tub symbol.

3 Release the mouse button to place the sink.

To resize a bathtub or spa


1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection
Tool.
2 Click the bathtub or spa to select it. The Tub or
To move a sink
Spa Properties bar is displayed.
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 93


Chapter 13 Plumbing Plan Tab

3 Type a new bathtub or spa length in the Length text box. Placing the Hot Water Heater
4 Type a new width in the Width text box. Adding a hot water heater to your home plan is as simple as a
5 Press Enter. The bathtub or spa is resized. mouse click.

Placing a Shower To add a hot water heater

Showers are placed in the same manner as bathtubs and spas. 1 On the Plumbing Plan tab, click the Hot Water
In addition to associative dimensioning and wall tracking as Heater Tool.
you place a shower, Punch! AS4000 automatically adds 2 Click once in your plan drawing. The hot water heater is
annotation to your design once the shower is placed. If you placed.
don’t find the exact sized shower you are looking for, simply
place a shower that is similar in size, then adjust the shower
properties to the exact size you want for your home design.

To place a shower
1 On the Plumbing Plan tab, click the Shower Tool.
The Shower Properties bar is displayed.
2 On the Design window, click where you want to place a
shower. The shower, with dimensions, is displayed. The
dimension lines indicate the distance from the center of
the shower to the nearest wall or plumbing fixture.
3 Drag the shower along the wall until it is in position.

4 Release the mouse button to place the shower. Notice


annotation automatically is displayed on the shower
symbol.

To resize a shower
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection
Tool.
2 Click the shower to select it. The Shower
Properties bar is displayed.
3 Type a new shower length in the Length text
box.
4 Type a new width in the Width text box.
5 Press Enter.The shower is resized.

94 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Chapter 14

HVAC Plan Tab


Correctly adding HVAC ducts and units is an important part of the home design process. Punch! Home Design
Architectural Series 4000 makes it easy to flawlessly design your HVAC system, making sure all rooms receive adequate
ventilation.
Once you place HVAC, with a few mouse clicks, it’s easy to adjust or move components, if you change your mind. You
can even move components by a specific distance, based on Cartesian or Polar coordinates, or rotate items, as needed.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 95


Chapter 14 HVAC Plan Tab

Placing Air Ducts To move air ducts a specific distance


Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 features 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
several sized air ducts to ensure the perfect HVAC plan. To 2 Click to select the air duct you want to move. Selection
place air ducts, simply click and drag. Air ducts are drawn handles appear.
horizontally and vertically, just as standard HVAC ducts are
3 On the Edit Menu, click Move. The Move dialog box is
actually placed in a new home. You can move air ducts by
displayed.
dragging or by a specific distance or rotate them to fit your
home design.
If you don’t find the perfectly-sized air duct for your home
plan, you can define the size of the duct yourself, using the
HVAC properties dialog box.
For information on precision placement using Snaps, see the 4 Click either Cartesian or Polar coordinates.
chapter titled “Punch! Software Primer”, which begins on 5 Type the X and Y Axis measurements, then click OK.
page 27.
6 The air duct is moved to the location you specified.
To place air ducts
To rotate air ducts
1 On the HVAC Plan tab, click the Air Duct Tool.
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click on the plan drawing; hold down the mouse
button and drag. The duct work is displayed, as you drag, 2 Click to select the air duct you want to rotate. Selection
displaying the measurements of the duct. handles appear.
3 On the Edit Menu, click Rotate. The Rotate dialog box is
displayed.

4 Click either Degrees or Radians, then type the angle


Drag measurement in the Angle text box.
5 Click OK. The selected air duct is rotated by the angle
you specified.

Note: Drawing is constrained to 15 degree angles; to release To resize an air duct


this constraint hold, down the SHIFT key, while drawing.
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
3 Release the mouse button to place the air duct segment. 2 Click the air duct to select it. The Duct
Properties bar is displayed.
3 Type new width and depth measurements in the
appropriate text boxes. The air duct you
selected is resized.

Placing Vents and Registers


Placing vents and registers involves one mouse click. Once
you’ve placed vents, you can move them by dragging or
defining specific coordinates. You can even rotate vents at
custom angles to fit your design. Punch! Home Design

96 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Adding Heating, Air Conditioning Units and Pumps

Architectural Series 4000 provides several vents to choose 5 Click OK. The selected vent is rotated by the angle you
from, including floor and ceiling vents. specified.

To place vents and registers Adding Heating, Air Conditioning Units and
1 On the HVAC Plan tab, click one of the vent tools. Pumps
2 Click once in your plan drawing. The vent you Adding heating and air conditioning units only involves one
selected is placed. mouse click. Once placed, you can move units by specific
distances, drag to move them and even rotate them to fit your
home design.

To place heating and air conditioning units


Dr
ag
1 On the HVAC Plan tab, click a heating or
cooling unit Tool.
2 Click once in your plan drawing. The unit
you selected is placed.

To move a vent or register by a specific distance


1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
Dr
2 Click to select the vent you want to move. Selection ag

handles appear.
3 On the Edit Menu, click Move. The Move dialog box is
displayed.

To move a heating or air conditioning unit by a


specific distance
4 Click either Cartesian or Polar coordinates. 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
5 Type the X and Y Axis coordinates, then click OK. 2 Click to select the unit you want to move. Selection
handles appear.
6 The vent is moved to the location you specified.
3 On the Edit Menu, click Move. The Move dialog box is
To rotate registers or vents displayed.
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click to select the register or vent you want to rotate.
Selection handles appear.
3 On the Edit Menu, click Rotate. The Rotate dialog box is
displayed. 4 Click either Cartesian or Polar coordinates.
5 Type the X and Y Axis coordinates, then click OK.
6 The unit is moved to the location you specified.

To rotate heating or air conditioning units


4 Click either Degrees or Radians, then type the angle 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
measurement in the Angle text box.
2 Click to select the unit you want to rotate. Selection
handles appear.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 97


Chapter 14 HVAC Plan Tab

3 On the Edit Menu, click Rotate. The Rotate dialog box is


displayed.

4 Click either Degrees or Radians, then type the angle


measurement in the Angle text box.
5 Click OK. The selected unit is rotated by the angle you
specified.

Placing Baseboard Heaters


As you place baseboard heaters in your home plan,
dimension lines automatically appear, making it easy to place
heaters a specific distance from a neighboring HVAC
component or wall segment. You’ll notice that, when placing
heaters, the object is automatically “tracked” to the wall
segment, making accurate placement simple.

To place baseboard heaters


1 On the HVAC Plan tab, click the Baseboard Heater
Tool.
2 Click a wall segment; hold down the mouse button and
drag. The heater is displayed, as you drag, with
dimensions. The dimension lines indicate the distance
from the center of the heater to the nearest wall or other
HVAC component.

3 Release the mouse button to place the heater.

To move a baseboard heater


1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click to select the heater you want to move.
Selection handles appear.
3 Drag the register to a new location. As you move the
heater, automatic dimensioning is displayed.
4 Release the mouse button to place the heater in the new
location.

98 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Part 4

Working on Your
Home’s Exterior

Chapter 15: Roofing Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101


Chapter 16: Roofing Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Chapter 17: Deck Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Chapter 18: Deck Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Chapter 19: Landscape Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Chapter 20: Detail Plan Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Chapter 15

Roofing Plan Tab


One of the features that will set your design apart from all others will be its roofline. Using the roofing tools available in
Punch! AS4000, you can design intricate roofs with ease. From basic rooflines like hipped or gable to less common ones
like saltbox, gambrel, or a roof over a bay window, you will be able to create any roof to match the style of your homeplan.
In this chapter you will learn how to create individual pieces which, when combined, create multifaceted roofs to fit your
needs.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 101


Chapter 15 Roofing Plan Tab

Adding a Roof
There are several styles of roof available in Punch! AS4000,
including three powerful freehand roofing tools. To match
the gable ends of these roof styles refer to “Defining Gable
Wall Segments” on page 71. To draw a flat ceiling, instead of
a cathedral one, see “Setting Ceiling/Floor Options” on page
70.
Automatic dimensioning makes it easy to achieve exact
Drag
placement. While there are nine roof tools available, six of
them are placed in the same manner. These styles are:
■ hip 5 Release the mouse button.
■ gable connector
■ gable
■ hip connector
■ hip/gable
■ cross connector
The Roof Wizard PowerTool can draw an entire roof, if you
prefer. For more information, see “Roofing Wizard”, which
begins on page 111.

To draw a roof
1 On the Roofing Plan tab, click one of the
Roof Tools. The Roofs Properties bar Note: The arrows show which way the roof section
displays the pitches that are available. descends. The elevation of each corner is noted.
2 Click the roof pitch to select it.
3 (optional) On the Design menu, click Work To snap a roof
on Floor, Second Floor (or the floor you want to roof) or 1 On the Roofing Plan tab, click one of the Roof
click on the Active Floor Icon, then click Work on Tools. The Roofs Properties bar displays the
Second Floor on the pop-up menu that is displayed. pitches that are available.
2 Click the roof pitch to select it.
3 Click the Snaps button. The Snaps toolbar is
displayed.

4 On the Snaps toolbar, click the Snap to Endpoint


Tool or press TAB.
4 Click on the design window; hold down the mouse button 5 Click a wall on the design window. The roof will “snap
and drag. to” the endpoint nearest where you clicked.

102 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Using the Freehand Roof Tools

drawing complex roofing plans. Using the three-point and


four-point freehand tools, roof sections are attached to walls
making it easy to draw them the necessary size the first time.
After drawing roof sections, all parts of it can be customized,
for example, pitch, placement, shape and so on. With the
three- and four-point freehand tools you can specify a width
for soffit.

To draw with the freehand roof tool


1 On the Roofing Plan tab, click the Freehand Roof
Tool. The Roofs Properties Bar displays the
pitches that are available.
2 On the Properties bar, click a pitch or type a
6 Hold down the mouse button and drag until the cursor
custom pitch in the dialog box.
touches a wall.
3 (optional) Type a Pitch Angle in the dialog
box.
4 Click on the design window to define the
start point of the roof section. A rubber-
band line is displayed and follows the
pointer. This line signifies the first edge of
the roof section. Notice that dimensions are
displayed, as you draw.

12 2

7 Press Tab to re-activate the Snap to Endpoint Tool. The


roof will automatically extend to cover the entire
perimeter.

42 32

5 Click and move the pointer to the next cornerpoint.


Repeat until you have completely drawn the roof section.
6 (optional) Click to select the arrow in the center of the
roof section, then rotate the bold arrow to change the
direction of the roof slope.

8 Release the mouse button.

Using the Freehand Roof Tools


Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 has three
Freehand Roof tools that provide versatility and power when
PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 103
Chapter 15 Roofing Plan Tab

Note: The elevation of each selected point of the roof


section is notated; use these specs to match roof sections.
7 Click the roof section to select it. The
Roofs Properties Bar displays the pitches
that are available.
8 Click the Elevation Base radio button to
measure from the ground to the base of the
roof section.
9 Click the Elevation Peak radio button to measure from
the ground to the peak of the roof section. 8 Release the mouse button. The roof section is drawn.
10 (optional) Adjust the elevation of the roof section using
the Elevation Slider on the left of your screen. To draw with the three-point freehand roof tool
1 On the Roofing Plan tab, click the Three-Point
To draw with the four-point freehand roof tool Freehand Roof Tool. The Three-Point Freehand
1 On the Roofing Plan tab, click the Four-Point Roof Tool Properties dialog box is displayed.
Freehand Roof Tool. The Four-Point Freehand
Roof Tool Properties dialog box is displayed.

2 Type the Soffit Depth in the dialog box, then click OK.
Note: Dimensions are entered in inches or feet and inches,
separated by a hyphen. For example, 10-0 indicates ten feet,
while 10 is interpreted as ten inches.
2 Type the Soffit Depth in the dialog box.
3 (optional) Click to check No Soffit.
Note: Dimensions are entered in inches or feet and inches,
4 On the Properties bar, click a pitch or type a custom pitch
separated by a hyphen. For example, 10-0 indicates ten feet,
in the dialog box.
while 10 is interpreted as ten inches.
5 Click a wall on the design window to define the start
3 Click to check the edge(s) where soffit is needed, then point of the roof section.
click OK.
6 Hold down the mouse button and drag away from the
4 (optional) Click to check No Soffit. wall section. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows
5 On the Properties bar, click a pitch or type a the pointer. This line signifies the direction the roof
custom pitch in the dialog box. section will rise. Notice that dimensions are displayed, as
6 Click a wall on the design window to define you draw.
the start point of the roof section.
7 Hold down the mouse button and drag
away from the wall section. A rubber-band
line is displayed and follows the pointer.
This line signifies the direction the roof
section will
rise. Notice that dimensions are displayed, as you draw.
104 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide
Editing Roofs

To change the roof’s slope direction


1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click a side of the roof, to select it.
3 Rotate the bold arrow in the center of the roof section,
until it points to the direction you want the section to fall.
4 Release the mouse. The slope is repositioned.
Note: Rotation is constrained to fifteen (15) degrees.

Drawing a Dormer
7 Release the mouse button. The roof section is drawn. Dormers are windows
set into small gables
Editing Roofs used to add light and
space to the top floor of
Once drawn, roof sections can be altered to suit your design.
a building, typically the
From resizing to rotating the slope to changing its pitch,
attic. Dormers are more
Punch! AS4000 makes it simple to create even the most
easily applied after the
complex roofline.
roof has been completed.
In the following
To resize the roof
example, the dormer
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. itself is drawn on the
2 Click a side of the roof, to select it. third floor while the Dormer Cutout is drawn on the second
floor. The Dormer Cutout tool must be applied to a roof
3 Click a cornerpoint of the roof; hold down the mouse object.
button and drag it until the roof is the size you want.
4 Release the mouse button. To draw a dormer
1 On the Roofing Plan tab, click the Gable
To change the roof’s pitch Connector Roof Tool. The Roofs Properties bar
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. displays the pitches that are available.
2 Click a side of the roof, to select it. 2 Click the roof pitch to select it. In this example, we are
3 On the Properties bar, click a pitch or type a using 10:12.
custom pitch in the dialog box. 3 Click on the design window; hold down the mouse button
4 (optional) Click the radio button next to and drag the Dormer roof to the shape needed.
Custom and type a pitch of 0.0 in the dialog
box to create a flat roof.
5 Click OK.

To elevate a roof by using the Elevation


Slider
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click a side of the roof, to select it.
3 On the left side of the screen, drag the Elevation Slider
up or down.
4 Release the mouse. The roof is repositioned.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 105


Chapter 15 Roofing Plan Tab

4 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Exterior Wall


Tool.
5 Click on the design window; hold down the mouse button
and drag. Notice that the wall follows the pointer and
automatically displays the wall length.
6 Release the mouse button when the correct wall length is
reached.
7 On the Properties bar, enter the height of the wall. In this
example, the gable wall is four feet high, with a pitch of
10:12.
8 Use the Elevation Slider to exactly position the gable
wall vertically. In this example, the gable wall has an
elevation of 18-6.
14 Repeat steps 9 through 13 for the opposite side wall.
15 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Window Tool. The
Windows Properties Bar is displayed.
16 On the Windows Properties Bar, click the Window Style
button, then click the window style you want from the
pop-up window that is displayed.
17 On the Design window, click a wall where you want to
place a window.
18 On the Properties bar, enter the dimensions of the
window.

9 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Exterior Wall


Tool.
10 Click on the design window; hold down the mouse button
and drag. Notice that the wall follows the pointer and
automatically displays the wall length.
11 Release the mouse button when the correct wall length is
reached. In this example, the side walls are only seven
inches long.
12 On the Properties bar, enter the dimensions
of the side wall. In this example, the side
wall is one inch high tapering to a height of
19 (optional) On the Design menu, click Work on Floor,
four feet, with a pitch of 10:12.
Second Floor (or the floor you want to roof) or click on
13 (optional) Use the Elevation Slider to the Active Floor Icon, then click Work on Second Floor
exactly position the gable wall vertically. In on the pop-up menu that is displayed.
this example, the gable wall has an
20 On the Roofing Plan tab, click the Dormer Cutout
elevation of 18-6.
Tool.
21 Trace the Dormer Roof leaving some space at the end
where the dormer connects to the roof.

106 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Adding a Skylight

Drawing a Gambrel Roof


The Gambrel roof, or
barn roof, is a popular
style because it
increases the usable
space in the loft/attic
area. A gambrel roof is
composed of two
pitches. The lower
sections are created
using the Four-Point
Freehand Roof tool,
while the upper pitch will be drawn using the Gable Roof
Tool.
Adding a Skylight
To draw a gambrel roof
Skylights are windows cut
into the roof. They add a 1 On the Roofing Plan tab, click the Four-Point
touch of elegance in addition Freehand Roof Tool. The Four-Point Freehand
to letting in more natural Roof Tool Properties dialog box is displayed.
light. You can even design
custom skylights in Window
Designer. For more
information, see “Window
Designer”, which begins on
page 203.

To add a skylight
1 On the Roofing Plan tab, click the Skylight Tool.
The Skylight Properties bar displays the options 2 Type 1" (one inch) in the Soffit Depth dialog box.
available.
3 (optional) Click to check No Soffit, then click OK.
2 Click the Skylight Style button,
4 Click 12:12 on the Properties bar.
then click the Skylight Style on
the pop-up menu. 5 Click a wall on the design window to define the start
point of the roof section.
3 (optional) Click the Custom
Skylight option, then click the 6 Hold down the mouse button and drag away from the
arrow next to the word Skylights wall section. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows
to see a listing of the available the pointer. This line signifies the direction the roof
custom skylights. section will rise. Notice that dimensions are displayed, as
you draw.
4 Click a roof section on the design window to define the
placement of the skylight.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 107


Chapter 15 Roofing Plan Tab

7 Release the mouse button. The roof section is drawn. 16 Type the number noted from Step 11.
8 On the Edit menu, click Copy or press CTRL+C or right- Note: The previous example specified 12:12 and 4:12
click the selection and click Copy on the pop-up menu pitches, but any combination of pitches will work for this
that is displayed. roof.
9 On the Edit menu, click Paste or press CTRL+V or right-
click the selection and click Paste on the pop-up menu
that is displayed. A duplicate roof section is created.
10 Rotate the bold arrow in the center of the roof section
180 degrees so it faces the opposite direction from the
other arrow.
11 Align this roof section on the other side of the floor plan.
Note the elevation that is specified in red as the upper
elevation of the roof section.

Note: To close the gable ends of this roof style use a


combination of the Wall Break Tool and Gable Wall
segments. For more information, see “Breaking a Wall”,
which begins on page 74 and “Defining Gable Wall
Segments” on page 71.

Drawing a Saltbox Roof


Saltbox roofs are similar
to gable roofs with an
Note: At this point there will be a gap between the two roof offset ridge. Although
sections; this gap will be filled with the Gable Roof section. they are not symmetrical,
12 On the Roofing Plan tab, click the Gable Roof they are extremely
Tool. attractive and easy to
create.
13 For the upper section, click 4:12 on the Properties bar.
14 Click on the design window; hold down the mouse button
and drag.
15 Right-click the upper roof section and click Elevate Roof To draw a saltbox roof
from the pop-up menu that is displayed. 1 On the Roofing Plan tab, click the Four-Point
Freehand Roof Tool. The Four-Point Freehand
Roof Tool Properties dialog box is displayed.

108 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Drawing a Saltbox Roof

2 Type 1" (one inch) in the Soffit Depth dialog box.


3 (optional) Click to check No Soffit, then click OK. 11 Click the lower edge of the second roof section and resize
4 Click 8:12 on the Properties bar. the roof.
5 Click a wall on the design window to define the start
point of the roof section.
6 Hold down the mouse button and drag away from the
wall section. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows
the pointer. This line signifies the direction the roof
section will rise. Notice that dimensions are displayed, as
you draw.

12 Click the roof section to select it. The Roofs


Properties Bar displays the pitches that are
available.
13 Click the Elevation Base radio button to
measure from the ground to the peak of the roof
section.
7 Press the mouse button and drag a box around all points 14 Right-click the Elevation Slider, then click Set Working
of the roof section to select it. Make a note of the Elevation on the pop-up menu that is displayed.
elevation that is specified as the upper elevation of the
15 Type the number noted from Step 7, then click OK.
roof section.
8 On the Edit menu, click Copy or press CTRL+C.
9 On the Edit menu, click Paste or press CTRL+V. A
duplicate roof section is created.
10 Rotate the bold arrow in the center of the roof section
180 degrees, so it faces the opposite direction from the
other arrow.

Note: To close the gable ends of this roof style refer to


“Defining Gable Wall Segments” on page 71.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 109


Chapter 15 Roofing Plan Tab

110 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Chapter 16

Roofing Wizard
Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000’s Roofing Wizard takes the guesswork out of creating hip roofs for simple
or complex home designs. Simply proceed through the Roofing Wizard, then use the manual roofing tools to tweak the
design to your own specifications.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 111


Chapter 16 Roofing Wizard

Launching Roofing Wizard 6 (optional) Check Trim Roof Panels on Overlapping


■ Launch Roofing Wizard by clicking the Floors to avoid drawing interior roofs on complex home
Roofing Wizard icon on the PowerTool Bar. designs (such as split-level home plans).

Designing Roofs
Once you’ve drawn a building shell in Punch! Home Design
Architectural Series 4000, you can use Roofing Wizard to
automatically generate all or part of the roof design. When
you first start the Roofing Wizard, an automated Roofing
Wizard appears to guide you through the process of
designing a roof for your home plan or you can launch the
automated Roofing Wizard once you’ve drawn some roof
sections.
Note: Your design must have a completely closed
perimeter, drawn with exterior walls for the Roofing Wizard
to draw a roof. If your design does not have a continuous
perimeter, no roof will be drawn. 7 (optional) Check Remove Previously Generated Roof
Panels to clear roof panels created in previous sessions of
To create a roof using Roofing Wizard Roofing Wizard.
1 Roofing Wizard will launch automatically. Note: Roof sections drawn from the Roofing Plan tab in
Note: If Roofing Wizard does not launch automatically, the Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 cannot be
“Always Show Wizard at Startup” may be unchecked. To automatically deleted.
launch Roofing Wizard, on the File menu, click Start Roofing 8 (optional) Check Lock Wall Properties to protect wall
Wizard. objects from edits such as changes in height or shape.
2 Click Next to set the pitch and soffit dimensions. 9 (optional) Check Lock Generated Roof Panels to protect
3 Choose Ratio or Angle in the Roof Pitch section, then roof sections generated by the Roofing Wizard from
enter a value in the corresponding text box. edits.
10 (optional) On the Height policy drop down menu, click
the method you want the Roofing Wizard to follow for
creating a regular roof across irregular walls.
11 (optional) Check Adjust Wall Heights to Match Height
Policy to automatically match wall heights to the roof
height.
12 (optional) Check Flatten Gable Structures to change
gable walls in your design to rectangular walls.
13 Click Next to save the options and generate the roof.
14 (optional) Check Save These Roofing Options for Future
Use to make the current wizard settings the default.

4 (optional) Check Include Soffit Along Roof Edges to


automatically include a soffit on all exposed edges of the
roof, then enter a value in the Depth text box.
5 Click Next to set the wizard options.

112 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Designing Roofs

5 (optional) Check Remove Previously Generated Roof


15 (optional) Check Generate Panels for All Wall Objects Panels to clear roof panels created in previous sessions of
Now. Roofing Wizard.
16 Click Finish. Note: Roof sections drawn from the Roofing Plan tab in
Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 cannot be
To generate a roof with options automatically deleted.
1 Right-click a wall, then click Generate Roof With 6 (optional) Check Lock Wall Properties to protect wall
Options on the pop-up menu. The Roof Properties dialog objects from edits, such as changes in height or shape.
box is displayed.
7 (optional) Check Lock Generated Roof Panels to protect
2 (optional) On the Dimensions tab, choose Ratio or Angle roof sections generated by the Roofing Wizard from
in the Roof Pitch section, then enter a value in the edits.
corresponding text box.
8 (optional) On the Height policy drop down menu, click
the method you want the Roofing Wizard to follow for
creating a regular roof across irregular walls.
9 (optional) Check Adjust Wall Heights to Match Height
Policy to automatically match wall heights to the roof
height.
10 (optional) Check Flatten Gable Structures to change
gable walls in your design to rectangular walls.
11 Click OK.

To generate a simple roof


■ Right-click a wall, then click Generate Roof on the pop-
3 (optional) Check Include Soffit Along Roof Edges to up menu. A roof is created that conforms to the default
automatically include a soffit on all exposed edges of the settings you set in the Roofing Wizard.
roof, then enter a value in the Depth text box.
4 (optional) On the Extended Options tab, check Trim
Roof Panels on Overlapping Floors to avoid drawing
interior roofs on complex home designs (such as split-
level home plans).

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 113


Chapter 16 Roofing Wizard

Drawing Additional Roof Components


Roofing Wizard allows you to create roof objects, using the
same tools you find on the Roofing Plan tab in Punch! 12 2
Home Design Architectural Series 4000. From basic roof
lines, like hipped or gable, to less common ones, like
saltbox, gambrel
or a roof over a bay window, you can create any roof to
match the style of your home plan.
In addition to the manual roof tools on the Roofing Plan Tab,
Roofing Wizard has three powerful freehand roofing tools for 42 32
roofing those hard-to-categorize areas. For more information
on using manual roof tools, see “Roofing Plan Tab”, which 7 Click and move the pointer to the next cornerpoint.
begins on page 101. Repeat until you have completely drawn the roof section.

You can also customize the shape of a roof section by adding To add a roof point
or deleting individual points to a roof section.
1 Click the Add Roof Point Tool. The pointer
changes to reflect drawing mode.
To draw a freehand hip roof
2 Click to enter a new point on one of the roof objects you
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Custom Roof
have created.
Region tool. The Custom Roof Region dialog box
is displayed.
To remove a roof point
2 Choose Ratio or Angle in the Roof Pitch section, then
1 Click the Remove Roof Point Tool. The pointer
enter a value in the corresponding text box.
changes to reflect drawing mode.
2 Click to remove a point from one of the roof objects you
have created.

Editing Roof and Wall Components


Complex roofs sometimes have to be drawn using a known
elevation. You can control the precision of your roof drawing
by changing the elevation. You can also lock roof sections to
protect them from unintentional edits.
Walls can also be modified, as you design your roof. Controls
on the Property bar allow you to change the wall height, stud
spacing and the overall shape and dimensions of the wall. As
with roof sections, you can lock walls to protect them from
unintentional edits.
3 (optional) Check Include Soffit Along Roof Edges to
automatically include a soffit on all exposed edges of the To change the pitch of a roof section
roof, then enter a value in the Depth text box.
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
4 Type an elevation value for the roof peak or bottom edge
in the Elevation text box. 2 Click a side of the roof, to select it.
5 Click OK. The pointer changes to a drawing tool. 3 On the Roof Objects Properties bar, click a different
ratio in the Pitch section or click Custom and type a new
6 Click on the design window to define the start point of ratio value.
the roof section. A rubber-band line is displayed and
follows the pointer. This line signifies the first edge of To change the height of a wall
the roof section. Notice that dimensions are displayed, as
you draw. 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
114 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide
Using Nudge, Snap Tools and the Grid

2 Click a wall to select it; the Wall Properties bar is To control the lock status of a roof section
displayed. 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
3 On the Walls Properties bar, click a different wall height 2 Click a side of the roof, to select it.
or click Custom and type a new height value.
3 On the Property bar, check the Locked checkbox. When
To define stud spacing this control is checked, the selected roof panel cannot be
altered, until the checkbox is cleared.
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click a wall to select it; the Wall Properties bar is To control the lock status of a wall
displayed. 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
3 Type a new value in the Stud Spacing text box. 2 Click a wall to select it; the Wall Properties bar is
displayed.
To change wall types
3 On the Property bar, check the Locked checkbox. When
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. this control is checked, the selected wall cannot be
2 Click a wall to select it; the Wall Properties bar is altered, until the checkbox is cleared.
displayed.
3 Click the Wall Style button, then select a style on the Using Nudge, Snap Tools and the Grid
pop-up menu. Once you’ve placed a roof object, you can precisely move it
4 Type new values to redefine the wall according to the into position using Nudge. Nudge utilizes the arrow keys to
shape you selected. move selected objects, or features, a specified distance. For
more information on using Nudge, see “Using Nudge”,
Note: For more information on defining slanted, gabled, or which begins on page 153.
other wall types, see “Defining Gable Wall Segments”,
which begins on page 71. Nudge works in tandem with the Snap Grid. To learn more
about the Snap Grid, see “Using the Grid”, which begins on
To increase or decrease elevation of a roof section page 16.
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. With snaps, you can define exactly where roof objects are
2 Click the roof panel you want to elevate. placed. You can move through the Snaps Toolbar with the Tab
key. Each time you press Tab, the next Snap Tool is activated,
3 Click and drag the Elevation slider, on the left side of the Shift-Tab reverses the process. For more information, see
Design window, to the desired height. “Punch! Software Primer”, which begins on page 27.
4 (optional) If you selected a freehand roof
Grid settings have a direct impact on the ease of aligning
panel, click an Elevation option on the
roof objects, snapping objects to the grid and so on. When
Property Bar. Clicking Base applies your
using the Snap to Grid feature, items that are dragged and
elevation value to the bottom edge of the roof.
dropped on the design window are automatically snapped, or
Clicking Peak applies your elevation value to
placed,
the top edge of the roof.
to align with the current grid. By default, Snap to Grid is
turned on. For more information, see “Using the Grid”,
To delete generated roof sections
which begins on page 16.
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Right-click a wall and click Delete Generated Roof
Panels on the pop-up menu.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 115


Chapter 16 Roofing Wizard

Setting the Working Elevation


Before you draw roof objects, be sure to set your working
elevation. All objects are drawn in relation to this elevation.

To set the working elevation


1 On the Design menu, click Set Working Elevation. The
Set Working Elevation dialog box is displayed.

2 (optional) In the Working Elevation edit box, type a new


value.
3 Click OK.

116 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Chapter 17

Deck Plan Tab


If you are looking for a way to add more living space to your existing home, but don’t want to build an addition, you might
consider adding a deck. Punch! AS4000 contains an extensive toolset for designing outdoor living areas.
In this chapter, you will learn how to design multi-story and multi-level decks, including options for handrails, skirt trim
and steps.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 117


Chapter 17 Deck Plan Tab

Adding a Deck cutout. Notice that dimensions are displayed, as you


draw.
Adding a deck is a great way to add living space to your
home. With Punch! AS4000 you can build deck sections on 3 Click and move the pointer to the next cornerpoint.
the fly, with or without railings. All sections can be altered if Repeat until you have completely drawn the cutout.
you change your mind in the middle of the design process.
For information on precision placement, using Snaps, see the Changing the Deck Height
chapter titled “Punch! Software Primer”, which begins on Creating multi-story and multi-level decks is easy. With just
page 27. a few mouse clicks, you can design a very elaborate and
elegant deck.
To draw a deck
1 On the Deck Plan tab, click a Deck Tool. To change deck height
2 Click on the design window to define the start point 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
of the deck. A rubber-band line is displayed and 2 Click the side of the deck you want to
follows the pointer. This line signifies the first edge raise or lower, to select it.
of the deck. Notice that dimensions are displayed, as you
draw. 3 On the Properties Bar, in the Deck Height
dialog box, type the height, in inches. A
positive number raises the deck, while a
negative number lowers it.
12 2 Note: Fractions of inches are entered in decimal form.

Editing Skirt Trim Options


By default, Skirt Trim is included on all sides of the deck. In
addition to including skirt trim on only the sides you want,
you can customize it by applying colors or materials. For
more information on color and material, see the chapter titled
42 32 “Working with LiveView”, which begins on page 157.

3 Click and move the pointer to the next cornerpoint. To remove skirt trim
Repeat until you have completely drawn the deck. 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the
Selection Tool.
To reshape a deck
2 Click the side of the deck where you want
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. to remove skirt trim, then on the Deck
2 Click the side of the deck you want to reshape. Properties bar, click to uncheck Skirting.
3 Click a cornerpoint; hold down the mouse button and Note: To select more than one side of your
drag. deck, hold the SHIFT key down, while clicking sides.

Creating a Deck Cutout Editing Handrail Options


You can easily create a space in your deck to insert a pool or With Punch! AS4000 you can easily customize deck options.
hot tub by using the Deck Cutout Tool. By default, handrail height is 36" and baluster spacing is set
to 6".
To create a deck cutout
1 On the Deck Plan tab, click the Deck Cutout Tool. To remove handrails

2 Click on the design window to define the start point 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
of the cutout. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows
the pointer. This line signifies the first edge of the deck

118 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Editing Step Options

2 Click the side of the deck to select it. The 2 Click the steps you want to resize. The
Deck Properties bar is displayed. Step Properties bar is displayed.
Note: To select more than one side of your 3 Type the new width, in inches.
deck, hold the SHIFT key down, while
clicking sides. To change the step height

3 Click to uncheck the Include Handrail 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the
checkbox. Selection Tool.
2 Click the steps you want to alter. The Step
To change handrail height Properties bar is displayed.
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 3 Type the new height, in inches.
2 Click the side of the deck you want to customize. Note: This is especially useful when designing multi-level
3 On the Properties Bar, in the Handrails Height dialog decks, when you do not want the steps to reach the ground,
box, type the height, in inches. just the next deck level.

To change baluster spacing To edit handrail placement


1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click the side of the deck you want to customize. 2 Click the steps you want to alter. The Step Properties bar
is displayed.
3 On the Properties Bar, in the Handrails Baluster Spacing
dialog box, type the spacing, in inches. 3 Click to uncheck the checkbox next to Handrails on Left
(or Right). The handrails on the selected side will be
Editing Step Options removed.

Using Punch! AS4000, you can add steps to any side of your
Adding Custom Railings
deck and customize them to meet your needs. By default,
steps are added to the center of the deck side, but can be Customizing railings is easy with Punch! AS4000; you can
moved easily into any position. simply add railings to any side of your deck.

To add steps To draw a straight railing


1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 1 On the Deck Plan tab, click the Railing Tool. The
Railing Properties bar is displayed.
2 Click the side of the deck where you want
to add steps. 2 Click on the design window to define the start point of
the Railing. A rubber-band Railing, with dimensions, is
3 On the Deck Steps Properties bar, click
displayed and follows the pointer.
Insert New. The steps will be inserted in
the middle of the selected side. 3 Extend the Railing to the location you want, then right-
click to end drawing mode.
To resize steps by clicking-and-dragging 4 (optional) Press and hold the SHIFT key, while drawing,
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. to release the 15 degree constraint.
2 Click to select the steps you want to resize.
To draw a curved railing
3 Click an endpoint of the steps; hold down the mouse
1 On the Deck Plan tab, click the Curved Railing
button and drag to resize.
Tool. The Railing Properties bar is displayed.
To resize steps by a specific measurement 2 Click on the design window to define the start point of
the railing. A rubber-band Railing, with dimensions, is
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
displayed and follows the pointer.
Note: The railing will appear angular as it is drawn, but will
curve after the next point is set.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 119


Chapter 17 Deck Plan Tab

3 (optional) Press and hold the SHIFT key, while drawing, 3 Move in the direction you want the stairs to rise, then
to constrain railing to a perfect arc. click to place the staircase.
4 (optional) Press and hold the SHIFT key, while drawing,
Modifying a Custom Railing to constrain stairs to a perfect arc.
Once you have drawn a railing, you can modify features and
location to suit your needs. Using Punch! AS4000 you gain Modifying a Custom Staircase
total control over railing handrail height, baluster spacing Once you have drawn a staircase, you can modify features
and railing posts. and location to suit your needs. With Punch! AS4000 you
have total control over stairway width, riser and tread
Customizing railing features dimensions and handrail height and placement.
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection
Tool. Customizing staircase features
2 Click the railing you want to customize. The 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection
Railing Properties bar is displayed. Tool.
3 (optional) Type a new handrail height. 2 Click the staircase you want to customize to
4 (optional) Type a new baluster spacing. select it. The Staircase Properties bar is
displayed.
5 (optional) Check whether railing posts are wanted.
3 (optional) Type a new staircase height and
width.
Resizing a railing
4 (optional) Check the radio button to add
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
skirt walls.
2 Click the railing you want to resize.
5 (optional) Type a new step height (riser).
3 Click on an endpoint of the railing; hold down the mouse
6 (optional) Type a step depth (tread).
button and drag. The railing is resized.
7 (optional) Specify handrail height and
Placing a Custom Staircase location, left or right, as you are looking
from bottom of staircase.
In addition to the Add Steps feature, Punch! AS4000 gives
you the option of easily drawing custom staircases. 8 (optional) Specify Closed Stringer and/or
Large Base, if needed.
To draw a straight staircase
Resizing a staircase
1 On the Deck Plan tab, click the Straight Staircase
Tool. The Staircase Properties bar is displayed. 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click on the design window to define the start point of 2 Click the centerline of the staircase you want to resize.
the staircase. A rubber-band staircase, with dimensions, 3 Click an endpoint or midpoint of the staircase; hold down
is displayed and follows the pointer. the mouse button and drag.
3 Extend the staircase to the location you want, then right-
click to end drawing mode. Reversing the direction of a staircase
4 (optional) Press and hold the SHIFT key, while drawing, 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
to release the 15 degree constraint. 2 Right-click the center line of the
staircase you want to alter.
To draw a curved staircase
3 Click Reverse Staircase
1 On the Deck Plan tab, click the Curved Staircase Direction on the pop-up menu
Tool. The Staircase Properties bar is displayed. that is displayed. The direction
2 Click and release on the design window to define the start of the staircase is reversed.
point of the staircase. A rubber-band staircase, with Note: This works for both curved and straight staircases.
dimensions, is displayed and follows the pointer.

120 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Chapter 18

Deck Designer
Punch! Home Design’s Deck Designer PowerTool makes designing even the most elaborate deck simple and straight-
forward. When you launch Deck Designer your floorplan is automatically displayed; the Deck Wizard is launched and you
are ready to begin.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 121


Chapter 18 Deck Designer

Designing With the Deck Wizard


The Deck Wizard makes it a snap to add a deck to your
design. The Deck Wizard includes fifteen shapes; in addition,
every detail is customizable to suit your needs.

To choose a deck shape (step one of three)


1 Open Punch! Deck Designer by clicking the
Launch Deck Designer icon on the PowerTools
tab. Deck Designer loads and Deck Wizard is
automatically launched.
Note: If you do not want the Wizard to launch
automatically each time you load Deck Designer, uncheck 6 Click Next.
the Show on Startup box. Note: At any time during the design process, you can go
2 Click a shape from the choices at the top of the screen. In back to previous steps by clicking the Back button.
this example, we will choose the second from the last
shape.

To customize the features (step two of three)


3 Type the measurements for each side of the shape, in feet 1 Type the height and elevation in the appropriate dialog
and inches, separated by a hyphen. boxes, in feet and inches, separated by a hyphen.
Note: To use inches, instead of feet and inches, check the
Inches box under Sizing.
4 (optional) Click Flip (h) to flip the plan on the horizontal.

Note: The height, elevation and baluster spacing


measurements are applied to the entire deck, while the
segment measurements are applied only to the selected side
5 (optional) Click Flip (v) to flip the plan on the vertical. (unless you click the Apply to All Sides button).

122 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Designing With the Deck Wizard

2 Click the arrow next to the selected side,


then click the letter designating the side to
be altered, from the drop down menu.
3 Click to uncheck the Include Skirting
checkbox, if the selected side does not
need skirting.
4 Click to uncheck the Handrails checkbox,
if the selected side does not need
handrails.
5 (optional) Type a new Handrail Height, in feet and
inches, separated by a hyphen.
6 (optional) Type a new Baluster Spacing, in inches.
Moving a deck
7 Click Next.
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
To add steps (step three of three) 2 Click the deck you want to reposition.
1 Click the arrow next to the selected side, 3 Click again; hold down the mouse button and drag the
then click the letter designating the side to deck to the new location.
be altered, from the drop down menu.
Note: For more information on making precision
2 Check the Steps checkbox, if the selected placements, using Snaps, see the chapter titled “Punch!
side is to have steps. Software Primer”, which begins on page 27.

To rotate the deck a specified amount


1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Right-click the deck, then click Select Entire Deck, to
select it.
3 Click Rotate on the Edit menu. The Rotate dialog box is
displayed.

4 Click either Degrees or Radians, then type the angle you


3 (optional) Type a new Width and/or Height dimension, in want to rotate the deck in the Angle text box.
feet and inches, separated by a hyphen.
5 Click OK. The deck is rotated, based on the angle
4 (optional) Click Left or Right to specify the location of measurement you specified.
handrails.
5 (optional) Click Open Stairs, if needed. To freely rotate the deck
6 Click Finish. The deck will be placed in the center of the 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
Deck Designer design window. 2 Right-click the deck, then click Select Entire Deck, to
select it.
3 On the Standard toolbar, click the Rotate Tool.
4 Click the deck; hold down the mouse button and
move the mouse.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 123


Chapter 18 Deck Designer

5 Release the mouse button when the deck is in the position Drawing a Rectangular Deck
you want.
The most common shape for a deck will be rectangular and
Note: The degree of rotation is displayed in the Status Bar. Deck Wizard makes them easy to create.

Designing a Polygon Deck To draw a rectangular deck


The Polygon Deck tool is a very fast and easy way to begin 1 Open Punch! Deck Designer by clicking the Launch
designing your new deck. With this tool, you can create Deck Designer icon on the PowerTools tab.
decks that conform to the shape of your exterior walls.
2 Click the Rectangle Deck Tool. The pointer
To draw a polygon deck changes to reflect drawing mode.

1 Open Punch! Deck Designer by clicking the 3 The Rectangle Deck Properties bar is
Launch Deck Designer icon on the PowerTools displayed, showing the customizable options
tab. for this tool.
4 (optional) Click the Method button to access a
different drawing style, then select an option
from the pop-up menu that is displayed.
Note: The four predefined drawing methods are
draw rectangle from corner, draw rectangle from
center, draw square from corner and draw square
from center.
5 Click on the design window to define the start
point of the rectangle. A rubber-band rectangle
is displayed and follows the pointer. Dimensions are
displayed, as you draw.
6 Hold the mouse button down, as you extend the rectangle
to the size you want.

2 Click the Polygon Deck Tool. The pointer changes


to reflect drawing mode.
12
3 The Polygon Deck Properties bar is displayed,
showing the customizable options for this tool.
4 Click on the design window to define the start
point of the polygon. A rubber-band line is
displayed and follows the pointer. Dimensions
are displayed, as you draw. Drag

5 Click and move the mouse to the next


cornerpoint. Repeat until you have drawn the 7 Release the mouse button.
necessary shape.
6 Right-click to end drawing mode.

124 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Designing a Circular Deck

Designing a Circular Deck Designing an Arc Deck


Use the Circle Deck Tool to design decking around your The Arc Deck Tool makes drawing circular decks off a side
pool or hot tub. You can even use this tool to build the of your home simple.
beginning level of a gazebo.
To draw an arc deck
To draw a circular/oval deck 1 Open Punch! Deck Designer by clicking the Launch
1 Open Punch! Deck Designer by clicking the Launch Deck Designer icon on the PowerTools tab.
Deck Designer icon on the PowerTools tab. 2 Click the Arc Tool. The pointer changes to reflect
2 Click the Circle/Oval Deck Tool. The pointer drawing mode.
changes to reflect drawing mode. 3 The Arc Deck Properties bar is displayed,
3 The Circle Deck Properties bar is displayed, showing the customizable options for this tool.
showing the customizable options for this tool. 4 (optional) Click the Method button to access a
4 (optional) Click the Method button to access a different drawing style, then select an option
different drawing style, then select an option from the pop-up menu that is displayed.
from the pop-up menu that is displayed.
Note: The two predefined drawing methods are
Note: The four predefined drawing methods are free-form arc and 90 degree arc.
draw oval from corner, draw oval from center,
5 Click on the design window to define the start
draw circle from corner and draw circle from
point of the arc. A rubber-band line is
center.
displayed and follows the pointer. Dimensions
5 Click on the design window to define the start are displayed, as you draw.
point of the shape. A rubber-band shape is 6 Hold the mouse button down, as you extend
displayed and follows the pointer. Dimensions the arc to the size you want.
are displayed, as you draw.
6 Hold the mouse button down, as you extend
the shape to the size you want.
12

Drag

12 7 Release the mouse button.

Drag

7 Release the mouse button.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 125


Chapter 18 Deck Designer

Drawing a Circular Arc Deck


Easily tuck a deck into any corner of your home’s exterior
with the Circular Arc Deck Tool.

To draw a circular arc deck 2


1 Open Punch! Deck Designer by clicking the Launch
Deck Designer icon on the PowerTools tab.
2 Click the Circular Arc Deck Tool. The pointer
changes to reflect drawing mode.
3 The Circular Arc Deck Properties bar is
displayed, showing the customizable options
for this tool.
4 Press the mouse button on the design window 8 Click to end drawing mode.
to define the centerpoint of the circular arc. A
rubber-band line is displayed and follows the
pointer. This line signifies the radius of your
Drawing a Multigon Deck
arc. You can quickly draw equal-sided decks with the Multigon
Deck Tool.

To draw a multigon deck


1 Open Punch! Deck Designer by clicking the Launch
Drag Deck Designer icon on the PowerTools tab.
2 Click the Multigon Deck Tool. The pointer
changes to reflect drawing mode.
3 The Multigon Deck Properties bar is displayed,
1 showing the customizable options for this tool.
2
4 On the Properties bar, type the number of equal
sides you want to draw.
5 Click on the design window to define the start
point of the multigon. A rubber-band multigon
is displayed and follows the pointer.
5 Hold the mouse button down and extend the radius to
the size you want. Dimensions appear in the position 6 Hold the mouse button down, as you extend the
readout bar as you draw. multigon to the size you want.

6 Release the mouse button.


7 Move the mouse clockwise or counter-clockwise to
create the shape you want.

126 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Adding Custom Railings

To draw a straight staircase


1 Click the Straight Staircase Tool. The Staircase
Properties bar is displayed.
2 Click on the design window to define the start point of
the staircase. A rubber-band staircase, with dimensions,
is displayed and follows the pointer.
Drag 3 Extend the staircase to the location you want, then right-
1 click to end drawing mode.
2
To draw a curved staircase
1 Click the Curved Staircase Tool. The Staircase
Properties bar is displayed.
2 Click and release on the design window to define the start
point of the staircase. A rubber-band staircase, with
7 Release the mouse button.
dimensions, is displayed and follows the pointer.
Note: To change the multigon’s size, but constrain its 3 Move in the direction you want the stairs to rise, then
orientation, press CTRL while drawing. click to place the staircase.
4 (optional) Press and hold the SHIFT key, while drawing,
Adding Custom Railings
to constrain stairs to a perfect arc.
Customizing railings is easy with Punch! AS4000; you can
simply add railings to any side of your deck. Tracing an Exterior Wall Perimeter
To draw a straight railing The two Trace Wall Deck tools make designing a deck
against an intricate set of exterior walls simple. At any time
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Railing Tool. during the designing process, you can view your work in 3D.
The Railing Properties bar is displayed.
To draw a wall trace perimeter deck
2 Click on the design window to define the start point of
the Railing. A rubber-band Railing, with dimensions, is 1 Open Punch! Deck Designer by clicking the Launch
displayed and follows the pointer. Deck Designer icon on the PowerTools tab.
3 Extend the Railing to the location you want, then right- 2 Click the Trace Wall Perimeter Tool. The pointer
click to end drawing mode. changes to reflect drawing mode.
3 Click a wall on the design window to define the start
To draw a curved railing point of the rectangle. A rubber-band rectangle is
1 Click the Curved Railing Tool. The Railing displayed and follows the pointer. Dimensions are
Properties bar is displayed. displayed, as you draw.
2 Click on the design window to define the start point of
the railing. A rubber-band Railing, with dimensions, is
displayed and follows the pointer.
Note: The railing will appear angular as it is drawn, but will
curve after the next point is set.
3 (optional) Press and hold the SHIFT key, while drawing,
to constrain railing to a perfect arc.

Placing a Custom Staircase


In addition to the Add Steps feature, Punch! AS4000 gives
you the option of easily drawing custom stairs.
PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 127
Chapter 18 Deck Designer

4 Hold the mouse button down, as you extend the deck to


the size you want.

4 Drag to define the direction you want the deck to be


drawn. A rubber-band arrow is displayed and follows the
5 Release the mouse button. The deck will conform to the pointer. Release the mouse button.
wall perimeter.

5 Click the wall where you want to change direction. The


deck will conform to the wall perimeter.
To draw a wall trace perimeter polygon deck
1 Open Punch! Deck Designer by clicking the Launch
Deck Designer icon on the PowerTools tab.
2 Click the Trace Wall Perimeter Polygon Tool. The
pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.
3 Click a wall on the design window to define the start
point.

6 Click and move the pointer to the next cornerpoint.


Repeat until you have completely drawn the deck.

128 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Adding and Removing Deck/Railing Points

3 Continue deleting points until you are finished, then


right-click to end.

Changing the Deck Height


Creating multi-story and multi-level decks is easy. With just
a few mouse clicks, you can design a very elaborate and
elegant deck.

To change deck height


1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click the side of the deck you want to raise or
lower, to select it.

7 Right-click to end drawing mode. 3 On the Properties Bar, in the Deck Height
dialog box, type the height, in inches. A
positive number raises the deck, while a
negative number lowers it.
Note: Fractions of inches are entered in decimal
form.

Editing Skirt Trim Options


By default, Skirt Trim is included on all sides of the deck. In
addition, you may include skirt trim on selected sides.

To remove skirt trim


1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection
Note: Only the edges of the deck that are away from the Tool.
house perimeter will have railings. 2 Click the side of the deck where you want to
remove skirt trim, then on the Deck
Adding and Removing Deck/Railing Points Properties bar, click to uncheck Skirting.
You can add or remove deck/railing points at any time to Note: To select more than one side of your deck,
fine-tune your design. hold the SHIFT key down, while clicking sides.

To add a deck/railing point Editing Handrail Options


1 On the toolbar, click the Add Deck/Railing Point With Punch! Deck Designer, you can easily customize deck
Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing options. By default, handrail height is 36" and baluster
mode. spacing is set to 6".
2 Click a side of the deck where you want to add a point.
3 Continue adding points until you are finished, then right- To remove handrails
click to end. 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click the side of the deck, to select it. The
To remove a deck/railing point Deck Properties bar is displayed.
1 On the toolbar, click the Remove Deck/Railing
Point Tool. The pointer changes to reflect Note: To select more than one side of your deck,
drawing mode. hold the SHIFT key down, while clicking sides.

2 Click on the point you want to remove. 3 Click to uncheck the Include Handrail
checkbox.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 129


Chapter 18 Deck Designer

To change handrail height 2 Click the steps you want to alter. The Step Properties bar
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. is displayed.

2 Click the side of the deck you want to customize. 3 Type the new height, in inches.

3 On the Properties Bar, in the Handrails Height dialog Note: This is especially useful when designing multi-level
box, type the height, in inches. decks, when you do not want the steps to reach the ground,
just the next deck level.
To change baluster spacing
To edit handrail placement
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click the side of the deck you want to
customize. 2 Click the steps you want to alter. The Step Properties bar
is displayed.
3 On the Properties Bar, in the Handrails
Baluster Spacing dialog box, type the spacing, 3 Click to uncheck the checkbox next to Handrails on Left
in inches. (or Right). The handrails on the selected side will be
removed.
Editing Step Options
Modifying a Custom Railing
Using Punch! Deck Designer, you can add steps to any side
of your deck and customize them to meet your needs. By Once you have drawn a railing, you can modify features and
default, steps are added to the center of the deck side, but can location to suit your needs. Using Punch! Deck Designer, you
be moved easily into any position. gain total control over railing features, handrail height,
baluster spacing and railing posts.
To add steps
Resizing a railing
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click the side of the deck where you want to
add steps. 2 Click to select the railing you want to resize.
3 On the Deck Steps Properties bar, click 3 Click on an endpoint of the railing; hold down the mouse
Insert New. The steps will be inserted in the button and drag. The railing is resized.
middle of the selected side.
Modifying a Custom Staircase
To resize steps by clicking-and-dragging Once you have drawn a staircase, you can modify features
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. and location to suit your needs. With Punch! AS4000 you
2 Click to select the steps you want to resize. have total control over stairway width, riser and tread
dimensions and handrail placement.
3 Click an endpoint of the steps; hold down the mouse
button and drag to resize. Resizing a staircase

To resize steps by a specific measurement 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 2 Click the centerline of the staircase you want to resize.

2 Click the steps you want to resize. The Step 3 Click an endpoint or midpoint of the staircase; hold down
Properties bar is displayed. the mouse button and drag.

3 Type the new width, in inches. 4 Click again; hold down the mouse button and drag the
new staircase into position.
To change the step height
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection
Tool.

130 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Using Nudge, Snap Tools and the Grid

Customizing staircase features dropped on the design window are automatically snapped, or
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection placed, to align with the current grid. By default, Snap to
Tool. Grid is turned on. For more information, see “Using the
Grid”, which begins on page 16.
2 Click the staircase you want to customize. The
Staircase Properties bar is displayed.
3 (optional) Type a new staircase height and
width.
4 (optional) Check the radio button to add skirt
walls.
5 (optional) Type a new step height (riser).
6 (optional) Type a step depth (tread).
7 (optional) Check the radio button for open
stairs.
8 (optional) Specify handrail height and
location, left or right as you are looking from
bottom of staircase.

Reversing the direction of a staircase


1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Right-click the centerline of the staircase you want to
alter.
3 Click Reverse Staircase Direction on the pop-up menu
that is displayed. The direction of the staircase is
reversed.
Note: This works for both curved and straight staircases.

Using Nudge, Snap Tools and the Grid


Once you’ve placed a roof object, you can precisely move it
into position using Nudge. Nudge utilizes the arrow keys to
move selected objects or features a specified distance. For
more information on using Nudge, see “Using Nudge”,
which begins on page 153.
Nudge works in tandem with the Snap Grid. To learn more
about the Snap Grid, see “Using the Grid”, which begins on
page 16.
With snaps, you can define exactly where deck objects are
placed. You can move through the Snaps Toolbar with the Tab
key. Each time you press Tab, the next Snap Tool is activated,
Shift-Tab reverses the process. For more information, see
“Punch! Software Primer”, which begins on page 27.
Grid settings have a direct impact on the ease of aligning
deck objects, snapping objects to the grid and so on. When
using the Snap to Grid feature, items that are dragged and

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 131


Chapter 18 Deck Designer

132 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Chapter 19

Landscape Plan Tab


From adding a flower bed near your front door to designing an elaborate pool area, Punch! AS4000 contains an extensive
toolset to help you design your outdoor living areas.
In this chapter, you will learn to add a pond and add pathways and fencing to your home plan. In addition, you can create
flower beds that you can landscape, using flowers, shrubs and trees accessible from the Plant Tab.

PowerTools to enhance your design


■ “Topo Designer” on page 49
■ “Deck Designer” on page 121
■ “Plant Editor” on page 225

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 133


Chapter 19 Landscape Plan Tab

Defining the Property Line To draw ground fill region


If you are working in a confined or unusually-shaped area, 1 On the Landscape Plan tab, click the Ground Fill
you may want to define the property lines. The property line Tool.
will only appear in the 2D design window. 2 Click on the design window to define the start point of
the ground fill region. A rubber-band line is displayed
To define the property line and follows the pointer. This line signifies the first edge
1 On the Landscape Plan tab, click the Property Line of the ground fill region. Notice that dimensions are
Tool. displayed, as you draw.
2 Click on the design window to define the start point of
the property line. A rubber-band line is displayed and
follows the pointer. This line signifies the first edge of
the property line. Notice that dimensions are displayed,
as you draw.

3 Click and move the pointer to the next cornerpoint.


Repeat until you have completely drawn the ground fill
region.

3 Click and move the pointer to the next cornerpoint.


Repeat until you have completely drawn the property
line.
4 Right-click to end drawing mode.

To edit the property line


1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click the property line to select it.
3 Click a cornerpoint of the property line, hold down the
mouse button and drag.
4 Click the next selection point, hold down the mouse
button and drag. 4 Right-click to end drawing mode.

Adding a Ground Fill Region 5 (optional) Drag and drop materials onto the region in the
3D LiveView window.
From simple, rectangular garden entryways and flower beds
to elaborate planting areas, Punch! AS4000 makes designing
them easy. You can design flower beds to flawlessly
integrate with your home design.

134 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Drawing Sidewalks, Pathways or Driveways

5 Right-click to end drawing mode.


To reshape a ground fill region
Note: While drawing, curved pathways will appear angular,
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. but will curve after the second mouse click.
2 Click a side of the ground fill region you want to reshape.
To straighten a curved pathway
3 Click a selection point of the ground fill region; hold
down the mouse button and drag. 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
4 Click the next selection point; hold down the mouse 2 Click the pathway you want to straighten.
button and drag. 3 Click the Straight radio button on the Properties
bar.
Drawing Sidewalks, Pathways or
Driveways To curve a straight pathway
In Punch! AS4000, you can design sidewalks, pathways and 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
driveways, using the same Tool. Once a pathway is drawn, 2 Right-click the pathway you want to curve.
you can customize it by applying any material to suit your
needs. For more information on color and material, see the 3 Click the Curved radio button on the Properties bar.
chapter titled “Working with LiveView”, which begins on
page 157. To reshape a pathway
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
To add a pathway
2 Click the center line of the pathway you want to reshape.
1 On the Landscape Plan tab, click the Pathway
3 Click a selection point of the pathway; hold down the
Tool.
mouse button and drag.
2 (optional) Type a new width, in the text box, on
4 Click the next selection point; hold down the mouse
the Properties bar.
button and drag.
3 Click on the design window to define the start
point of the pathway. A rubber-band line is displayed To change the width of a pathway
and follows the pointer. Notice that dimensions are
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
displayed, as you draw.
2 Click the center line of the pathway, to select it.
4 Click and move the pointer to the next point. Repeat until
The Pathway Properties bar is displayed.
you have completely drawn the pathway.
3 Type a new width, in inches, or feet and inches,
separated by a hyphen.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 135


Chapter 19 Landscape Plan Tab

Adding Fill or materials to the edging so it blends with your home plan’s
color scheme. For more information on color and material,
You can use the Fill tool to show mulch around trees or
see the chapter titled “Working with LiveView”, which
shrubs or to add a pond or stream to your landscaping.
begins on page 157.
To mulch around a tree To draw straight edging
1 On the Landscape tab, click the Fill Tool.
1 On the Landscape Plan tab, click the Edging Tool.
2 Click on the design window; hold down the mouse
button and drag. A rubber-band shape is displayed and 2 Click the Straight radio button on the Properties
follows the pointer. Notice that dimensions are displayed, bar.
as you draw. 3 Click on the design window to define the start
3 Release the mouse button. point of the edging. A rubber-band line is displayed and
follows the pointer. Notice that dimensions are
displayed, as you draw.

4 (optional) Move the fill area into position, if necessary.


Note: By default, mulch material will be applied to the 4 Move the pointer to the next point. Right-click to end
shape you drew. To apply different mulch material, see “To drawing mode.
apply material” on page 180.

To add a pond
1 On the Landscape tab, click the Fill Tool.
2 Click on the design window; hold down the mouse
button and drag the shape pond you want.
3 Release the mouse button.
4 Click the Materials Toolbar, then click the arrow to the
right of the word Materials above the Preview Bar and
select Mulch.
5 Scroll to view the available materials, until you locate the
water textures.
6 Drag and drop the water texture onto the pond in the 3D
To draw curved edging
LiveView window.
1 On the Landscape Plan tab, click the Edging Tool.
Edging an Area
Punch! AS4000 makes it easy to place edging around flower
beds or along walkways. Once drawn, you can apply colors

136 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Drawing Fences and Gates

2 Click the Curved radio button on the Properties 2 Click Custom. The Custom Fence properties
bar. are displayed.
3 Click on the design window to define the start 3 For this example, type the following
point of the edging. A rubber-band line is displayed and measurements:
follows the pointer. Notice that dimensions are ■ Span Length - 72"
displayed, as you draw. ■ Span Height - 48"
4 Click and move the pointer to the next point. Repeat until ■ Post Width - 2"
you have completely drawn the edging. ■ Post Height - 48"
5 Right-click to end drawing mode. ■ Gate Height - 48"

Note: While drawing, the lines will appear angular, but will Note: Press ENTER after each entry.
curve after the second mouse click. Note: You can use other measurements to suit
your needs.
To straighten curved edging
4 Click on the design window to define the
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. start point of the fence. A rubber-band line is
2 Click the edging you want to straighten. displayed and follows the pointer. Notice
3 Click the Straight radio button on the Properties bar. that dimensions are displayed, as you draw.

To curve straight edging


1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Right-click the edging you want to curve.
3 Click the Curved radio button on the Properties bar.

To reshape edging
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click the edging you want to reshape.
3 Click a selection point of the edging; hold down the Start
mouse button and drag. Point
4 Click the next selection point; hold down the mouse
button and drag. 5 Click and move the pointer to the next point. Repeat until
you have completely drawn the fence.
Drawing Fences and Gates
With Punch! AS4000, you can draw fences and gates with
ease. Once a fence or gate is drawn, you can customize it by
applying any material. For more information on color and
material, see the chapter titled “Working with LiveView”,
which begins on page 157.
The following example will show you how to draw a typical
fence of chain link. The material is a custom fencing
material.

To add and customize a fence

1 On the Landscape Plan tab, click the Fence Tool.


The Properties bar displays available fence styles.
6 Right-click to end drawing mode.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 137


Chapter 19 Landscape Plan Tab

7 Click the Materials Tab. 11 Click the Colors Tab.


8 On the Materials Tab, click the arrow next to 12 At the top of the Preview Bar, click the down arrow next
“Materials”, then Custom & Brand Name Materials from to “Colors”, then click Gray Tones from the drop down
the menu. menu. The color palette is displayed on the Preview Bar.
13 Select a gray to simulate the steel posts and drag and drop
that color onto the posts in your LiveView window.

9 At the top of the Preview Bar, click the down arrow next
to “Materials”, then click Custom Fences, then select the
type of fence you want to use. Custom fence material
options appear in the Preview Bar.

To reshape a fence
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click the fence you want to reshape.
3 Click a selection point of the fence; hold down the mouse
button and drag.
4 Click the next selection point; hold down the mouse
button and drag.

To add a gate
10 Click Chain-Linked. Drag and drop the chain link
material onto your fence in the LiveView window. 1 On the Landscape Plan tab, click the Gate Tool.
The Properties bar displays available gate widths.
2 (optional) Type a new gate width in the text box on the
Properties bar.
3 On the Design window, click the fence where you want a
gate placed.

138 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Using Fence Designer Images

Note: The style of the gate will always conform to the Drawing Retaining Walls
fencing material; i.e., if a gate is placed on a privacy fence,
Punch! AS4000 makes it easy to add interest and
the gate will be a privacy fence gate.
functionality to your outdoor living areas by adding retaining
walls. Retaining walls can be used to create raised planting
To resize a gate
beds, to line an above-ground swimming pool and so on.
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click the gate you want to resize. To draw a retaining wall
3 Type a new width in the Gate Properties text 1 On the Landscape tab, click the Retaining Wall
box. Tool.
4 (optional) Click an endpoint of the gate; hold down the 2 Click on the design window; hold down the mouse button
mouse button and drag. and drag. Notice that the retaining wall follows the
pointer and automatically displays the length.
5 Release the mouse button. The gate is resized.
3 Release the mouse button when you reach the wall length
Using Fence Designer Images you want.
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3, drawing individual walls, until the
Once you’ve created your own custom fence or gate
retaining wall is complete.
materials in Fence Designer, see “Fence Designer”, which
begins on page 267, you can easily apply them back in your
Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 project.
After you’ve drawn a fence on the Landscaping tab, simply
navigate to the library where you stored the new image, and
drag the image to the fence in your LiveView window. Existing Exterior Wall

To apply Fence Designer images


1 Click the Materials Tab. The Preview Bar
will display materials available for
placement.
2 Click the black arrow on the Materials tab
and click Custom Material Library on the
pop-up menu that is displayed.

3 At the top of the Preview Bar, click the down arrow next
to “Materials”, then click Custom Fences, then select the
type of fence you want to use. Custom fence material
options appear in the Preview Bar. Note: Drawing is constrained to 15 degree angles; to release
4 Click the custom fence material you want to apply; hold this constraint, hold down the SHIFT key, while drawing.
down the mouse button and drag it onto the fence or Note: If you don’t see automatic dimensioning, while you
gate in the LiveView window. The custom fence draw, it may be turned off. To enable automatic
material you selected is applied. dimensioning, click to check Automatic Dimensioning, on
the Options menu.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 139


Chapter 19 Landscape Plan Tab

To change wall height


1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click a wall segment in your drawing, to select
it. The Wall Properties bar is displayed.
3 Type a new height in the Wall Style section of
the Wall Properties bar.
Note: Measurements are measured in inches, or in feet and
inches, separated by a hyphen.

Placing Sprinkler Heads


Punch! AS4000 will be useful to define where the sprinkler
heads of an outdoor water system should be placed. Note: By placing a series of sprinkler heads, with various
coverages, you will achieve a complete watering pattern.
To place a sprinkler head
1 On the Landscape tab, click the Sprinkler Tool. Excavating Topography
2 On the Design window, click to define the center From earth-contact homes to split front-to-back lots, you can
of the sprinkler area and drag. A rubber-band line is excavate the footprint of your floor plan with ease.
displayed and follows the pointer. Notice that dimensions
are displayed, as you draw, measuring the radius of the To excavate an area
sprinkler area. 1 On the Landscape tab, click the Excavate
Topography Tool.
2 Click on the design window to define the start point of
the area to be excavated. A rubber-band line is displayed
and follows the pointer. Notice that dimensions are
displayed, as you draw.
Note: Drawing is constrained to 15 degree angles; to release
this constraint, hold down the SHIFT key, while drawing.

3 Hold the mouse button down and drag, until the degree of 3 Click and move the pointer to the next cornerpoint.
coverage is reached. Repeat until you have completely drawn the area.
4 Release the mouse button. 4 Right-click to end drawing mode.
5 (optional) On the left side of the screen, drag the
Elevation Slider down to the level needed for your
excavation.
Note: Default elevation is -3' (negative three feet).

5 Click to set the swing of the sprinkler head.

140 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Chapter 20

Detail Plan Tab


Punch! AS4000 provides tools specifically for 2D drawing. Items drawn with these tools will not show up in the 3D
LiveView window, unless converted to 3D entities. These tools make it easy to label your plan, from description blocks
that are used to label what is being printed on each page to notations about square footage on each floor.
In addition, using the tools on the Detail Plan Tab, you will be able to easily convert imported DXF/DWG shapes to
various “smart entities” like walls, stairways, flooring, property lines and so on.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 141


Chapter 20 Detail Plan Tab

Drawing Rectangles and Squares Drawing Circles and Ovals


With Punch! AS4000, you can draw items that will appear You can draw circles and ovals, which can be converted to
only in the 2D design window. If you choose, these shapes curved walls, curved stairways, groundfill regions and so on.
can be converted to a variety of features, for instance walls,
stairways, pathways, edging and so on. To draw circles and ovals
Rectangles can be used as label boxes for your printed plans 1 On the Detail Plan tab, click the Circle Tool. The
or can be converted to walls or flooring. Using the Snap pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.
tools, you can easily create and place these shapes before
converting them into other features. For more information, 2 The Detail Object Properties bar is displayed,
see “Punch! Software Primer”, which begins on page 27. showing the customizable options for this tool.
3 (optional) Click the Method button to access a
To draw rectangles and squares different drawing style, then select an option
from the pop-up menu that is displayed.
1 On the Detail Plan tab, click the Rectangle Tool.
The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode. Note: The four predefined drawing methods are
draw oval from corner, draw oval from center,
2 The Detail Object Properties bar is displayed, draw circle from corner and draw circle from
showing the customizable options for this tool. center.
3 (optional) Click the Method button to access a
4 Click on the design window to define the start
different drawing style, then select an option
point of the shape. A rubber-band shape is
from the pop-up menu that is displayed.
displayed and follows the pointer. Dimensions
Note: The four predefined drawing methods are are displayed as you draw.
draw rectangle from corner, draw rectangle from 5 Hold the mouse button down as you extend the
center, draw square from corner and draw square shape to the size you want.
from center.
4 Click on the design window to define the start
point of the rectangle. A rubber-band rectangle
is displayed and follows the pointer.
Dimensions are displayed as you draw.
5 Hold the mouse button down as you extend the
rectangle to the size you want. 1
2

Drag

12
6 Release the mouse button.

Drawing Lines
You can draw lines that can in turn be converted to walls,
stairs, ducts, stiffener beams, edging, pathways and so on.
Dr
ag
To draw lines
6 Release the mouse button.
1 On the Detail Plan tab, click the Line Tool. The
pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.
142 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide
Drawing Polygons

2 The Detail Object Properties bar is displayed,


showing the customizable options for this tool.
2 12
3 (optional) Click the Method button to access a
different drawing style, then select an option
from the pop-up menu that is displayed.
Note: The two predefined drawing methods are
52 42
draw from endpoint and draw from centerpoint.
4 Click on the design window to define the start
point of the line. A rubber-band line is
displayed and follows the pointer. Dimensions 32 2
are displayed, as you draw.
5 Hold the mouse button down, as you extend 6 Right-click to end drawing mode.
the line to the length you want.
Drawing Arcs
With Punch! AS4000 you can draw arcs that can be easily
converted into curved walls, edging, stairs and so on.
12 Drag
To draw an arc
Drawing Polygons 1 On the Detail Plan tab, click the Arc Tool. The
You can draw open or closed polygons that can be easily pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.
converted into walls, roof sections, floors or floor cutouts, 2 The Detail Object Properties bar is displayed,
topography and so on. showing the customizable options for this tool.
3 (optional) Click the Method button to access a
To draw a polygon
different drawing style, then select an option
1 On the Detail Plan tab, click the Polygon Tool. from the pop-up menu that is displayed.
The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.
Note: The two predefined drawing methods are
2 The Detail Object Properties bar is displayed, free-form arc and 90 degree arc.
showing the customizable options for this tool.
4 Click on the design window to define the start
3 (optional) Click the Method button to access a
point of the arc. A rubber-band line is
different drawing style, then select an option
displayed and follows the pointer. Dimensions
from the pop-up menu that is displayed.
are displayed, as you draw.
Note: The two predefined drawing methods are 5 Hold the mouse button down, as you extend
closed polygon and open polygon. the arc to the size you want.
4 Click on the design window to define the start
point of the polygon. A rubber-band line is
displayed and follows the pointer. Dimensions
are displayed, as you draw. 12
5 Click and move the mouse to the next
cornerpoint. Repeat until you have drawn the
necessary shape.
Dr
ag

6 Release the mouse button.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 143


Chapter 20 Detail Plan Tab

Drawing Circular Arcs


With Punch! AS4000, you can draw arcs that can be easily
converted into curved walls, edging, stairs and so on.

To draw a circular arc 2


1 On the Detail Plan tab, click the Circular Arc
Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing
mode.
2 The Detail Object Properties bar is displayed,
showing the customizable options for this tool.
3 Press the mouse button on the design window
to define the centerpoint of the circular arc. A
rubber-band line is displayed and follows the
pointer. This line signifies the radius of your 7 Click to end drawing mode.
arc.
Drawing Multigons
You can draw equal-sided decks, floors, even treehouses with
the easy-to-use Multigon Tool and the Convert To feature.
For more information, see “Converting Details to Intelligent
Drag Features”, which begins on page 146.

To draw a multigon
1 On the Detail Plan tab, click the Multigon Tool.
1 The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.
2
2 The Detail Object Properties bar is displayed,
showing the customizable options for this tool.
3 On the Properties bar, type the number of equal
sides you want to draw.
4 Click on the design window to define the start
4 Hold the mouse button down and extend the radius to point of the multigon. A rubber-band multigon
the size you want. Dimensions appear in the position is displayed and follows the pointer.
readout bar, as you draw.
5 Hold the mouse button down, as you extend
5 Release the mouse button. the multigon to the size you want.
6 Move the mouse clockwise or counter-clockwise to
create the shape you want.

Drag

12

144 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Drawing Curves

6 Release the mouse button. To change the line style


Note: To change the multigon’s size, but constrain its 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
orientation, press CTRL while drawing. 2 Click a shape to select it.
3 On the Detail Plan tab, click the Rule
Drawing Curves Style icon. The Rule Style drop-down
You can draw intricate curved flowerbeds and walls, among box is displayed.
many other things, using the Curve Tool and the Convert To 4 Click a style on the drop-down box.
feature of Punch! AS4000. The style of the rule outlining the detail
shape is changed.
To draw a curve
To set the fill to transparent
1 On the Detail Plan tab, click the Curve Tool. The
pointer changes to reflect drawing mode. 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 The Detail Object Properties bar is displayed, 2 Click a shape to select it.
showing the customizable options for this tool.
3 On the Detail Plan tab, click the Transparent Fill
3 (optional) Click the Method button to access a icon. The shape is transparent.
different drawing style, then select an option
from the pop-up menu that is displayed.
Note: The two predefined drawing methods are
closed curve and open curve.
4 Click on the design window to define the start
point of the curve. A rubber-band curve is
displayed and follows the pointer.
5 Click and move the mouse to the next point.
Repeat until you have drawn the needed shape.
Note: Although the lines will initially appear to
be angular, they will become curved when you end To set the fill to white
drawing mode. 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
6 Double-click to end drawing mode. 2 Click a shape to select it.

Using Rules and Fills 3 On the Detail Plan tab, click the White Fill icon.
The shape is filled with white.
You can change the thickness (weight) of the lines or fills of
the shapes drawn with tools on the Details Plan tab.

To change the line weight


1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click a shape to select it.
3 On the Detail Plan tab, click the Rule Weight
icon. The Rule Weight drop-down box is
displayed.
4 Click a weight on the drop-down box. The
weight of the rule outlining the detail shape is To set the fill to solid
changed.
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
5 (optional) Click Other to define a custom
weight. 2 Click a shape to select it.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 145


Chapter 20 Detail Plan Tab

3 On the Detail Plan tab, click the Solid Fill icon. Converting Details to Intelligent Features
The shape is filled with a solid color.
With Punch! AS4000, you can draw items that will appear
only in the 2D design window or you can convert them to
intelligent features. For example, you can convert a line to a
fence, a rectangle to four exterior walls, a circle to a deck or
even a circular stairway, and so on. There is virtually no limit
to what you can draw using this combination. Following are a
few examples of what this powerful process can do!

To convert a rectangle to your property line


1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click a rectangle to select it.
To set the fill to a pattern 3 The Detail Object Properties bar is displayed,
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. showing the customizable options for this tool.
2 Click a shape to select it. 4 Click the Convert To button on the Properties
bar, then click Property Line on the pop-up
3 On the Detail Plan tab, click one of the Pattern Fill menu.
icons. The shape is filled with that pattern.

To control layering of detail shapes


1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click a shape to select it.
3 The Detail Object Properties bar is displayed,
showing the customizable options for this
shape.
5 The rectangle is converted to a property line.
4 Click the Bring to Front button on the Properties bar, to
place the selected shape on the top of the other shapes.
To convert an oval to a deck
5 (optional) Click the Send to Back button, on the
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
Properties bar, to place the selected shape behind the
other shapes. 2 Click an oval to select it.

146 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Editing Detail Shapes

3 The Detail Object Properties bar is displayed, 7 The Plant Fill dialog box is displayed.
showing the customizable options for this tool.
4 Click the Convert To button on the Properties
bar, then click Deck without Railing on the
pop-up menu.

8 Click the checkbox next to the option you want to use.


9 Type the plant spacing in the text box, then click OK.

Editing Detail Shapes


Object-Level Editing is active by default. Object-Level
Editing, along with Point-Level Editing, controls how your
5 The oval is converted to a deck. edits impact your object. If you are in object selection mode,
changes affect the object as a whole. If you are working in
point selection mode, each edge of the object is treated
separately, as you edit. To fine-tune your design further, use
the Insert Point or Delete Point tools. These tools are
available anytime, but are especially useful when editing
shapes.

To use object selection mode


1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click a Detail shape to select it. The Properties bar for
this shape is displayed.
3 On the Properties bar, click Object in the Edit
Level section.
Filling a shape with plants
4 Click the object and drag it into the new
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. position or shape.
2 Click the Plants Tab. The Preview Bar will display plants
available for placement.
3 At the top of the Preview Bar, click the down arrow next
to “Plants” to display the plant category menu, then
click to check the type of plants you want to place.
4 Use the scroll bar to view the remainder of the plant
selections in the Preview Bar.
5 On the Preview Bar, click the plant you want to place.
6 Right-click a shape, then click Plant Fill on the pop-up
menu that is displayed. 5 Release the mouse to end.

To use point selection mode


1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click a Detail shape to select it. The Properties bar for
this shape is displayed.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 147


Chapter 20 Detail Plan Tab

3 On the Properties bar, click Point in the Edit Level 4 Type the amount of Curve Tension that you want. The
section. Curve Tension you specified is applied.
4 Click a point on the object and drag it into the new Examples:
position to reshape it.
Unsmooth (0):

Curve Tension set at 3:

5 Release the mouse to end.

To insert a point
1 On the Snaps toolbar, click the Insert Point Tool.
2 Click a shape where you want to add a point. A point is
added at each click. Curve Tension set at 6:
To delete a point
1 On the Snaps toolbar, click the Delete Point Tool.
2 Click the point you want deleted.

Adding Smoothing Tension


To further control the look of the shapes drawn with any tool
on the Detail Plan tab, you have control over the degree of Curve Tension set at 10:
smoothing tension applied to them. Clicking Straighten on
the Properties bar will easily create angular shapes; while
clicking Adjust allows you to specify precise smoothing
tension. Specifying 0 in the dialog box results in no tension
being applied, while specifying 10 will cause an exaggerated
curve.

To change smoothing tension


1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click a Detail shape to select it. The Properties bar for
this shape is displayed.
3 On the Properties bar, click Adjust in the
Curve section. The Smooth dialog box is
displayed.

148 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Part 5

Customizing Your
Drawing

Chapter 21: Editing Your Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151


Chapter 22: Working with LiveView . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Chapter 23: Personalizing Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Chapter 24: Material Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Chapter 21

Editing Your Drawing


In addition to standard Windows commands like cut, copy, paste and delete, Punch! AS4000 includes more sophisticated
modes of manipulating your design. You can copy or move objects, walls and so on, to different floors as well as between
plan layers.
You can flip your entire design either vertically or horizontally to make it easy to view it from any angle or from any
direction. In addition, you can move or rotate your entire floor plan at one time.
More advanced concepts are also covered in this chapter, such as rotating individual objects to custom fit them into your
design and elevating objects using the Elevation Slider to achieve perfect placement. Learn to customize settings like
nudge factor, so Punch! AS4000 works best for you.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 151


Chapter 21 Editing Your Drawing

Editing Using Cut, Copy, Paste and Clear


Cut moves the selection to the Clipboard and deletes the
original. Copy places a duplicate of the selection on the
Clipboard. Paste places the contents of the Clipboard into
your drawing. You can place the Clipboard contents as many
times as necessary. Clear removes the selection.
2 Click the Deactivate Undo (Faster) box, then click OK.
To edit using the cut command
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. To set undo parameters
2 Click the selection you want to cut. 1 On the Edit menu, click Undo Preferences, the Undo
3 On the Edit menu, click Cut or press CTRL+X on the Preferences dialog box is displayed.
keyboard. The selection is removed to the Clipboard. 2 Type the number of undo levels you want to use; click
OK.
To edit using the copy command
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. To use redo
2 Click the selection you want to copy. ■ On the Edit menu, click Redo or press CTRL+Y. The
3 On the Edit menu, click Copy or press CTRL+C on the previous action is reversed.
keyboard. The selection is copied to the Clipboard.
Copying Objects to Different Floors
To edit using the paste command There may be times when you want multiple floors to contain
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. duplicates. Copy to Floor leaves the object in its original
position and places a duplicate where you define.
2 On the Edit menu, click Paste or press CTRL+V on the
keyboard. The selection is copied from the Clipboard to
To copy from one floor to another
the design window.
1 On the Standard
To edit using the clear command toolbar, click the
Selection Tool.
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click the object or
2 Click the selection you want to cut.
objects you want
3 On the Edit menu, click Clear or press DELETE on the duplicated.
keyboard. The selection is removed from your design.
3 On the Edit menu,
click Copy to Floor,
Using Undo Upper Floor. Select
With Punch! AS4000, you can specify up to 50 levels of Lower Floor if you
Undo, making it easy to recover your work. Bear in mind, the want to copy the
more levels of undo you specify, the more system resources original down one
will be used. To conserve system resources, set the undo level.
level at the lowest level possible.
Moving Objects to Different Floors
To use undo
With Punch! AS4000, you can move selections between plan
■ On the Edit menu, click Undo or press CTRL+Z. The layers; Move to Floor deletes these objects from their
previous action is reversed. original position.

To turn off undo To move objects or features from one floor to


1 On the Edit menu, click Undo Preferences, the Undo another
Preferences dialog box is displayed. 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

152 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Moving Features to Different Plans

2 Click the object or


objects you want
moved. To select
more than one object,
press the SHIFT key
while clicking objects. 2 Click either Cartesian or Polar, then type amount you
3 On the Edit menu, want the plan moved in the appropriate text boxes.
click Move to Floor, 3 Click OK. The plan is moved, based on the coordinates
Upper Floor. Select you specified.
Lower Floor if you
Note: Coordinates are measured in inches or they can be
want to move the
original down one measured in feet and inches, separated by a hyphen.
level.
Rotating the Entire Floor Plan
Moving Features to Different Plans At any point during the design process, you can rotate the
With Punch! AS4000, you can move selections to different entire plan. With just a couple of mouse clicks, you can see
how your dream home will look facing a different direction
plan layers; Move to Floor deletes these objects from their
original position. This will be useful if you want to move a on your lot.
feature between two stories that you have drawn.
To rotate the entire floor plan
To move features from one plan to another 1 On the Design menu, click Rotate Entire Plan. The
1 On the Standard Rotate Entire Plan dialog box is displayed.
toolbar, click the
Selection Tool.
2 Click the feature or
object you want
moved. To select more 2 Click either Degrees or Radians, then type the angle you
than one object, press want to rotate the plan in the Angle text box.
the SHIFT key, while
clicking objects. 3 Click OK. The plan is rotated, based on the angle
measurement you specified.
3 On the Edit menu,
click Move to Plan,
Flipping the Entire Floor Plan
then specify the plan
where you want the With Punch! AS4000 you can create a mirror image of your
feature to appear. floor plan. It is easy to see how your plan will look from
various angles and directions.
4 (optional) Right-click the selection and click Move to
Plan on the pop-up menu that is displayed, then click
To flip the floor plan vertically
which plan. The selection is moved to a different plan.
■ On the Design menu, click Flip Entire Plan, then select
Moving the Entire Floor Plan Vertical. The floor plan is flipped.

At any point during the design process, you can move the To flip the floor plan horizontally
entire plan. With just a couple of mouse clicks, you can see
how your dream home will look on different parts of your lot. ■ On the Design menu, click Flip Entire Plan, then select
Horizontal. The floor plan is flipped.
To move the entire floor plan
Using Nudge
1 On the Design menu, click Move Entire Plan. The Move
Entire Plan dialog box is displayed. Once you’ve placed an object or feature, you can precisely
move it into position using Nudge. Nudge utilizes the arrow

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 153


Chapter 21 Editing Your Drawing

keys to move selected objects or features a specified distance. 2 Click the object, wall or feature you want to rotate.
Nudge works in tandem with the Snap Grid. To learn more 3 On the Standard toolbar, click the Rotate Tool.
about the Snap Grid, refer to “Using the Grid” on page 16.
4 Click the object; hold down the mouse button and
To adjust Nudge settings move the pointer in the direction that you want the object
to rotate. Degree of rotation will appear in the status bar
1 On the Options menu, confirm there is a check next to as you draw. Press SHIFT to release the 45 degree
Snap to Grid. This confirms that the Snap Grid is constraint.
activated.
5 Release the mouse button.
2 On the Options menu, click Grid Properties or press
CTRL+G. The Grid Properties dialog box is displayed. Note: The item rotates around its centerpoint.

To rotate by specifying an amount


1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click the object, wall or feature you want to rotate.
3 Right-click the selection and click Rotate on the pop-up
menu that is displayed.

3 Enter, in inches, the Snap Grid distance you want to set.


Click OK. 4 Type, in degrees or radians, the amount you want to
4 On the Edit menu, click Nudge, then click the direction rotate the object and click OK. The object is rotated.
(up, down, left, right) or use the arrow keys on your
keyboard. Customizing Floorplan Colors
Note: When the “Snap to Grid” is turned off, Nudge moves Punch! AS4000 gives you the option of assigning custom
the object or feature one pixel at a time instead of snapping colors to areas of your design. All floorplan colors can be
to grid distance. changed by accessing the Options Menu.

To move a selection using the Nudge feature To assign a working floor color
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 1 On the Options menu, click Screen Colors, then click
Working Floor Color. The Color matrix will appear.
2 Click the object or feature to select it.
3 On the Edit menu, click Nudge, then click the direction
(up, down, left, right).
4 (optional) Use the arrow keys on your keyboard to nudge
the object or feature.

Rotating a Selection
Using the rotate feature, you can easily spin an object
around any point. This is useful when you want to face an
object in a different direction from which it was drawn.
Using the Rotate tool you can freely rotate the selection or
you can specify the exact amount of rotation using the
Rotate dialog box.
2 Click a color from the Basic Color list. Click OK.
To freely rotate an object
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
154 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide
Elevating Objects

Note: The Color|Solid preview box will display the chosen 6 (optional) Type Hue, Saturation and Luminosity
color. variables. Click OK.
3 (optional) Click a color from the Custom Colors list. 7 (optional) Type Red, Green and Blue variables. Click
Click OK. OK.
4 (optional) Move the arrow to the right of the colorbar at
To reset all colors
the right of the Color dialog box. Click OK.
■ On the Options menu, click Screen Colors, then click
5 (optional) On the Color Spectrum box, click a color or
Reset Colors. All colors will be reset to the default
click-and-drag the color marker. Click OK.
values.
6 (optional) Type Hue, Saturation and Luminosity
variables. Click OK. Elevating Objects
7 (optional) Type Red, Green and Blue variables. Click The elevate object command will be extremely useful. From
OK. “lifting” lamps onto tables to elevating planters and benches
onto your deck, exact placement is easy.
To assign an inactive floor color
1 On the Options menu, click Screen Colors, then click To elevate an object
Inactive Floor Color. The Color matrix will appear. 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click a color from the Basic Color list. Click OK. 2 Click the object, wall or feature you want to elevate.
Note: The Color|Solid preview box will display the chosen 3 On the Edit menu, click Set Elevation. The Set Elevation
color. dialog box is displayed.
3 (optional) Click a color from the Custom Colors list.
Click OK.
4 (optional) Move the arrow to the right of the colorbar at
the right of the Color dialog box. Click OK.
5 (optional) On the Color Spectrum box, click a color or 4 Type the amount you want to elevate the object and click
click-and-drag the color marker. Click OK. OK. The object is elevated.
6 (optional) Type Hue, Saturation and Luminosity
Note: To specifying an amount in inches you may use either
variables. Click OK.
18 or 18". To specify an amount in feet and inches they must
7 (optional) Type Red, Green and Blue variables. Click be separated by a hyphen, for instance 18-0, 8'-6" and so on.
OK. A single number like 20, 20" or even 20', will be understood
as 20 inches.
To assign a background color
5 (optional) The Float Above Topography switch causes
1 On the Options menu, click Screen Colors, then click objects to follow the lay of the land.
Background Color. The Color matrix will appear.
2 Click a color from the Basic Color list. Click OK.
Note: The Color|Solid preview box will display the chosen
color.
3 (optional) Click a color from the Custom Colors list.
Click OK.
4 (optional) Move the arrow to the right of the colorbar at
the right of the Color dialog box. Click OK.
5 (optional) On the Color Spectrum box, click a color or
click-and-drag the color marker. Click OK.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 155


Chapter 21 Editing Your Drawing

Using Elevation Slider 4 Type the elevation in inches or feet and inches, separated
with a hyphen. Click OK.
With the Elevation Slider, you can easily move selected
items vertically. This feature makes it a snap to make sure Note: All selected objects will be reset to the elevation
windows, doors, plants and so on, are in exactly the position specified, even if the objects were originally located at
you want. various elevations.

To use the elevation slider To make features follow custom topography


1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the
2 Click the object, wall or feature you want to Selection Tool.
elevate. 2 Click the feature(s) you want to
3 Click the Elevation Slider at the left side of your follow the custom topography.
window and move the elevation control up or 3 Right-click the Elevation Slider at the left side of your
down until the object is in the correct position. window and click Float Above Topography from the
4 Release the mouse. The elevation of the object is pop-up menu that is displayed.
changed. 4 (optional) Right-click the Elevation Slider at the left
side of your window and click Set Elevation from the
To set the working elevation pop-up menu that is displayed.
1 Right-click the Elevation Slider at the left side of your
window and click Set Working Elevation from the pop-
up menu that is displayed.

5 Check the box which specifies Float Above Topography.


Click OK.

2 In the Set Working Elevation dialog box, type the


necessary elevation in inches, or feet and inches,
separated with a hyphen. Click OK.
3 (optional) Right-click, while nothing is selected, and
click Set Working Elevation from the pop-up menu that
is displayed.

To set the elevation of a group of objects


1 On the Standard toolbar, click the
Selection Tool.
2 Press SHIFT and click each object
you want to elevate.
3 Right-click the Elevation Slider at
the left side of your window and
click Set Elevation from the pop-up
menu that is displayed.

156 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Chapter 22

Working with LiveView


Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 lets you view your home in photo-realistic 3D. You can select exterior and
interior wall color, add realistic roof materials and select from a variety of wood textures to make your home design
completely unique. In the LiveView Window, you can view your design from a variety of angles.
Using the Designer Palettes, you can easily make changes to your decorating theme. This makes it easy to experiment with
a variety of color schemes, both inside and outside your home, before picking up a paintbrush!
With the powerful ClearView feature, you can literally see through the walls and view electrical, plumbing and so on.

Walk-Through Rendering Show/Hide


and Fly-Around Style Selector Lighting Feature Control

Designer
Palette
Controlled Render Shadows Access
Walk-Through Final View
and Fly-Around

Designer
3D Cutaway Palette
Slider

Camera Translucency
Angle Slider
Select
Material/Paint

Viewing Viewpoint Save 3D Selection


Speed Directions LiveView
Views
PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 157
Chapter 22 Working with LiveView

Opening a LiveView Window To display a 3D view only


There are three pre-set LiveView window sizes, but you are ■ On the Window menu, click 3D Full View or click
not limited to those three views. The LiveView window can the 3D Full View icon or right-click, while nothing
be repositioned and resized to fit your requirements. All is selected, and click 3D Full View from the pop-up
LiveView window pre-set sizes are accessible from the right- menu that is displayed.
click plan options menu.

To display the 2D plan view and a small 3D view

■ On the Window menu, click 3D Quarter View or


click the 3D Quarter View icon or right-click while
nothing is selected and click 3D Quarter View from the
pop-up menu that is displayed.

Moving around in 3D
Punch! AS4000 provides two interactive 3D viewing options,
the 3D Walk-Through and Fly-Around views. Using
interactive viewing, you can vary the viewing level by
adjusting the altitude and height. Viewing speed and camera
angle can also be adjusted to provide the best viewing
capabilities available.
To display a split 2D and 3D view
To view your home using Walk-Through
■ On the Window menu, click Split Plan/3D View or
click the Split Plan/3D View icon or right-click, 1 Open a LiveView window, as explained previously.
while nothing is selected, and click Split Plan/3D View
from the pop-up menu that is displayed. 2 On the View menu, click 3D Viewing Method,
Walk-Through or click the Walk-Through button
on the LiveView window.
3 Position the mouse pointer in the LiveView window,
then click and drag up to move inward.
4 Position the mouse pointer in the LiveView window,
then click and drag down to move outward.

To view your home using Controlled Walk-Through


1 Open a LiveView window, as explained previously.
2 Click the Controlled Walk-Through button on the
LiveView window.
3 To look left, position the mouse pointer in the LiveView
window, then click and drag left.
4 To look right, position the mouse pointer in the
LiveView window, then click and drag right.

158 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Accessing the Rendering Styles

5 To look up, position the mouse pointer in the LiveView 2 On the design window, click the center of
window, then click and drag away from you. reference icon and drag it to a new position.
6 To look down, position the mouse pointer in the Note: The placement of the icon will be the point that the
LiveView window, then click and drag toward you. helicopter revolves around.

To change Walk-Through elevation with the mouse To specify an absolute Fly-Around altitude
■ Press and hold the right mouse button down to raise and 1 Open a LiveView window, as explained previously.
lower the viewpoint, alternately.
2 On the View menu, click 3D Viewing Method, Fly-
Around Altitude. The Fly-Around Altitude dialog box is
To specify an absolute Walk-Through elevation
displayed.
1 Open a LiveView window, as explained previously.
3 Type a new elevation measurement, then click OK.
2 On the View menu, click 3D Viewing Method, Walk-
Through Elevation. The Walk-Through Elevation dialog
box is displayed.
3 Type a new elevation measurement in inches, then click
OK.
To adjust the 3D camera angle
1 Open a LiveView window, as explained previously.

2 At the bottom of the LiveView window,


click the right camera angle arrow to widen
To view your home using Fly-Around the view.
1 Open a LiveView window, as explained previously. 3 At the bottom of the LiveView window, click the left
camera angle arrow to narrow the view.
2 On the View menu, click 3D Viewing Method,
Fly-Around or click the Fly-Around button on the To increase or decrease the Fly-Around and Walk-
LiveView window. Through speed
3 Move the Fly-Around pointer around inside the 1 Open a LiveView window, as explained previously.
LiveView window and watch the view move
dynamically. 2 At the bottom of the LiveView window, click
the right speed arrow to speed up the viewing
To view your home using Controlled Fly-Around method.

1 Open a LiveView window, as explained previously. 3 At the bottom of the LiveView window, click the left
arrow to slow down the viewing method.
2 Click the Controlled Fly-Around button on the
LiveView window. Note: The faster the viewing speed, the lower the quality of
the rendered 3D image.
3 Click and hold the mouse button down, then move the
Fly-Around pointer around inside the LiveView window
and watch the view move dynamically. Accessing the Rendering Styles
With Punch! AS4000’s four rendering options you can view
To change Fly-Around altitude with the mouse your three dimensional floorplan in variety of ways. With
■ Press and hold the right mouse button down to change the ClearView you may see potential conflicts hidden by walls,
viewpoint. for example, between utilities and so on.

To specify a center of reference in Fly-Around To render using wireframe mode


mode
1 On the Window menu, click 3D Full View or click
1 Open a LiveView window, as explained previously. the 3D Full View icon.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 159


Chapter 22 Working with LiveView

2 On LiveView, click the Render Style


button, then click Render Wire Frame
from the pop-up menu.
Note: While in Wire Frame mode, your
design will be displayed on a black
background. Each feature of your floor plan
will be rendered in the color of the plan tab
where it is drawn. For example, walls will be displayed in the
Note: The Translucency Slider will only appear while
color you have defined for the Floorplan Tab.
working in ClearView.
To render using shaded wireframe mode
To render view with materials
1 On the Window menu, click 3D Full View or click 1 On the Window menu, click 3D Full
the 3D Full View icon. View or click the 3D Full View icon.
2 On LiveView, click the Render Style 2 On LiveView, click the Render Style
button, then click Render Shaded Wire button, then click Render Materials from
Frame from the pop-up menu. the pop-up menu.
Note: While in Shaded Wire Frame mode,
your design will be displayed on a black Adjusting Rendering Quality
background. Each feature of your floor plan Punch! AS4000 technology includes anti-aliased, photo-
will be rendered in the color of the material realism. With this technology you can view your plan with
you have applied to it. incredible detail, whether you are in ClearView, viewing
materials, viewing framing and so on.
To view a room using ClearView
1 On the Window menu, click 3D Full View or click the To render a plan in 3D final quality
3D Full View icon. 1 Open a LiveView window, as explained previously.
2 On LiveView, click the Render Style 2 On the View menu, click Render 3D Final
button, then click Render ClearView Quality or click the 3D Final Quality button on
from the pop-up menu. the LiveView window.

To set 3D render quality


■ On the View menu, click 3D Final Quality, Low. This
results in a fast rendering speed, but lower quality output.
■ On the View menu, click 3D Final Quality, High. This
results in a moderate rendering speed and average quality
output.
■ On the View menu, click 3D Final Quality, Ultra High.
This results in a slower rendering speed and a high
To control the opacity of a ClearView rendering quality output.
■ On the View menu, click 3D Final Quality, Excellent.
1 On the View menu, click Render ClearView or This results in a very slow rendering speed, but a very
click the ClearView Tool.
high quality, sharp output.
2 Click the left arrow on the Translucency
Slider. Your floorplan will appear more Note: You can stop the rendering process at any time by
translucent. pressing the ESC key.

3 Click the right arrow on the Translucency Slider. Your


floorplan is displayed more solidly.
160 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide
Setting Rendering Options

Setting Rendering Options


With Punch! AS4000 you can customize the render quality of
many of the customized features you use. By setting these
features to a lower render quality, you can speed up the
rendering time.

To set the render options


1 Open a LiveView window, as explained previously.
2 On the View menu, click Render Options. The Render
Options dialog box is displayed.

3 Click the direction from which you want the light to


originate in the Direction section of the 3D Lighting
dialog box.
4 Increase or decrease the light intensity by clicking and
dragging the intensity slider.
5 Increase or decrease the overall brightness by clicking
and dragging the brightness slider.
6 Click OK.

3 Click and drag the slider to set the rendering quality for To render shadows to a 3D view
each feature you want to change.
1 Open a LiveView window, as explained previously.
4 Click OK.
2 On the View menu, click 3D Shadows or click the
Note: The lower the render quality is set, the faster 3D Shadows button on the LiveView window.
LiveView will render your design.
Note: Shadows will also render when the Render Final
Quality selection is clicked.
Adding Lighting and Shadows
With Punch! AS4000 you can customize the lighting and To control shadow quality
shadows. You can virtually see how that big oak tree casts ■ On the View menu, click Shadow Quality and click
shadows into your living room window. either High (slow) or Low (fast).

To adjust the lighting intensity in a 3D View


1 Open a LiveView window, as explained earlier.
2 On the View menu, click 3D Lighting or click the
3D Lighting button on the LiveView window. The
3D Lighting dialog box is displayed.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 161


Chapter 22 Working with LiveView

Using Designer Palettes To create a group


Punch! Designer Palettes allow you to 1 Select the materials and colors you want to bring to the
construct lists of commonly-used colors and palette. Click and drag the color or material onto a blank
materials so they can be easily used palette tile.
throughout your home design. Each palette 2 Once you have all the materials and colors you want,
is divided into as many as 15 groups, click the Group 1 label, then click Rename Section on
allowing you to assign each group to a room the drop-down menu.The Palette Section Name dialog
or other segment of your design. box is displayed.
You simply load the Designer Palette with
the colors and materials you want to apply
to your 3D view, then save the palette for
use in later sessions. Designer Palettes can
even be exported and imported for use in
different drawings.
3 Type a name for the group in the Palette Section Name
text box and click OK. The name you entered is
displayed in the group label.

To collapse a group
■ Click the group label and select Collapse Section.

To build a palette OR
1 Click the Show/Hide Palettes button in the ■ Click the minus box on the group label. The group
LiveView window. The default palette is displayed. collapses displaying only its assigned name.
2 If the Colors and Materials tabs are not visible, position
the LiveView window so you can access these tabs. To expand a group

3 Click and drag a color or material from Punch! Interiors ■ Click the group label and select Expand Section.
and place it on a blank palette tile. OR

Applying colors and materials from palette ■ Click the plus box on the group label. The group
expands, displaying your entries.
■ Click and drag the color or material you want from the
palette tile to the area of your design. Your selection is
To expand all groups
displayed in LiveView.
■ Click the group label and select Expand All. All of your
Note: To apply the same color or material to multiple groups expand, displaying your entries.
surfaces in LiveView, be sure AutoClick Placement is
checked in the palette drop-down menu. To collapse all groups

To clear a palette entry ■ Click the group label and select Collapse All. All of your
groups collapse, displaying only their assigned names.
1 Right click the entry you want to delete and click Clear
Palette Entry. Managing LiveView Palettes
2 Click Yes at the prompt to remove the entry.
Your LiveView palettes are saved separately from the rest of
your design. That means you can use the same palette in
Managing Groups different drawings, different sessions, or even share palettes
You can organize the colors and materials of each room by with colleagues.
assigning groups. Palette Designer provides you with 15
blank group labels.

162 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Customizing LiveView

To save a custom palette 2 (optional) To move a palette up the list in priority, click
1 Click the palette drop-down menu and click Save Palette the palette name and click the upward arrow on the left-
As. The Palette Name dialog box is displayed. hand side of the window.
3 (optional) To move a palette down the list in priority,
click the palette name and click the downward arrow on
the left-hand side of the window.
4 (optional) To rename a palette, select the name of the
palette you want to change and click the Rename Palette
button at the bottom of the window and the Palette Name
dialog box is displayed.
2 Specify your palette by typing a name in the Palette 5 (optional) Type the name you want in the Palette Name
Name text box and click OK. Your palette is saved and text box and click OK. The palette appears under its new
the name of your palette is displayed.. name.
To import a custom palette 6 (optional) To delete a palette, select the name of the
palette you want to delete and click the Delete Palette
1 Click the palette drop-down menu bar and click Import button. Click Yes to delete that palette completely.
Palette. The Open dialog box is displayed.
7 Click Close.
2 Click the palette you want to import and click Open. The
Palette Name dialog box is displayed.
Customizing LiveView
3 Type a new Palette Name if you want to, then click OK.
The palette is displayed. There may be times when you will need to see your
design without specific features, objects and so on.
To export a palette With Punch! AS4000 you have complete control over what
1 Click the palette drop-down menu bar and select Export parts of your design are visible. Clicking the Show/Hide
Palette. The Save As box is displayed. Components Tool activates a pop-up toolbar where you can
access the individual controls.
2 To a different drive or folder, click a different drive and
folder, or type the complete path in the File Name text These controls operate simply, if there is a red “X” through
box. Click Save. the icon, that feature is hidden; if there is not an “X”, that
feature is visible.
To organize palettes
To hide/view doors in 3D
1 Click the palette menu and select Organize Palettes. The
Palettes dialog box is displayed with the names of each 1 Open a LiveView window, as explained previously.
of your palettes. 2 On the LiveView menu, click the Show/Hide
Components Tool, then click the Show/Hide
3D Doors icon on the pop-up toolbar.

To hide/view objects in 3D
1 Open a LiveView window, as explained previously.
2 On the LiveView menu, click the Show/
Hide Components Tool, then click the
Show/Hide 3D Objects icon on the pop-up
toolbar.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 163


Chapter 22 Working with LiveView

2 On the LiveView menu, click the Show/Hide


Components Tool, then click the Show/Hide
3D Plumbing icon on the pop-up toolbar.

Saving 3D LiveView Views


You can save pre-set LiveView views that can be easily
accessed at any time.

To hide/view roofs in 3D To save a LiveView view


1 Open a LiveView window, as explained previously. 1 Using the tools described earlier in this chapter, set the
2 On the LiveView menu, click the Show/Hide LiveView window from the direction and angle that you
Components Tool, then click the Show/Hide want to save.
3D Roofs icon on the pop-up toolbar. 2 On the LiveView Window, click
the LiveView View icon, then
To hide/view materials in 3D click Save 3D View on the pop-
1 Open a LiveView window, as explained previously. up menu. The View Name dialog
box is displayed.
2 On the LiveView menu, click the Show/Hide
Components Tool, then click the Show/Hide
3D Materials icon on the pop-up toolbar.

To hide/view topography in 3D
1 Open a LiveView window, as explained previously.
2 On the LiveView menu, click the Show/Hide
Components Tool, then click the Show/Hide 3 Type the name in the dialog box. Click OK.
3D Topography icon on the pop-up toolbar.
To access a saved view
Note: To hide the topography lines on the 2D design
window, on the Options menu, click to uncheck Show ■ On the LiveView Window,
Topography Lines. click the LiveView View
icon, then click the view on
To suppress background animation in 3D the pop-up menu. The
LiveView window will
1 Open a LiveView window, as explained previously.
display the selected view.
2 On the LiveView menu, click the Show/Hide
Components Tool, then click the Animate 3D To update a saved view
Background icon on the pop-up toolbar.
■ Reposition the view. On the LiveView Window, click the
Note: When background animation (cloud movement) is LiveView View icon, then click Update: on the pop-up
suppressed, no resources will be used to move the clouds in menu.
the sky.
To organize the LiveView views
To hide/view electrical in 3D 1 On the LiveView Window, click the LiveView View
1 Open a LiveView window, as explained previously. icon, then click Organize Views on the pop-up menu.
2 On the LiveView menu, click the Show/Hide The 3D Views organizer is displayed.
Components Tool, then click the Show/Hide
3D Electrical icon on the pop-up toolbar.

To hide/view plumbing in 3D
1 Open a LiveView window, as explained previously.
164 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide
Using the 3D Cutaway Slider

To view a room using the 3D Cutaway Slider


1 On the Window menu, click 3D Full View or click
the 3D Full View icon.
2 (optional) Click one of the direction buttons to
select from which direction to cut away.
3 On the LiveView window, click and drag the 3D
Cutaway Slider up and down to see a cutaway
view of your design.

2 Click to select a view, then click the arrows on the left to


reorder the list.
3 (optional) Click to select a view, then click Rename
View. The View Name dialog box is displayed. Type the
name in the dialog box. Click OK.
4 (optional) Click to select a view, then click Delete View.
Confirm that you want the view deleted, then click OK.
5 Click Close once you have organized the views to your
satisfaction.

Using the 3D Cutaway Slider


With Punch! AS4000’s 3D Cutaway Slider you peel away
layers of your floor plan with ease. You can slice away layer
after layer of your design from any of the four sides or from
the top, making it easy to see room arrangements, furniture
placement and so on.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 165


Chapter 22 Working with LiveView

Setting the Viewpoint Angle Selecting Features in 3D


Punch! AS4000 has four pre-set viewpoint angles and from With Punch! AS4000’s 3D Selection Tool, you can click
those angles, moving to the needed viewpoint is easy. features on the LiveView window and have them be selected
on your 2D plan. This makes fine-tuning your design much
To set a viewpoint angle easier. For example, you can easily select windows that may
be stacked on top of each other in the 2D design view.
1 On the Window menu, click 3D Full View or click
the 3D Full View icon. To use the 3D selection tool
2 In the LiveView window, click one of the 1 Click the 3D Selection Tool.
Viewpoint Direction buttons. 2 On the LiveView window, click a feature to select
it. That feature is activated on the design window and its
properties are displayed on the Properties Toolbar.

Note: By clicking the other three Viewpoint Direction


buttons, you will view your floorplan from the other edges of
your lot.
Note: You can select features on the active floor only. If
the feature you click does not become active, make sure it is
on the active floor.

166 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Identifying Colors and Materials

Identifying Colors and Materials


As you experiment with different colors and materials during
the design process, you may want to identify a previously-
used material. This is easy with Punch! AS4000’s Select
Material/Paint Tool.

To use the select material/paint tool


1 Click the Select Material/Paint Tool.
2 On the LiveView window, click the color or
material that you want to identify. That color or material
will be displayed in the Preview Bar.

Note: The material being identified in this example is on the


pillow on the sofa.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 167


Chapter 22 Working with LiveView

168 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Chapter 23

Personalizing Your Design


Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 lets you view your home in photo-realistic 3D. You can select exterior and
interior wall color, add realistic roof materials and select from a variety of woods to make your home design completely
unique. View all your customizations in the LiveView Window.
By adding color, trim and materials, you can make decorative changes to your home design as quickly as you think of
them. This makes it easy to experiment with a variety of colors, both inside and outside your home, before picking up a
paintbrush!
You can even furnish your dream home from Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000’s library of objects!

PowerTools to enhance your design


■ “Material Workshop” on page 183
■ “Door Designer” on page 197
■ “Window Designer” on page 203
■ “Cabinet Wizard” on page 209
■ “Trim Designer” on page 229
■ “3D Custom Workshop” on page 341

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 169


Chapter 23 Personalizing Your Design

Objects Preview Bar 3 When you see the name of the file you want to open,
click to select it.
Punch! AS4000 lets you add details to any room using a
variety of objects, included in the library are 3D Objects, 2D 4 Click OK. The object will be imported and placed in the
Symbols and Accessories. The Objects Preview Bar is center of the design.
accessible at any time and objects can be placed on any plan 5 (optional) Click the Selection tool, then click the object
tab. you just placed to drag it to another location on your
The Accessories category is very large and includes drapes, design window.
blinds, curtains, shutters and so on. An Accessory can only
be placed on a wall segment. To add 2D symbols
1 Click the Objects Tab.
In addition, you can create your own filing system for the
objects you create with 3D Custom Workshop or rearrange 2 On the Objects Tab, click the arrow
the objects to suit your needs. next to “Objects”, then select 2D
Symbol Library from the menu.
It is important to keep in mind that the objects only appear in
3D when you are viewing in 3D mode. In the plan drawing,
objects appear as 2D symbols.
3 At the top of the Preview Bar, click
To add 3D objects using drag-and-drop the down arrow next to “Symbols”,
1 Click the Object Tab. The Preview Bar then select exactly what type of
displays design objects. Symbol you want to use. 2D
Symbol options appear in the
2 (optional) On the Objects Tab, click the Preview Bar.
arrow next to “Objects”, then select the
needed object library from the menu. 4 Click the symbol you want to place; hold down the
mouse button and drag the symbol onto your design
window.
5 (optional) Click the Selection tool, then click the symbol
you just placed to drag it to another location on your
design window.
Tip: To further personalize your design, you can create
custom 2D Symbols. For more information, see “Symbol
3 (optional) Click the arrow next to “Objects” at the top of Editor”, which begins on page 301.
the Preview Bar to display the object library list, then
click another object library. To add accessories

4 Scroll to view the available objects. 1 Click the Objects Tab.

5 Click the object you want to place; hold down the mouse 2 On the Objects Tab, click the arrow
button and drag the object onto your design window. next to “Objects”, then select
Accessories Library from the menu.
6 (optional) Click the Selection tool, then click the object
you just placed to drag it to another location on your
design window.
3 At the top of the
To add 3D objects using import Preview Bar, click
1 On the File menu, click Import, then Punch! Custom the down arrow
Workshop Object. next to
“Accessory”, then
2 In the File Name box, type the name of the file you want select the type of
to open, or search for the file by switching folders or Accessory you
drives.

170 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


AutoClick Placement

want to use. Accessory options appear in the Preview To add log home components using drag-and-drop
Bar. 1 Click the Object Tab. The Preview Bar displays
4 On the Preview Bar, click the Accessory you furnishing objects.
want to place. 2 (optional) Click the arrow next to
5 On the Design window, click a wall where you “Objects” at the top of the Preview
want to place the accessory. Bar, then click Log Home
Components.
3 Scroll to view the available
components.
Note: Hold the mouse button down to move the
accessory along the wall. 4 Click the component you want to
place; hold down the mouse button
6 Click to select the accessory. The Properties and drag the object onto your design
Bar is displayed. window.
7 Type the Width, Height, Wall Offset and 5 (optional) Click the Selection tool,
Elevation to customize them. then click the component you just
placed to drag it to another location on your design
window.

AutoClick Placement
You can apply the same object, plant, trim and so on by
using the AutoClick Placement toggle. We will use “Trim”
in this example, but the steps for using AutoClick Placement
are the same, regardless of what you are inserting or
applying.
8 (optional) To create a sheer effect, set the
translucency. To use AutoClick Placement
9 (optional) To automatically size the 1 Click the Trim Tab that contains the
accessory, click the Auto/Size button, then feature you want to place. The
click the window, for example. The Preview Bar will display trims
accessory will automatically fit to the dimensions of that available for placement.
window.
2 On the Trim Tab, click the arrow
Note: When you click an Accessory in the Preview Bar, the next to “Trim”, then click
Accessory Tool on the Floor Plan Tab automatically is AutoClick Placement.
selected, too. 3 At the top of the Preview Bar, click
Tip: To further personalize your design, you can create the down arrow next to “Trim”, then select the needed
custom Accessories. For more information, see “Material trim from the menu. Trim options appear in the Preview
Workshop”, which begins on page 183. Bar.
4 Click the trim you want to apply.
5 Click on each wall section where you want the trim to
appear.
6 Right-click to end. The trim you selected is applied.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 171


Chapter 23 Personalizing Your Design

Editing Objects Note: Rotation is constrained to 45 degrees, to release this


constraint, press the SHIFT key while rotating.
Once you’ve placed objects in your drawing, it’s easy to
move, delete, copy and rotate objects, usually involving just
To rename objects
one or two mouse clicks. You can also edit objects using 3D
Custom Workshop. For more information, see “3D Custom 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
Workshop”, which begins on page 341. 2 Right-click an object. The Custom Workshop Object
Name dialog box is displayed.
To resize an object
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection
Tool.
2 Click an object to select it. The Workshop
Object Properties Bar is displayed.
3 Type the Width, Height and Depth to 3 Type a new name in the dialog box, then click OK.
customize them. Note: This is the name that will be listed in the spreadsheet
4 (optional) Type the percent sizing created by Punch! Estimator.
dimensions.
5 (optional) Uncheck the Cast Shadow box if
Moving Objects
shadows are not needed. Once you’ve placed objects, you can move them by dragging,
6 (optional) Type an angle, if you want to by making very precise movements using Nudge, for more
rotate the object. information see “Using Nudge” on page 153, or by
specifying exact cartesian or polar coordinates that
To rotate objects a specified amount correspond to the reference grid. For more information on the
reference grid, see “Using the Grid” on page 16.
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click an object to select it. To select more than one To move objects by dragging
object; hold down the SHIFT key while clicking. 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
3 Click Rotate on the Edit menu. The Rotate dialog box is 2 Click an object to select it. To select more than one
displayed. object; hold down the SHIFT key while clicking.
3 Holding down the mouse button, drag the object or object
group to a new location, then release the mouse button.
Note: For more information on making precision
movements using Snaps, see the chapter titled “Punch!
4 Click either Degrees or Radians, then type the angle you Software Primer”, which begins on page 27.
want to rotate the object in the Angle text box.
5 Click OK. The object or object group you selected is To move objects by specifying coordinates
rotated, based on the angle measurement you specified. 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click an object to select it. To select more than one
To freely rotate objects object, hold down the SHIFT key while clicking.
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 3 Click Move on the Edit menu. The Move dialog box is
2 Click object to be rotated to select it. displayed.
3 On the Standard toolbar, click the Rotate Tool.
4 Click the object; hold down the mouse button and
move the mouse.
5 Release the mouse button when the object is in the
position you want.

172 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Elevating Objects

4 Click either Cartesian or Polar, then type new X- and 2 Click the arrow next to “Objects” at
Y-Axis coordinates in the appropriate text boxes. the top of the Preview Bar to display
5 Click OK. The object or object group you selected is the object library list, then click
moved based on the coordinates you specified. Object Organizer. The Object
Organizer dialog is displayed.
Elevating Objects
With Punch! AS4000 you can elevate objects based on a
measurement you define. This is handy if you want to place
something on top of a table, for example.

To elevate objects by specifying a measurement


1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click an object to select it. To select more than one
object, hold down the SHIFT key while clicking.
3 On the Edit Menu, click Set Object Elevation. The Set
Elevation dialog box is displayed. To move objects from one category to another
4 Type the measurement, in inches, that you want to 1 Click the Object Tab.
elevate the object, then click OK. 2 Click the arrow next to “Objects” at the top of the
Note: Use this feature to lower objects by typing a negative Preview Bar to display the object library list, then click
number in the Set Elevation dialog box. Object Organizer. The Object Organizer dialog is
displayed.
To elevate objects by using the Elevation Slider 3 Click the arrow above the right column to access a
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. listing of available object categories. Click the category
where you want the object to be moved.
2 Click an object to select it. To select more than one
object, hold down the SHIFT key while clicking.
3 On the left side of the screen, drag the Elevation Slider
up or down.
4 Release the mouse. The object will be repositioned.

Organizers
You can create categories and customize lists of objects, trim,
accessories and so on to make Punch! Home Design
Architectural Series 4000 more personal. In this example we 4 Click the object in the left column that you want
will use the Object Organizer, but all Organizers work the to move to the new category, then click the right
same. arrow button. The object is moved from the
category on the left to the category on the right.
To open Object Organizer
5 (optional) Repeat step 6 until all the objects you want to
1 Click the Object Tab. reorganize have been moved to the new category.

To access information about an object


1 Click the Object Tab.
2 Click the arrow next to “Objects” at the top of the
Preview Bar to display the object library list, then click
Object Organizer. The Object Organizer dialog is
displayed.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 173


Chapter 23 Personalizing Your Design

3 Click Info in the Object section of the Object 5 Type the name of the new category and click OK. The
Organizer Preview Bar. The Object Info Object Organizer is displayed with your new category.
dialog is displayed.
4 (optional) Type a new name or a different
description in the text box, then click OK.

To delete an object from a category


1 Click the Object Tab.
2 Click the arrow next to “Objects” at the top of the
Preview Bar to display the object library list, then click
Object Organizer. The Object Organizer dialog is
displayed.
3 Click Delete in the Object section of the To delete an entire category
Object Organizer Preview Bar. The Object is 1 Click the Object Tab.
removed from the listing.
2 Click the arrow next to “Objects” at the top of the
Note: To access all the objects you have deleted, Preview Bar to display the object library list, then click
click the Recycle Button. A listing of all deleted objects is Object Organizer. The Object Organizer dialog is
displayed. displayed.
3 Click Delete in the Category section of the
To create a new category
Object Organizer Preview Bar. The Browse
1 Click the Object Tab. for Folder dialog is displayed.
2 Click the arrow next to “Objects” at the top of the
Preview Bar to display the object library list, then click
Object Organizer. The Object Organizer dialog is
displayed.
3 Click New in the Category section of the
Object Organizer Preview Bar. The Browse
for Folder dialog is displayed.

4 Click the category you want to delete, then click OK. The
category is removed.

To rename a category
1 Click the Object Tab.
2 Click the arrow next to “Objects” at the top of the
Preview Bar to display the object library list, then click
4 Click the folder where you want to add a new category Object Organizer. The Object Organizer dialog is
and click OK. The Category Name dialog is displayed. displayed.
3 Click Rename in the Category section of the
Object Organizer Preview Bar. The Browse
for Folder dialog is displayed.

174 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Building Rooms Using Templates

4 Click the folder you want to rename, then click OK. The Creating New Templates
Category Name dialog is displayed.
With Punch! AS4000 you can easily create room templates to
suit your specific needs.

To create a template
1 Once your room is designed exactly
to your liking, select all walls,
5 Type the new name, then click OK. The Object doors and other features that you
Organizer is displayed with your renamed category. want to include in your template.
2 Click the Templates Tab. The
Building Rooms Using Templates Preview Bar displays room
Punch! AS4000 includes dozens of room templates, which templates.
will make designing your home easy and fun. Divided into 3 Click the arrow next to “Templates”
several categories, choose the template that suits you needs at the top of the Preview Bar to
best.
display the listing, then click Create Template. The Save
Template to Category dialog is displayed.
To place a template
1 Click the Templates Tab. The Preview Bar
displays room templates.
2 (optional) Click the arrow next to
“Templates” at the top of the Preview Bar to
display the room libraries, then click
another library.
3 Scroll to view the available templates.
4 Click the Template Category, then select the appropriate
4 Click the template you want to place; hold
category from the drop down menu that appears.
down the mouse button and drag it onto
your design window. 5 Type a Template Name.
5 (optional) Click the Selection tool, then 6 Type a Template Description, then click OK. The
click the template you just placed to drag it to another template is added to that category and displayed in the
location on your design window. Preview Bar.

To choose a new category Plants Preview Bar


1 Click the Templates Tab. The Preview Bar displays room Punch! AS4000 includes thousands of plants to make
templates. designing your landscape easy and fun. Divided into several
categories, choose the ones that grow best in your area of the
2 (optional) Click the arrow next to
country.
“Templates” at the top of the
Preview Bar to display the room
libraries, then click another library. To add plants
3 Scroll to view the available 1 Click the Landscape Tab.
templates. 2 Click the Plants Tab. The Preview Bar will display plants
4 Click the template you want to available for placement.
place; hold down the mouse button 3 At the top of the Preview Bar, click the down arrow next
and drag it onto your design window. to “Plants” to display the plant category menu, then
click to check the type of plants you want to place.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 175


Chapter 23 Personalizing Your Design

4 Use the scroll bar to view the remainder of the plant 2 Click the plant you want to customize.
selections in the Preview Bar. 3 On the Plant Preview Bar, type the age of the
Note: Hold your cursor over the preview of the plant and plant at the time of planting.
that plant’s description will be displayed in the Status Bar. Note: Planting age can be adjusted only after a plant is
5 On the Preview Bar, click the plant you want to place; placed.
hold down the mouse button and drag it onto your design
window. To identify which plant has been placed
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 On the design window, right-click the plant you want to
identify, then click Plant Details on the pop-up menu.

Viewing Hardiness Zones


Punch! AS4000 includes USDA Hardiness Zone maps for the
contiguous 48 states, Alaska and Hawaii, Canada, Europe
and Australia. All plants included in Punch! AS4000 can be
sorted using this information.

To view a hardiness zone map


1 Click the Plants Tab. The Preview
Bar will display plants available
for placement.
2 At the top of the Preview Bar,
click the down arrow next to
“Plants” to display the plant
category menu, then click the
Hardiness Zone map you want to view.

To move a plant
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
To hide the hardiness zone map
2 Click the plant you want to move.
■ Click anywhere on the zone map.
3 Click again; hold down the mouse button and drag the
plant to the new location.
PlantFinder
To customize the planting age Punch! AS4000 includes thousands of plants to make
designing your landscape easy and fun. PlantFinder is a
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

176 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Making Plants Grow

powerful sorting engine that lets you see only the plants that To find a plant by name
fit your particular criteria. 1 Click the Plants Tab. The
Preview Bar will display plants
To sort plants available for placement.
1 Click the Plants Tab. The Preview 2 At the top of the Preview Bar,
Bar will display plants available click the down arrow next to
for placement. “Plants” to display the plant
2 At the top of the Preview Bar, category menu, then click Find
click the down arrow next to Plant by Name. The Find Plant by
“Plants” to display the plant Name dialog box is displayed.
category menu, then click
PlantFinder. The PlantFinder
dialog box is displayed.

3 Type the botanical or common name of the plant in the


dialog box.
4 Uncheck the criteria that does not meet your needs, then
click OK. A plant matching the criteria you specified
will be displayed in the Preview Bar.
Note: If you do not specify a category to be searched,
Punch! AS4000 will search the “Trees” category by default.

3 Uncheck the criteria that does not meet your needs, then To view all plants
click OK. ■ At the top of the Preview Bar, click the down arrow next
Note: Only the plants matching all the variables selected to “Plants” to display the plant category menu, then
will be displayed in the Preview Bar. To broaden your search, click View All Plants.
check fewer boxes.
Making Plants Grow
4 (optional) Click the View All buttons to select all options
in a category. With Punch! AS4000 you can watch your landscape grow
from year to year. With just a couple of mouse clicks you can
To locate a plant on the Preview Bar watch your landscape change over 20 years.

1 On the design window, right-click the To grow your landscape


plant you want to locate, then click
Locate Plant on the pop-up menu that 1 On the Window menu, open a LiveView window and
is displayed. The plant will be position it to easily see the area of your landscape you
selected and displayed on the Preview want to watch mature.
Bar. 2 Clicking the smaller tree to the left of the
Plant Growth Meter makes the plants
appear younger, while pressing the larger tree on the
right makes them appear older.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 177


Chapter 23 Personalizing Your Design

Note: The age is displayed in the status bar.


Applying Trims
All interior walls are drawn with standard 6" base trim. It is
easy to add base trim, crown molding or library paneling for
an elegant appearance or use wainscotting if you want to
Note: To change the planting age for individual plants, see apply two different materials on one wall. You can also add
“To customize the planting age” on page 176. casing molding around doors and windows. Plus, you can
even design your own trim using Trim Designer. For more
information, see “Trim Designer”, which begins on page 229.
In this example we will use Base Trim, but crown molding,
door casings, library paneling and wainscotting will be
applied in exactly the same way.

To apply base trim


1 Click the Trim Tab.
2 On the Trim Tab, click the arrow
next to “Trim”, then select the
needed trim library from the menu.

3 At the top of the Preview Bar,


click the down arrow next to
“Base Trim”, then select exactly
what type of Base Trim you
want to use. Base Trim options
appear in the Preview Bar.
4 Click the trim you want to apply; hold down the mouse
button and drag it onto the wall of your home in the
LiveView window. The trim you selected is applied.

178 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Removing Wall Trims

Removing Wall Trims


All wall trims are removed in the same way, drag and drop a
“no trim” material onto the wall.

To remove wall trim


1 Click the Trim Tab. The Preview Bar will display trims
available for placement.
2 At the top of the Preview Bar, click the down arrow next
to “Trim”, then select Standard Base Trim from the
menu. Base trim options appear in the Preview Bar.
3 Apply the last trim option on the Preview Bar
to remove wall trim entirely.
Note: The actual name of the paint is displayed in the upper
right for ease in purchasing the correct color.
Applying Paint and Color
With Punch! AS4000, you can try out various color schemes To apply color from a customizable palette
with ease. Now you can choose between paint libraries and 1 Click the Colors Tab. The Preview Bar will
color families with just a few mouse clicks. Walls are just display materials available for placement.
one example of what can be colorized; you can also apply
color to furniture, window trim, doors and so on. To apply 2 (optional) At the top of the Preview Bar,
different paint colors to different rooms, refer to “Breaking a click the down arrow next to “Colors” to
Wall” on page 74. display the Colors style menu, then click to
check Spring or whichever category you
To make designing easier, you can create custom Designer prefer. The color palette is displayed on the
Palettes. For more information, see “Using Designer Preview Bar.
Palettes”, which begins on page 162.
3 Scroll to view the available spring colors.
To apply paint 4 Click the color you want to apply; hold down
the mouse button and drag the color onto the
1 Click the Colors Tab. The Preview Bar will
exterior walls of your home in the LiveView window.
display paint colors available for
The color you selected is applied.
placement.
2 (optional) At the top of the Preview Bar, Note: To customize a color, see “To define a custom color”
click the down arrow next to “Paint” to on page 180.
display the available Paint Libraries. Click
to select which one you want to use. The To apply color from the color ramp
paint colors are displayed on the Preview 1 Click the Colors Tab. The
Bar. Preview Bar will display
3 Scroll to view the available paint colors. materials available for
placement.
4 Click the paint color you want to apply;
hold down the mouse button and drag it 2 On the Colors Tab, click the
onto the exterior walls of your home in the arrow beneath the word Colors,
LiveView window. The paint you selected is applied. then click Color Ramp. Twenty-
five shades of the same color appear in the Preview Bar.
Note: To customize a color, see “To define a custom color”
on page 180. 3 (optional) At the top of the Preview Bar,
click the plus (+) or minus (-) signs next to
5 (optional) To view larger paint chips, click “Paint” at the the color spectrum to change the color family.
top of the Preview Bar, like in Step 2 above. Then click
4 Scroll to view the variations of that color.
Paint Chooser from the drop down menu. The Paint
Chooser is displayed.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 179


Chapter 23 Personalizing Your Design

5 Click the color you want to apply; hold down the mouse
button and drag the color onto the exterior walls of your
home in the LiveView window. The color you selected
is applied.

To apply a series of the same color


1 Click the Colors Tab. The Preview Bar will display
materials available for placemen.
2 (optional) At the top of the Preview
Bar, click the down arrow next to
“Colors” to display the Colors style
menu, then click to check Spring. The
Spring color palette is displayed on the
Preview Bar. 4 Click one of the Basic or Custom colors or click on the
color spectrum block to select a color.
3 Scroll to view the available Spring
colors. 5 (optional) Adjust the current Red, Green and Blue values
to create a custom color.
4 Right-click the color you want to apply.
6 (optional) Click an area on the color spectrum window to
5 On the LiveView window, right-click on each wall where select a color, then adjust the RGB values, if necessary.
you want the chosen color to appear.
7 Click OK. The color you defined is displayed on the
6 Click the left mouse button to end. The color you Preview Bar.
selected is applied.
Applying Building Materials
Using Custom Colors
With Punch! AS4000, customizing the exterior of your home
With Punch! AS4000, you can define your own custom color is a simple drag and drop procedure. Available materials
with the Color dialog box. You can start with one of the basic include brick, stucco, gravel, roofing and so on. You can
colors available, then change its red, blue or green values or create your own custom materials. For more information, see
click on a color in the color spectrum window to “mix” your “Material Workshop”, which begins on page 183.
own color. By customizing colors, you are sure to find the
exact color you want. You can even apply two different materials to a wall using
the Wainscotting feature. For more information, see
To define a custom color “Applying Trims”, which begins on page 178.
1 Click the Colors Tab. The Preview Bar will display
To apply material
materials available for placement.
1 Click the Materials Tab. The Preview Bar
2 (optional) At the top of the Preview Bar, click the down
will display materials available for
arrow next to “Colors” to display the Colors style menu,
placement.
then click to check Summer. The Summer color palette
is displayed on the Preview Bar. 2 (optional) At the top of the Preview Bar,
click the down arrow next to “Materials” to
3 Double-click one of the colors on the Preview Bar. The
display the Materials style menu, then click
Color dialog box is displayed.
to check the material you want, for instance
brick, stucco, stone, siding and so on.
Options of the selected material will be
displayed on the Preview Bar.
3 Scroll to view the available materials.
4 Click the material you want to apply; hold down the
mouse button and drag the material onto the exterior

180 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Applying Building Materials

walls of your home in the LiveView window. The


material you selected is applied.
Note: To increase the accuracy of applying materials, it
may help to zoom in closer to what you are texturing.

To apply custom materials


1 Click the Materials tab. The Preview Bar will
display materials available for placement.
2 On the Materials Tab, click the arrow next to
“Materials”, then Custom & Brand Name
Materials from the menu.

3 At the top of the Preview Bar, click the down


arrow next to “Materials”, then select a library from the
menu. Custom material options appear in the Preview
Bar.
4 Click the custom material you want to apply; hold down
the mouse button and drag it onto a surface of your home
in the LiveView window. The custom material you
selected is applied.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 181


Chapter 23 Personalizing Your Design

182 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Chapter 24

Material Workshop
Whether it’s paint or brickwork, carpet or draperies, the Material Workshop lets you customize photorealistic images of
real-world textures so you can tour a realistic rendering of your home plan in Punch! Home Design Architectural Series
4000. Modify one of the materials in Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000’s libraries or import one of your own,
using Material Workshop’s powerful image editing and management tools.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 183


Chapter 24 Material Workshop

Launching Material Workshop To open an existing material definition


■ Launch Material Workshop by clicking the 1 Click the Material tab, or click the Material
Material Workshop icon on the PowerTool Bar. Library button. The Preview Bar displays the
materials in the current library.
File Management 2 (optional) Click the Materials drop-down menu above the
There are several ways you can create a new material image Preview Bar and click to select a new library collection.
in Material Workshop. You can import a digital image of a 3 Click the material image you want to modify and
texture, such as brickwork or wallpaper, you can create a new drag it into the design window or click the Open
material from scratch or you can modify one of Punch! Home Selected Material button.
Design Architectural Series 4000’s existing materials. With
Material Workshop, you can save your new image as a new Note: You can use this same method to retrieve an image
BMP image and/or you can save the image in one of Material from Custom Materials library.
Workshop’s libraries.
To update a material or accessory image
In addition, you have complete control on how your material
1 On the File menu, click Save to Library or click
library is organized. This makes remembering where you
the Save/Update to Library button. The Save to
have stored all the materials you created for the Living
Library dialog box is displayed.
Room, for example.
2 Choose to save your new image in the material library or
To import a new image file accessories library, then click OK. The Save/Update
Material dialog box is displayed.
1 On the File menu, click Open New Image. The Open
dialog box is displayed. 3 Click Update Existing to replace the current material or
accessory definition.
4 Click Yes to merge all of the image objects in your
drawing into one image or click No to maintain separate
objects. This will make future edits to the saved image
easier.

To save a new material or accessory image


1 On the File menu, click Save to Library or click
the Save/Update to Library button. The Save to
2 In the Look In box, type the name of the file you want to Library dialog box is displayed.
insert or search for the file by switching folders or drives. 2 Choose to save your new image in the material library
3 When you see the name of the file you want to open, or accessories library, then click OK. The Save Material
click to select it. to Library dialog box is displayed.
4 Click Open.

To open a blank image file


1 On the File menu, click Blank Canvas. The Color dialog
box is displayed.
2 Click an area on the color spectrum window to select a
background color, then adjust the values, if necessary.
3 (optional) Adjust the current Red, Green and Blue values
to create a custom color. 3 (optional) Click New to create a new library. Select a
4 Click Open. The color you defined is applied to the folder in which to create the library, then type a name for
drawing background. the new library and click OK.

184 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Organizers

4 Type a name for the new material in the Material Name


text box. New material names can contain up to 44
characters.
5 Type a description of the new material in the Material
Description text box. New material descriptions can
contain up to 78 characters.
6 Type the real-world dimensions of the material image in
the Width and Height text boxes.
7 (optional) Check Stretch for width or height to stretch the
image in that direction, rather than replicate it.
8 (optional) Check Transparent Black to designate all black
areas (RGB=0,0,0) of the material image as transparent.
Tip: Transparent black is not only useful for things like
window panes, it’s also helpful in images like trellises, chain
3 On the left side of the Material Organizer, select a
link fences or between blind slats.
category.
9 (optional) Check Retain State to save the image with all 4 On the right side of the Material Organizer, select a
of its layers intact. This will make future edits to the category.
saved image easier.
5 Click to select the material you want to move.
10 Click OK.
6 (optional) Click the Info button to display information
Organizers about the selected material.
7 (optional) Click the Delete button to permanently remove
You have complete control on how your libraries are
the selected material.
organized. This makes it easier to remember where you have
stored all the materials and accessories that you created for 8 Click an arrow button to move the selected material from
the Living Room, for example. one of the selected categories to the other.
9 Click Close.
To use the Material Organizer
1 Click the Custom tab or click the Custom Material To create, delete or rename a material category
Library tool. The Preview Bar displays the 1 Click the Custom tab or click the Custom Material
contents of the current Custom Material Library. Library tool. The Preview Bar displays the
2 Click the down-arrow at the top of the Preview contents of the current Custom Material Library.
BarPreview Bar, then click Material Organizer on the 2 Click the down-arrow at the top of the Preview Bar, then
drop-down menu. The Material Organizer dialog box is click Material Organizer on the drop-down menu. The
displayed. Material Organizer dialog box is displayed.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 185


Chapter 24 Material Workshop

3 On the left side of the Accessory Organizer, select a


category.
4 On the right side of the Accessory Organizer, select a
category.
5 Click to select the accessory you want to move.
6 (optional) Click the Info button to display information
about the selected accessory.
7 (optional) Click the Delete button to permanently remove
the selected accessory.
8 Click an arrow button to move the selected accessory
from one of the selected categories to the other.
9 Click Close.

3 (optional) In the Category section, click the New button. To create, delete or rename an accessory category
Select a folder in which to create the new category, then 1 Click the Accessory tab or click the Accessories
type a name for the new category and click OK. Library tool. The Preview Bar displays the
4 (optional) In the Category section, click Delete. Select a contents of the current Accessory Library.
folder to delete and click OK. 2 Click the down-arrow at the top of the Preview Bar, then
5 (optional) In the Category section, click Rename. Select click Accessory Organizer on the drop-down menu. The
a folder to rename and click OK. Type a new name for Accessory Organizer dialog box is displayed.
the category and click OK again.
6 Click Close.

To use the Accessory Organizer


1 Click the Accessory tab or click the Accessories
Library tool. The Preview Bar displays the
contents of the current Accessory Library.
2 Click the down-arrow at the top of the Preview Bar,
then click Accessory Organizer on the drop-down menu.
The Accessory Organizer dialog box is displayed.

3 (optional) In the Category section, click the New button.


Select a folder in which to create the new category, then
type a name for the new category and click OK.
4 (optional) In the Category section, click Delete. Select a
folder to delete and click OK.
5 (optional) In the Category section, click Rename. Select
a folder to rename and click OK. Type a new name for
the category and click OK again.
6 Click Close.

186 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Editing Material Workshop Images

To open a custom color list Tip: When drawing multiple instances of a CAD object, be
1 On the File menu, click Open Custom Color List. The sure that Keep Tool Selected is checked on the Edit menu.
Open Color List dialog box is displayed. When Keep Tool Selected is checked, you can draw
concurrent CAD objects without selecting the corresponding
2 In the File Name box, type the name of the file you want CAD tool each time.
to open or search for the file by switching folders or
drives. Editing Material Workshop Image
3 When you see the name of the file you want to open, Properties
click to select it.
With Punch! Material Workshop, you can control additional
4 Click OK. properties for your image—for instance, you can add
information to materials in your own custom libraries or the
To save a custom color list permanent Punch! libraries. You can also control the way
1 On the File menu, click Save Custom Color List. The each instance of your image blends with its neighbors. The
Save Color List dialog box is displayed. seamless tool lets you eliminate the tell-tale borderlines
between instances of the same material image.
2 Type a file name in the File Name text box.
3 Click OK. To make an image seamless
1 Click the Seamless tool. The Seamless Material
Editing Material Workshop Images dialog box is displayed.
With Punch! Material Workshop, you can draw shapes that 2 Click one of the seamless options. Horizontal blends
will be used to color, fill, replicate or add materials to your images along their sides, Vertical blends images along
image. Simply select a tab, choose a color or material from the top and bottom, Both blends horizontally and
the Preview Bar, then draw a shape using one of the drawing vertically, None does not blend.
tools.
The eight editing modes available in Material Workshop are:
■ Color. Tools in this mode will add a tint in your
selected area.
■ Fill. Tools in this mode will completely replace
the original color in your selected area with a color
of your choice.
■ Replicate. This tool copies the selected area so it can be
placed elsewhere.
■ Material. Tools in this mode completely replace
the original material in your selected area with a
standard Punch! material of your choice.
■ Custom. If you have already saved custom
materials, tools in this mode completely replace
the original material in your selected area with a custom
material of your choice.
■ Accessory. Tools in this mode completely replace 3 Click one of the blend options. Click Low to concentrate
the original material in your selected area with an blending at the edges of the image. Click High to
accessory of your choice. concentrate blending across the entire image.
■ Brightness. This tool adjusts the brightness of 4 Click the preview buttons to see how your image will
your selected area. look when tiled horizontally, vertically or both.
■ Opacity. This tool adjusts the opacity of your
selected area. You can change the background 5 Click Seamless.
color by clicking the color area at the bottom of the
Preview Bar.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 187


Chapter 24 Material Workshop

To add information to a material object To control layering


1 Click the Material Info tool. The Material Info 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
dialog box is displayed. 2 Right-click a shape to select it.
3 Click Bring to Front, on the pop-up menu that is
displayed, to place the selected shape on the top of the
other shapes.
4 (optional) Click Send to Back button, on the pop-up
menu that is displayed, to place the selected shape behind
the other shapes.
2 Type a description of the new material in the Material To use object selection mode
Description text box. New material descriptions can
contain up to 78 characters. 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

3 Type the real-world dimensions of the material image in 2 Right-click a shape to select it, then click Object-
the Width and Height text boxes. Level Editing on the pop-up menu that is displayed.
4 (optional) Check Stretch for width or height to stretch the 3 Click the object and drag it into the new position or
image in that direction, rather than replicate it. shape.
5 (optional) Check Transparent Black to designate all black
areas (RGB=0,0,0) of the material image as transparent.
6 Click OK.

Editing Shapes
All shapes drawn in Material Workshop can be edited in a
variety of ways. They can be moved specified amounts,
rotated, layered, cropped and even converted to other types of
drawing shapes. Object-Level Editing is active by default.
Object-Level Editing, along with Point-Level Editing, 4 Release the mouse to end.
controls how your edits impact your object. If you are in
object selection mode, changes affect the object as a whole. If To use point selection mode
you are working in point selection mode, each edge of the
object is treated separately, as you edit. 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Right-click a shape to select it, then click Point-
To crop an image Level Editing on the pop-up menu that is displayed.
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Crop Image 3 Click a point on the object and drag it into the new
tool. position to reshape it.
2 Click on the design window to define the start point of
the crop rectangle. A rubber-band rectangle is displayed
and follows the pointer. Dimensions are displayed, as
you draw.
3 Hold the mouse button down, as you extend the rectangle
to the size you want.
4 Release the mouse button.
5 On the Standard toolbar, click the Crop Image tool
again. 4 Release the mouse to end.

188 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Editing Material Perspective

To select all color objects in the drawing To set the perspective angle
■ On the Edit menu, click Select Objects, All Color ■ Click and rotate the Blue arrow to change the location of
Objects. the vanishing point.
■ (optional) Right-click the material, then click Change
To select all fill objects in the drawing Material Angle on the pop-up menu that is displayed.
■ On the Edit menu, click Select Objects, All Fill Objects. Type the angle in the text box, then click OK.

To select all replicate objects in the drawing To change the centerline

■ On the Edit menu, click Select Objects, All Replicate ■ Click & Drag a Yellow dot to change the centerline of the
Objects. material.

To set the scale


To select all material objects in the drawing
■ Right-click the material, then click Change Material
■ On the Edit menu, click Select Objects, All Material
Scale on the pop-up menu that is displayed. Type the new
Objects.
percentage(s) in the text box, then click OK.
To select all brightness objects in the drawing
To reset perspective changes
■ On the Edit menu, click Select Objects, All Brightness
■ Right-click the material, then click Reset Material
Objects.
Attributes on the pop-up menu that is displayed.
To select all opacity objects in the drawing
Using Material Workshop Images in Your
■ On the Edit menu, click Select Objects, All Opacity Punch! Home Design Architectural Series
Objects. 4000 Project
To select all objects in the drawing Once you’ve created your own custom materials and
accessories in the Material Workshop, you can easily apply
■ On the Edit menu, click Select All. them back in your Punch! Home Design Architectural Series
4000 project. Simply navigate to the library where you stored
To convert to another drawing style the new image and drag the image to a surface in your
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. LiveView window.
2 Right-click a shape to select it, then click Convert
To on the pop-up menu that is displayed. To apply custom accessories

3 Click to select the type of object you want. 1 Click the Objects tab. The Preview Bar will
display objects available for placement.
Editing Material Perspective 2 On the Objects Tab, click the arrow next to
“Objects”, then select Accessories Library
In addition to the ability to rotate, move, point-level edit and
from the menu.
so on, Material shapes can be edited to conform to the
perspective in the image. Click a shape to select it. This will
activate Perspective Editing Mode. In this mode, there will be
different colored controls that manipulate different things.

To change the size of the shape


■ Click & Drag the Red dots to control the area of the
shape. Drag a corner to make the shape larger or smaller.
3 At the top of the Preview Bar, click the down arrow next
To set the perspective to “Accessory”, then select the appropriate location for
■ Click & Drag a Green dot to change the vanishing point your custom accessory from the menu. Custom accessory
of the material. options appear in the Preview Bar.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 189


Chapter 24 Material Workshop

4 Click the custom accessory you want to apply; hold down image is not square, use your graphics software to rotate
the mouse button and drag it onto a surface of your home it in half-degree increments until it is.
in the LiveView window. The custom material you ■ Photograph the feature when the sun is shining. This
selected is applied. ensures more color saturation and detail of the image.
■ Images should touch the bottom of the image area. If it is
Tip: To apply the same accessory to multiple surfaces,
centered in the area, it will float above ground level.
select AutoClick Placement on the pop-up menu (see Step 2
■ When saving an image to the Material library, check
above). Then simply select an accessory from the Preview
Retain State to save the image with all of its layers intact.
Bar and click each surface where you want the accessory
This will make future edits to the saved image easier.
placed, right-click when you are finished.

To apply custom materials


1 Click the Materials tab. The Preview Bar will
display materials available for placement.
2 On the Materials Tab, click the arrow
beneath the word Materials, then click
Custom Material Library on the pop-up
menu that is displayed.

3 At the top of the Preview Bar, click the down arrow next
to “Materials”, then select the appropriate location for
your custom material from the menu. Custom material
options appear in the Preview Bar.
4 Click the custom material you want to apply; hold down
the mouse button and drag it onto a surface of your home
in the LiveView window. The custom material you
selected is applied.
Tip: To apply the same custom material to multiple
surfaces, select AutoClick Placement on the pop-up menu
(see Step 2 above). Then simply select a custom material
from the Preview Bar and click each surface where you want
the material placed, right-click when you are finished.

Tips for Using Material Workshop


Punch! AS4000’s Material Workshop lets you take digital
pictures and use them as custom textures in your home
design. Although this is a straightforward process, there are a
few hints that will make the ultimate result much more
satisfying.
■ Verify that the image is level and square when taking a
digital picture or scanning a photograph. If the initial

190 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Part 6

Design Aid
PowerTools

Chapter 25: Site Planner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193


Chapter 26: Door Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Chapter 27: Window Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Chapter 28: Cabinet Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Chapter 29: Fireplace Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Chapter 30: Plant Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Chapter 31: Trim Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Chapter 32: Pool Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Chapter 25

Site Planner
Punch! Site Planner lets you duplicate your lot exactly from your surveyor’s report. Site Planner has three methods of
defining points to your lot:
Azimuth: Defines points in degrees, minutes and seconds clockwise from North.
Bearing: Defines points in angles, minutes and seconds, using North, South, East and West as guides.
Relative: Defines points in feet and inches, using the previous point as a reference.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 193


Chapter 25 Site Planner

Launching Site Planner Defining a drawing method


If you have a survey plat of your property, you can exactly 1 On the Survey Definition toolbar,
draw your property lines using Punch! Site Planner.
click the needed tool.
Launching Punch! Site Planner 2 (optional) On the View Menu, click Direction Mode,
then click the method you want to use.
■ Launch Site Planner by clicking the Site Planner
icon on the PowerTool Bar.
Managing Points
Choosing a Drawing Method You can quickly add, delete and edit points in Site Planner.

There are three methods of drawing in Punch! Site Planner. Adding a point
Points are defined almost identically in the three methods;
choose the one that is most comfortable for you. 1 On the Survey Definition toolbar, click the Add
Point Tool. The Add Point menu is displayed.
Azimuth: Defines points in degrees, minutes and
seconds, clockwise from North.

Bearing: Defines points in angles, minutes and


seconds, using North, South, East and West as guides.
2 Choose North or South as the Reference Meridian.
3 Type the Angles, Minutes and Seconds in the text boxes.
4 Choose the Line Direction.
5 Type the Line Length. Click OK.
6 Continue defining points until you have defined your
entire lot perimeter.

Relative: Defines points in feet and inches, using the


previous point as a reference.
194 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide
Managing Line Dimensions

Deleting a point Managing Line Dimensions


1 On the design window, click the point you want to delete. In each drawing method, the line dimensions are displayed
2 On the Survey Definition toolbar, click the Delete on your drawing with the point ID, the direction and length.
Point Tool. The Point Deletion Confirmation You can choose to display any or all of these definitions.
dialog is displayed.
Managing line dimensions
3 Click Yes to delete the point.
■ On the Options menu, click Line Dimensions, then click
4 (optional) Click No, if you have chosen the point by
Show Point ID. If a checkmark is displayed on this
mistake.
choice, the ID is visible. If there is no checkmark, the ID
Note: To turn off the Point Deletion Confirmation, click is hidden.
Confirm Point Deletion on the Options menu.

Inserting a point
1 On the design window, click the point before which you
want to add a point.
Note: Points are always added before the point you have
selected.
■ On the Options menu, click Line Dimensions, then click
2 On the Survey Definition toolbar, click the Insert
Show Point. If a checkmark is displayed on this choice,
Point Tool. The Insert Point menu is displayed.
the direction is visible. If there is no checkmark, the
3 Choose North or South as the Reference Meridian. direction is hidden.
4 Type the Angles, Minutes and Seconds in the text boxes.
5 Choose the Line Direction.
6 Type the Line Length. Click OK.

Editing a point
1 On the design window, click the point you want to edit.
2 On the Survey Definition toolbar, click the Edit ■ On the Options menu, click Line Dimensions, then click
Point Tool. The Edit Point menu is displayed. Show Length. If a checkmark is displayed on this
choice, the length is visible. If there is no checkmark,
the length
is hidden.

3 Make the necessary edits in the menus and dialog boxes.


4 Click OK.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 195


Chapter 25 Site Planner

Saving Your Property Lines


When you open a file, Punch! Site Planner copies the file to
your computer’s memory. As you work, you modify the copy
stored in memory. Any system failure or loss of power
destroys that copy. To save your work permanently, you must
save it to a file on a disk. A good rule of thumb is to save
every 15 minutes or after you’ve completed any work you
wouldn’t want to redo.
When you click the Save command, Site Planner saves the
active drawing using the name and location you specify. You
can create more than one version of a drawing or save copies
on another disk for safekeeping. You can save each version
under a different name or you can save them under the same
name in different folders or on different disks.

To save an existing file


■ On the File menu, click Save or press CTRL+S.

To save a new, unnamed file


1 On the File menu, click Save As. The Save As dialog box
is displayed.
2 In the File Name text box, type a name. Surveyor
automatically adds the SDO extension.
3 Click Save.

Closing a File
When you finish working with a file, close it to remove the
window from the screen and to free up your computer’s
memory. You have the option of placing your property lines
into your home plan.

To close a file
■ On the File menu, click Exit. If you have unsaved
changes, Punch! AS4000 prompts you to save them
before it closes the file and asks if you want the survey
added to your Punch! home design file. Click Yes. The
property lines will be placed in the center of the design
window.

196 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Chapter 26

Door Designer
Whether it’s drawing custom grillwork or simply designing a door for a unique space, Punch! Door Designer lets you
create custom doors that behave and render like any other door in Punch! AS4000.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 197


Chapter 26 Door Designer

Designing Custom Doors Editing Your Door Design


With Door Designer you can create custom doors by using an Rather than draw each geometric feature of your door casing,
unlimited variety of the three door components. panel or grill separately, use Door Designer’s editing tools to
reshape, reposition, re-orient or even join existing door
Door Casing is the trim that surrounds the door opening. You
elements.
can draw a simple rectangular opening or you can combine
shapes to create a more ornate door casing. The following procedures explain steps for moving, resizing
or rotating door elements. For more information on reshaping
Door Panels are added to your design by drawing 2D shapes
and joining objects, see “Reshaping Elements” on page 36.
within the confines of the casing. By varying the thickness
For more information on flipping and mirroring objects, see
of the panels, you can create raised panels to define the
“Using Flip and Mirror” on page 37.
door.
Raised Grills add elegance to your door design after you have To resize door elements
added the casing and panels. As you draw, you can set the 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
width of the grills on the Property bar. If you want your door
design to include glass, simply leave those areas empty. 2 Click a door element to select it.
3 Click and hold down the mouse button, drag the segment
Launching Door Designer or point to a new location, then release the mouse button.
■ Launch Door Designer by clicking the Door Note: To constrain movements horizontally or vertically,
Designer icon on the PowerTool Bar. press SHIFT while reshaping the object.

Drawing Door Components To move door elements


You can modify an existing door design or draw your own 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
custom doors from scratch. As you draw each component, 2 Click a door element to select it.
Punch! displays your door design in 3D. Door Designer has
three drawing modes that let you design doors from the 3 On the Edit menu, click Move. The Move dialog box is
outside to the inside. displayed.

■ Casing. Start by drawing the trim to surround your


custom door.
■ Panels. Next, draw the wood panels that comprise the
visible body of your door.
■ Grills. Finally, add detailed grillwork to define windows
in a door. If you want your door design to include glass, 4 Click either Cartesian or Polar, then type amount you
simply leave those areas empty. want the object moved in the appropriate text boxes.
Each of the three drawing modes features an assortment of 5 Click OK. The object is moved based on the coordinates
2D drawing tools. The geometry of all three modes are drawn you specified.
the same. For best results, use these tools in conjunction with Note: Coordinates are measured in inches or they can be
snaps and editing tools to reshape door elements, minimize measured in feet and inches, separated by a hyphen.
repetition and increase accuracy. For more information about
snaps, see “Snap Basics” on page 29. For more information To place a door element on top of another object
about using editing tools, see “Editing Your Door Design” on
page 198. 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click the object you want to place on top.
Tip: When drawing multiple instances of a door object, be
sure to turn Auto Reset off. On the Options menu, click to 3 On the Edit menu, click Bring To Front, or click Bring
uncheck Auto Reset Tools. When Auto Reset Tools is To Front on the Property bar that is displayed.
unchecked, you can draw concurrent door objects without
selecting the corresponding door tool each time. To place a door element behind another object
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

198 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Controlling Drawing Settings

2 Click the group you want to place on bottom. To control automatic dimensioning
3 On the Edit menu, click Send To Back, or click Send To ■ While in an active drawing mode, on the Property bar,
Back on the Property bar that is displayed. check the Auto Dim checkbox to insert a dimension for
any door element you draw.
To select the next door element
■ On the Standard toolbar, click the Select Next Using Object or Point Selection Modes
Object tool. Door Designer selects the objects in the Object Selection Mode is active by default. Object selection,
order you placed them. along with point selection, controls how your edits impact
your object. If you are in object selection mode, changes
To select the previous door element affect the object as a whole. If you are working in point
■ On the Standard toolbar, click the Select Previous selection mode, each edge or corner of the object is treated
Object tool. Door Designer selects the objects in separately, as you edit.
reverse order. In point selection mode, you are able to resize or reshape an
object by moving one of its individual points. While it is
Controlling Drawing Settings easy to move an entire object in object selection mode, it is
There are a variety of tools that allow you to control how you much more convenient to handle detailed edits, using point
draw, select, or modify door elements. The Property bar lets selection mode.
you modify a variety of settings, including the number of
sides on a multigon or the size of your workspace. To use object selection mode
■ On the Property bar, click Object in the Edit Level
To set the workspace boundary section or right-click an object and click Object
1 On the Property bar, type new values in the Width and Selection.
Height text boxes and press ENTER.
To use point selection mode
2 (optional) If you have already drawn objects in the design
window, check Scale Objects to resize them accordingly. ■ On the Property bar, click Points in the Edit Level section
or right-click an object and click Point Selection.
To adjust the nudge rate
■ On the Property bar, type a new value in the Nudge Rate
Using Nudge, Snap Tools and the Grid
text box, then press ENTER. Once you’ve placed a door object, you can precisely move it
into position using Nudge. Nudge utilizes the arrow keys to
To adjust the join sensitivity move selected objects, or features, a specified distance. For
■ On the Property bar, type a new value in the Join more information on using Nudge, see “Using Nudge”,
Sensitivity text box then press ENTER. A lower value which begins on page 153.
means that you must position objects closer to join them. Nudge works in tandem with the Snap Grid. To learn more
about the Snap Grid, see “Using the Grid”, which begins on
To adjust the drawing precision page 16.
■ On the Property bar, click Inches or Feet - Inches, in the With snaps, you can define exactly where door objects are
Precision section. Measurements on the status bar placed. You can move through the Snaps Toolbar with the Tab
change to reflect your preference. key. Each time you press Tab, the next Snap Tool is activated,
Shift-Tab reverses the process. For more information, see
To set the tracking constraints “Punch! Software Primer”, which begins on page 27.
■ On the Property bar, click Constrain to Angle or
Grid settings have a direct impact on the ease of aligning
Constrain to Roof Pitch in the Tracking Constraints
door objects, snapping objects to the grid and so on. When
section. When Constrain to Roof Pitch is selected,
using the Snap to Grid feature, items that are dragged and
polygons and lines at the top of the door design
dropped on the design window are automatically snapped, or
automatically constrain to the roof pitch in your home
placed, to align with the current grid. By default, Snap to
design.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 199


Chapter 26 Door Designer

Grid is turned on. For more information, see “Using the To move doors between categories
Grid”, which begins on page 16. 1 On the Property bar, click the down arrow next to
Doors, then select Door Organizer. The Door Organizer
Managing Door Designs dialog box is displayed.
Door Designer not only allows you to save new doors for use
in your Punch! drawings, it also has easy-to-use tools for
organizing and managing door libraries.

To import an existing door design


1 On the Property bar, click the down arrow next to Doors,
then select a Door library. The Preview Bar changes to
display doors in this library.
2 (optional) On the Property bar, check the Replace
Existing checkbox to remove existing door designs from
the design window as you import from the library. When
this checkbox is unchecked, imported designs are placed
on top of existing designs.
3 (optional) On the Property bar, check the Scale to
Workspace checkbox to automatically resize the door
design to the current workspace size as you import from 2 On the left side of the Door Organizer, select a category.
the library. 3 On the right side of the Door Organizer, select a
4 Click a door design on the Preview Bar and drag it into category.
the Design Window. 4 Click to select the door you want to move.

To save a new door design 5 (optional) Click the Info button to display information
about the selected door.
1 On the File menu, click Save Door to Library or click the
Save Door to Library button on the Property bar. The 6 (optional) Click the Delete button to permanently remove
Save Door to Category dialog box is displayed. the selected door.

2 (optional) In the Door Category section, click to save the 7 Click an arrow button to move the selected door from one
door to a different category. of the selected categories to the other.
8 Click Close.

To create, delete or rename a door category


1 On the Property bar, click the down arrow next to
Doors, then select Door Organizer. The Door Organizer
dialog box is displayed.

3 (optional) Click New to create a new door category.


Select a folder in which to create the new category, then
type a name for the new category and click OK.
4 Type a name for the new door in the Door Name text
box. New door names can contain up to 44 characters.
5 Type a description of the new door in the Door
Description text box. New door descriptions can contain
up to 78 characters.
6 Click OK.

200 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Placing Custom Doors In Your Punch! Drawing

6 (optional) Click to set the door swing, if necessary.

7 (optional) Type the Width, Height, Elevation and Trim


Width to customize them.

2 (optional) In the Category section, click the New button. Note: Any changes made on the Door Properties bar,
Select a folder in which to create the new category, then become the default and will be used the next time a door is
type a name for the new category and click OK. placed.

3 (optional) In the Category section, click Delete. Select a


folder to delete and click OK.
4 (optional) In the Category section, click Rename. Select
a folder to rename and click OK. Type a new name for
the category and click OK again.
5 Click Close.

Placing Custom Doors In Your Punch!


Drawing
Once you’ve designed a custom door, you can place it in your
Punch! design as you would any other door, making sure to
select the custom door library before you place the door. In
the 2D design window, custom doors are displayed the same
as standard doors, but they are fully rendered in LiveView.

To add a custom door


1 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Door Tool. The
Door Properties Bar is displayed.
2 On the Door Properties Bar, click theDoor
Style button, then click Custom from the pop-
up window that is displayed. The Preview Bar displays
the doors available in the current library.
3 Click the down arrow next to Doors at the top of the
Preview Bar, then select a library.
4 Click a door in the Preview Bar to select it.
5 On the Design window, click a wall where you want to
place a door.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 201


Chapter 26 Door Designer

202 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Chapter 27

Window Designer
Whether it’s selecting the number of panes in a bay window, or detailing window shapes, Window Designer lets you create
custom windows that behave and render like any other window in Punch! AS4000.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 203


Chapter 27 Window Designer

Designing Custom Windows Editing Your Window Design


With Punch! Window Designer, you can create custom Rather than draw each geometric feature of your window
windows by using an unlimited combination of the three casing, sill or grill separately, use Window Designer’s editing
window components. tools to reshape, reposition, re-orient or even join existing
window elements.
Window Casing is the trim that surrounds the window
opening. You can draw a simple rectangular opening or you The following procedures explain steps for moving, resizing,
can combine shapes to create a more ornate window casing. or rotating window elements. For more information on
reshaping and joining objects, see “Reshaping Elements” on
Window Sills are added to your design by drawing 2D shapes
page 36. For more information on flipping and mirroring
within the confines of the casing.
objects, see “Using Flip and Mirror” on page 37.
Raised Grills add elegance to your window design after you
have added the casing and sills. As you draw, you can set the To nudge a window element
width of the grills on the Property bar. Wherever you want 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
your window design to include glass, simply leave those
areas empty. 2 Click the object to select it.
3 On the Edit menu, click Nudge, then click the direction
Launching Window Designer (up, down, left, right).
■ Launch Window Designer by clicking the 4 (optional) Use the arrow keys on your keyboard to nudge
Window Designer icon on the PowerTool Bar. the object or feature.
Note: For more information on adjusting the Nudge Rate,
Drawing Window Components see “Controlling Drawing Settings” on page 205.
You can modify an existing window design or draw your
own custom windows from scratch. As you draw each To resize window elements
component, Punch! displays your window design in 3D. 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
Window Designer has three drawing modes that let you
design windows from the outside to the inside. 2 Click a window element to select it.
3 Click and hold down the mouse button, drag the segment
■ Casing. Start by drawing the trim to surround your
or point to a new location, then release the mouse button.
custom window.
■ Sills. Next, draw the wood trim that comprises the base Note: To constrain movements horizontally or vertically,
of your window. press SHIFT, while reshaping the object.
■ Grills. Finally, add detailed grillwork to define panes in a
window. Wherever you want your window design to To move window elements
include glass, simply leave those areas empty.
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
Each of the three drawing modes features an assortment of 2 Click a window element to select it.
2D drawing tools. For best results, use these tools in
conjunction with snaps and editing tools to reshape window 3 On the Edit menu, click Move. The Move dialog box is
elements, minimize repetition and increase accuracy. For displayed.
more information about snaps, see “Snap Basics” on page
29. For more information about using editing tools, see
“Editing Your Window Design” on page 204.
Tip: When drawing multiple instances of a window object,
be sure to turn Auto Reset off. On the Options menu, click to
uncheck Auto Reset Tools. When Auto Reset Tools is 4 Click either Cartesian or Polar, then type amount you
unchecked, you can draw concurrent window objects without want the object moved in the appropriate text boxes.
selecting the corresponding window tool each time. 5 Click OK. The object is moved based on the coordinates
you specified.

204 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Controlling Drawing Settings

Note: Coordinates are measured in inches or they can be To adjust the join sensitivity
measured in feet and inches, separated by a hyphen. ■ On the Property bar, type a new value in the Join
Sensitivity text box, then press ENTER. A lower value
To place a window element on top of another object means that you must position objects closer to join them.
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click the object you want to place on top. To adjust the drawing precision

3 On the Edit menu, click Bring To Front or click Bring To ■ On the Property bar, click Inches or Feet - Inches, in the
Front on the Property bar that is displayed. Precision section. Measurements on the status bar
change to reflect your preference.
To place a window element behind another object
To set the tracking constraints
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
■ On the Property bar, click Constrain to Angle or
2 Click the group you want to place on bottom. Constrain to Roof Pitch, in the Tracking Constraints
3 On the Edit menu, click Send To Back or click Send To section. When Constrain to Roof Pitch is selected,
Back on the Property bar that is displayed. polygons and lines at the top of the window design
automatically constrain to the roof pitch in your home
To remove window elements design.
■ Click the object to select it then right-click and click
To control automatic dimensioning
Clear.
■ While in an active drawing mode, on the Property bar,
To select the next window element check the Auto Dim checkbox to insert a dimension for
any window element you draw.
■ On the Standard toolbar, click the Select Next
Object tool. Window Designer selects the objects in
the order you placed them. Using Object or Point Selection Modes
Object Selection Mode is active by default. Object selection,
To select the previous window element along with point selection, controls how your edits impact
■ On the Standard toolbar, click the Select Previous your object. If you are in object selection mode, changes
Object tool. Window Designer selects the objects in affect the object as a whole. If you are working in point
reverse order. selection mode, each edge or corner of the object is treated
separately, as you edit.
Controlling Drawing Settings In point selection mode, you are able to resize or reshape an
There are a variety of tools that allow you to control how you object by moving one of its individual points. While it is
draw, select or modify window elements. The Property bar easy to move an entire object in object selection mode, it is
lets you modify a variety of settings, including the number of much more convenient to handle detailed edits using point
sides on a multigon or the size of your workspace. selection mode.

To set the workspace boundary To use object selection mode

1 On the Property bar, type new values in the Width and ■ On the Property bar, click Object, in the Edit Level
Height text boxes and press ENTER. section, or right-click an object and click Object
Selection.
2 (optional) If you have already drawn objects in the design
window, check Scale Objects to resize them accordingly. To use point selection mode

To adjust the nudge rate ■ On the Property bar, click Points, in the Edit Level
section, or right-click an object and click Point Selection.
■ On the Property bar, type a new value in the Nudge Rate
text box, then press ENTER.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 205


Chapter 27 Window Designer

Using Nudge, Snap Tools and the Grid To save a new window design
Once you’ve placed a window object, you can precisely 1 On the File menu, click Save Window to Library or
move it into position using Nudge. Nudge utilizes the arrow click the Save Window to Library button on the Property
keys to move selected objects, or features, a specified bar. The Save Window to Category dialog box is
distance. For more information on using Nudge, see “Using displayed.
Nudge”, which begins on page 153. 2 (optional) In the Window Category section, click to save
Nudge works in tandem with the Snap Grid. To learn more the window to a different category.
about the Snap Grid, see “Using the Grid”, which begins on
page 16.
With snaps, you can define exactly where window objects are
placed. You can move through the Snaps Toolbar with the Tab
key. Each time you press Tab, the next Snap Tool is activated,
Shift-Tab reverses the process. For more information, see
“Punch! Software Primer”, which begins on page 27.
Grid settings have a direct impact on the ease of aligning 3 (optional) Click New to create a new window category.
window objects, snapping objects to the grid and so on. Select a folder in which to create the new category, then
When using the Snap to Grid feature, items that are dragged type a name for the new category and click OK.
and dropped on the design window are automatically 4 Type a name for the new window in the Window Name
snapped, or placed, to align with the current grid. By text box. New window names can contain up to 44
default, Snap to Grid is turned on. For more information, see characters.
“Using the Grid”, which begins on page 16.
5 Type a description of the new window in the Window
Description text box. New window descriptions can
Managing Window Designs contain up to 78 characters.
Window Designer not only allows you to save new windows 6 Click OK.
for use in your Punch! drawings, it also has easy-to-use tools
for organizing and managing window libraries. To move windows between categories
To import an existing window design 1 On the Property bar, click the down arrow next to
Windows, then select Window Organizer. The Window
1 On the Property bar, click the down arrow next to Organizer dialog box is displayed.
Windows, then select a Window library. The Preview
Bar changes to display windows in this library.
2 (optional) On the Property bar, check the Replace
Existing checkbox to remove existing window designs
from the design window, as you import from the library.
When this checkbox is unchecked, imported designs are
placed on top of existing designs.
3 (optional) On the Property bar, check the Scale to
Workspace checkbox to automatically resize the window
design to the current workspace size, as you import from
the library.
4 Click a window design on the Preview Bar and drag it
into the Design Window.

2 On the left side of the Window Organizer, select a


category.

206 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Placing Custom Windows In Your Punch! Drawing

3 On the right side of the Window Organizer, select a displayed the same as standard windows, but they are fully
category. rendered in LiveView.
4 Click to select the window you want to move.
To add a custom window
5 (optional) Click the Info button to display information
about the selected window. 1 On the Floor Plan tab, click the Window Tool. The
Window Properties Bar is displayed.
6 (optional) Click the Delete button to permanently remove
the selected window. 2 On the Window Properties Bar, click Window
Style button, then click Custom from the pop-
7 Click an arrow button to move the selected window from up window that is displayed. The Preview Bar displays
one of the selected categories to the other. the windows available in the current library.
8 Click Close. 3 Click the down arrow next to Windows, at the top of the
Preview Bar, then select a library.
To create, delete or rename a window category
4 Click a window in the Preview Bar to select it.
1 On the Property bar, click the down arrow next to
Windows, then select Window Organizer. The Window 5 On the Design window, click a wall where you want to
Organizer dialog box is displayed. place a window.

6 (optional) Type the Width, Height, Elevation and Trim


Width to customize them.
7 (optional) For double-hung or casement/picture
windows, specify the grill spacing.
Note: Any changes made on the Window Properties bar
become the default and will be used the next time a window
is placed.

2 (optional) In the Category section, click the New button.


Select a folder in which to create the new category, then
type a name for the new category and click OK.
3 (optional) In the Category section, click Delete. Select a
folder to delete and click OK.
4 (optional) In the Category section, click Rename. Select
a folder to rename and click OK. Type a new name for
the category and click OK again.
5 Click Close.

Placing Custom Windows In Your Punch!


Drawing
Once you’ve designed a custom window, you can place it in
your Punch! design as you would any other window, making
sure to select the custom window library before you place
the window. In the 2D design window, custom windows are

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 207


Chapter 27 Window Designer

208 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Chapter 28

Cabinet Wizard
Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 has a complete line of cabinets, furniture and appliances that you can drag
and drop onto your design from the Object Preview Bar. For more information, see “Objects Preview Bar”, which begins
on page 170.
In addition to the available pre-drawn objects, with Punch! Cabinet Wizard you can build custom cabinets to fit almost any
design. Whether you choose to add cabinets to your workshop, kitchen or bathroom and so on, Cabinet Wizard makes it
easy.
Although they are not set in stone, here are some basic kitchen design dimensions and clearances:
■ Stock sizes begin at 9" width and increase in 3" increments
■ Standard base cabinets are 36" high and at least 21" deep
■ Standard wall cabinets are 12" deep and 30" high (they may be shorter if they are over a refrigerator, microwave and so
on)
■ Allow 18" between the countertop and the bottom of the wall cabinet above it
■ Leave 24" of countertop space on at least one side of the sink
■ Place the dishwasher within 3 feet of the sink
■ Leave 15-18" of free counter space beside both the refrigerator and the cooking surface
■ Cook tops should be no closer than 3" to the wall
■ Electrical outlets that are near water should be specified as GFI
■ Leave at least 30" of clearance in front of the tub or shower stall
■ Standard vanity height is 32", but you may prefer higher or lower
■ Whirlpool tubs typically need a space that is 36" x 72", but many take a larger area
■ Allow at least 36" of clear space in front of the toilet or bidet
■ Keep the sink at least 15" from the nearest wall and, when designing a bathroom with twin lavatories, at least 30" from
each other

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 209


Chapter 28 Cabinet Wizard

Designing Full Cabinets


A full cabinet is one that has both a base and a top cabinet.
Stock sizes begin at 9" and increase in 3" increments. With
Cabinet Wizard, you can design custom cabinets with just a
few mouse clicks. Standard base cabinets are 36" high and at
least 21" deep. Standard wall cabinets are 12" deep and 30"
high, although they may be shorter if they are over a
refrigerator, microwave and so on. Allow 18" between the
countertop and the bottom of the wall cabinet above it.

To design a full cabinet


1 Open Cabinet Wizard from Punch! AS4000 by
6 Type the base length, width and depth you require in the
clicking the Launch Cabinet Wizard icon on the
A, B and C text boxes.
PowerTools tab, the Cabinet Wizard dialog is
displayed. 7 Type the top cabinet elevation, height and depth you
require in the D, E and F text boxes.
8 Specify the width and height of the toekick you require in
the G text box.
9 Specify the thickness of the countertop you plan to use in
text box H.
10 Type the rail and stile dimensions in the I and J text
boxes.
11 Type the door height in text box K.
12 Specify the number of doors you want.
13 Click to uncheck drawers, if you do not want drawers in
the base cabinet.
2 Click the radio button next to Full Cabinet; the cabinet
14 Click to uncheck backsplash, if you do not want this
rendering changes to reflect your choice.
feature or type the backsplash height in text box L.
3 Click Next.
15 Click the radio button next to the style of trim you
require. Click Finish.
16 (optional) At any point, click Back to return to the
previous dialog box.

Designing Base Cabinets


Cabinet Wizard has four styles of base cabinets, including
one standard base cabinet and three that feature built-in
appliances. Standard base cabinets are 36" high and at least
21" deep. You may choose to design base cabinets at two
heights, one height for standing activities (usually 36-45")
and a lower height for activities performed while seated
(usually 28-36").
4 Click the radio button next to the direction the cabinet
will face, when imported into your design, then click To design a base cabinet
Next.
1 Launch Cabinet Wizard.
5 (optional) Type an angle in the dialog box, then click
Next. 2 Click the radio button next to Base Cabinet; the cabinet
rendering changes to reflect your choice.

210 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Designing Top Cabinets

3 Click Next. 2 Click the radio button next to Top Cabinet; the cabinet
4 Click the radio button next to the direction the cabinet rendering changes to reflect your choice.
will face, when imported into your design, then click 3 Click Next.
Next. 4 Click the radio button next to the direction the cabinet
5 (optional) Type an angle in the text box, then click Next. will face, when imported into your design, then click
Next.
5 (optional) Type an angle in the text box, then click Next.

6 Type the base length, width and depth you require in the
A, B and C text boxes.
7 Specify the width and height of the toekick you require in 6 Type the base length in text box A.
the G text box. 7 Type the rail and stile dimensions in the I and J text
8 Specify the thickness of the countertop you plan to use in boxes.
text box H. 8 Specify the number of doors you want.
9 Type the rail and stile dimensions in the I and J text 9 Click the radio button next to the style of trim you
boxes. require. Click Finish.
10 Type the door height in text box K. 10 (optional) At any point, click Back to return to the
11 Specify the number of doors you want. previous dialog box.
12 Click to uncheck drawers, if you do not want drawers in
the base cabinet. Designing Islands
13 Click to uncheck backsplash, if you do not want this You can increase counter space by designing an island.
feature or type the backsplash height in text box L. Islands come in many styles and may contain cooktops, sinks
and so on. In a well-designed kitchen, an island will not
14 Click the radio button next to the style of trim you inhibit the “work triangle”, the pattern beginning at the sink,
require. Click Finish. then going to the refrigerator, continuing on to the cooking
15 (optional) At any point, click Back to return to the surface, then returning to the sink.
previous dialog box.
To design an island
Designing Top Cabinets 1 Launch Cabinet Wizard.
Cabinet Wizard has two styles of top cabinets, including one 2 Click the radio button next to Island Cabinet; the cabinet
standard top cabinet and one featuring a built-in microwave. rendering changes to reflect your choice.
Standard base cabinets are 36" high, at least 21" deep and
18" above the base cabinet. 3 Click Next.
4 Click the radio button next to the direction the cabinet
To design a top cabinet will face, when imported into your design, then click
1 Launch Cabinet Wizard. Next.
5 (optional) Type an angle in the text box, then click Next.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 211


Chapter 28 Cabinet Wizard

6 Type the base length, width and depth you require in the 6 Type the base length, width and depth you require in the
A, B and C text boxes. A, B and C text boxes.
7 Specify the width and height of the toekick you require in 7 Type the rail and stile dimensions in the I and J text
the G text box. boxes.
8 Specify the thickness of the countertop you plan to use in 8 Specify the number of doors you want.
text box H. 9 Click the radio button next to the style of trim you
9 Type the rail and stile dimensions in the I and J text require. Click Finish.
boxes. 10 (optional) At any point, click Back to return to the
10 Type the door height in text box K. previous dialog box.
11 Specify the number of doors you want.
To design an oven built into cabinets
12 Click to uncheck drawers, if you do not want drawers in
1 Launch Cabinet Wizard.
the base cabinet.
2 Click the radio button next to Double-Oven, Single-
13 Click the radio button next to the style of trim you
Oven or Range-Oven Combo; the cabinet rendering
require. Click Finish.
changes to reflect your choice.
14 (optional) At any point, click Back to return to the
3 Click Next.
previous dialog box.
4 Click the radio button next to the direction the cabinet
Designing Cabinets with Built-in will face, when imported into your design, then click
Appliances Next.
Cabinet Wizard lets you install your appliances, too. 5 (optional) Type an angle in the text box, then click Next.
Refrigerators, both side-by-side and stacked, range tops and
ovens are easy to add to your design.

To design a refrigerator built into cabinets


1 Launch Cabinet Wizard.
2 Click the radio button next to Refrigerator Cabinet (Side-
by-Side) or Refrigerator Cabinet (Stacked); the cabinet
rendering changes to reflect your choice.
3 Click Next.
4 Click the radio button next to the direction the cabinet
will face, when imported into your design, then click
Next. 6 Type the base length, width and depth you require in the
5 (optional) Type an angle in the text box, then click Next. A, B and C text boxes.

212 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Defining Dimension Increments

7 Type the rail and stile dimensions in the I and J text


boxes.
8 Specify the number of doors you want.
9 Click the radio button next to the style of trim you
require. Click Finish.
10 (optional) At any point, click Back to return to the
previous dialog box.

To elevate a built-in oven


1 Open Cabinet Wizard from Punch! AS4000 by
clicking the Launch Cabinet Wizard icon on the
PowerTools tab; the Cabinet Wizard dialog is 11 On the Size menu, click Appliance Elevation. The
displayed. Appliance Elevation text box is displayed.
2 Click the radio button next to Double-Oven or Single-
Oven; the cabinet rendering changes to reflect your
choice.
3 Click Next.
4 Click the radio button next to the direction the cabinet 12 Type the dimension in the text box, then click OK.
will face, when imported into your design, then click
Next.
5 (optional) Type an angle in the text box, then click Next.

Defining Dimension Increments


You can gain great control over changes in the dimensions of
6 Type the base length, width and depth you require in the each cabinet by specifying a dimension increment. This
A, B and C text boxes. increment will be the measurement amount used when you
7 Type the rail and stile dimensions in the I and J text click the arrows to alter each dimension.
boxes.
To change the dimension increment
8 Specify 0 (zero) doors.
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Dimension
9 Click the radio button next to the style of trim you Increment Tool. The Increments text box is
require. displayed.
10 (optional) At any point, click Back to return to the
previous dialog box. Click Finish.

2 Type the dimension in the text box, then click OK.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 213


Chapter 28 Cabinet Wizard

Specifying a Trim Style To change the base cabinet height


Punch! AS4000 offers three trim styles for the front of your 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Base Cabinet
cabinets. You can mix and match or specify that all cabinets Height tool or, on the Size menu, click Base Cabinet
use the same trim. Height. The Base Cabinet Height dialog box is displayed.

To specify a trim style


1 On the Options menu, click Trim Style. The Trim Style
dialog box is displayed.
2 Type the height of the cabinet in the text box.
3 Click OK. The cabinet height changes to reflect the new
measurement.

To change the base cabinet height by set


increments
■ On the Standard toolbar, click the up or down arrow next
2 Click the radio button next to the trim style you want to to the Base Cabinet Width Tool. Each click will increase
use for your cabinetry, then click OK. (or decrease) the dimension by the set increment.
Note: The current measurement is always displayed next to
Customizing Cabinet Features the incremental arrows.
Once the Cabinet Wizard has placed the cabinet in the center
of the design window, you can customize the size, material, To change the base cabinet depth
color and so on. 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Base Cabinet
Depth tool or, on the Size menu, click Base Cabinet
To change the base cabinet length Depth. The Base Cabinet Depth dialog box is displayed.
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Base Cabinet
Length tool or, on the Size menu, click Base Cabinet
Length. The Base Cabinet Length dialog box is
displayed.
2 Type the depth of the cabinet in the text box.
3 Click OK. The cabinet depth changes to reflect the new
measurement.

2 Type the length of the cabinet in the text box. To change the base cabinet depth by set
3 Click OK. The cabinet length changes to reflect the new increments
measurement. ■ On the Standard toolbar, click the up or down arrow next
to the Base Cabinet Width Tool. Each click will increase
To change the base cabinet length by set (or decrease) the dimension by the set increment.
increments
Note: The current measurement is always displayed next to
■ On the Standard toolbar, click the up or the incremental arrows.
down arrow next to the Base Cabinet
Length Tool. Each click will increase (or decrease) the To change the top cabinet elevation
dimension by the set increment.
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Top Cabinet
Note: The current measurement is always displayed next to Elevation tool or, on the Size menu, click Top
the incremental arrows. Cabinet Elevation. The Top Cabinet Elevation dialog box
is displayed.

214 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Customizing Cabinet Features

3 Click OK. The cabinet width changes to reflect the new


measurement.

To change the top cabinet depth by set increments


2 Type the elevation of the cabinet in the text box. ■ On the Standard toolbar, click the up or down arrow next
3 Click OK. The cabinet elevation changes to reflect the to the Top Cabinet Depth Tool. Each click will increase
new measurement. (or decrease) the dimension by the set increment.
Note: The current measurement is always displayed next to
To change the top cabinet elevation by set the incremental arrows.
increments
■ On the Standard toolbar, click the up or down arrow next To change the countertop thickness
to the Top Cabinet Elevation Tool. Each click will 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Countertop
increase (or decrease) the dimension by the set Thickness tool or, on the Size menu, click
increment. Countertop Thickness. The Countertop Thickness dialog
Note: The current measurement is always displayed next to box is displayed.
the incremental arrows.

To change the top cabinet height


1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Top Cabinet
Height tool or, on the Size menu, click Base Cabinet 2 Type the thickness of the countertop in the text box.
Height. The Top Cabinet Height dialog box is displayed.
3 Click OK. The countertop thickness changes to reflect
the new measurement.

To change the countertop thickness by set


increments
2 Type the height of the cabinet in the text box. ■ On the Standard toolbar, click the up or down arrow next
3 Click OK. The cabinet height changes to reflect the new to the Countertop Thickness Tool. Each click will
measurement. increase (or decrease) the dimension by the set
increment.
To change the top cabinet height by set increments Note: The current measurement is always displayed next to
■ On the Standard toolbar, click the up or down arrow next the incremental arrows.
to the Top Cabinet Height Tool. Each click will increase
(or decrease) the dimension by the set increment. To change the backsplash height
Note: The current measurement is always displayed next to 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Backsplash
the incremental arrows. Height tool or, on the Size menu, click Backsplash
Height. The Backsplash Height dialog box is
To change the top cabinet depth displayed.
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Top Cabinet
Depth tool or, on the Size menu, click Top Cabinet
Depth. The Top Cabinet Depth dialog box is displayed.

2 Type the height of the backsplash in the text box.


3 Click OK. The backsplash height changes to reflect the
new measurement.

2 Type the depth of the cabinet in the text box.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 215


Chapter 28 Cabinet Wizard

To change the backsplash height by set increments Note: The current measurement is always displayed next to
■ On the Standard toolbar, click the up or down arrow next the incremental arrows.
to the Backsplash Height Tool. Each click will increase
(or decrease) the dimension by the set increment. To change the rail height
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Rail Height tool
Note: The current measurement is always displayed next to
or, on the Size menu, click Rail Height. The Rail
the incremental arrows.
Height dialog box is displayed.
To change the backsplash thickness
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Backsplash
Thickness tool or, on the Size menu, click
Backsplash Thickness. The Backsplash Thickness dialog
box is displayed. 2 Type the rail height in the text box.
3 Click OK. The rail height changes to reflect the new
measurement.

To change the rail height by set increments


2 Type the thickness of the backsplash in the text box. ■ On the Standard toolbar, click the up or down arrow next
to the Rail Height Tool. Each click will increase (or
3 Click OK. The backsplash thickness changes to reflect
decrease) the dimension by the set increment.
the new measurement.
Note: The current measurement is always displayed next to
To change the backsplash thickness by set the incremental arrows.
increments
■ On the Standard toolbar, click the up or down arrow next To change the stile width
to the Backsplash Thickness Tool. Each click will 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Stile Width tool
increase (or decrease) the dimension by the set or, on the Size menu, click Stile Width. The Stile
increment. Width dialog box is displayed.
Note: The current measurement is always displayed next to
the incremental arrows.

To change the toe kick dimension


1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Toe Kick tool or, 2 Type the stile width in the text box.
on the Size menu, click Toe Kick Size. The Toe
3 Click OK. The stile width changes to reflect the new
Kick Height dialog box is displayed.
measurement.

To change the stile width by set increments


■ On the Standard toolbar, click the up or down arrow next
to the Stile Width Tool. Each click will increase (or
2 Type the toe kick size in the text box. decrease) the dimension by the set increment.
3 Click OK. The toe kick dimensions change to reflect the Note: The current measurement is always displayed next to
new measurement. the incremental arrows.

To change the toe kick by set increments To change the door height
■ On the Standard toolbar, click the up or down arrow next 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Door Height tool
to the Toe Kick Tool. Each click will increase (or or, on the Size menu, click Door Height. The Door
decrease) the dimension by the set increment. Height dialog box is displayed.

216 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Rendering Options

2 Type the door height in the text box.


3 Click OK. The door height changes to reflect the new
measurement.

To change the door height by set increments


■ On the Standard toolbar, click the up or down arrow next
to the Door Height Tool. Each click will increase (or
decrease) the dimension by the set increment.
Note: The current measurement is always displayed next to
the incremental arrows.
Exporting to 3D Custom Workshop
Rendering Options By exporting a Cabinet Wizard design to 3D Custom
Workshop, the smallest details can be added or altered. For
With Cabinet Wizard’s rendering options you can view your example, add knobs to cabinet doors, change the handles
cabinet in either Final Quality or ClearView. from the right side to the left side of the refrigerator and so
on. For more information, see “3D Custom Workshop”,
To view a cabinet using ClearView which begins on page 341.
■ On the View menu, click Render ClearView or
click the ClearView Tool. To export a cabinet to 3D Custom Workshop
1 On the File menu, click Export to Custom Workshop.
The Save As dialog box is displayed.
2 In the File Name text box, type a name. Cabinet Wizard
automatically adds the POB extension. Click OK.
Note: You may then open the file in 3D Custom Workshop.

To render a cabinet in 3D final quality


■ On the View menu, click Render 3D Final Quality
or click the 3D Final Quality Tool.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 217


Chapter 28 Cabinet Wizard

218 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Chapter 29

Fireplace Wizard
Adding a fireplace is now #10 on the “Things that Add Value to Your Home” list! With Punch! Fireplace Wizard, it’s a
snap to do.
Once you have stepped through the Wizard you are able to customize every feature of your Fireplace. Then you can add
materials and colors to create a truly individual home feature!

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 219


Chapter 29 Fireplace Wizard

Fireplace Wizard
Punch! Fireplace Wizard walks you through the initial design
process, then allows total customization of each feature.

To design a full fireplace


1 Open Fireplace Wizard from Punch! AS4000 by
clicking the Launch Fireplace Wizard icon, on
the PowerTools tab; the Fireplace Wizard dialog
is displayed.

4 (optional) Type new dimensions in the appropriate text


box, then click Next.
Note: Don’t worry, you can always change these
dimensions at a later time.

2 Click Next.

5 (optional) Check the feature(s) you want and type new


dimensions in the appropriate dialog box(es).

3 Click the radio button next to the type of fireplace you


want to design, then click Next.

6 Click Finish. Your fireplace is displayed.

220 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Defining Dimension Increments

Defining Dimension Increments To change the firebox dimensions


You can gain great control over changes in the dimensions of 1 On the General tab, type a dimension
each area of fireplace design by specifying a dimension in the Firebox Width text box or click
increment. This increment will be the measurement amount the up or down arrow. Each click will
used when you click the arrows to alter each dimension. increase (or decrease) the dimension
by the set increment.
To change the dimension increment 2 On the General tab, type a dimension
1 On the Design menu, click Set Dimensions Increment. in the Firebox Height text box or
The Increment Value dialog box is displayed. click the up or down arrow. Each
click will
increase (or decrease) the dimension by the set
increment.
3 On the General tab, type a dimension in the Firebox
Depth text box or click the up or down arrow. Each click
2 Type the dimension in the text box, then click OK. will increase (or decrease) the dimension by the set
increment.
Customizing the General Dimensions 4 On the General Tab, type a dimension in the Firebox
The General Tab in Punch! Fireplace Wizard allows total Elevation text box or click the up or down arrow. Each
control over dimensions of each face and even the firebox. click will increase (or decrease) the dimension by the set
As you make changes, the preview window will display increment.
them.
Customizing Hearth & Mantel Dimensions
To select a face
The Hearth & Mantel Tab is where you can customize these
1 On the Design menu, click Face, then click the needed features. As you make changes, the preview window will
face on the pop-up menu. display them.
2 (optional) Click a Work on Face button above the Face
Dimension section of the General Tab. To specify a hearth
■ Check the Include Hearth box on the Hearth & Mantel
Note: All faces may not be available at all times. Some
tab.
fireplaces may have three faces, while others may have only
one face.
To change the hearth dimensions
To change the face dimensions 1 On the Hearth & Mantel tab, type a
dimension in the Hearth Width text
1 On the General tab, type a
box or click the up or down arrow.
dimension in the Face Width text
Each click will increase (or
box or click the up or down arrow.
decrease) the dimension by the set
Each click will increase (or
increment.
decrease) the dimension by the set
increment. 2 On the Hearth & Mantel tab, type a
dimension in the Hearth Height text box or click the up or
2 On the General tab, type a dimension in the Face Height
down arrow. Each click will increase (or decrease) the
text box or click the up or down arrow. Each click will
dimension by the set increment.
increase (or decrease) the dimension by the set
increment. 3 On the Hearth & Mantel tab, type a dimension in the
3 On the General tab, type a dimension in the Face Depth Hearth Depth text box or click the up or down arrow.
text box or click the up or down arrow. Each click will Each click will increase (or decrease) the dimension by
increase (or decrease) the dimension by the set the set increment.
increment.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 221


Chapter 29 Fireplace Wizard

To specify a mantel To change the chimney pot dimensions


■ Check the Include Mantel box on the Hearth & Mantel 1 On the Chimney tab, type a
tab. dimension in the Pot Width text
box or click the up or down arrow.
To change the mantel dimensions Each click will increase (or
1 On the Hearth & Mantel tab, type a decrease) the dimension by the set
dimension in the Mantel Width text increment.
box or click the up or down arrow. 2 On the Chimney tab, type a
Each click will increase (or decrease) dimension in the Pot Height text box or click the up or
the dimension by the set increment. down arrow. Each click will increase (or decrease) the
2 On the Hearth & Mantel tab, type a dimension by the set increment.
dimension in the Mantel Height text 3 On the Chimney tab, type a dimension in the Pot Depth
box or click the up or down arrow. text box or click the up or down arrow. Each click will
Each click will increase (or decrease) the dimension by increase (or decrease) the dimension by the set
the set increment. increment.
3 On the Hearth & Mantel tab, type a dimension in the
Mantel Depth text box or click the up or down arrow. Rendering Options
Each click will increase (or decrease) the dimension by With Fireplace Wizard’s rendering options you can view
the set increment. your fireplace in either Final Quality or ClearView.
4 On the Hearth & Mantel Tab, type a dimension in the
Mantel Elevation text box or click the up or down arrow. To view a fireplace using ClearView
Each click will increase (or decrease) the dimension by ■ On the View menu, click Render ClearView or
the set increment. click the ClearView Tool.

Customizing the Chimney Dimensions


The Chimney Tab in Punch! Fireplace Wizard allows you to
update whether or not you want a chimney and lets you
specify its dimensions. As you make changes, the preview
window will display them.

To specify a chimney
■ Check the Include Chimney box on the Chimney tab.

To change the chimney dimensions


1 On the Chimney tab, type a dimension
in the Chimney Width text box or
click the up or down arrow. Each click
will increase (or decrease) the To render a fireplace in 3D final quality
dimension by the set increment.
■ On the View menu, click Render 3D Final Quality
2 On the Chimney tab, type a dimension or click the 3D Final Quality Tool.
in the Chimney Height text box or click the up or down
arrow. Each click will increase (or decrease) the
dimension by the set increment.
3 On the Chimney tab, type a dimension in the Chimney
Depth text box or click the up or down arrow. Each click
will increase (or decrease) the dimension by the set
increment.

222 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Saving a Fireplace

Closing a File
When you finish working with a file, close it to remove the
window from the screen and to free up your computer’s
memory. You have the option of placing your fireplace into
your home plan and moving it into position.

To close a file
■ On the File menu, click Exit PowerTool. The update
current design menu is displayed. Click Yes. The
fireplace will be placed in the center of the design
window.

Exporting to 3D Custom Workshop


Note: If your fireplace is currently in ClearView mode, you By exporting a Fireplace Wizard design to 3D Custom
must click the ClearView Tool to render with materials. Workshop, the smallest details can be added or altered. For
more information, see “3D Custom Workshop”, which
Saving a Fireplace begins on page 341.
When you open a file, Fireplace Wizard copies the file to
To export a fireplace to 3D Custom Workshop
your computer’s memory. As you work, you modify the copy
stored in memory. Any system failure or loss of power 1 On the File menu, click Export to Custom Workshop.
destroys that copy. To save your work permanently, you must The Save As dialog box is displayed.
save it to a file on a disk. A good rule of thumb is to save 2 In the File Name text box, type a name. Fireplace Wizard
every 15 minutes, or after you’ve completed any work you automatically adds the POB extension. Click OK.
wouldn’t want to redo.
Note: You may then open the file in 3D Custom Workshop.
When you click the Save As command, Fireplace Wizard
saves the active drawing, using the name and location you
specify. You can create more than one version of a drawing
or save copies on another disk for safekeeping. You can save
each version under a different name or you can save them
under the same name, in different folders or on different
disks.

To save an existing file


■ On the File menu, click Save or press CTRL+S.

To save a new, unnamed file


1 On the File menu, click Save As. The Save As dialog box
is displayed.
2 In the File Name text box, type a name. Fireplace Wizard
automatically adds the PFW extension.
3 Click Save.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 223


Chapter 29 Fireplace Wizard

224 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Chapter 30

Plant Editor
Punch! Plant Editor lets you take digital pictures of your favorite plants and add them to your landscape design. Although
this is a straightforward process, there are a few hints that will make the ultimate result much more satisfying.

Tips for Using Plant Editor


■ Verify that the image is level and square when taking a digital picture or scanning a photograph. If the initial
photograph is not square, use your graphics software to rotate it in half-degree increments until it is.
■ Photograph the feature when the sun is shining. This ensures more color saturation and detail of the image.
■ Take your time masking the plant; the better the mask, the better the end result.
■ Be sure to mask out the areas where the sun shines through the plant. This will create more realistic shadows.
■ Images should touch the bottom of the image area. If it is centered in the area, it will float above ground level.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 225


Chapter 30 Plant Editor

Plant Editor
You can now create custom libraries of plants with Punch!
Home Design Architectural Series 4000’s powerful Plant
Editor!

Launching Plant Editor


1 Launch Plant Editor by clicking the Plant Editor
icon on the PowerTool Bar. Plant Editor Wizard
automatically opens and the Open Bitmap File
dialog box is displayed.

7 The Plant Description menu is displayed. Type


appropriate information in the dialog boxes. Click Next.

2 In the File Name box, type the name of the file you want
to open, or search for the file by switching folders or
drives.
3 When you see the name of the file you want to open, 8 The Plant Requirements menu is displayed. Enter the
click to select it. appropriate information in the dialog boxes. Click Next.

4 Click Open.

9 The Miscellaneous menu is displayed. Enter the


appropriate information. Click Next.
5 The Plant Editor Welcome message is displayed. Click
Next.
6 (optional) Click Import and select a *.PTI file that
contains the needed plant data.

226 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Replicating Parts of the Plant

Saving an image
1 On the File menu, click Save Image as BMP, the Save
Image dialog box is displayed.
2 Type a file name in the File Name text box.
3 Click Save.

Opening an overlay mask


1 On the File menu, click Open Overlay Mask, the Open
Overlay Mask dialog box is displayed.
2 In the File Name box, type the name of the file you want
10 The Finish screen is displayed. Click where you want the to open, or search for the file by switching folders or
plant saved, then type a file name. drives.
11 Click Finish. The BMP file is displayed in the Plant 3 When you see the name of the file you want to open,
Editor edit window. click to select it.
4 Click Open.

Saving an overlay mask


1 On the File menu, click Save Overlay Mask, the Save
Overlay Mask dialog box is displayed.
2 Type a file name in the File Name text box.
3 Click Save.

Replicating Parts of the Plant


You can duplicate parts of your plant with the Replicate
Tool, making it easy to add a leaf here or a branch there.

To replicate parts of the plant


1 Click the Replicate Tool.
2 Click on the design window to define the start point.
A rubber-band rectangle is displayed and follows the
pointer.
3 Hold the mouse button down, as you define the area you
want to duplicate.
4 Release the mouse button. The selection will be active.
5 Click the selection and move it into position.

File Management
With Plant Editor you can save your image as a new BMP
image, or you can overwrite the existing file.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 227


Chapter 30 Plant Editor

228 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Chapter 31

Trim Designer
In much the same way that ornate trim pieces are milled from basic lumber, Punch! Trim Designer lets you fashion trims
by editing a basic shape. Modify one of the trims in Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000’s libraries or create
one of your own, using Trim Designer’s powerful image editing and management tools.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 229


Chapter 31 Trim Designer

Launching Trim Designer Controlling Drawing Settings


■ Launch Trim Designer by clicking the Trim There are a variety of tools that allow you to control how you
Designer icon on the PowerTool Bar. draw, select or modify trim segments in Trim Designer.

Designing Custom Trims To adjust the nudge rate


Rather than drawing your custom base and crown trims, Trim ■ On the Property bar, type a new value in the Nudge Rate
Designer lets you create custom trims for your home plan by text box, then press ENTER.
reshaping a rectangular base shape—in much the same way
that trims are milled from boards. You can also modify To control automatic dimensioning
existing trims from the Trim Library. Using standard editing ■ On the Options menu, check Automatic Dimensioning to
tools to change the location, shape or angle of individual insert a dimension for any trim segment you draw.
segments of the trim face, you can add graceful curves or
carve precision angles into the face of your custom trims.
Managing Trim Designs
To nudge a trim segment Trim Designer not only allows you to save new trims for use
in your Punch! drawings, it also has easy-to-use tools for
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
organizing and managing trim libraries.
2 Click the object to select it.
3 On the Edit menu, click Nudge, then click the direction To open a new trim design
(up, down, left, right). 1 On the File menu, click New Trim. The Trim Design
4 (optional) Use the arrow keys on your keyboard to nudge Selection dialog bog is displayed.
the object or feature.
Note: For more information on adjusting the Nudge Rate,
see “Controlling Drawing Settings” on page 230.

To resize trim segments


1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click a trim segment to select it.
3 Click and hold down the mouse button, drag the segment
to a new location, then release the mouse button.

To resize the entire trim object


1 On the Property bar, click Resize Trim. The Trim Size
dialog box is displayed. 2 Click one of the basic trim templates to select it.
3 (optional) Type new values in the Width and Height text
boxes.
4 Click OK.

To import an existing trim design


1 On the Property bar, click the down arrow next to Trims,
then select a Trim library. The Preview Bar changes to
display trims in this library.
2 Type new values in the Width and Height text boxes. 2 Double-click a trim design on the Preview Bar to place it
3 Click OK. in the Design Window.

230 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Placing Custom Trims In Your Punch! Drawing

To save a new trim design 5 (optional) Click the Info button to display information
1 On the File menu, click Save Trim to Library, or click the about the selected trim.
Save Trim to Library button on the Property bar. The 6 (optional) Click the Delete button to permanently remove
Save Trim to Category dialog box is displayed. the selected trim.
2 (optional) In the Trim Category section, click to save the 7 Click an arrow button to move the selected trim from one
trim to a different category. of the selected categories to the other.
8 Click Close.

To create, delete or rename a trim category


1 On the Property bar, click the down arrow next to Trims,
then select Trim Organizer. The Trim Organizer dialog
box is displayed.

3 (optional) Click New to create a new trim category.


Select a folder in which to create the new category, then
type a name for the new category and click OK.
4 Type a name for the new trim in the Trim Name text box.
New trim names can contain up to 44 characters.
5 Type a description of the new trim in the Trim
Description text box. New trim descriptions can contain
up to 78 characters.
6 Click OK.

To move trims between categories


1 On the Property bar, click the down arrow next to Trims,
then select Trim Organizer. The Trim Organizer dialog
box is displayed. 2 (optional) In the Category section, click the New button.
Select a folder in which to create the new category, then
type a name for the new category and click OK.
3 (optional) In the Category section, click Delete. Select a
folder to delete and click OK.
4 (optional) In the Category section, click Rename. Select
a folder to rename and click OK. Type a new name for
the category and click OK again.
5 Click Close.

Placing Custom Trims In Your Punch!


Drawing
Once you’ve created your own custom trims in the Trim
Designer, you can easily apply them back in your Punch!
Home Design Architectural Series 4000 project. Simply
2 On the left side of the Trim Organizer, select a category. navigate to the library where you stored the new trim and
drag the image to a surface in your LiveView window.
3 On the right side of the Trim Organizer, select a category.
4 Click to select the trim you want to move.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 231


Chapter 31 Trim Designer

To apply custom trims Printing Files


1 Click the Trim tab. The Preview Bar will Punch! Trim Designer prints using the current Windows
display trims available for placement. printer. You can, however, print using any installed printer.
2 On the Trim Tab, click the arrow next to Your can print your drawing in color or in black and white.
“Trim”, then select the needed trim library
from the menu. To print to fit page
1 On the File menu, click Print to Fit Page or press Ctrl+P.
A Print Manager menu will ask if you want to print your
drawing in color. Click Yes to print in color; click no to
print in greyscale. The Print dialog box is displayed.
2 Click the down arrow next to the printer name.
3 Click the printer you want to use.
4 Click the Properties button. The Properties menu is
displayed.
3 On the Preview Bar, click the custom trim
you want to apply; hold down the mouse Note: The following Properties menu is that of a popular
button and drag it onto a surface of your home in the color printer. Refer to your printer’s documentation on the
LiveView window. The custom trim you selected is use of its specific features.
applied.
5 Select the paper orientation.
Tip: To apply the same trim to multiple surfaces, select 6 Select the paper size. Typically, this will be either 8.5x11
AutoClick Placement on the pop-up menu. Then simply in (letter) or 8.5x14 in (legal).
select a trim from the Preview Bar and click each surface you
want to place it on, right-clicking when you are finished. 7 Click the down arrow next to media type. Then select the
required media.
8 Click either Auto Feeder or Manual Feed as your paper
feed method, then click Print.

232 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Chapter 32

Pool Designer
Imagine the pool of your dreams, picture it in your mind. Now make it a reality with Punch! Pool Designer! Create a pool
as extravagant or intimate as you like. Create the ultimate atmosphere by selecting just the right accessories from Pool
Designer. Get started now...

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 233


Chapter 32 Pool Designer

■ Launch Pool Designer by clicking the Pool


Designer icon on the PowerTool Bar.

Create a Pool Using Pool Wizard


The Punch! Pool Wizard guides you through the process of
selecting more advanced shaped pools, plus defining the
coping (the tiles that edge your in-ground pool), water, liner
and sizing properties of your pool. Pool Wizard also allows
you to create an above-ground pool and defines its properties.

To create a pool using Pool Wizard


1 From the Shape tab click the Pool Wizard tool.
Pool Wizard appears.

To customize coping properties in Pool Wizard


1 To change the coping width, type the width you want in
the Coping Width text box on the Properties bar.
2 To change the coping thickness, type the thickness you
want in the Coping Thickness text box on the Properties
bar.

To customize water properties in Pool Wizard

2 There are three tabs of pool types for you to choose from: 1 Your pool appears filled with water when viewed in
Basic Shapes, Advanced Shapes and Above Ground. LiveView. If you want your pool to appear empty in
Click the thumbnail for a large full-color preview of the LiveView, uncheck the checkbox next to Fill Pool.
pool shape. 2 To change the water level, type the distance you want the
water to appear from the top edge of the pool in the
Water Level text box.

To customize liner properties in Pool Wizard


1 Liner Properties specifies the depth of your pool. By
default, your pool features both a shallow end and a deep
end. Click the checkbox next to User Defined Depth
Areas to disable this feature and specify your own
shallow and deep sections on the workspace.
2 Type the depth for the shallow end of your pool in the
Shallow End Depth text box.
3 By default, the Deep End Depth checkbox is selected.
Type the depth for the Deep End of your pool in the Deep
3 After selecting your shape, customize the properties on End text box.
the Properties bar.
Note: If you uncheck the Deep End checkbox a Deep End
won’t be automatically generated.

234 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Shaping your pool

4 (optional) Deselect User Defined Depth Areas if you 5 Place the crosshair where you want the shape to begin
want to create custom shallow and deep ends using the and click and drag to the needed size. Notice Punch!
methods described in the section “Editing Your Pool automatically displays the shape’s dimensions. Release
Design” on page 242. your mouse to place the shape. The shape appears on
your workspace.
To customize the size of your pool in Pool Wizard
1 You can change the Sizing properties by entering custom To create an oval/circle shape
dimensions for your pool. In the Pool Width text box,
type the width you want. 1 On the Shape tab, click the Oval/
Circle Pool tool. The Pool Shape
2 In the Pool Height text box, type the height you want. Properties bar appears.
Note: By default, Punch! Pool Wizard automatically 2 Click the Method button on the Pool
calculates the aspect ratio to keep your shape intact. Deselect Shape Properties bar. The Method
the Maintain aspect ratio checkbox to override this feature. options appear.
3 Click the Default button to return to the pool’s original ■ Draw an oval starting from the top-left
width and height. side
■ Draw an oval starting from the center
4 When you have finished selecting your pool’s shape and
■ Draw a circle starting from the top-left
customizing its properties, click OK. Your pool appears
side
on the Pool Designer workspace.
■ Draw a circle starting from the center

Shaping your pool 3 Select which Method you want. A crosshair appears on
the workspace as you move your mouse over it.
The first step to creating the pool of your dreams is to select
4 Place the crosshair where you want the shape to appear
the shape you want. Punch! offers Pool Tools to create a pool
and click and drag to your desired size. Notice Punch!
from basic shapes and a Pool Wizard to create a more
automatically displays the shape’s dimensions. Release
advanced design.
your mouse to place the shape. The shape appears on
your workspace and the Pool Shape Properties bar
To create a rectangle shape
appears.
1 Click the Shape tab. The Shape options are displayed.
To create a polygon shape
1 On the Shape tab, click the Polygon Pool tool. A
crosshair appears on the workspace as you move
your mouse over it.
2 Click the Rectangle Pool tool
from the Shape tab. The Pool 2 Place the crosshair where you want the shape to appear.
Shape Properties bar is Click and extend the rubber band line to where you want
displayed. it. Click to place each side and continue until your shape
is complete.
3 Click the Method button on the Pool
Shape Properties bar. The Method 3 Double-click to place the shape. Your Polygon Pool
options appear. shape appears on your workspace and the Pool Shape
Properties bar is displayed.
■ Draw a rectangle starting from the top-
left side
■ Draw a rectangle starting from the
center
■ Draw a square starting from the top-left side
■ Draw a square starting from the center
4 Select which Method you want. A crosshair appears on
the workspace as you move your mouse over it.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 235


Chapter 32 Pool Designer

To create a multigon shape 6 Place the crosshair where you want the depth to appear
1 On the Shape tab, click the and click and drag to your desired size. Notice Punch!
Multigon Pool tool. The Pool automatically displays the depth’s dimensions. Release
Shape Properties bar is your mouse to place the depth. The depth appears on
displayed. your workspace and the Depth Area Properties bar
appears.
2 On the Properties bar, type the number
of sides you want your shape to have in 7 Type the depth you want in the Area Depth text box on
the #Sides text box and press ENTER. A the Properties bar and press ENTER.
crosshair appears on the workspace as
you move your mouse over it. To create a polygon depth level in your pool

3 Place the crosshair where you want the 1 Click the Depth tab. The Depth options are displayed.
shape to appear. Click and drag to extend the shape to the 2 Click the Polygon Depth tool from the Depth tab. A
size you want. Release to place the shape. Your Multigon crosshair appears on the workspace as you move your
shape appears on your workspace and the Pool Shape mouse over it. Place the crosshair where you want the
Properties bar appears. depth to begin.
3 Left-click and extend the rubber band line to where you
To create a curved shape want it. Click to place the side and continue until your
1 On the Shape tab, click the Curved Pool tool. A shape is complete.
crosshair appears on the workspace as you move 4 Double-click to place the depth. Your Polygon Depth
your mouse over it. Place the crosshair where appears on your workspace and the Depth Area
you want the shape to begin. Properties bar is displayed.
2 Click and extend the rubber band line to where you want 5 Type the depth you want in the Area Depth text box on
it. Click to place the side and continue until your shape the Properties bar and press ENTER.
is complete.
To create a multigon depth level in your pool
Defining the depth of your pool
1 Click the Depth tab. The Depth options are displayed.
After you have fine-tuned the shape of your pool, you can
2 Click the Multigon Depth tool from the Depth tab.
set the depth by drawing shapes with the tools that work just
like those on the Shapes Tab. 3 On the Properties bar, type the number of sides you want
your Multigon to have in the #Sides text box and press
To create an oval/circle depth level in your pool ENTER. A crosshair appears on the workspace as you
move your mouse over it.
1 Click the Depth tab. The Depth options are displayed.
4 Place the crosshair where you want the depth to appear.
Click and drag to extend the Multigon to the size you
want. Release to place the depth. Your Multigon Depth
appears on your workspace and the Depth Area
2 Click the Oval/Circle Depth tool from the Depth tab. The Properties bar is displayed.
Depth Area Properties bar is displayed. 5 Type the depth you want in the Area Depth text box on
3 Click the Method button on the Depth Area Properties the Properties bar and press ENTER.
bar. The Method options are displayed.
To create a curved depth level in your pool
4 Click the Method you want to draw your depth:
1 Click the Depth tab. The Depth options are displayed.
■ Draw an oval starting from the top-left side
■ Draw an oval starting from the center 2 Click the Curved Depth tool from the Depth tab. A
■ Draw a circle starting from the top-left side crosshair appears on the workspace as you move your
■ Draw a circle starting from the center mouse over it.
5 Select which Method you want. A crosshair appears on 3 Place the crosshair where you want the depth to begin.
the workspace as you move your mouse over it. Left-click and extend the rubber band line to where you

236 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Equipping Your Pool

want it. Click to place the side and continue until your To create parallel depth
shape is complete. 1 To create a depth parallel to the current depth, click the
4 Double-click to place the depth. Your Curved Depth Parallel Depth button on the Pool Shape Properties bar.
appears on your workspace and the Depth Area The Build Parallel Depth dialog box is displayed.
Properties bar is displayed.
5 Type the depth you want in the Area Depth text box on
the Properties bar and press ENTER.

To edit your depth


1 Once you’ve placed a depth from the Depth tab
(including a Parallel Depth), the Depth Area Properties
bar is displayed.
2 You can edit your depth on two levels:
Object and Points. 2 By default, the Parallel Depth is offset 6” from the inside
edge. To increase or decrease the Offset Distance, type
■ Object Edit allows you to click and drag
the amount of space you want between the edge and the
the object into the new position or shape
Parallel Depth.
■ Points Edit allows you to click a point on
the object and drag it into the new position to reshape it 3 To create your Parallel Depth click OK. The Parallel
Depth appears inside your pool.
3 Click the Auto-Dim checkbox to automatically display
your depth’s dimensions on your workspace.
Equipping Your Pool
Note: Dimensions are not available for Oval/Circle or
Punch! Pool Designer gives you all the tools and equipment
Curved depths.
you’ll need to create a realistic pool setting. Add the steps,
4 Use the Curve sector of the Depth Area railings, and equipment that allow you to enjoy and maintain
Properties bar to customize the shape of your pool.
your depth.
To add a standard ladder
5 Click the Adjust button to on the Depth
Area Properties bar, the Smooth dialog box is displayed. 1 Click the Ladders tab. The Ladder style options are
displayed.

2 Click the Standard Ladders tool from the


Ladders tab. The Standard Ladder Style button
appears on the Properties bar.
6 To create round edges all around your depth, increase the 3 Click the Standard Ladder Style button.
Smoothing Tension. To create more defined edges The ladder styles are displayed.
decrease the Smoothing Tension. Once you have set the
4 Select which ladder style you want. A
tension you want, click OK. Your depth appears with the
crosshair appears on the workspace as
Smoothing Tension you’ve selected.
you move your mouse over it.
7 To completely square off each edge, click the Straighten
5 Place the crosshair where you want the ladder to appear
button on the Properties bar. Each edge appears square.
and click and drag so the two red arrows are pointing
8 To set the depth, type the depth you want in the Area towards the center of the pool. Release your mouse to
Depth text box on the Properties bar and press ENTER. place the ladder. The ladder appears on your workspace.
Note: To create an island in your pool, type 0 in the Area
Depth text and press ENTER.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 237


Chapter 32 Pool Designer

Release your mouse to place the ladder. The rail appears


on your workspace.

To add p-rails
To add a camelback ladder 1 Click the Ladders tab. The Ladder style options are
displayed.
1 Click the Ladders tab. The Ladder style options are
displayed. 2 Click the P-Rails tool from the Ladders tab. A crosshair
appears on the workspace as you move your mouse over
2 Click the CamelBack Ladders tool from the
it.
Ladders tab. The CamelBack Ladder Style
button appears on the Properties bar. 3 Place the crosshair where you want the ladder to
appear and click and drag so the two red arrows
3 Click the CamelBack Ladder Style
are pointing towards the center of the pool.
button. The ladder styles are displayed.
Release your mouse to place the ladder. The rail appears
4 Select which ladder style you want. A on your workspace.
crosshair appears on the workspace as
you move your mouse over it. To add figure-4 hand rails
5 Place the crosshair where you want the 1 Click the Ladders tab. The Ladder style options are
ladder to appear and click and drag so the two red arrows displayed.
are pointing towards the center of the pool. Release your
2 Click the Figure-4 Hand Rails tool from the Ladders tab.
mouse to place the ladder. The ladder appears on your
A crosshair appears on the workspace as you move your
workspace.
mouse over it.
To add a parallel-look ladder 3 Place the crosshair where you want the ladder to
be placed and click and drag so the two red
1 Click the Ladders tab. The Ladder style options are
arrows are pointing towards the center of the
displayed. pool. Release your mouse to place the ladder. The rail
2 Click the Parallel-Look Ladders tool from the appears on your workspace.
Ladders tab. The Parallel-Look Ladder Style
button appears on the Properties bar. To add a 2-bend hand rail
3 Click the Parallel-Look Ladder Style 1 Click the Rail & Step tab. The Rail & Step style options
button. The ladder styles are displayed. are displayed.
4 Select which ladder style you want. A
crosshair appears on the workspace as
you move your mouse over it.
5 Place the crosshair where you want the ladder to appear
2 Click the 2-Bend Hand Rail tool from the Rail
and click and drag so the two red arrows are pointing
and Step tab. The 2-Bend Hand Rail Style
towards the center of the pool. Release your mouse to
button appears on the Properties bar.
place the ladder. The ladder appears on your workspace.
3 Click the 2-Bend Hand Rail Style button.
To add mounted hand rails The rail styles are displayed.
1 Click the Ladders tab. The Ladder style options are 4 Select which rail style you want. A
displayed. crosshair appears on the workspace as
you move your mouse over it.
2 Click the Mounted Hand Rails tool from the Ladders
tab. A crosshair appears on the workspace as you move 5 Place the crosshair where you want the
your mouse over it. rail to appear and click and drag so the two red arrows are
pointing towards the center of the pool. Release your
3 Place the crosshair where you want the ladder
mouse to place the rail. The rail appears on your
to appear and click and drag so the two red
workspace.
arrows are pointing towards the center of the
pool.
238 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide
Equipping Your Pool

To add a 3-bend hand rail 2 Click the Perimeter Steps tool from the Rail and
1 Click the Rail & Step tab. The Rail & Step style options Step tab. The Auto-Steps Properties bar is
are displayed. displayed.

2 Click the 3-Bend Hand Rail tool from the Rail 3 Click the Build Style button and select
and Step tab. The 3-Bend Hand Rail Style button which step style you want.
appears on the Properties bar.
3 Click the 3-Bend Hand Rail Style button. The rail styles
are displayed.
4 Click the Step Stagger Style button and
4 Select which rail style you want. A crosshair appears on
select which stagger style you want
the workspace as you move your mouse over it.
your steps to have.
5 Place the crosshair where you want the rail to appear and
click and drag so the two red arrows are pointing towards
the center of the pool. Release your mouse to place the 5 By default, Perimeter Steps appear with rounded
rail. The rail appears on your workspace. corners. To square the step corners, deselect the
checkbox next to Round Step Corners.
To add deck mounted stair rails
6 You can customize the tread that
1 Click the Rail & Step tab. The Rail & Step style options appears on your steps in the Tread
are displayed. sector of the Auto-Steps Properties bar.
2 Click the Deck Mounted Stair Rails tool from the ■ Type the tread count you want in the
Rail and Step tab. The Stair Rail Style button Count text box and press ENTER.
appears on the Properties bar. ■ Type the tread height you want in the
3 Click the Stair Rail Style button. The rail Height text box and press ENTER.
styles are displayed. ■ Type the tread depth you want in the
4 Select which rail style you want. A Depth text box and press ENTER.
crosshair appears on the workspace as 7 Once you’ve set the Perimeter Steps properties, select the
you move your mouse over it. location you want your steps to appear. Click and drag to
5 Place the crosshair where you want the extend your steps to the size you want. Notice Punch!
displays the dimensions as you draw. Release your
rail to appear and click and drag so the two red arrows are
pointing towards the center of the pool. Release your mouse to place the rail. The steps appears on your
mouse to place the rail. The rail appears on your workspace.
workspace.
To add a freehand-drawn step
To add a spa-rail 1 Click the Rail & Step tab. The Rail & Step style options
1 Click the Rail & Step tab. The Rail & Step style options are displayed.
are displayed. 2 Click the Freehand Step tool from the Rail and
Step tab. The Freehand Step Properties bar is
2 Click the Spa-Rail tool from the Rail and Step
displayed.
tab. A crosshair appears on the workspace as you
move your mouse over it.
3 Place the crosshair where you want the rail to appear and
click and drag so the two red arrows are pointing towards
the center of the pool. Release your mouse to place the
rail. The rail appears on your workspace.

To add perimeter steps 3 Select the location you want your steps to appear. Left-
1 Click the Rail & Step tab. The Rail & Step style options click and extend the rubber-band line to create the sides
are displayed.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 239


Chapter 32 Pool Designer

of your steps. Notice Punch! displays the line’s 3 Click the Pool System Options button.
dimensions as you draw. The Pool System options appear.
4 Click to place each side of your steps. Double-click to 4 Select which support system you want.
finish. Your steps are displayed. A crosshair appears on the workspace
5 (optional) On the Properties bar, type the height you want as you move your mouse over it.
your step to appear in the Height text box and press 5 Place the crosshair where you want the support system
ENTER. to appear and click to place it. The support system
6 (optional) Click the Adjust button on the Properties bar, appears on your workspace.
the Smooth dialog box is displayed.
To add an automatic pool cleaner
7 To create round edges all around your steps, increase the
Smoothing Tension. To create more defined edges 1 Click the Equipment tab. The Equipment options are
decrease the Smoothing Tension. Once you have set the displayed.
tension you want, click OK. Your steps appears with the 2 Click the Automatic Cleaner tool from the
Smoothing Tension you’ve selected. Equipment tab. The Auto-Cleaners button
8 To completely square off each edge, click the Straighten appears on the Properties bar.
button on the Properties bar. Each edge appears square. 3 Click the Auto-Cleaners button. The
Auto-Cleaner options are displayed.
To add pre-built steps
1 Click the Rail & Step tab. The Rail & Step style options
are displayed.
2 Click the Pre-Built Steps tool from the Rail and
Step tab. The Pool Step Style button appears on
the Properties bar.
3 Click the Pool Step Style button. The
step styles are displayed.
4 Select which Automatic Cleaner you want. A crosshair
4 Select which step style you want. A
appears on the workspace as you move your mouse over
crosshair appears on the workspace as
it.
you move your mouse over it.
5 Place the crosshair where you want the Automatic
5 Place the crosshair where you want the steps to appear
Cleaner to appear and click to place it. The Automatic
and click to place the steps. The steps appears on your
Cleaner appears on your workspace.
workspace.
To add a surface skimmer
To add a pool support system
1 Click the Equipment tab. The Equipment options are
1 Click the Equipment tab. The Equipment options are
displayed.
displayed.
2 Click the Surface Skimmer tool from the
Equipment tab. A crosshair appears on the
workspace as you move your mouse over it.
3 Place the crosshair on the edge you want the Surface
2 Click the Pool Support Systems tool from the Skimmer to appear and click to place it. The Surface
Equipment tab. The Pool System Options button Skimmer appears on your workspace.
appears on the Properties bar.
Note: If you do not click an edge, Punch! automatically
places the Surface Skimmer on the closest edge.

240 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Equipping Your Pool

To add a drain To add a liner vacuum


1 Click the Equipment tab. The Equipment options are 1 Click the Equipment tab. The Equipment options are
displayed. displayed.
2 Click the Drain tool from the Equipment tab. A 2 Click the Liner Vacuums tool from the
crosshair appears on the workspace as you move Equipment tab. The Vacuums button appears on
your mouse over it. the Properties bar.
3 Place the crosshair where you want the Drain to appear 3 Click the Vacuum button. The Vacuums
and click to place it. The Drain appears on your options are displayed.
workspace. 4 Select which Vacuum you want. A
crosshair appears on the workspace as
To add a leaf skimmer you move your mouse over it.
1 Click the Equipment tab. The Equipment options are 5 Place the crosshair where you want the Vacuum to
displayed. appear and click to place it. The Vacuum appears on your
2 Click the Leaf Skimmer tool from the Equipment workspace.
tab. The Leaf Skimmers button appears on the
Properties bar. To add a liner broom
3 Click the Leaf Skimmers button. The 1 Click the Equipment tab. The Equipment options are
Leaf Skimmers options are displayed. displayed.
4 Select which Leaf Skimmer you want. A 2 Click the Liner Brooms tool from the
crosshair appears on the workspace as Equipment tab. The Brooms button appears on
you move your mouse over it. the Properties bar.
5 Place the crosshair where you want the Leaf Skimmer to 3 Click the Brooms button. The Broom
appear and click to place it. The Leaf Skimmer appears options are displayed.
on your workspace.

To add a floating thermometer


1 Click the Equipment tab. The Equipment options are
displayed.
2 Click the Floating Thermometer tool from the
Equipment tab. A crosshair appears on the
workspace as you move your mouse over it.
3 Place the crosshair where you want the Floating 4 Select which Broom you want. A crosshair appears on
Thermometer to appear and click to place it. The Floating the workspace as you move your mouse over it.
Thermometer appears on your workspace. 5 Place the crosshair where you want the Broom to appear
and click to place it. The Broom appears on your
To add a chlorinator workspace.
1 Click the Equipment tab. The Equipment options are
displayed. To add a volleyball net
2 Click the Chlorinator tool from the Equipment 1 Click the Accessory tab. The Accessory options are
tab. A crosshair appears on the workspace as you displayed.
move your mouse over it.
3 Place the crosshair where you want the Chlorinator to
appear and click to place it. The Chlorinator appears on
your workspace.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 241


Chapter 32 Pool Designer

2 Click the Volleyball Net tool from the Accessory 5 Place the crosshair where you want the Slide to appear
tab. A crosshair appears on the workspace as you and click to place it. The Slide appears on your
move your mouse over it. workspace.

3 The Volleyball Net extends across your pool from one Editing Your Pool Design
edge to another so place the crosshair on the edge you
want to start your Volleyball Net. Click and drag across Pool Designer offers a variety of ways to customize and edit
the pool to the opposite edge. Release to place. The your pool. You can control the shape, walls and coping (the
Volleyball Net appears on your workspace. tile lip that surrounds the top edge of your pool). Pool
Designer also allows you to create and store templates, plus
To add a basketball goal add colors and materials to your pool.
1 Click the Accessory tab. The Accessory options are After you create your pool using Pool Tools, click the pool to
displayed. select it and click the Properties tab. The Pool Shape
2 Click the Basketball Goal tool from the Properties bar appears.
Accessory tab. A crosshair appears on the
workspace as you move your mouse over it. To edit your pool’s size or position

3 Place the crosshair where you want the Basketball Goal 1 Click the pool shape to select it. The Pool Shape
to appear and click and drag so the red arrow is pointing Properties bar for this shape appears.
towards the center of the pool. Release your mouse to 2 On the Properties bar, click Object in the Edit Level
place the Basketball Goal. The Basketball Goal appears section. Edit handles appear at the corners of the object
on your workspace. extents.
3 Click and drag the object handles into the new position or
To add a diving board shape.
1 Click the Accessory tab. The Accessory options are 4 Release your mouse to place the shape.
displayed.
To edit your pool’s shape
2 Click the Diving Boards tool from the Accessory
tab. The Diving Boards button appears on the 1 Click the pool shape to select it. The Pool Shape
Properties bar. Properties bar is displayed.
3 Click the Diving Boards button. The 2 On the Properties bar, click Points in the Edit Level
Vacuums options are displayed. section. Edit handles appear at every point in the object.
4 Select which Diving Board you want. A 3 Click a point on the object and drag it into the new
crosshair appears on the workspace as position to reshape it.
you move your mouse over it.
To display the dimensions of your pool
5 Place the crosshair where you want the Diving Board to
appear and click to place it. The Diving Board appears ■ Click the Auto-Dim checkbox to automatically display
on your workspace. your pool’s dimensions on your workspace.
Note: Dimensions are not available for Oval/Circle or
To add a slide
Curved pools.
1 Click the Accessory tab. The Accessory options are
displayed. To customize the shape of your pool
2 Click the Slides tool from the Accessory tab. The 1 Click the Adjust button in the Curve section of the
Slides button appears on the Properties bar. Properties bar. The Smooth dialog box is displayed.
3 Click the Slides button. The Slides
options are displayed.
4 Select which Slide you want. A crosshair
appears on the workspace as you move
your mouse over it.

242 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Using Templates

To customize coping
1 To remove the coping from the top edge
of your pool, deselect the checkbox next
to Coping On on the Properties bar.
2 To change the coping width, type the
width you want in the Coping Width text
box on the Properties bar and press
2 To create round edges all around your pool, increase the ENTER.
Smoothing Tension. To create more defined edges
decrease the Smoothing Tension. Once you have set the 3 To change the coping thickness, type the thickness you
tension you want, click OK. Your pool appears with the want in the Coping Thickness text box on the Properties
Smoothing Tension you’ve selected. bar and press ENTER.

3 To completely square off each edge, click the Straighten To customizing the depth of your pool
button on the Properties bar. Each edge appears square.
■ To change the depth, type the depth you want in the
To choose your liner color Depth text box on the Properties bar and press ENTER.

1 Click the pool shape to select it. The Pool Shape To create rectangle depth levels in your pool
Properties bar is displayed.
1 Click the Depth tab. The Depth shape options appear.
2 Click the color block next to Liner Color to choose the
color of your liner. The color palette is displayed. 2 Click the Rectangle Depth tool from the Depth tab. The
Depth Area Properties bar appears.
3 Select the color you want and click OK. The color you
chose appears as the Liner Color. 3 Click the Method button on the Depth Area Properties
bar. The Method options appear.
To set water levels 4 Click the Method you want to draw your depth:
1 Click the Fill checkbox in the Water section of the ■ Draw a rectangle starting from the top-left side
Properties bar to display your pool with water when ■ Draw a rectangle starting from the center
viewed in LiveView after your exit Pool Designer. ■ Draw a square starting from the top-left side
■ Draw a square starting from the center
Note: To view your pool without water
after you exit Pool Designer, deselect the 5 Select which Method you want. A crosshair appears on
checkbox next to Fill on the Properties bar. the workspace as you move your mouse over it.

2 To change the water level, type the 6 Place the crosshair where you want the depth to appear
distance you want the water to appear from the top edge and click and drag to your desired size. Notice Punch!
of the pool in the Level text box and press ENTER. automatically displays the depth’s dimensions. Release
your mouse to place the depth. The depth appears on
To customize walls your workspace.

1 To remove the Side Walls, deselect the 7 Type the depth you want in the Area Depth text box on
checkbox next to Side Walls On on the the Properties bar and press ENTER.
Properties bar.
Using Templates
2 To change the wall width, type the width
you want in the Width text box on the Punch! Pool Designer provides prefabricated templates for
Properties bar and press ENTER. you to quickly place an original pool style. You can also
create and manage your own templates independent of
specific drawings you have saved. The Template Organizer is
particularly useful when you’re working with multiple pool
designs because you can organize your designs by category.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 243


Chapter 32 Pool Designer

To use templates
1 Click the Templates tab. The Templates drop-down
appears in the Properties bar.
2 Click the Templates drop-down box and the Template
categories and options are displayed.

To organize templates
1 Click the Templates drop-down menu and select Pool
Template Organizer. The Pool Organizer is displayed.

3 Select the folder you want your new category to appear in


and click OK. The Category Name dialog box is
displayed.

4 Type the name of your new category in the Category


Name text box and click OK. Your new category appears
on the right side of the Pool Organizer.
5 To delete a category from Pool Organizer, click the
Delete button under Category. The Browse for Folder
dialog box is displayed.
6 Select the category you want to delete and click OK. The
delete confirmation box is displayed.
2 To create a new category click the New button under
Category. The Browse for Folder dialog box is displayed

7 Click Yes to permanently delete the category from Pool


Designer.
8 To rename a category click the Rename button under
Category. The Browse for Folder dialog box is displayed.

244 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Using the Colors Tab

17 To delete a template from the library, click the Delete


button. The delete confirmation box is displayed.

18 Click Yes to permanently delete the pool template from


the library.
19 Once you’ve finished organizing your pool templates,
click the Close button to close Pool Organizer and return
to the Templates tab.

To create a pool template


9 Select the category you want to rename and click OK.
The Category Name dialog box is displayed. 1 Create a pool design you want to save as a template and
click the Templates tab. Templates appears on the
10 Type the new name in the Category Name text box and Properties bar.
click OK. The new category name appears in Pool
Organizer. 2 Click the Templates drop-down menu and select Create
Pool Template. The Save Pool To Category dialog box
11 To move templates from one category to another, open appears.
both categories using the category drop-down menu in
Pool Organizer.

12 Use the navigation arrows to move templates


from one category to the other. The templates 3 Click the Pool Category drop-down menu to select the
appear under the category where you move them. category you want to save your pool template to.
13 To review information on a particular template, select 4 Type the name of your pool in the Pool Name text box.
the pool from the library and click the Info button. The
Pool Info dialog box is displayed. 5 Type a description of your pool in the Pool Description
text box.
6 Once you’ve finished entering the information on your
new pool, click OK. Your design appears in the
Templates Properties bar.
Tip: Use the Templates drop-down menu to navigate
through your categories quickly.

14 To customize the Pool Name, type the name you want in Using the Colors Tab
the Pool Name text box.
You can choose from an extensive library of colors as well as
15 To customize the Pool Description, type the description find just the right shade and hue using the Color Ramp.
you want in the Pool Description text box. Placing colors is as easy as clicking and dragging them into
16 Once you have updated all the Pool Info you want to, place!
click OK and the information is updated.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 245


Chapter 32 Pool Designer

To use the custom colors library 2 Click the Materials drop-down menu. The
1 Click the Colors tab and the Custom Colors library list of materials appears.
appears in the Properties bar, as well as the Quarter Page 3 Select which Material library you want
LiveView window. and click it. The library appears in the
2 Click the Colors drop-down menu and the color options Properties bar.
are displayed. 4 From the Properties bar, click and drag
the material you want onto the
workspace. The material appears on the
surface you dropped it onto.

To use custom and brand-name library


1 Click the Materials tab. The Materials
library pop-out menu appears.
3 Select which color type you want and the color library 2 Click Custom and Brand-Name Library
appears in the Properties bar. from the drop-down menu and the
Custom and Brand-Name Library appears
To use the color ramp in the Properties bar.
1 Click the Colors tab and select Color Ramp. The Color 3 Click the Custom drop-down menu. The list of brand-
Ramp appears in the Properties bar, as well as the name products appears.
Quarter Page LiveView window.

2 Use the navigation tools on either side of the Color Ramp


to select the color you want, then scroll through the
library to select the shade you want.

To apply colors to your pool


■ From the Properties bar, click and drag the color you
want onto your pool. The surface changes to reflect the
new color choice.
4 Select which brand-name you want. A drop-down menu
To use AutoClick placement is displayed featuring the products available for that
■ There is a feature available on the Colors tab called brand-name.
AutoClick Placement. This allows you to place one color 5 Select the product you want and the library is displayed
on multiple surfaces without having to drag and drop it in the Properties bar.
each time. Click the Colors tab and select AutoClick
Placement. 6 From the Properties bar, click and drag the material you
want onto the workspace. The surface changes to reflect
the new material choice.
Using the Materials Tab
You can change the style and composition of your pool’s To calculate your pool’s volume
coping or lining by dragging new textures into your
LiveView window. ■ Click the Calculate Pool Volume button. A dialog
box appears displaying your Pool Volume,
To use Punch! materials library Perimeter Length and Pool Surface Area.
1 Click the Materials tab. The Materials Preview bar is
displayed.

246 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Controlling Your Working Plan Views

To customize your pool’s options 2 By default, if you have created a design from a tab, it is
1 Click the Options button. The Options dialog box visible on the workspace and has a check-mark next to it
is displayed. in the drop-down menu. To hide a specific plan or plans,
click the plan(s) you want to hide. The check-mark and
plan(s) disappear.
3 Click the plan(s) you want to view and a check-mark
appears next to the plan and it appears on the workspace.

To customize a plan’s color on the workspace


1 Click a tab to display the drop-down menu. The working
plans are displayed.
2 Click the Plan Color. The color palette is displayed.
3 Select the color you want the contents of that plan to
appear on the workspace.
2 (optional) Move the slider side to side to increase or 4 Click OK. The contents of that plan appear in the color
decrease the Pool Liner Rendering Quality. you chose.
3 (optional) Move the slider side to side to increase or
decrease the Water Transparency. To display or hide your pool plans

4 (optional) To enable equipment to move with your pool, 1 Click a tab to display the drop-down menu. The working
select the checkbox next to Move Equipment With Pool. plans appear.
Your equipment stays in place anytime you move or 2 Select Home Design Plans to display the drop-down
resize your pool. menu. The drop-down menu appears.
5 (optional) To enable steps to move with your pool, 3 To hide a specific plan or plans, click the plan(s) you
select the checkbox next to Move Steps With Pool. Your want to hide. The check-mark and plan(s) disappear.
steps stay in place anytime you move or resize your
4 Click the plan(s) you want to view and a check-mark
pool.
appears next to the plan and it appears on the workspace.
6 Click OK.

Controlling Your Working Plan Views


You can control which plans are visible while editing your
design. Each tab has a drop-down box which allows you to
view or hide the work you’ve done in each other plan.

To display or hide your working plan


1 Click a tab to display the drop-down menu. The working
plans are displayed.

Note: You cannot hide the active plan.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 247


Chapter 32 Pool Designer

248 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Part 7

General
PowerTools

Chapter 33: FloorPlan Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251


Chapter 34: PhotoView & PhotoView Editor . . . . . . 255
Chapter 35: DXF/DWG Export & Import . . . . . . . . . 263
Chapter 36: Fence Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Chapter 37: Elevation Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Chapter 38: Framing Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Chapter 39: Estimator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Chapter 33

FloorPlan Trace
Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 lets you import a scanned image into the background of your design. Once
scanned and loaded into your design file, you can trace it to create a Punch! AS4000 floor plan. You can even set the scale
of the new drawing to the scale of the image. When you are done tracing, you can save the new file without the background
bitmap image.
Find or sketch your favorite floor plan design. Using a scanner, digital camera or with the help of a scanning service, scan
the plan and save it in most of the popular formats.
The designer or owner of most homeplans hold the copyright to them. Make sure you have permission before you copy a
plan.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 251


Chapter 33 FloorPlan Trace

Importing a Floorplan Image


After you have scanned the plan you want to trace and saved
it, you are ready to import it into Punch! AS4000. You can
import a floorplan image onto the second or third floor also.
To be sure all floors line up correctly, scan all plans at the
same size and match the scale identically (see following
section).

To load a floorplan trace image


1 On the Design menu, click Load Floorplan Trace Image.
2 Locate the directory where you saved the file. 7 On the Design menu, click Resize Floorplan Trace
Image. The Resize Floorplan Trace Image dialog box is
3 Click the filename, then click Open. The floorplan loads
displayed.
into the window.

Matching the Drawing Scale


If the floorplan is not the correct size, you can scale it in
Punch! AS4000. Be sure to use the same scale when
preparing to trace an upper floor.
8 Type values in the Horizontal and Vertical text boxes to
To match the drawing scale equal amounts to change the scale of the entire drawing
1 On the Design menu, click Load Floorplan Trace Image. in proportion. Repeat until you have matched the scale.
2 Find a wall section with a known length on the scanned 9 Click OK.
image. Note: If you need the imported image to be larger, the
percent you enter will be greater than 100%. Conversely, if
you need the image to be smaller, the percent will be less
than 100%.

Tracing the Imported Floorplan


Tracing the image is an easy, straight-forward process.
Using the tools explained earlier in this User’s Guide, you
will soon have an editable floorplan of your scan.

To trace the floorplan image


3 Click the Virtual Ruler. For information on how to
use the Virtual Ruler, see “Virtual Ruler” on page ■ To trace the foundation, see “To define the foundation
perimeter”, which begins on page 62.
9. If you do not see the Virtual Ruler, zoom out until you ■ To trace exterior walls, see “To draw exterior walls”,
locate it. which begins on page 68.
4 Move the Virtual Ruler into position along the wall of the ■ To trace interior walls, see “To draw interior walls on the
scanned image. fly”, which begins on page 69.
5 Extend the Virtual Ruler to match the known length on ■ To add electrical features, see “Electrical Plan Tab”,
the image. which begins on page 85.
■ To place landscape plants, see “To add plants”, which
6 Set the Virtual Ruler parallel to the wall segment. begins on page 175.
Note: It is best to measure along a longer wall to minimize
the margin of error when scaling.

252 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Hiding an Imported Floorplan

Hiding an Imported Floorplan


There may be times when it is easier to work on your
floorplan if the tracing image is not visible. It is easy to
toggle the Floorplan Trace image on and off.

To hide the floorplan trace image


■ On the Design menu, click Floorplan Trace Image
Visible. The image is visible when there is no check
mark next to this menu listing.

To show the floorplan trace image


■ On the Design menu, click Floorplan Trace Image
Visible. The image is hidden when there is a check mark
next to this menu listing.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 253


Chapter 33 FloorPlan Trace

254 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Chapter 34

PhotoView &
PhotoView Editor
Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 lets you import a digital photograph or a scanned image of your home and
landscape around it. From window and door treatments to entire facades, you can simulate your home with ease.
From cars to pets, windows to chimneys, doors to neighbors, you can customize your design to match your dreams. You
can even place an imported image of your own backyard, so when you look out a window, you’re home.
With PhotoView Editor, you can apply different building materials onto your home’s picture. No redrawing walls, no
adding windows and doors - just click and drag a new material onto your home!

Tips for Using PhotoView


Punch! AS4000’s PhotoView lets you take digital pictures and add them to your landscape design. Although this is a
straightforward process, there are a few hints that will make the ultimate result much more satisfying.
■ Verify that the image is level and square, when taking a digital picture or scanning a photograph. If the initial
photograph is not square, use your graphics software to rotate it in half-degree increments, until it is.
■ Photograph the feature when the sun is shining. This ensures more color saturation and detail of the image.
■ Double-check the dimensions when importing PhotoView images.
■ Take your time masking the image; the better the mask, the better the end result.
■ Images are placed in the center of the lot. When importing multiple images, move each image, as it is placed, to avoid
stacking them on top of each other.
■ Images should touch the bottom of the image area. If it is centered in the area, it will float above ground level.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 255


Chapter 34 PhotoView & PhotoView Editor

Importing PhotoView Images


Whether you want to import an image of your home’s facade
to landscape around or you want to add a custom door or
window, Punch! PhotoView makes it easy. You can import
any image you want, even your pet or your neighbor.

To import PhotoView images


1 On the File menu, click Insert PhotoView Image
or click the PhotoView icon. The Open dialog
box is displayed.

Note: PhotoView Images appear in the 2D window as lines,


similar to walls.

2 In the Look In box, type the name of the file you want to
insert or search for the file by switching folders or drives. To delete PhotoView images
Note: As you scroll through the available images, when one 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
is highlighted, the image will be displayed in the preview 2 On the Design window, click a PhotoView image
box. to select it.
3 When you find the file you want to open, click to select 3 Press the DELETE key on the keyboard.
it.
4 Click Open. The PhotoView Properties dialog box is Moving PhotoView Images
displayed. When you import a PhotoView image into your file, it will
be placed in the center of the lot. You have freedom to move
the image anywhere on the plan window and between plan
tabs.

To move PhotoView images by dragging


1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
5 Type width and height, in inches, or feet and inches,
separated by a hyphen, then click OK. 2 On the Design window, click a PhotoView image to
select it.
Note: In 2D plan, a PhotoView image is displayed as a line.
3 Holding down the mouse button, drag the image to a new
location, then release the mouse button.
Note: Be sure to drag the image from the center; dragging
an endpoint resizes the image.

256 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Replacing PhotoView Images

To move PhotoView images from one plan tab to


another
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 On the Design window, click the image you want moved.
To select more than one image, press the SHIFT key,
while clicking objects. 3 (optional) Click Set Image to load another file.
3 On the Edit menu, click Move to Plan. Then specify the Tip: You will find it useful to store PhotoView images in
plan where you want the feature to appear, in the pop-up the Content folder in the Punch! AS4000 directory. The
menu that is displayed. content folder is designed to be the first place searched for
missing files, for instance, PhotoView files, custom
4 (optional) Right-click the selection and click Move to
materials, custom trims, and so on.
Plan on the pop-up menu that is displayed, then click
which plan. The selection is moved to a different plan.
Elevating PhotoView Images
Replacing PhotoView Images You can elevate PhotoView images, based on a measurement
you define.
You can try out different window or door images, for
example, by using the Set PhotoView Image option on the
To elevate PhotoView images by specifying a
right-click pop-up menu.
measurement
To replace PhotoView images 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the 2 On the Design window, click an image to select it. To
Selection Tool. select more than one image; hold down the SHIFT key
while clicking.
2 On the Design window, click the
PhotoView image. Then click Set Image 3 On the Edit menu, click Set Object Elevation. The Set
on the Properties toolbar. The Open Elevation dialog box is displayed.
PhotoView Image File dialog box is
displayed.
3 In the File Name text box, type the name
of the file you want to insert or search for the file by
switching folders or drives.
4 Type the measurement, in inches, that you want to
4 When you see the name of the file you want to open, elevate the image, then click OK.
click to select it.
Note: Use this feature to lower objects by typing a negative
5 Click OK. The PhotoView Properties dialog box is
number in the Set Elevation dialog box.
displayed.
6 (optional) Type the width and height, in inches, or To elevate PhotoView images by using the
feet and inches, separated by a hyphen in the text Elevation Slider
boxes on the Properties toolbar. The image is resized.
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
To locate PhotoView images 2 On the Design window, click an image to select it. To
select more than one object, hold down the SHIFT key,
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
while clicking.
2 On the Design window, click the PhotoView image.
3 On the left side of the window, drag the Elevation Slider
Then click Image Info on the Properties toolbar. The
up or down.
Open dialog box is displayed and shows the path where
the file is located on your hard drive. 4 Release the mouse. The image will be repositioned.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 257


Chapter 34 PhotoView & PhotoView Editor

Altering PhotoView Images To mask PhotoView images


Once you have imported your PhotoView image, you have 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
the option of further customizing its appearance. This can be 2 On the Design window, click the PhotoView image you
done at any time during the design process. You can resize, want to mask.
change elevation, rotate or flip it and so on.
3 On the PowerTools toolbar, click the Launch
PhotoView Editor button. The selected image
To resize PhotoView images by specifying
will be automatically opened in Editor.
dimensions
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the
Selection Tool.
2 On the Design window, click the
PhotoView image you want to resize.
3 Type the width and height, in inches or
feet and inches, separated by a hyphen, in
the text boxes on the Properties toolbar.
The image is resized.

To resize PhotoView images by dragging 4 Click the Fill Tab.


1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 5 Double-click one of the colors on the Preview Bar. The
2 On the Design window, click a PhotoView image, Color dialog box is displayed. Define the black color
to select it. used to mask as 0-0-0. If this mix is not used, the mask
will not appear transparent in Punch! AS4000.
3 Holding down the mouse button on an endpoint of the
image, drag the endpoint, until the image is the size you
want, then release the mouse button.
Note: Dragging an endpoint only changes the width of the
image; to keep proportions accurate, update the height in the
PhotoView Properties text box, as shown above.

To flip PhotoView images


1 On the Standard toolbar, click the
Selection Tool.
2 On the Design window, click the
PhotoView image you want to flip, then
click <<Flip>> on the Properties toolbar. 6 Using the PhotoView Editor tools, color everything you
The image is flipped. want to appear transparent in Punch! AS4000.

Masking PhotoView Images


If you prefer that your images blend more completely into
Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000, you may
want to mask (coloring black) parts of the image. The
masking process deletes those parts of the photograph that
are not necessary, like signs, mailboxes, driveways, grass,
trees and so on.
Although other programs are available, we recommend you
use the Punch! PhotoView Editor PowerTool to make any
alterations necessary to your PhotoView images.

258 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Landscaping Using PhotoView Images

7 When you are finished editing, on the File Menu, click from the pop-up menu that is displayed. Choose a
Exit and Return to Punch! Home Design. The Exit different LiveView size, if you prefer.
confirmation dialog box is displayed. 3 Using tools and techniques described in previous
chapters, add pathways, plants, furniture, topography and
so on.

8 Click OK. To save a copy of the unaltered file, check the


box by Save Backup Copy and follow the prompts that
appear.

Note: PhotoView images appear in the 2D design window


as lines, similar to interior walls.
Result: The original, unmasked house on the left and the
masked version on the right.
Right in Your Own Backyard
Landscaping Using PhotoView Images In Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 you can
even look out the window of your new home design and see
One way to get started landscaping your yard is to import a
your own backyard. By taking a digital picture of your
PhotoView image of your home. You can then embellish
backyard, you can position it so when you view your design
your design with landscaping and other objects.
in LiveView, you’re home.
To landscape using PhotoView images
To view your own backyard
1 Import the image of your home, as explained previously.
1 Create your home design, using tools and techniques
outlined in previous chapters.

2 On the Window menu, click 3D Quarter View,


click the 3D Quarter View icon or right-click,
while nothing is selected, and click 3D Quarter View
from the pop-up menu that is displayed. Choose a
different LiveView size if you prefer.

Note: It’s very important to input the correct dimensions of


your home. For more information, see “To import
PhotoView images”, which begins on page 256.

2 On the Window menu, click 3D Quarter View,


click the 3D Quarter View icon or right-click,
while nothing is selected, and click 3D Quarter View

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 259


Chapter 34 PhotoView & PhotoView Editor

4 In the Look In box, type the name of the file you want to
insert or search for the file by switching folders or drives.
3 Import the PhotoView image of your own backyard. 5 When you see the name of the file you want to open,
4 On the Design window, move the PhotoView image to a click to select it.
position where it can be viewed from your virtual home. 6 Click OK.
Note: If you have a PhotoView image selected, when you
click the Launch PhotoView Editor icon, that image will be
loaded into Editor.

File Management
With PhotoView Editor you can save your personalized
image as a new file or you can overwrite the existing file.

Saving an image
1 On the File menu, click Save Image as BMP, the Save
Image dialog box is displayed.
2 Type a file name in the File Name text box.
Note: In this example, the PhotoView image is the line at 3 Click OK.
the bottom of the Design window.
Opening an overlay mask
PhotoView Editor
1 On the File menu, click Open Overlay Mask; the Open
You can now take a digital picture of your house and apply Overlay Mask dialog box is displayed.
materials and colors directly to it with PhotoView Editor,
then import it into Punch! AS4000! 2 In the File Name box, type the name of the file you want
to open, or search for the file by switching folders or
Launching PhotoView Editor drives.

1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. 3 When you see the name of the file you want to open,
click to select it.
2 On the Design window, click the PhotoView image you
want to mask. 4 Click OK.

3 Launch PhotoView Editor by clicking the Saving an overlay mask


PhotoView Editor icon on the PowerTool Bar.
The Open dialog box is displayed. 1 On the File menu, click Save Overlay Mask; the Save
Overlay Mask dialog box is displayed.
2 Type a file name in the File Name text box.
3 Click OK.

260 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Editing Your PhotoView Image

Opening a custom color list 2 Right-click the shape you want to move, then click Move
1 On the File menu, click Open Custom Color List; the on the pop-up menu that is displayed. The Move dialog
Open Color List dialog box is displayed. box is displayed.

2 In the File Name box, type the name of the file you want
to open or search for the file by switching folders or
drives.
3 When you see the name of the file you want to open,
click to select it.
3 Click either Cartesian or Polar coordinates.
4 Click OK.
4 Type the X and Y Axis measurements, then click OK.
Saving a custom color list 5 The shape is moved to the location you specified.
1 On the File menu, click Save Custom Color List; the
To rotate by specifying an amount
Save Color List dialog box is displayed.
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Type a file name in the File Name text box.
2 Right-click the shape you want to rotate, then click
3 Click OK.
Rotate on the pop-up menu that is displayed. The Rotate
dialog box is displayed.
Editing Your PhotoView Image
With Punch! PhotoView Editor, you can draw shapes that
will be used to color, fill, replicate or add materials to your
photograph.
The four drawing styles available in PhotoView Editor are:
3 Type, in degrees or radians, the amount you want to
■ Color. Tools on this tab will create shapes that add a tint rotate the object and click OK. The shape is rotated.
to your photograph.
Note: Rotate is not available on the Replicate tab.
■ Fill. Tools on this tab will completely replace the original
color with a color of your choice.
■ Replicate. Tools on this tab copy what is on the original To control layering
photograph, so it can be placed elsewhere. 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
■ Material. Tools on this tab completely replace the 2 Right-click a shape to select it.
original material with a material of your choice.
3 Click Bring to Front on the pop-up menu that is
displayed, to place the selected shape on the top of the
Editing Shapes
other shapes.
All shapes drawn in PhotoView Editor can be edited in a
4 (optional) Click Send to Back button on the pop-up menu
variety of ways. They can be moved specified amounts,
that is displayed, to place the selected shape behind the
rotated, layered, edited and even converted to other types of
other shapes.
drawing shapes. Object-Level Editing is active by default.
Object-Level Editing, along with Point-Level Editing,
To convert to another drawing style
controls how your edits impact your object. If you are in
object selection mode, changes affect the object as a whole. If 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
you are working in point selection mode, each edge of the 2 Right-click a shape to select it, then click Convert To on
object is treated separately, as you edit. the pop-up menu that is displayed.

To move a shape 3 Click to select the type of feature you want.

1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 261


Chapter 34 PhotoView & PhotoView Editor

Editing Material Perspective


In addition to the ability to rotate, move, point-level edit and
so on, Material shapes can be edited to conform to the
perspective in the photograph. Click a shape to select it. This
will activate Perspective Editing Mode. In this mode, there
will be different colored controls that manipulate different
things.

To change the size of the shape


■ Click & Drag the Red dots to control the area of the
shape. Drag a corner to make the shape larger or smaller.

To set the perspective


■ Click & Drag a Green dot to change the vanishing point
of the material.

To set the perspective angle


■ Click and rotate the Blue arrow.
■ (optional) Right-click the material, then click Change
Material Angle on the pop-up menu that is displayed.
Type the angle in the text box, then click OK.

To flip material orientation


■ Right-click the material, then click Flip Material
Orientation on the pop-up menu that is displayed. The
material orientation is flipped.
■ (optional) Right-click the material, then click Restore
Material Orientation to reset the orientation back to the
original direction.

To change the centerline


■ Click & Drag a Yellow dot to change the centerline of the
material.

To set the scale


■ Right-click the material, then click Change Material
Scale on the pop-up menu that is displayed. Type the new
percentage(s) in the text box, then click OK.

To reset perspective changes


■ Right-click the material, then click Reset Material
Attributes on the pop-up menu that is displayed.

262 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Chapter 35

DXF/DWG Export & Import


Among the Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 Power Tools, are the DXF/DWG Importer and Exporter. DXF
stands for Drawing Exchange File and is an industry-standard format for sharing drawing files. DXF is a two-dimensional
graphic file format supported by almost all PC-based CAD programs. DWG is the extension used by Autodesk for its
AutoCAD drawing files. It has become a industry standard format for CAD applications.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 263


Chapter 35 DXF/DWG Export & Import

Exporting and Importing a DXF/DWG File


You may find it useful to share files with your architect,
builder and so on. Importing and exporting your home plan to
DXF or DWG format will make sharing your files simple.

To export a DXF/DWG floorplan


1 Click the DXF/DWG Exporter on the
PowerTools bar. The Export Options dialog
box is displayed.

2 In the File Name box, type the name of the file you want
to open or search for the file by switching folders or
drives.
3 When you see the name of the file you want to open,
double-click to select it. The Scale menu is displayed.
2 Click the radio button next to Format and Version you
want to use.
3 Click OK. The Export DXF dialog box is displayed.

4 Click the radio button next to the scale you want to use.
5 Click OK.
Note: Once you have imported your file, you will need to
convert the lines into Punch! intelligent objects before they
can be views in 3D. For more information, see “Converting
Details to Intelligent Features”, which begins on page 146.

Copying Objects to Different Floors


There may be times when you want multiple floors to contain
duplicates. Copy to Floor leaves the object in its original
position and places a duplicate where you define.
4 Type a file name in the File Name text box. Punch!
AS4000 DXF Exporter automatically adds the DXF or
To copy from one floor to another
DWG extension.
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
5 Click Save.
2 Click the object or objects you want duplicated.
To import a DXF/DWG floorplan 3 On the Edit menu, click Copy to Floor, Upper Floor.
1 Click the DXF/DWG Importer on the Select Lower Floor, if you want to copy the original
PowerTools bar. The Import DXF dialog box is down one level.
displayed.

264 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Moving DXF/DWG Features

Moving DXF/DWG Features


As with Punch! AS4000, you can move selections between
plan layers and between floors. Move to Floor deletes these
objects from their original position.

To move everything from one floor to another


1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click the object or objects you want moved. To select
more than one object, press the SHIFT key, while
clicking objects.
3 On the Edit menu, click Move to Floor, Upper Floor.
Select Lower Floor, if you want to move the original
down one level.

To move features from one plan to another


1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click the feature or object you want moved. To select
more than one object, press the SHIFT key, while
clicking objects.
3 On the Edit menu, click Move to Plan, then specify the
plan where you want the feature to appear.
4 (optional) Right-click the selection and click Move to
Plan on the pop-up menu that is displayed, then click
which plan. The selection is moved to a different plan.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 265


Chapter 35 DXF/DWG Export & Import

266 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Chapter 36

Fence Designer
Whether it’s selecting the picket type for an ornamental iron fence, setting the railing heights on a gate or adding color or
texture to fence sections, the Fence Designer lets you customize images of fences and gates so you can tour a realistic
rendering of your garden plan in Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 267


Chapter 36 Fence Designer

Designing Fences 7 On the Chain Link Fabric tab, select the size of each
square in the chain-linked mesh, from the Dimensions
Fence Designer gives you two powerful toolsets to use in
drop-down menu.
your fence designs. Controlled Detailing tools allow you to
control attributes such as rail placement and picket caps. 8 On the Chain Link Fabric tab, select the size of the wire
Freehand Detailing tools allow you to modify the appearance used in the mesh, on the Thickness drop-down menu.
of those elements or even draw new elements. 9 On the Framework tab, specify (in inches) the height and
elevation of the upper frame rai,l in the corresponding
Launching Fence Designer text boxes.
■ Launch Fence Designer by clicking the Fence 10 (optional) If you are designing a gate, on the Framework
Designer icon on the PowerTool Bar. tab, specify the width (in inches) of the side frame rails,
in the Width text box.
Specifying Fence Attributes 11 (optional) If you want to include a rail at the bottom of
Fence Designer’s easy-to-use Controlled Detailing tools let the fence, on the Framework tab, place a check in the
you specify the structural attributes of a fence or gate. Simply Lower Beam checkbox, then specify the height (in
select a fence or gate type from the New Design dialog box, inches) of the lower rail in the Height text box.
then enter your preferences on a series of tabs. The display in
the design window updates to reflect each design decision To design an ornamental iron fence or gate
you make. 1 On the File menu, click New or click the New
Design button on the toolbar. The New Design
dialog box is displayed.
2 Click either Fence Section Design or Fence Gate Design.
3 Select Ornamental Iron on the Component Style drop-
down menu.
4 Specify (in inches) the width and height of each gate or
section in the corresponding text boxes.
5 Click OK. The iron fence is displayed in the design
window.
6 Click the Controlled Detailing tab; tabs are displayed on
the right side of the design window.
7 On the Iron Pickets tab, specify (in inches) the width,
height and spacing of individual iron pickets in the
To design a chain-linked fence or gate corresponding text boxes.
1 On the File menu, click New or click the New 8 On the Iron Pickets tab, select the cap style for individual
Design button on the toolbar. The New Design iron pickets on the Cap Style drop-down menu, then
dialog box is displayed. specify the cap’s height and width in the corresponding
2 Click either Fence Section Design or Fence Gate Design. text boxes.
3 Select Chain-Linked on the Component Style drop-down 9 On the Railing tab, select one of the rails, check the
menu. corresponding checkbox to include it in the design, then
specify (in inches) the height and elevation for each rail.
4 Specify (in inches) the width and height of each gate or
section in the corresponding text boxes. Note: Clicking each rail allows you to control its properties
5 Click OK. The chain-linked fence is displayed in the individually.
design window. 10 On the Embellishment tab, select one of the ornamental
6 Click the Controlled Detailing tab; tabs are displayed on accessories; check the corresponding checkbox to
the right side of the design window. include it in the design.

268 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Specifying Fence Attributes

11 Select a style and thickness for each accessory in the 6 Click the Controlled Detailing tab; tabs are displayed on
corresponding drop-down menus. the right side of the design window.
12 Specify (in inches) the height and elevation for each 7 On the Boards tab, specify (in inches) the width, height,
accessory. and spacing of individual boards in the corresponding
text boxes.
Note: Clicking each accessory allows you to control its
properties individually. 8 (optional) To leave a small space between the fence
boards, check the Include Gap Between Boards
To design a picket fence or gate checkbox.
1 On the File menu, click New or click the New 9 On the Boards tab, select the cap style for individual
Design button on the toolbar. The New Design boards on the Cap Style drop-down menu, then specify
dialog box is displayed. the cap’s height in the Height text box.
2 Click either Fence Section Design or Fence Gate Design. 10 On the Back Railing tab, select one of the rails, check
the corresponding checkbox to include it in the design,
3 Select Picket on the Component Style drop-down menu.
then specify (in inches) the height and elevation for each
4 Specify (in inches) the width and height of each gate or rail.
section in the corresponding text boxes.
Note: Clicking each rail allows you to control its properties
5 Click OK. The picket fence is displayed in the design individually.
window.
6 Click the Controlled Detailing tab; tabs are displayed on To design a rail fence or gate
the right side of the design window. 1 On the File menu, click New or click the New
7 On the Pickets tab, specify (in inches) the width, height, Design button on the toolbar. The New Design
and spacing of individual pickets in the corresponding dialog box is displayed.
text boxes. 2 Click either Fence Section Design or Fence Gate Design.
8 On the Pickets tab, select the cap style for individual 3 Select Rail on the Component Style drop-down menu.
pickets on the Cap Style drop-down menu, then specify
the cap’s height in the Height text box. 4 Specify (in inches) the width and height of each gate or
section in the corresponding text boxes.
9 On the Back Railing tab, select one of the rails, check
the corresponding checkbox to include it in the design, 5 Click OK. The rail fence is displayed in the design
then specify (in inches) the height and elevation for each window.
rail. 6 Click the Controlled Detailing tab; tabs are displayed on
the right side of the design window.
Note: Clicking each rail allows you to control its properties
individually. 7 On the Rails tab, select one of the rails from the Rail
drop-down menu, then specify (in inches) the height and
10 On the Top Edge tab, select a shape for the fence section elevation for each rail.
or gate on the Style drop-down menu, then specify the
lowest top point (in inches) in the Min. Height text box. 8 (optional) To include a third rail, check the Tertiary Rail
checkbox, then specify (in inches) the height and
To design a privacy fence or gate elevation for the third rail.

1 On the File menu, click New or click the New To resize a fence section or gate
Design button on the toolbar. The New Design
dialog box is displayed. 1 On the Edit menu, click Adjust Design Dimensions. The
Design Dimensions dialog box is displayed.
2 Click either Fence Section Design or Fence Gate Design.
3 Select Privacy on the Component Style drop-down menu.
4 Specify (in inches) the width and height of each gate or
section in the corresponding text boxes.
5 Click OK. The privacy fence is displayed in the design
window.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 269


Chapter 36 Fence Designer

completely replace the original material in your selected


area with a custom material of your choice.

To apply color or texture to a fence component or


shape
1 Click the Freehand Detailing tab; a toolbar is displayed at
the top of the design window.
2 Click the editing mode that you want to apply, then select
a color or material from the Preview Bar.
3 Select a fence component (such as a rail or a picket) or a
shape. The color or texture is applied to that shape.

To change the material scale


2 Click either Resize Using Dimensions or Resize Using
1 Right-click an object to which material has been applied,
Percentages, then enter new values for the width and
then click Change Material Scale. The Material Scale
height in the corresponding text boxes.
dialog box is displayed.
3 (optional) Check Rescale Freehand Geometry if you
want to scale any shapes you have already drawn in the
design.
4 Click OK.

Editing Your Custom Fence


2 Specify a new horizontal and vertical scale in the
In Freehand Detailing mode, you can move, rotate, or apply corresponding text boxes.
colors and textures to individual components of the fence or
3 Click OK.
gate. You can even add custom shapes to the design.
All shapes drawn in Fence Designer can be edited in a variety File Management
of ways. They can be moved specified amounts, rotated,
You can return to a Fence Designer project simply by
layered, and even converted to other types of drawing shapes.
opening an existing fence design file. Fence designs are
Object-Level Editing is active by default. Object-Level
saved with the file extension *.FDD. When you’re ready to
Editing, along with Point-Level Editing, controls how your
use your fence design in a home design project, simply
edits impact your object. If you are in object selection mode,
export it to one of the custom material libraries.
changes affect the object as a whole. If you are working in
point selection mode, each edge of the object is treated
To open an existing fence definition
separately as you edit.
1 On the File menu, click Open or click the Open
The four editing modes available in Fence Designer are: button. The Open Design dialog box is displayed.
■ Color Ramp. Tools in this mode will completely
replace the original color in your selected area 2 In the File Name box, type the name of the file you want
with a color of your choice. to open or search for the file by switching folders or
■ Custom Color. Tools in this mode will completely drives.
replace the original color in your selected area 3 When you see the name of the file you want to open,
with a custom color of your choice. click to select it.
■ Material Library. Tools in this mode completely
4 Click Open.
replace the original material in your selected area
with a standard Punch! material of your choice.
To save a fence image to a material library
■ Custom Material Library. If you have already
saved custom materials, tools in this mode 1 On the File menu, click Export to Material Library. The
Fence Designer dialog box is displayed.

270 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Using Fence Designer Images in Your Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 Project

2 Type a name for the new fence or gate in the Material


File Name text box.
4 Click the custom fence material you want to apply; hold
3 Type a description of the new fence or gate in the
down the mouse button and drag it onto the fence or gate
Material Description text box.
in the LiveView window. The custom material you
4 Click OK. selected is applied.

Using Fence Designer Images in Your


Punch! Home Design Architectural Series
4000 Project
Once you’ve created your own custom fence or gate
materials in Fence Designer you can easily apply them back
in your Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000
project. After you’ve drawn a fence on the Landscaping tab,
simply navigate to the library where you stored the new
image, and drag the image to the fence in your LiveView
window.

To apply Fence Designer images


1 Click the Materials Tab. The Preview Bar
will display materials available for
placement.
2 Click the black arrow on the Material tab
and click Custom Material Library on the
pop-up menu that is displayed.

3 At the top of the Preview Bar, click the down arrow next
to “Materials”, then click Custom Fences, then select the
type of fence you want to use. Custom fence material
options appear in the Preview Bar.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 271


Chapter 36 Fence Designer

272 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Chapter 37

Elevation Editor
Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000’s powerful Elevation Editor allows you to view and edit your design in
3D! You can add and remove windows or doors, or change their elevation, and all your changes are automatically applied
to your 2D floorplan. You can even save the finished image for use in the Layout Manager!

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 273


Chapter 37 Elevation Editor

Launching Elevation Editor Changing Door Settings


Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 includes a There is no need to redraw a door just because you need a
PowerTool called Elevation Editor. different size or style. You can control many of the door’s
features through the Custom Door dialog box.
Launching Elevation Editor
■ Launch Elevation Editor by clicking the To change door type
Elevation Editor icon on the PowerTool Bar. 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Right-click a door in your drawing, then click Door
Properties on the pop-up menu that is displayed. The
Adding and Modifying Doors and Windows Door Properties dialog box is displayed.
Punch! AS4000 takes the guesswork out of placing doors and 3 Click a new door type in the Type section of the Door
windows by allowing you to add and modify doors and Properties dialog box, then click OK.
windows, while viewing your design in 3D.
There are many styles of openings and doors available in To resize a door by specifying dimensions
Elevation Editor and they are all placed in the same manner. 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Right-click a door in your drawing, then click Door
To add an opening or door Properties on the pop-up menu that is displayed. The
1 Click the Door Tool. Door Properties dialog box is displayed.

2 The Preview Bar displays the styles that are


available.
3 Click the arrow to the right of the word
Doors above the Preview Bar to select
either painted or stained.
4 Click the Door style of your choice.The
Door Properties menu is displayed.

3 Type the new dimensions in the Dimensions area of the


dialog box, then click OK.

To change door swing


1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Right-click a door in your drawing, then click Door
Properties on the pop-up menu that is displayed. The
Door Properties dialog box is displayed.
5 (optional) Click the radio button next to another style to
3 Type the new door swing angle in the text box in the
choose a different door style.
Door Attributes section. Click OK. The door swing
6 Type the Width, Height, Elevation and Trim Width to updates.
customize them.
7 Click OK. To change the flip the direction of a door
8 Click a wall in the Elevation Editor window where you 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
want to place the door or opening. 2 Right-click a door in your drawing, then click Door
Properties on the pop-up menu that is displayed. The
Door Properties dialog box is displayed.

274 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Adding Windows

3 Check Reverse Hinges in the Door Attribute Section. 9 Click a wall in the Elevation Editor window where you
Click OK. The door flips direction. want to place a window.
Note: If you change the elevation, all windows placed after
To change the elevation of a door
this are placed at the newly-specified elevation.
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click a door to select it. Changing Window Settings
3 Right-click a door in your drawing, then click Door The Elevation Editor allows you to resize, reposition or
Properties on the pop-up menu that is displayed. The change the properties on windows. You can specify exact
Door Properties dialog box is displayed. dimensions, change the grill settings, flip windows vertically
4 Type the elevation in the text box. Click OK. The door is or horizontally or change their elevations.
raised or lowered into position.
To resize a window by specifying dimensions
5 (optional) Use the Elevation Slider at the left of the
screen to raise or lower the selected door into position. 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Right-click a window in your drawing, then click
Adding Windows Window Properties on the pop-up menu that is displayed.
The Window Properties dialog box is displayed.
Like doors and cased openings, there are an extensive
variety of windows available in the Elevation Editor and
they are all placed in the same manner.

To add a window
1 Click the Window Tool.
2 The Preview Bar displays the available styles.
3 Click the arrow to the right of the word
Windows above the Preview Bar to select
either painted or stained.
4 Click the Window style of your choice. The
Window Properties dialog box is displayed. 3 Type the new sizes in the Dimensions area of the
Window Properties dialog box, then click OK.

To flip a window
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Right-click a window in your drawing, then click
Window Properties on the pop-up menu that is displayed.
The Window Properties dialog box is displayed.
3 Check the box next to Flip Horizontally, Flip Vertically
or both, then click OK.
Note: Flip is not available for Double Hung or Casement/
5 Type the Width, Height, Elevation and Trim Width to Picture windows.
customize them.
To change the grill settings of a window
6 (optional) For double-hung or casement/picture
windows, specify the grill spacing. 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.

7 (optional) Click the radio button next to another style to 2 Right-click a window in your drawing, then click
choose a different window. Window Properties on the pop-up menu that is displayed.
The Window Properties dialog box is displayed.
8 Click OK.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 275


Chapter 37 Elevation Editor

Outputting Elevation Data


When you’ve finished modifying your design in the
Elevation Editor, you can save the view as a bitmap, print the
view or save the changes in Punch! AS4000 and close the
Elevation Editor.

To save an elevation view


1 On the File menu, click Export Image, then click the
format you prefer. The Export Image dialog box is
displayed.
2 Type a name in the File Name text box. Punch! AS4000
3 Click either Double Hung or Casement/Picture. The Grill
automatically adds the appropriate extension, then click
settings dialog is displayed.
OK.
Note: The Grill settings dialog box only appears when a
Double Hung or Casement/Picture window option is chosen. To save your changes and return to Punch! Home
Design
4 Using the scroll bars in the Grill section of the dialog
box, adjust the grill appearance, then click OK. The new ■ On the File menu, click Exit and Return to Punch!
grill settings are applied. Home Design. Your changes are saved and the Elevation
Editor window closes.
To elevate a window
To print your elevation view
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click the window to select it. 1 On the File menu, click Print, then select the quality
needed. The print dialog box is displayed.
3 Raise or lower the window into position using the
Elevation Slider at the left of the screen. 2 Click the down arrow next to the printer name.
3 Click the printer you want to use.
4 Click the Properties button. The Properties dialog box is
displayed.
5 Select the paper orientation.
6 Select the paper size. Typically, this is either 8.5x 11 in
(letter) or 8.5x14 in (legal).
7 Click the down arrow next to media type, then select the
required media.
8 Click either Auto Feeder or Manual Feed as your paper
feed method.
9 Click OK.

276 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Chapter 38

Framing Editor
Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000’s versatile Framing Editor allows you to view and edit the framing of your
design. You can add beams, joists and other supports, plus you have total control over what size lumber is used for what
purpose. All modifications made in Framing Editor can be applied back to Punch! AS4000.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 277


Chapter 38 Framing Editor

Launching Framing Editor 2 Click the radio button next to the type of material you
want to use or specify a Custom Wall type.
Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 includes a
PowerTool called Framing Editor. 3 (optional) Click the Insulated Wall button to add or
remove insulation.
Launching Framing Editor 4 (optional) Click the Load Bearing Wall button to suit
■ Launch Framing Editor by clicking the Framing your design.
Editor icon on the PowerTool Bar.
To specify floor cutout properties
1 Click a floor cutout, then click Floor Cutout Properties
Customizing Wall Framing Properties on the pop-up menu that is displayed. The Floor Cutout
Properties menu is displayed.
Although you draw walls in Punch! Home Design
Architectural Series 4000, Framing Editor lets you specify
which walls are insulated, which are load bearing, and so on.

To specify insulation
■ Click a wall, then click Insulated
Wall on the pop-up menu that is
displayed.
or
■ Click a wall, then click Wall
Framing Properties on the pop-up
menu that is displayed. Check the Insulated Wall box.
2 Click the radio button next to Frame Rim Header Joists to
To specify load bearing
specify that the cutout is framed.
■ Click a wall, then click Load
3 Click the radio button next to the type of material you
Bearing on the pop-up menu that is
want to use or specify a Custom Joists type.
displayed.
or
■ Click a wall, then click Wall Adding Structural Components
Framing Properties on the pop-up Framing Editor lets you define exactly where and what kind
menu that is displayed. Check the Load Bearing Wall of lumber or other material is to be used for the framing
box. phase of your design.

To specify wall framing properties To add a framing beam


1 Click a wall, then click Wall Framing Properties on the
pop-up menu that is displayed. The Wall Framing 1 Click the Framing Beam Tool. The Preview Bar
displays predefined beam sizes.
Properties menu is displayed.
2 On the Preview Bar, click the size of beam
you want.
3 Press the mouse button on the design window
to define the start point of the beam. A
rubber-band line is displayed and follows the
pointer.
4 Hold the mouse button down, as you extend
the beam to the length you want.
5 Release the mouse button to end drawing mode.

278 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Customizing Framing Beam Properties

Note: Drawing is constrained to 15 degree angles; to release To specify beam type


this constraint hold down the SHIFT key, while drawing. 1 Double click a framing beam. The Beam Properties menu
is displayed.
To add flooring joists

1 Click the Joists Tool. The Preview Bar


displays predefined joists sizes.
2 On the Preview Bar, click the size of flooring
joists you want.
3 Click on the design window to define the start
point of the flooring joists. A rubber-band
line is displayed and follows the pointer. This
line signifies the first edge of the flooring
joists. Notice that dimensions are displayed,
as you draw. 2 Click the radio button next to the type of beam you want.
3 Click OK.

2
12 To customize beam type
1 Double click a framing beam. The Beam Properties menu
52 is displayed.
2 2 Click the radio button next to Custom Beam Type.
42
3
3 beamClick Material. The Choose Framing Material menu
2

4 Click and move the pointer to the next cornerpoint.


is displayed.
Repeat until you have completely drawn the flooring
joists area. 4 Click the radio button next to the material you want to
use.
5 Right-click to end drawing mode.
5 (optional) Click Color and choose a custom color.
To place support columns 6 Click OK.
1 Click the Support Column Tool. The
Preview Bar displays predefined column To change framing beam size
diameters. 1 Double click a framing beam. The Beam Properties menu
2 On the Preview Bar, click the column is displayed.
diameter you want. 2 Type the width and depth of the beam to be used.
3 Click on the design window. A support 3 Click OK.
column will be placed at the location of each
click. Customizing Joist Properties
Framing Editor automatically frames each floor, wall and
roof section with specifications set in Punch! Home Design
Architectural Series 4000. You can easily modify all of these
settings.
Customizing Framing Beam Properties To specify joist material
After adding a framing beam you can change its type and
1 Double click the perimeter of a framing section. The
size.
Joists Properties menu is displayed.
PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 279
Chapter 38 Framing Editor

To specify rim joists


1 Double click the perimeter of a framing section. The
Joists Properties menu is displayed.
2 Check the box next to Rim Joists (Headers).
3 Click OK.

Specifying Support Column Properties


2 Click the radio button next to the material you want. After adding a support column in Framing Editor you can
change its material and size.
3 Click OK.
To specify column material
To customize joist material
1 Double click a support column. The Column Properties
1 Double click the perimeter of a framing section. The menu is displayed.
Joists Properties menu is displayed.
2 Click the radio button next to Custom Joists Type.
3 Type the name you want to call the custom joists type.
4 Click Material. The Choose Framing Material menu is
displayed.
5 Click the radio button next to the material you want to
use.
6 (optional) Click Color and choose a custom color.
7 Click OK. 2 Click the radio button next to the type of column you
want.
To change joists angle 3 Click OK.
1 Double click the perimeter of a framing section. The
Joists Properties menu is displayed. To customize column material

2 Type the degree you want the joists to be placed. 1 Double click a support column. The Column Properties
menu is displayed.
3 Click OK.
2 Click the radio button next to Custom Column Type.
To change joists spacing 3 Type the name you want to call the custom column type.
1 Double click the perimeter of a framing section. The 4 Click Material. The Choose Framing Material menu is
Joists Properties menu is displayed. displayed.
2 Type the new spacing in inches or feet and inches, 5 Click the radio button next to the material you want to
separated by a hyphen. For example, 10-0 indicates ten use.
feet while 10 is interpreted as ten inches. 6 (optional) Click Color and choose a custom color.
3 Click OK. 7 Click OK.

To change joists size To change column size


1 Double click the perimeter of a framing section. The 1 Double click a support column. The Column Properties
Joists Properties menu is displayed. menu is displayed.
2 Type the new size in inches or feet and inches, separated 2 Type the diameter and height of the column to be used.
by a hyphen. For example, 10-0 indicates ten feet while
10 is interpreted as ten inches. 3 Click OK.

3 Click OK.

280 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Customizing Door and Window Headers

Customizing Door and Window Headers 2 Click the radio button next to Custom Rafter Type.
Framing Editor automatically adds 2"x12" door and window 3 Type the name you want to call the custom rafter type.
headers above all openings. You can change this preset if 4 Click Material. The Choose Framing Material menu is
you want a different sized header. displayed.
5 Click the radio button next to the material you want to
To specify header size
use.
1 Click a window or door on the design window, then
6 (optional) Click Color and choose a custom color.
click Header Size on the pop-up box. The Header Size
menu is displayed. 7 Click OK.

To change rafter spacing


1 Click the perimeter of a roof section, then click Roof
Properties on the pop-up menu. The Rafter Properties
menu is displayed.
2 Type the new spacing in inches or feet and inches,
separated by a hyphen. For example, 10-0 indicates ten
feet, while 10 is interpreted as ten inches.
3 Click OK.
2 Click the radio button next to the size header you want.
3 Click OK. To change rafter size
1 Click the perimeter of a roof section, then click Roof
Customizing Rafter Properties Properties on the pop-up menu. The Rafter Properties
menu is displayed.
Framing Editor automatically frames each roof section with
specifications set in Punch! Home Design Architectural 2 Type the new size in inches or feet and inches, separated
Series 4000. You can easily modify all of these settings. by a hyphen. For example, 10-0 indicates ten feet while
10 is interpreted as ten inches.
To specify rafter material 3 Click OK.
1 Click the perimeter of a roof section, then click Roof
Properties on the pop-up menu. The Rafter Properties To specify estimation options
menu is displayed. 1 Double click the perimeter of a framing section. The
Joists Properties menu is displayed.
2 Click the radio button next to the option you want
estimated.
3 Click OK.

To specify roofing trusses


1 Click the perimeter of a roof section, then click Roof
Properties on the pop-up menu. The Rafter Properties
menu is displayed.
2 Click the radio button next to the material you want. 2 Click the radio button next to Frame Trusses.
3 Click OK.

To customize rafter material


1 Click the perimeter of a roof section, then click Roof
Properties on the pop-up menu. The Rafter Properties
menu is displayed.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 281


Chapter 38 Framing Editor

To edit deck framing properties


1 Click the perimeter of a deck section, then click Deck
Properties on the pop-up menu. The Deck Properties
menu is displayed.
2 Type a Decking Angle in the text box. Decking Angle is
measured in degrees.
3 Type the the Board Spacing in the text box. Board
Spacing is the space between each board in the deck.
3 Type the truss spacing in the text box. Click OK. 4 Type the the Board Size in the text box. .
5 (optional) Check Fascia if fascia is needed.
Customizing Deck Properties 6 Click OK.
Framing Editor automatically frames each deck section with
specifications set in Punch! Home Design Architectural To specify concrete deck pier/posts
Series 4000. You can easily modify all of these settings. 1 Click pier or post at the corner of a deck section, then
click Deck Pier/Post Properties on the pop-up menu. The
To specify deck material Deck Pier/PostProperties menu is displayed.
1 Click the perimeter of a deck section, then click Deck
Properties on the pop-up menu. The Deck Properties
menu is displayed.

2 Click the radio button next to concrete.


2 Click the radio button next to the material you want. 3 Click OK.
3 Click OK.
To customize deck pier/post material
To customize deck material 1 Click pier or post at the corner of a deck section, then
1 Click the perimeter of a deck section, then click Deck click Deck Pier/Post Properties on the pop-up menu. The
Properties on the pop-up menu. The Deck Properties Deck Pier/PostProperties menu is displayed.
menu is displayed. 2 Click the radio button next to Custom.
2 Click the radio button next to Custom. 3 Type the name you want to call the custom material.
3 Type the name you want to call the custom material. 4 Click Material. The Choose Framing Material menu is
4 Click Material. The Choose Framing Material menu is displayed.
displayed. 5 Click the radio button next to the material you want to
5 Click the radio button next to the material you want to use.
use. 6 (optional) Click Color and choose a custom color.
6 (optional) Click Color and choose a custom color. 7 Click OK.
7 Click OK.

282 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Specifying Estimation Options

To edit deck pier/post properties To print to fit page


1 Click pier or post at the corner of a deck section, then 1 On the File menu, click Print to Fit Page or press Ctrl+P.
click Deck Pier/Post Properties on the pop-up menu. The A Print Manager menu will ask if you want to print your
Deck Pier/PostProperties menu is displayed. drawing in color. Click Yes to print in color, click no to
2 Type a Pier Depth in the text box. print in greyscale.

3 Type a Pier Width in the text box. 2 The Print dialog box is displayed.

4 Type a Pier Elevation in the text box.


5 Click OK.

Specifying Estimation Options


Framing Editor uses many settings from Punch! AS4000 to
estimate your design after framing. You can customize these
settings to fit your needs.

To specify estimation options


1 On the Options menu, click Estimation Options. The
Estimation Options menu is displayed.

3 Click the down arrow next to the printer name.


4 Click the printer you want to use.
5 Click the Properties button. The Properties menu is
displayed.
Note: The following Properties menu is that of a popular
color printer. Refer to your printer’s documentation on the
use of its specific features.
6 Select the paper orientation.
7 Select the paper size. Typically, this will be either 8.5x11
in (letter) or 8.5x14 in (legal).
2 Type the needed measurements in the appropriate text 8 Click the down arrow next to media type. Then select the
boxes. required media.
3 Click OK. 9 Click either Auto Feeder or Manual Feed as your paper
feed method, then click OK.

To print to scale
Printing and Exporting Files
1 On the File menu, click Print to Scale. A Print Manager
Punch! Framing Editor prints using the current Windows menu will ask if you want to print your drawing in color.
printer. You can, however, print using any installed printer. Click Yes to print in color, click no to print in greyscale.
Your can print your drawing in color or in black and white; it
can be printed to scale or you can print it all on one page, 2 The Print dialog box is displayed.
whatever you require. You can also export a rendering to 3 Click the down arrow next to the printer name.
BMP format for use in Layout Manager. 4 Click the printer you want to use.
5 Click the Properties button. The Properties menu is
displayed.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 283


Chapter 38 Framing Editor

6 Select the paper orientation. 4 (optional) Right-click the selection and click Move to
7 Select the paper size. Typically, this will be either 8.5x11 Plan on the pop-up menu that is displayed, then click
in (letter) or 8.5x14 in (legal). which plan. The selection is moved to the plan you
specified.
8 Click the down arrow next to media type. Then select the
required media. Note: Items on a hidden layer are not available during a
Select All process and will not be moved along with the other
9 Click either Auto Feeder or Manual Feed as your paper
items and features in your drawing.
feed method, then click OK.

To print a 3D LiveView rendering


1 On the File menu, click Print 3D LiveView, then select
the quality needed. The print dialog box is displayed.
2 Click the down arrow next to the printer name.
3 Click the printer you want to use.
4 Click the Properties button. The Properties menu is
displayed.
5 Select the paper orientation.
6 Select the paper size. Typically, this will be either 8.5x
11 in (letter) or 8.5x14 in (legal).
7 Click on the down arrow next to media type. Then select
the required media.
8 Click either Auto Feeder or Manual Feed as your paper
feed method.
9 Click OK.

To export to BMP
1 On the File menu, click Export BMP. The Export BMP
dialog box is displayed.
2 In the File Name text box, type a name. Punch! Framing
Editor automatically adds the BMP extension, then click
OK.

Moving Features to Different Plans


Just like in Punch! AS4000, you can move selections to
different plan layers. Move to Plan deletes these objects from
their original position.

To move features from one plan to another


1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click the feature or object you want moved. To
select more than one object, press the SHIFT key, while
clicking objects.
3 On the Edit menu, click Move to Plan, then specify the
plan, where you want the feature to appear, in the pop-up
menu that is displayed.

284 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Chapter 39

Estimator
Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 keeps track of building materials, as you design your home. Estimator
continually and automatically tallies your expenses and building materials. This information is presented in an editable,
printable, exportable spreadsheet format. Estimator also utilizes the Plan Tabs from Punch! Home Design Architectural
Series 4000, so you can easily find the materials for a specific part of your design.
As you input the material costs for your area, Estimator calculates the subtotals of each size door and window, each plant
type, including sod, roofing materials and roof trusses and computes the grand total for the entire project.
You can even create custom pricelists, so you use appropriate vendors or wholesalers for specific parts of the job.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 285


Chapter 39 Estimator

Launching Estimator 6 Press OK.


Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 includes an 7 (optional) Click “Exit and Return to Home Design”, if
extremely versatile PowerTool called Estimator. Estimator you do not want to launch Estimator and, instead, want to
inventories almost every feature of your design. Prices may return to Punch! AS4000.
be higher during the peak building season and will depend on
the part of the country where you are building your new Customizing the Spreadsheet
home. You can obtain specific costs from your local supplier You may find it easier to use or read the data, if you change
or contractor. the colors of specific areas of your spreadsheet. Punch!
AS4000 makes this easy. You can assign any color you want
Launching Estimator to certain parts of the spreadsheet.
1 Launch Estimator by clicking the Estimator
icon on the PowerTool Bar. The Setup Options To customize colors
menu is displayed. 1 Click Set Colors on the Options menu. The Colors dialog
box is displayed.

2 Click the Dry Wall Estimation option you want. By 2 Click the color block next to the feature you want to
default, Estimator will estimate dry wall usage without customize. The Color dialog box is displayed.
regard to where doors or windows are placed. Click
“Take out Window and Door Area”, if you want to
subtract those areas from the calculation.
3 Click the Wall Material Estimation options you want. By
default, Estimator will make estimations without regard
to where doors or windows are placed or whether or not
the walls have base trim. Click “Take out Window and
Door Area” and/or “Take out Base Trim Area”, if you
want to subtract those areas from the calculation.
4 Click the Insulation option you want. By default,
Estimator will estimate insulation needed without regard
to where doors or windows are placed. Click “Take out
3 Click one of the Basic or Custom colors or click on the
Window and Door Area”, if you want to subtract those
color spectrum block to select a color.
areas from the calculation.
4 (optional) Adjust the current Red, Green and Blue values
5 Click the Calculate Roofing Squares option you want. By to create a custom color.
default, Estimator will estimate the number of roofing
squares needed for your design. Click “Off”, if you do 5 (optional) Click an area on the color spectrum window to
not need this calculation. select a color, then adjust the RGB values, if necessary.

286 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Selecting a Plan Tab

6 Click OK. The color you defined is displayed on the To calculate construction costs
color block on the Change color dialog box. 1 Click the green cell next to Construction Square Foot
7 Click OK. The color is applied to the spreadsheet. Cost.
2 Type the estimated cost.
To reset a color back to the default
3 Press ENTER. Punch! AS4000 automatically calculates
■ Click the Reset button next to the feature you want to the total and places it in the grey-shaded cell across from
reset to the default color. Then click OK. Total Cost.

To reset all colors


Completing the Various Schedules
■ Click the Reset All button. Then click OK.
Estimator catalogs the features of your design that appear on
each Plan Tab. From cubic yards of concrete, for a slab
To hide tools
foundation, to light switches, everything is displayed on
■ Click to uncheck Show Tools on the View menu. The individual lines and calculations are based upon prices that
tool icons on the spreadsheet are hidden. you obtain from a building supply company near you.

To complete Estimator schedules


1 Click the green-shaded cell for the Unit Cost of each
material or feature of your design.
2 Type the estimated cost.
3 Press ENTER. Punch! AS4000 automatically calculates
the total and displays it in the Total Cost column, then
keeps a running Grand Total of each schedule.
Note: Use the arrow keys on your keyboard to move around
your spreadsheet.

Creating a Master Pricelist


Estimator saves the prices you enter in a master pricelist file
to make it easy to create a new estimate after making
Selecting a Plan Tab alterations to your design. In addition, you can create
Estimator will automatically display features and materials individual pricelists for each building supply company,
used on all plan tabs of your design. You can choose to vendor or wholesaler that you make purchases from.
estimate specific areas of your design, for instance just the
HVAC materials or just the materials for your deck. To store a master pricelist
1 On the View menu, click Plan Cost List. The Filtered
To select a plan tab Cost List menu is displayed.
1 Click the plan tab you want to use. The plan tab is
selected and the materials list for that tab appears.
2 (optional) Click Estimates on the View Menu, then click
the individual plan you want.

Calculating Construction Costs


Estimator automatically calculates the total square footage
for each floor of your design. The Construction Cost Per
Square Foot is dependent upon variables specific to your
area. You can obtain specific costs from your local supplier
or contractor.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 287


Chapter 39 Estimator

2 Type the costs from the source where you plan to


purchase materials.
3 Click Save as a Master when you have finished updating
your prices. The Save As dialog box is displayed.

3 Type a file name in the File Name text box or click to


select the Master List you want to use. Click Save.

Exporting a Pricelist
4 Type a file name in the File Name text box, the extension You can export the information contained in an Estimator
is automatically added. Click Save. spreadsheet so you can use the information in other
programs.
5 Click Save.
6 (optional) If you want to save the drawing to a different To export a pricelist to Excel
drive or folder, click a different drive and folder or type 1 Click Export on the File menu, then click Excel File. The
the complete path in the File Name text box. Click Save. Save As dialog box is displayed.
To open a master pricelist
1 On the View menu, click Plan Cost List. The Filtered
Cost List menu is displayed.

2 Type a file name in the File Name text box, the extension
is automatically added. Click Save.

To export a comma delimited file


1 Click Export on the File menu, then click Comma
Delimited. The Save As dialog box is displayed.
2 Type a file name in the File Name text box, the extension
is automatically added. Click Save.

To export a tab delimited file


2 Click Open Master List. The Open dialog box is 1 Click Export on the File menu, then click Tab Delimited.
displayed. The Save As dialog box is displayed.
2 Type a file name in the File Name text box, the extension
is automatically added. Click Save.

288 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Printing a Pricelist

To export an HTML file


1 Click Export on the File menu, then click HTML File.
The Save As dialog box is displayed.
2 Type a file name in the File Name text box, the extension
is automatically added. Click Save.
Note: All necessary graphics are copied to the directory
where you save the HTM file. You will need to upload all
files to your web server to make them available to be viewed
by others.

To export a QuickBooks list


1 Click Export on the File menu, then click QuickBooks
Item List. The Save As dialog box is displayed.
2 Type a file name in the File Name text box, the extension
is automatically added. Click Save.

Printing a Pricelist
You can print pricelists any way you need them. There are
many ways to customize your estimations.

To print a pricelist
1 Click Print on the File menu. The Print Preview Setup
dialog box is displayed.

2 Click to check the options you want to have printed and


uncheck any options you don’t want to print.
3 Click Portrait or Landscape.
4 Click Printer Setup to specify what printer you want to
use. For more information on printer setup, see “Printing
Floorplans”, which begins on page 22.
5 Click Preview to see what the page will look like before
you actually print it.
6 Click Print when you have finished setting the options.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 289


Chapter 39 Estimator

290 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Part 8

Presentation &
CAD PowerTools

Chapter 40: RealModel® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293


Chapter 41: Layout Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Chapter 42: Symbol Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Chapter 43: Section Detailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Chapter 44: Global Sun Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Chapter 40

RealModel®
Punch! AS4000 integrates the exclusive, patented RealModel® technology, making it easy to construct an actual scale
model of any home you draw.
Once you have completed your home design, details are automatically transferred to the RealModel application.
Instructions on building your home model are printed, with numbered sections and floor plan templates that make
assembling it simple.
This hands-on model shows you how to improve your design and save on construction costs, before you break ground. This
is the perfect tool for presenting your ideas to your builder or architect.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 293


Chapter 40 RealModel®

Preparing to Construct a RealModel Setting Print Setup


When constructing a RealModel, you’ll need to get a few Punch! AS4000 prints using the current Windows printer.
supplies together first. Visit your local craft supply or hobby You can, however, print using any installed, Windows-
store to purchase these materials. compatible printer. Through the Print dialog box you can
specify a printer or plotter from those currently installed.
Items you’ll need to construct a RealModel:
■ Construction material — foam board or poster board To set print setup parameters
■ Adhesive — spray adhesive, rubber cement, or glue stick 1 On the File Menu, click Printer Setup. The Printer Setup
and so on. dialog box is displayed.
■ Tape
■ Straight pins
■ Straight-edge ruler
■ Artist’s knife or scalpel
Launch RealModel by clicking the RealModel
button on the PowerTool tab or by clicking Launch
RealModel on the File menu.

Defining Scale
The scale you choose will define the actual size of your
model. All model templates will print in this scale. For
example, if you choose 1/2"=1' - a ten-foot wall will print as 2 Click on the down arrow next to the printer name.
a five-inch template. 3 Click the printer you want to use.
To select scale 4 Click on the down arrow next to paper size.
1 On the Model menu, click Scale. 5 Select the size of paper in your printer. Typically, this
will be either 8.5x11 in (letter) or 8.5x14 in (legal).
2 Click an architectural scale, then click OK.
6 Click on the down arrow next to paper source.
Choosing the Construction Material 7 Click the correct option. Typically, this will be either
AutoSelect or Manual Feed.
Choose a sturdy construction material such as foamcore for
construction of walls and roofs. Choose a thinner material for 8 Click either Portrait or Landscape in the Orientation area.
the base of the second and third floors, since using thick 9 Click OK.
material may cause a gap in the Material between floors of
your final product.
Printing Templates
To select construction material The templates are used to guide you as you build your
RealModel. They will specify which wall section is attached
1 On the Model menu, click Construction Material.
to other walls and where doors and windows are placed.
2 Select the button corresponding to the thickness of the Floor templates show where each wall is placed. You have
material you will use to construct your model. A preview the choice of printing all wall, roof or floor templates at one
of the actual size of your construction material is time or printing each individually.
displayed.
3 (optional) If the exact measurement is not displayed, use To print wall templates
the material thickness slider bar to select your 1 On the File menu, click Print All Wall Templates. The
construction material. Print dialog box is displayed.
4 Click OK. 2 Confirm your default printer selection, then click OK.

294 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Constructing Wall Templates

To print roof templates 2 Cut out each roof section to the exact size of the
1 On the File menu, click Print All Roof Templates. The template.
Print dialog box is displayed. 3 Attach each roof template to its appropriate counterpart.
2 Confirm your default printer selection, then click OK. 4 Secure the roof to the walls.

To print floor templates Printing Template Materials and Colors


1 On the File menu, click Print Floor Template, then click To add a realistic look to your RealModel, you can print
First Floor (or the floor you want to print). The Print sheets of materials and colors to be applied to your model and
dialog box is displayed. trimmed to size. With this process you can see what your
2 Confirm your default printer selection, then click OK. design will look like. Follow these steps for every wall and
roof on your model.
To print a specific, individual template
To print template materials and colors
1 On the File menu, click Print Template. The Print
Template dialog box is displayed. 1 Decide which material you want to print first.

2 Type the number of the template you want to print, then


click Print. The Print dialog box is displayed.
3 Confirm your printer settings, then click OK.

Constructing Wall Templates


You will notice that some wall templates will have darker
shaded edges. These shaded areas indicate the thickness of
your construction material. Use these as guidelines on where
to attach adjoining walls. The directions for connecting the
2 On the File menu, click Print Template Materials and
walls will be printed on each page. Be sure to transfer this
Colors. The Print Template Materials and Colors dialog
information to the template before cutting it out.
box is displayed.
To construct a wall template
1 Attach each wall template to your construction material,
using a permanent adhesive.
2 Cut out each wall section to the exact size of the
3 Type the template number of the material and color you
template. Be sure to include shaded areas.
want to print, then click Print. The Print dialog box is
3 Attach each template to its appropriate counterpart. displayed.
4 Confirm your printer settings, then click OK.
Constructing Roof Templates
Note: It is best to print and assemble the material and color
Although your roof templates may print attached at points,
on each wall before moving on to the next wall. If you choose
cut out each roof section separately from your construction
not to do this, you should label each material template and
material to the exact size of the template.
color, as they are printed, to make identifying them easier
when attaching them to your model.
To construct a roof template
1 Attach each roof template to your construction material,
using a permanent adhesive.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 295


Chapter 40 RealModel®

Attaching Template Materials and Colors to


Your Model
Once the materials and colors have been printed, you will
need to affix them to the appropriate template and trim them
to size. It is best to use spray adhesive, glue stick or tape for
this step, as using white glue may cause the paper to wrinkle.

To attach the template materials and colors


1 Affix the material to the proper wall template, which has
already been attached to the construction material.
2 Carefully trim around the outside edges of the wall
template.
3 Cut out the door and window openings.
4 Attach each template to its appropriate counterpart.

296 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Chapter 41

Layout Manager
Among the Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 PowerTools, is the Layout Manager. Layout Manager makes
it easy to create presentations with your design. You can create a presentation of elevations which shows all four sides on
one sheet or you can show a floorplan in 2D and a 3D LiveView with the roof cutaway to reveal that floor. The
combinations
are as varied as your needs.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 297


Chapter 41 Layout Manager

Launching Layout Manager To change the active floor


Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 includes a 1 Click a Home Design Layout box to select it; right-click
PowerTool called Layout Manager. and select Home Design Layout Properties. The Layout
Box Properties dialog box is displayed.
Launching Layout Manager 2 Under Active Floor, select the floor(s) you want
■ Launch Layout Manager by clicking the Layout displayed.
Manager icon on the PowerTool Bar. 3 Click OK.

Creating a Layout
Punch! AS4000 allows you to draw three types of layout
boxes:
■ Home Design Layout Boxes display a 2D plan view of
your home. You can display single or multiple floors, as
well as select which plan views to display.
■ Image Layout Boxes display a bitmap image of your
home, created in the Elevation Editor or exported from
Punch! Home Design.
■ LiveView Layout Boxes display a live, interactive 3D To delete layout boxes
image of your home. You can use the fly-around feature ■ Click a Home Design Layout box to select it; right-click
to create a custom view of your home or use the 3D and select Clear or press DELETE.
Cutaway Slider to reveal interior features of your home.
Adding Image Layout Boxes
Adding Home Design Layout Boxes Using the Image Layout Box, you can import an image of the
You can have any number of layout boxes in your house plan in the presentation.
presentation to display all aspects of your home plan.
To insert an Image Layout Box
To insert a Home Design Layout Box 1 Click the Image Layout Box icon.
1 Click the Home Design Layout Box icon.
2 Click and drag to create a rectangle. The Load
2 Click and drag to create a rectangle. The floor plan Layout Image dialog box is displayed.
is displayed. 3 Select the file for the plan you want to display.
To change the visible plans 4 Click Open.
1 Click a Home Design Layout box to select it; right-click To change the image in an Image Layout Box
and select Home Design Layout Properties. The Layout
Box Properties dialog box is displayed. 1 Click an Image Layout Box to select it; right-click and
select Change Image. The Load Layout Image dialog box
2 Under Visible Plans, select the plans you want displayed. is displayed.
3 Click OK. 2 Select the file.
To change the visible floors 3 Click Open.
1 Click a Home Design Layout box to select it; right-click To change the image ratio
and select Home Design Layout Properties. The Layout
Box Properties dialog box is displayed. ■ Click the Image Layout Box to select it; right-click and
select Stretch to fit or Maintain Ratio.
2 Under Visible Floors, select the floor(s) you want
displayed.
3 Click OK.

298 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Adding LiveView Layout Boxes

Adding LiveView Layout Boxes Printing your Layout


Using the LiveView Layout Box, you can include a real-time Punch! AS4000 prints using the current Windows printer.
view of the house plan as part of your presentation.
To modify print settings
To insert a LiveView Layout Box ■ On the Setup menu, click Paper Size to display the Print
1 Click the LiveView Layout Box icon. Setup dialog box.
2 Click and drag to create a rectangle. A Live View
of the house is created and the LiveView toolbar appears. To print your layout
■ On the File menu, click Print to display the Print dialog
Manipulating Layout Boxes box.

To duplicate an existing layout box Using Layout Templates


■ Click the layout box to select it; right-click and select Layout templates allow you to design a layout page, then
Duplicate Layout. save that design as a generic template. If you open another
drawing and apply the Layout Template, the new layout will
To move a layout box feature the same overall arrangement. If you used Home
1 Click the layout box you want to move. Design Layout Boxes in the template, those layout boxes will
display the new drawing with the same options. The new
2 On the Edit menu, click Move. The Move dialog box is layout will even display the LiveView of the new drawing!
displayed.
To save your layout as a template
1 On the File menu, click Save as Layout Template. The
Save to Layout Template Library dialog box is displayed.
2 Enter a name and description for the layout template.
3 Click either Cartesian or Polar, then type amount you
want the layout box moved in the appropriate text boxes.
4 Click OK. The layout box is moved, based on the
coordinates you specified.
Note: Coordinates are measured in inches or they can be
measured in feet and inches, separated by a hyphen.
3 Click OK.
To nudge a layout box
1 Click the layout box you want to move. To apply a template to your layout
2 On the Edit menu, click Nudge, then click the direction ■ If you have already saved a template, open the Layout
(up, down, left, or right) or use the arrow keys on your Manager and click and drag a template from the
keyboard. Templates Preview Bar.

To clear a layout box To delete a layout template


■ Click the layout box to select it; right-click and select ■ Right-click a template from the Templates Preview Bar
Clear or press DELETE. and click Delete Layout on the pop-up menu.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 299


Chapter 41 Layout Manager

300 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Chapter 42

Symbol Editor
Punch! Home Design Architectural Series 4000’s Symbol Editor lets you create custom symbols, or modify existing
symbols, for use in your 2D drawing plans. Using standard 2D design tools, you can draw the symbol, save it to a library
and even record a brief description of the symbol. You can manage your custom symbols, and the entire library of Punch!
AS4000 symbols, using the Symbol Organizer.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 301


Chapter 42 Symbol Editor

Launching Symbol Editor


■ Launch Symbol Editor by clicking the Symbol
Editor icon on the PowerTool Bar.

Managing Symbols
Symbol Editor not only allows you to save new symbols for
use in your 2D drawings, it also has easy-to-use tools for
organizing symbols and managing symbol categories.

To save a new symbol


1 On the Symbols drop-down menu, click Create
Symbol or click the Add Symbol to Library
button. The Save Symbol to Library dialog box is
displayed.
2 (optional) In the Symbol Category section, click to save 2 On the left side of the Symbol Organizer, select a
the symbol to a different category. category.
3 On the right side of the Symbol Organizer, select a
category.
4 Click to select the symbol you want to move.
5 (optional) Click the Info button to display information
about the selected symbol.
6 (optional) Click the Delete button to permanently remove
the selected symbol.
3 (optional) Click New to create a new symbol category.
7 Click an arrow button to move the selected symbol from
Select a folder in which to create the new category, then
one of the selected categories to the other.
type a name for the new category and click OK.
8 Click Close.
4 Type a name for the new symbol in the Symbol Name
text box. New symbol names can contain up to 44
To create, delete or rename a symbol category
characters.
1 On the Symbols drop-down menu, click Symbol
5 Type a description of the new symbol in the Symbol
Organizer. The Symbol Organizer dialog box is
Description text box. New symbol descriptions can
displayed.
contain up to 78 characters.
6 Click OK.

To move symbols between categories


1 On the Symbols drop-down menu, click
Symbol Organizer. The Symbol Organizer
dialog box is displayed.

302 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Editing CAD Objects

2 (optional) In the Category section, click the New button. 3 On the Edit menu, click Move. The Relocate Tool dialog
Select a folder in which to create the new category, then box is displayed.
type a name for the new category and click OK.
3 (optional) In the Category section, click Delete. Select a
folder to delete and click OK.
4 (optional) In the Category section, click Rename. Select
a folder to rename and click OK. Type a new name for
the category and click OK again.
5 Click Close.
4 Click either Cartesian or Polar, then type amount you
want the object moved in the appropriate text boxes.
5 Click OK. The object is moved, based on the coordinates
you specified.
Note: Coordinates are measured in inches or they can be
measured in feet and inches, separated by a hyphen.

To scale CAD objects


1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click a CAD object to select it.
Editing CAD Objects
3 On the Options menu, click Scale Selection or click
You can move, rotate and modify CAD objects, using the the Resize Selected Tool. The Scale Selection
array of editing tools in Symbol Editor. dialog box appears.

To nudge a CAD object 4 (optional) Click either Object Size or Percentage then
enter values to scale the object.
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click the object or feature to select it.
3 On the Edit menu, click Nudge, then click the direction
(up, down, left, right).
4 (optional) Use the arrow keys on your keyboard to nudge
the object or feature.

To resize CAD objects


1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click a CAD object to select it.
3 Click and hold down the mouse button, drag the segment
or point to a new location, then release the mouse button. 5 (optional) In the Scale From section, click a location to
Note: To constrain movements horizontally or vertically, use as the basepoint during the scaling operation. For
press SHIFT, while reshaping the object. instance, clicking Bottom Right means that location will
remain constant.
To move CAD objects 6 Click OK.
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
To skew CAD objects
2 Click a CAD object to select it.
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click a CAD object to select it.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 303


Chapter 42 Symbol Editor

3 On the Standard toolbar, click the Skew Tool.


4 Click a cornerpoint of the object; hold down the
mouse button and move the pointer in the direction that
you want the object to be slanted. Dimensions appear in
the position readout bar, as you draw.

Drag

3 On the Edit menu, click Duplicate Offsets. The Duplicate


Offsets dialog box is displayed.

5 Release the mouse to stop skewing the object.

To trim a CAD object


1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click the object you want to trim. Selection handles
appear around the object.
3 On the Standard toolbar, click the Trim Tool. 4 Type the horizontal and vertical offsets and the number
4 Click the point on the segment where you want to of duplicates.
trim (or break) the object into two separate segments. Note: These variables control the distance apart that the
duplicates are placed.
Duplicating Objects
5 Click OK. The object is duplicated at the offset you
Similar to cutting and pasting, the duplicate feature creates defined.
an exact copy of the object you select. In the Duplicate
Offsets dialog box, you can specify the number and specific
offset of
a series of duplicates.

To create a duplicate
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click the object you want to duplicate.
3 On the Edit menu, click Duplicate Object or press
CTRL+D.
Grouping Objects
To create a series of duplicate objects
By defining a Group, you create a set of selected objects that
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. are then treated as one item. You can have unlimited groups
2 Click the object you want to duplicate. in a drawing.

To group objects
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Hold down SHIFT and click on each object that
you want to be included in the group.

304 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Locking Objects

3 On the Arrange menu, click Group or right-click


and click Group on the pop-up menu that is
displayed or click the Group button.

To ungroup objects
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click the group you want to ungroup.
3 On the Arrange menu, click Ungroup or right-
click and click Ungroup on the pop-up menu that
is displayed or click the Ungroup button. 2 (optional) Type a new value in the Multigon Sides text
box. This value controls the number of sides on a
Locking Objects selected multigon and changes the number of sides
You can protect CAD objects or symbols from accidental multigons are drawn with.
modifications by locking them. You can have unlimited 3 (optional) Type a new value in the Curve Smoothness
locked objects in a drawing. text box. Lower values result in less curvature.
4 (optional) Type a new value in the Zoom Percentage text
To lock objects
box. This controls the amount of magnification that is
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. applied each time you click the Zoom Tool.
2 Click the object you want to lock. 5 (optional) Increase or decrease the Pixels setting in the
3 On the Arrange menu, click Lock or click the Scrolling Speed section. This value controls the rate at
Lock button. which the drawing window moves when you click the
scroll arrows.
To unlock objects 6 (optional) Increase or decrease the Snap Tool &
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. Selection Sensitivity. A lower value means that you must
click closer to an object to snap to or select it.
2 Click the locked object you want to unlock.
7 (optional) Increase or decrease the Join Sensitivity. A
3 On the Arrange menu, click Unlock or click the lower value means that you must position objects closer
Unlock button. to join them.

Controlling Drawing Settings 8 (optional) Uncheck Auto Reset Tools. When Auto Reset
Tools is unchecked, you can draw concurrent CAD
There are a variety of tools that allow you to control how you objects without selecting the corresponding CAD tool
draw, select or modify CAD objects and symbols. The each time.
Preferences dialog box lets you modify a variety of settings,
9 Click OK.
including the number of sides on a multigon or the sensitivity
of snap or join tools.
To change the drawing scale
Tools along the bottom of the drawing window allow you 1 On the Project menu, click Drawing Scale. The Drawing
draw parallel segments, switch between object and point Scale dialog box is displayed.
selection modes or center and corner drawing modes.

To change drawing preferences


1 On the Options menu, click Preferences. The Preferences
dialog box is displayed.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 305


Chapter 42 Symbol Editor

2 (optional) In the Screen Units section enter a new value 3 (optional) Type a new value in the Vertical text box.
and change the units of measurement. Higher values in 4 (optional) Click Move. The drawing origin is moved by
the screen units section make it easier to draw small the horizontal and vertical increment you specified.
details.
5 (optional) Click Reset. The drawing origin is returned to
3 (optional) In the World Units section enter a new value its the default location.
and change the units of measurement. Higher values in
the world units section make it easier to draw large To display the drawing pages
details.
■ On the Project menu, click to check Draw Page Breaks.
4 (optional) Check Rescale Objects to change existing When this item is checked, Symbol Editor displays the
objects to the new scale. actual page breaks in the drawing.
5 Click OK.
To display the drawing axis
To change the paper size ■ On the Project menu, click to check Draw Axis. When
1 On the Project menu, click Paper Size. The Paper Size this item is checked, Symbol Editor displays the actual
dialog box is displayed. horizontal and vertical drawing axes in the drawing.

To change the axis color


1 On the Project menu, click Axis Color. The Color dialog
box is displayed.
2 Click an area on the color spectrum window to select a
color, then adjust the values, if necessary.
3 (optional) Adjust the current Red, Green and Blue values
to create a custom color.
4 Click OK. The color you defined is applied to the axis.

To change the drawing color


1 On the Project menu, click Drawing Color. The Color
dialog box is displayed.
2 (optional) Click one of the four output styles, then select
a standard size from the corresponding drop down menu. 2 Click an area on the color spectrum window to select a
color, then adjust the values, if necessary.
3 (optional) Click Custom, type new values in the Width
and Height text boxes, then select a Units of 3 (optional) Adjust the current Red, Green and Blue values
Measurement from the drop down menu. to create a custom color.

4 Click OK. 4 Click OK. The color you defined is applied to the
drawing.
To move the drawing origin
Drawing Parallel Segments
1 On the Project menu, click Move Origin. The Move
Origin dialog box is displayed. You can draw one or more parallel segments for any CAD
object. Use the Parallel dialog box to specify the number of
parallel segments, as well as their distance and direction
from the original.

To draw parallel segments


■ Click Turn On Draw Parallel in the lower left
corner of the window.

2 (optional) Type a new value in the Horizontal text box.

306 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Using Object or Point Selection Modes

To draw single segments To use point selection mode


■ Click Turn Off Draw Parallel in the lower left ■ On the Options menu, click Point Selection or
corner of the window. click on the Point Selection tool in the lower left
corner of the window.
To control the settings for parallel segments
1 On the Options menu, click Parallel. The Parallel dialog Drawing from Corner or Center
box is displayed. You can draw a CAD object from corner to corner or from
center to corner. Draw from Corner makes drawing cabinets,
tables and most other angular objects much easier. Draw
from Corner works with the rectangle, oval and line/plane
tools only.

To draw from corner

■ On the Options menu, click Draw From Corner or


click on the Draw from Corner Tool in the lower
left corner of the window.

To draw from center

2 (optional) Click a direction to draw the offset parallel. ■ On the Options menu, click Draw from Center or
click on the Draw from Center Tool in the lower
3 (optional) Type a new value in the Parallel Width text
box. This controls the distance between the original and left corner of the window.
parallel segments.
Exporting and Importing
4 (optional) Check Group to automatically group the
original and parallel segments. There may be times that you want your symbol exported to
DXF/DWG format.
5 Click OK.
To export a DXF/DWG symbol
Using Object or Point Selection Modes
1 On the File menu, click Export DXF/DWG. The Export
Object Selection Mode is active by default. Object selection, Options dialog box is displayed.
along with point selection, controls how your edits impact
your object. If you are in object selection mode, changes
affect the object as a whole. If you are working in point
selection mode, each edge of the object is treated separately,
as you edit.
In point selection mode, you are able to resize or reshape an
object by moving one of its individual points. While it is
easy to move an entire object in object selection mode, it is
much more convenient to handle detailed edits using point
selection mode.
2 Click the radio button next to Format and Version you
To use object selection mode want to use.
3 Click OK. The Export DXF/DWG dialog box is
■ On the Options menu, click Object Selection or displayed.
click on the Object Selection tool in the lower left
corner of the window.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 307


Chapter 42 Symbol Editor

To modify print settings


■ On the Setup menu, click Printer Setup to display the
Print Setup dialog box.

To print your drawing


■ On the File menu, click Print to display the Print dialog
box.

4 Type a file name in the File Name text box. Symbol


Editor automatically adds the extension.
5 Click Save.

To import a DXF/DWG symbol


1 On the File menu, click Import DXF/DWG. The Import
DXF dialog box is displayed.

2 In the File Name box, type the name of the file you want
to open or search for the file by switching folders or
drives.
3 When you see the name of the file you want to open,
double-click to select it. The Scale menu is displayed.

4 Click the radio button next to the scale you want to use.
5 Click OK.

Printing your Drawing


Symbol Editor prints using the current Windows printer.

308 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Chapter 43

Section Detailer
You can store even more details of your home design, without cluttering your project, using Punch! Home Design
Architectural Series 4000’s Section Detailer. Create a separate detailed drawing of built-in book shelving or an electrical
sub-panel, then simply place a reference marker to the detail in your main project.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 309


Chapter 43 Section Detailer

Launching Section Detailer To open an existing detail


■ Launch Section Detailer by clicking the Section 1 On the Project menu, click Switch Details or click
Detailer icon on the PowerTool Bar. the Switch Working Detail button. The Choose
Detail dialog box appears.
Managing Section Details 2 Click the name of the detail you want to open, in the
Section Detailer not only allows you to save Details for use Detail Link Name window.
in your 2D drawings, it also has easy-to-use tools for 3 Click OK.
managing how those details are displayed in the 2D
drawing. To change a detail’s link properties
1 On the Project menu, click Detail Link Properties
To open a new detail
or click the Detail Properties button. The Detail
1 On the Project menu, click Switch Details or click Link Style dialog box appears.
the Switch Working Detail button. The Choose
Detail dialog box appears.

2 Click on of the six detail link styles to choose the detail


link that will appear in your drawing.
3 Enter a name in the Detail Label text box.
4 Click a Detail Link Size to choose the size of the detail
link that will appear in your drawing.
5 (optional) Check the Thick Line checkbox to set the line
weight in your detail drawing to thick.
6 Click OK.

Editing CAD Objects


2 Check the Create New Detail Link checkbox. You can move, rotate and modify CAD objects using the
array of editing tools in Section Detailer.
3 Click one of the six detail link styles to choose the detail
link that will appear in your drawing.
To scale CAD objects
4 Enter a name in the Detail Name text box.
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
5 Click a Detail Link Size to choose the size of the detail
2 Click a CAD object to select it.
link that will appear in your drawing.
3 On the Options menu, click Scale Selection or click
6 (optional) Check the Thick Line checkbox to set the line
the Resize Selected Tool. The Scale Selection
weight in your detail drawing to thick.
dialog box appears.
7 Click OK.
4 (optional) Click either Object Size or Percentage then
enter values to scale the object.

310 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Duplicating Objects

Note: The endpoints of each object must be nearby for


those objects to be joined. You can increase or decrease the
necessary distance by changing the Join Sensitivity. For more
information, see “Controlling Drawing Settings”, which
begins on page 313.
3 On the Standard toolbar, click the Join Tool. The
objects are joined into a polyline.
Note: You can separate the segments of any polyline
(whether or not you created it using the Join Tool) by
5 (optional) In the Scale From section, click a location to selecting the polyline and clicking the Unjoin Tool on the
use as the basepoint during the scaling operation. For Standard toolbar.
instance, clicking Bottom Right, means that location will
remain constant. To add additional points to a CAD object
6 Click OK. 1 Click the Add Point Tool. The pointer changes to
reflect drawing mode.
To skew CAD objects
2 Click to enter a new point on one of the CAD objects you
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. have created.
2 Click a CAD object to select it.
3 On the Standard toolbar, click the Skew Tool. To remove a point from a CAD object
1 Click the Remove Point Tool. The pointer changes
4 Click a cornerpoint of the object; hold down the
to reflect drawing mode.
mouse button and move the pointer in the direction that
you want the object to be slanted. Dimensions appear in 2 Click to remove a point from one of the CAD objects you
the position readout bar, as you draw. have created.

To place a CAD object on top of another object


Drag 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click the group you want to place on top.
3 On the Arrange menu, click Bring To Front or
right-click and click Bring To Front on the pop-up
menu that is displayed or click the Bring To Front button.

5 Release the mouse to stop skewing the object. To place a CAD object behind another object
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
To trim a CAD object
2 Click the group you want to place on bottom.
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
3 On the Arrange menu, click Send To Back or
2 Click the object you want to trim. Selection handles
right-click and click Send To Back on the pop-up
appear around the object.
menu that is displayed or click the Send To Back button.
3 On the Standard toolbar, click the Trim Tool.
4 Click the point on the segment where you want to To clear CAD objects
trim (or break) the object into two separate segments. ■ Click the object to select it, then right-click and click
Clear.
To join arcs, lines or polylines
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. Duplicating Objects
2 Hold down SHIFT and click on each object that Similar to cutting and pasting, the duplicate feature creates an
you want to be joined. exact copy of the object you select. In the Duplicate Offsets

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 311


Chapter 43 Section Detailer

dialog box, you can specify the number and specific offset of
a series of duplicates.

To create a duplicate
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click the object you want to duplicate.
3 On the Edit menu, click Duplicate Object or press
CTRL+D.

To create a series of duplicate objects Grouping Objects


1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
By defining a Group, you create a set of selected objects that
2 Click the object you want to duplicate. are then treated as one item. You can have unlimited groups
in a drawing.

To group objects
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Hold down SHIFT and click on each object that
you want to be included in the group.
3 On the Arrange menu, click Group or right-click
and click Group on the pop-up menu that is
displayed or click the Group button.
3 On the Edit menu, click Duplicate Offsets. The Duplicate
Offsets dialog box is displayed. To ungroup objects
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click the group you want to ungroup.
3 On the Arrange menu, click Ungroup or right-
click and click Ungroup on the pop-up menu that
is displayed or click the Ungroup button.

Locking Objects
You can protect CAD objects or symbols from accidental
4 Type the horizontal and vertical offsets and the number modifications by locking them. You can have unlimited
of duplicates. locked objects in a drawing.

Note: These variables control the distance apart that the To lock objects
duplicates are placed.
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
5 Click OK. The object is duplicated at the offset you 2 Click the object you want to lock.
defined.
3 On the Arrange menu, click Lock or click the
Lock button.

To unlock objects
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click the locked object you want to unlock.

312 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Controlling Drawing Settings

3 On the Arrange menu, click Unlock or click the 8 (optional) Uncheck Auto Reset Tools. When Auto Reset
Unlock button. Tools is unchecked, you can draw concurrent CAD
objects without selecting the corresponding CAD tool
Controlling Drawing Settings each time.
There are a variety of tools that allow you to control how you 9 Click OK.
draw, select or modify CAD objects and symbols. The
Preferences dialog box lets you modify a variety of settings, To change the drawing scale
including the number of sides on a multigon or the sensitivity 1 On the Project menu, click Drawing Scale. The Drawing
of snap or join tools. Scale dialog box is displayed.
Tools along the bottom of the drawing window allow you to
draw parallel segments, switch between object and point
selection modes or center and corner drawing modes.

To change drawing preferences


1 On the Options menu, click Preferences. The Preferences
dialog box is displayed.

2 (optional) In the Screen Units section, enter a new value


and change the units of measurement. Higher values in
the screen units section make it easier to draw small
details.
3 (optional) In the World Units section, enter a new value
and change the units of measurement. Higher values in
the world units section make it easier to draw large
details.
4 (optional) Check Rescale Objects to change existing
2 (optional) Type a new value in the Multigon Sides text objects to the new scale.
box. This value controls the number of sides on a
selected multigon and changes the number of sides with 5 Click OK.
which multigons are drawn.
To change the paper size
3 (optional) Type a new value in the Curve Smoothness
text box. Lower values result in less curvature. 1 On the Project menu, click Paper Size. The Paper Size
dialog box is displayed.
4 (optional) Type a new value in the Zoom Percentage text
box. This controls the amount of magnification that is
applied each time you click the Zoom Tool.
5 (optional) Increase or decrease the Pixels setting in the
Scrolling Speed section. This value controls the rate at
which the drawing window moves when you click the
scroll arrows.
6 (optional) Increase or decrease the Snap Tool &
Selection Sensitivity. A lower value means that you must
click closer to an object to snap to or select it.
7 (optional) Increase or decrease the Join Sensitivity. A
lower value means that you must positions objects closer
to join them.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 313


Chapter 43 Section Detailer

2 (optional) Click one of the four output styles, then select


a standard size from the corresponding drop down menu.
3 (optional) Click Custom; type new values in the Width
and Height text boxes, then select a Units of
Measurement from the drop down menu.
4 Click OK.

To move the drawing origin


1 On the Project menu, click Move Origin. The Move
Origin dialog box is displayed.

2 Click an area on the color spectrum window to select a


color, then adjust the values, if necessary.
3 (optional) Adjust the current Red, Green and Blue values
to create a custom color.
4 Click OK. The color you defined is applied to the axis.

To change the drawing color


2 (optional) Type a new value in the Horizontal text box.
1 On the Project menu, click Drawing Color. The Color
3 (optional) Type a new value in the Vertical text box.
dialog box is displayed.
4 (optional) Click Move. The drawing origin is moved by
2 Click an area on the color spectrum window to select a
the horizontal and vertical increment you specified.
color, then adjust the values, if necessary.
5 (optional) Click Reset. The drawing origin is returned to
3 (optional) Adjust the current Red, Green and Blue values
its default location.
to create a custom color.
To display the drawing pages 4 Click OK. The color you defined is applied to the
drawing.
■ On the Project menu, click to check Draw Page Breaks.
When this item is checked, Section Detailer displays the
To change the background color
actual page breaks in the drawing.
1 On the Project menu, click Background Color. The Color
To display the drawing axis dialog box is displayed.
■ On the Project menu, click to check Draw Axis. When 2 Click an area on the color spectrum window to select a
this item is checked, Section Detailer displays the actual color, then adjust the values, if necessary.
horizontal and vertical drawing axes in the drawing. 3 (optional) Adjust the current Red, Green and Blue values
to create a custom color.
To change the axis color
4 Click OK. The color you defined is applied to the
1 On the Project menu, click Axis Color. The Color dialog drawing background.
box is displayed.
Drawing Parallel Segments
You can draw one or more parallel segments for any CAD
object. Use the Parallel dialog box to specify the number of
parallel segments, as well as their distance and direction
from the original.

To draw parallel segments


■ Click Turn On Draw Parallel in the lower left
corner of the window.

314 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Using Object or Point Selection Modes

To draw single segments To use point selection mode


■ Click Turn Off Draw Parallel in the lower left ■ On the Options menu, click Point Selection or
corner of the window. click on the Point Selection tool in the lower left
corner of the window.
To control the settings for parallel segments
1 On the Options menu, click Parallel. The Parallel dialog Drawing from Corner or Center
box is displayed. You can draw a CAD object from corner to corner or from
center to corner. Draw from Corner makes drawing cabinets,
tables and most other angular objects much easier. Draw
from Corner works with the rectangle, oval and line/plane
tools only.

To draw from corner

■ On the Options menu, click Draw From Corner or


click on the Draw from Corner Tool in the lower
left corner of the window.

To draw from center

2 (optional) Click a direction to draw the offset parallel. ■ On the Options menu, click Draw from Center or
click on the Draw from Center Tool in the lower
3 (optional) Type a new value in the Parallel Width text
box. This controls the distance between the original and left corner of the window.
parallel segments.
Exporting and Importing a DXF/DWG File
4 (optional) Check Group to automatically group the
original and parallel segments. You may find it useful to share files with your architect,
builder and so on. Importing and exporting your detail
5 Click OK.
drawings to DXF or DWG format will make sharing your
files simple.
Using Object or Point Selection Modes
Object Selection Mode is active by default. Object selection, To export a DXF/DWG drawing
along with point selection, controls how your edits impact 1 On the File menu, click Export DXF/DWG. The Export
your object. If you are in object selection mode, changes Options dialog box is displayed.
affect the object as a whole. If you are working in point
selection mode, each edge of the object is treated separately.
as you edit.
In point selection mode, you are able to resize or reshape an
object by moving one of its individual points. While it is
easy to move an entire object in object selection mode, it is
much more convenient to handle detailed edits using point
selection mode.

To use object selection mode

■ On the Options menu, click Object Selection or


click on the Object Selection tool in the lower left
corner of the window. 2 Click a format for your file.
3 Click a version for your file.
4 Click OK. The Export DXF/DWG dialog box is
displayed.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 315


Chapter 43 Section Detailer

5 Type a file name in the File Name text box. Punch! Printing your Drawing
AS4000 DXF Exporter automatically adds the DXF or
Section Detailer prints using the current Windows printer.
DWG extension.
6 Click Save. To modify print settings
■ On the Setup menu, click Printer Setup to display the
To import a DXF/DWG drawing
Print Setup dialog box.
1 On the File menu, click Import DXF/DWG. The Import
DXF dialog box is displayed. To print your drawing
■ On the File menu, click Print to display the Print dialog
box.

2 In the File Name box, type the name of the file you want
to open or search for the file by switching folders or
drives.
3 Click the name of the file you want to select it.
4 (optional) Check the Group Objects on Import checkbox
to group all elements in the DXF/DWG together.
5 Click Open.

To import a Symbol
1 On the File menu, click Import Symbol. The Import
Symbol dialog box is displayed.

2 In the File Name box, type the name of the file you want
to open or search for the file by switching folders or
drives.
3 Click the name of the file you want to select it.
4 (optional) Check the Rescale to Current checkbox to use
the scale currently set.
5 Click Open.

316 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Chapter 44

Global Sun Positioning


Global Sun Positioning allows you to establish your site’s location, relative to the sun, anywhere in the world. This ensures
that your design will render with accurate sun angle and intensity any time, any day of the year.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 317


Chapter 44 Global Sun Positioning

■ Launch Global Sun Positioning by clicking 4 Click the hour, minute or seconds in the Time bar to
the Global Sun Positioning icon on the select it, then click the navigation arrows to change the
PowerTool Bar. time.
Note: You can manually type the time by selecting the hour,
Establishing Your Site’s Global Sun minute or second and typing the time you want.
Positioning
5 (optional) Click the checkbox to select Daylight Savings
You can pinpoint a specific time of day and year, as well as a
Time.
location anywhere in the world, using Punch! Global Sun
Positioning. Global Sun Positioning also offers an easy way
to render from day to night quickly, without having to adjust
the sunlight settings in LiveView.

To set date and time 6 Click the Use Current Date button to use today’s date on
the calendar. Today’s date automatically appears on the
1 Click the navigation arrows on either side of the month
calendar.
and year title bar to move through the calendar months.
7 Click the Use Current Time button to update the Time to
the current hour, minute and second. The current time
automatically appears in the Time bar.

To set a location
1 Click the Country drop-down box to display the Country
list. The list appears alphabetically.

2 (optional) Click the month and year title bar, then click 2 Click the country from the list. A red crosshair appears
the month from the drop-down menu. on the map, targeting the country you chose.
3 Click the City drop-down box to display the list of cities
in the country you chose. The list appears alphabetically.

3 Click the year, then use the


navigation buttons to move 4 Click the city from the list. A red crosshair appears on the
through the years. map, targeting the city you selected.

318 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Establishing Your Site’s Global Sun Positioning

Note: If you momentarily place your mouse above the


crosshair on the map, a popup displays the city, state,
country, longitude and latitude of the selected location.
5 Click the Add City button to add a city
that does not appear in the database.
The New City dialog box is displayed.

2 Click the text box of the information you want to


change.Type the updated information.
3 Click the UTC Offset drop-down box to edit the time
zone.
4 After you’ve entered the updated information about your
city, click OK. The city is updated in the database.
6 Type the name of the city in the City Name text box.
To delete a location
7 (optional) You can pinpoint a location by clicking on the
1 From the Country drop-down menu, select the country
map or by typing the location’s latitude in the Latitude
from which you want to delete a city. Click the country
text box and selecting South or North from the drop-
and its cities appear in the City drop-down menu.
down box then typing the longitude in the Longitude text
box and selecting West or East from the drop-down box. 2 Click the Delete button to delete a city
from the country you chose. The
8 Click the UTC Offset drop-down box to select the time
Delete Locations dialog box is
zone where you want your design located. Click the time
displayed with that country’s cities in
zone you want to use.
the database.
9 After you’ve entered the information about your New
City, click OK. Your city is added to the database.

To edit a location
1 Click the Edit City button to edit
information about any city in the
database. The Edit City dialog box is
displayed.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 319


Chapter 44 Global Sun Positioning

3 Click on the city you want to delete. Click DELETE. The To change date and time options
confirmation box appears. 1 On the Options menu, click General. The Global Sun
Positioning Options dialog box is displayed.
2 (optional) To disable calendar synchronization, click to
uncheck the checkbox next to Synchronize date using my
PC calendar.
3 (optional) To disable time synchronization, click to
uncheck the checkbox next to Synchronize time using my
4 Click YES to delete your selection(s) from the database. PC clock.
Note: You can delete multiple cities at one time by
To change map options
pressing and holding SHIFT or CTRL, while you select the
cities with your mouse. 1 On the Options menu, click General. The Global Sun
Positioning Options dialog box is displayed.
Controlling Settings 2 Select the checkbox next to Show Longitude and
To ensure accurate rendering, Punch! automatically Latitude grid. The Longitude and Latitude grid is
synchronizes Global Sun Positioning with your PC’s displayed on the Global Sun Positioning map.
calendar and clock. This way the sun’s intensity and angle 3 (optional) The Location Indicator specifies your current
are time and date sensitive. However, you can change these location on the map. To enable this feature select the
and other settings, such as date and time synchronization, checkbox next to Show Location Indicator on map. The
crosshair settings, database options, as well as customize the Location Indicator type and Location Indicator color
lighting settings for your design. sections appear.
Global Sun Positioning can incorporate seasonal aspects into 4 Click the Location Indicator drop-down menu to select
your design, but it cannot always predict the topography of which type of Location Indicator appears on the map.
your exact location. The Lighting Settings give you control Three options appear.
of the intensity and shadows to create the natural effect of a
specific location, based on your own landscape and
topography.

5 Click the red block next to Location Indicator color to


chose the color of the Location Indicator. The color
palette is displayed.

6 Choose the color you want and click OK. The Location
Indicator changes color.

320 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Establishing True North

To customize lighting settings


1 On the Options menu, click Lighting. The Lighting
Settings window is displayed.

2 Use the slider bar to adjust the compass needle to your


site’s orientation. The angle is displayed beneath, as you
move the slide.
2 Click and drag the sliders to brighter or darker settings to 3 Click OK.
customize how your design is displayed in 3D LiveView.
3 Once you’ve established your Lighting Settings, click
OK to return to Global Sun Positioning.
4 (optional) Right-click on any of the three custom lighting
areas and click Reset Defaults to use the program’s
default settings.

Establishing True North


True North refers to the location of the North Pole, relative to
the navigator’s position. By orienting your drawing to True
North, you allow Punch! to more accurately calculate the
sun’s intensity and angle at your location for any given time
and date.

To establish True North

1 Click the True North button at the lower right of the


drawing window. The True North Angle dialog box
is displayed.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 321


Chapter 44 Global Sun Positioning

322 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Part 9

Punch!
Animator

Chapter 45: File Management and Editing Controls . 325


Chapter 46: KeyPoints and Animation Paths . . . . . . . 329
Chapter 47: Segment Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Chapter 48: Video Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Chapter 45

File Management and


Editing Controls
When you start Punch! Animator, the current file from your Punch! PowerTool-enabled software program will be loaded
into memory and displayed. If you are returning to work on an existing animation file, you must open it or display it, on the
screen. Opening a file involves clicking Open on the File menu and specifying the name of the file you want to open. Once
you have opened a file, you can edit, import, export, print, view and save it.
The changes you make to a plan drawing occur only in your computer’s memory, until you save them. To preserve a
drawing for later use, you must save it to a file. If you want to save a drawing using its current name or if you want to save
a new, untitled drawing, use Save. If you want to save a drawing using a new name, use Save As.
In addition to standard Windows commands like cut, copy, paste and delete, Punch! Animator includes more
sophisticated modes of manipulating your design. You can move or rotate selected KeyPoints, Animation Segments or
Animation Paths. Learn to customize settings like nudge factor, so Punch! Animator works best for you.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 325


Chapter 45 File Management and Editing Controls

Exporting an AVI File Opening a Video File


Punch! Animator exports AVI files to make it easier to show You can view any exported video file at any time.
your architect, friends, colleagues and so on, the ins and outs
of your newly designed home plan. To open and play an existing AVI file
1 On the File menu, click Open Video File or press Ctrl+O.
To export an AVI file The Open dialog box is displayed.
1 On the File menu, 2 In the File Name text box, type the name of the file you
click Export want to open or search for the file by switching folders
Animation Video or drives.
or press Ctrl+S.
The Save 3 When you see the name of the file you want to open,
Animation Video click to select it.
dialog box is 4 Click OK. Depending on the media player installed on
displayed. your computer, a player window similar to this one is
2 (optional) On the Toolbar, click the Export displayed.
Animation Video button. The Save Animation
Video dialog box is displayed.
3 In the File Name text box, type a name. Punch! Animator
automatically adds the AVI extension.
4 (optional) If you want to save the drawing to a different
drive or folder, click a different drive and folder or type
the complete path in the File Name text box.
5 Click Save.
Note: To play back the video after exporting, make sure the
Play Video After Export option is checked on the Video Tab.
5 View your movie using Play, Pause, Stop and so on,
To set the temporary directory available from your media playing software.
1 On the Video Tab, click Temp
Directory. The Browse for Folder Saving Animation Paths
dialog box is displayed.
With Punch! Animator you can save a variety of Animation
Paths to be sure you have just the right viewpoints recorded.

To save an animation path


1 On the File menu, click Save Animation Paths. The Save
As dialog box is displayed.
2 If you want to save the path under another name, type a
name in the File Name text box.
3 If you want to save the path to a different drive or folder,
click a different drive and folder or type the complete
path in the File Name text box.
4 Click Save.
2 Click the folder where you want your working files to be
saved. Click OK. Importing Animation Paths
When you decide which view you like, you can import any of
the saved Animation Paths.

326 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Closing a File

To import an animation path To set undo parameters


1 On the File menu, click Import Animation Paths. The 1 On the Edit menu, click Undo Preferences; the Undo
Open dialog box is displayed. Preferences dialog box is displayed.
2 In the File Name text box, type the name of the file you 2 Type the number of undo levels you want to use; click
want to open or search for the file by switching folders OK.
or drives.
3 When you see the name of the file you want to open, To use redo
click to select it. ■ On the Edit menu, click Redo or press CTRL+Y. The
4 Click Open. previous action is reversed.

Closing a File Editing Using Cut, Copy, Paste and Clear


When you finish working with a file, close it to remove the Cut moves the selection to the Clipboard and deletes the
window from the screen and to free up your computer’s original. Copy places a duplicate of the selection on the
memory. When you are done working in Punch! Animator, Clipboard. Paste places the contents of the Clipboard into
close all your files and return to Punch! Home Design. your drawing. You can place the Clipboard contents as many
times as necessary. Clear removes the selection.
To close a file
To edit using the cut command
■ On the File menu, click Exit & Return to Punch! Home
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
Design or press Ctrl+Q. If you have unsaved changes in
your plan drawing, Punch! Animator prompts you to 2 Click the selection you want to cut.
save them before it closes the file. 3 On the Edit menu, click Cut or press CTRL+X. The
selection is removed to the Clipboard.
Using Undo
With Punch! Animator you can specify up to 50 levels of To edit using the copy command
Undo, making it easy to recover your work. Bear in mind, the 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
more levels of undo you specify, the more system resources
2 Click the selection you want to copy.
will be used. To conserve system resources, set the undo
level at the lowest level possible. 3 On the Edit menu, click Copy or press CTRL+C. The
selection is copied to the Clipboard.
To use undo
To edit using the paste command
■ On the Edit menu, click Undo or press CTRL+Z. The
previous action is reversed. 1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 On the Edit menu, click Paste or press CTRL+V. The
To turn off undo selection is copied from the Clipboard to the design
1 On the Edit menu, click Undo Preferences; the Undo window.
Preferences dialog box is displayed.
To edit using the clear command
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click the selection you want to cut.
3 On the Edit menu, click Clear or press DELETE or right-
click the selection and click Clear on the pop-up menu
that is displayed. The selection is removed from your
design.
2 Click the Deactivate Undo (Faster) box, then click OK.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 327


Chapter 45 File Management and Editing Controls

328 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Chapter 46

KeyPoints and
Animation Paths
Among the most common functions of Punch! Animator are KeyPoints, Animation Segments and Animation Paths. These
three terms will be used throughout this User’s Guide. All AVI files will be composed of combinations of these three
entities.
The AVI files you create with Punch! Animator are limited only by the amount of free hard disk space on your computer!

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 329


Chapter 46 KeyPoints and Animation Paths

Drawing Animation Paths


With Punch! Animator, you can draw extremely intricate
Animation Paths. Then, you can set each KeyPoint’s view
individually. For more information on customizing KeyPoint
views, see “Segment Tab”, which begins on page 333.

To draw an animation path 3 Continue deleting KeyPoints until you are finished, then
right-click to end.
1 On the toolbar, click the Animation Path tool. The
pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.
Naming and Ordering Animation Paths
2 Click on the design window to define the start point of Punch! Animator makes it easy to set the exact order of
the Animation Path. A rubber-band curve is displayed multiple Animation Paths. Adding descriptive names to each
and follows the pointer. path will make it easier to set their order in the final video.
3 Click and move the mouse to the next point. Repeat until
you have drawn the needed shape. To name an Animation Path
4 Right-click to end drawing mode. 1 On the design window, click a KeyPoint or Animation
Segment to select it.
Note: Although the lines will initially appear to be angular,
they will become curved as you continue drawing. 2 On the Segment Tab, click the Name icon on the
“Name” section. The Name Animation Path
Adding and Deleting KeyPoints dialog box will be displayed.

You can add or delete KeyPoints at any time on any


Animation Path you have drawn.

To add KeyPoint(s) to an Animation Path


1 On the toolbar, click the Add KeyPoint tool. The
pointer changes to reflect drawing mode. 3 Type the name in the dialog box, then click OK.

2 Click on an Animation Path where you want to add a Note: Path names are restricted to 22 characters, including
KeyPoint. spaces.

To set the order of Animation Paths


1 On the toolbar, click the Order Paths tool. The
Animation Path Order dialog box is displayed.

3 Continue adding KeyPoints until you are finished, then


right-click to end.

To remove KeyPoint(s) from an Animation Path


1 On the toolbar, click the Remove KeyPoint tool.
The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.
2 Click on an Animation Path where you want to
remove a KeyPoint.
2 Click a path name on the Active (export to AVI) section
to select it.

330 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Previewing

3 Click the Order arrows to change the order of the 2 (optional) On the
Animation Paths. File menu, click
4 (optional) Click the arrows between the Active and Export Animation
Inactive menus to suppress export of specified Animation Video or press
Paths. Ctrl+S. The Save
Animation Video
5 When you are finished ordering Animation Paths, click dialog box is
OK. displayed.
3 In the File Name text box, type a name. Punch! AS4000
Previewing automatically adds the AVI extension.
At any point you can view your video. You can view it in its
4 (optional) If you want to save the video to a different
entirety or you can view individual Animation Segments.
drive or folder, click a different drive and folder or type
the complete path in the File Name text box.
To preview Animation Segments
5 Click Save.
1 On the design window, click an Animation Segment to
select it. Note: To play back the video after exporting, make sure the
2 (optional) Hold down the shift key and click several Play Video After Export option is checked on the Video Tab.
Animation Segments.
3 On the toolbar, click the Preview Selected
Segments tool. A LiveView window will open
and the selected Animation Segments will be
played.

To preview the entire animation


■ On the toolbar, click the Preview Animation tool.
A LiveView window will open and the
Animation will be played.

To set the preview speed


■ On the Video Tab, click the left or
right scroll arrows on the “Preview
Speed” section. To increase the speed
in larger increments, click the control
shaft, between the scroll box and a scroll arrow.

Exporting an AVI File


Punch! Animator exports AVI files to make it easier to show
your architect, friends, colleagues and so on, the ins and outs
of your newly designed home plan.

To export an AVI file


1 On the Toolbar, click the Export Animation
Video button. The Save Animation Video dialog
box is displayed.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 331


Chapter 46 KeyPoints and Animation Paths

332 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Chapter 47

Segment Tab
Many of the controls that allow you to customize your video are contained on the Segment
Tab. Using these tools in Punch! Animator gives you total control over how and what your
video displays at any KeyPoint along the Animation Path.
Controls on the Segment Tab can be used to change a single KeyPoint. They impact only that
KeyPoint or Animation Segment that is selected. Controls on the Video Tab have a global
effect on the entire video.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 333


Chapter 47 Segment Tab

Defining Segment Times To snap KeyPoints to a point on the plan


Each Animation Segment is treated separately by Punch! 1 On the design window, click a KeyPoint or Animation
Animator. You have the ability to control how long each Segment to select it.
segment takes to complete. Segments can be defined to last 2 On the Segment Tab, click the Snap to Mouse icon
from one to sixty seconds, or anywhere in between. on the “Viewing Angles” section.
3 On the design window, click to set the direction you want
To define a segment time
the KeyPoint to face.
1 On the design window, click an Animation
4 Right-click to end Snap to Mouse mode.
Segment. The KeyPoints on both ends should be
highlighted (red) to indicate the segment is
selected. Defining Path Transitions
2 On the Segment Tab, click the scroll arrow on the When you define more than one Animation Path, you will
“Sec” section. To increase the time in larger want to make the transition easy on the eye for the person
increments, click the control shaft, between the watching your video file. With Punch! Animator you can
scroll box and a scroll arrow. define exactly how these transitions happen.

Tip: To easily select all points along an Animation To fade in at the begining of a path
Path, on the design window, right-click, then click Select All
1 On the design window, click an Animation Path to select
from the pop-up menu that is displayed.
it.
Note: Changing the seconds per segment will not be 2 On the Segment Tab, check the
noticeable during segment preview, but will impact the box next to Fade In on the “Path
exported video. Transitions” section.

Defining Viewing Angles To fade out at the end of a path


Punch! Animator’s useful Viewing Angle controls make it 1 On the design window, click an Animation Path to select
easy to set exactly the KeyPoint view that you want. it.
2 On the Segment Tab, check the box next to Fade Out on
To define viewing pitch
the “Path Transitions” section.
1 On the design window, click a KeyPoint to select it.
2 On the Segment Tab, click the left To fade on segments
arrow on the Vertical Pitch slider to 3 On the Segment Tab, check the box next to On Segments
look down. on the “Path Transitions” section.
3 Click the right arrow on the Vertical Pitch slider to look
up. To define a custom transition color
1 On the Segment Tab, click the Color box on the “Path
To snap KeyPoints to the path Transitions” section. The Color dialog box is displayed.
1 On the design window, click a KeyPoint or Animation
Segment to select it.
Note: To easily select all points along an Animation Path,
on the design window, right-click, then click Select All from
the pop-up menu that is displayed.

2 On the Segment Tab, click the Snap to Path icon


on the “Viewing Angles” section. The KeyPoint
will automatically snap to the direction the
Animation Path was drawn.

334 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Customizing Point Tension

2 Click one of the Basic or Custom colors or click on the


color spectrum block to select a color.
3 (optional) Adjust the current Red, Green and Blue values
to create a custom color.
4 (optional) Click an area on the color spectrum window to
select a color, then adjust the RGB values, if necessary.
5 Click OK.
Default Point Tension is “8”.
Customizing Point Tension
As you draw each Animation Path, you can adjust the tension
of each point. This function lets you define the exact path
your video will show.

To define point tension


1 On the design window, click an Animation Path to select
it.
2 On the Segment Tab, click a
number, or none, on the “Point Point Tension set at “10”.
Tension” section. A low number
will result in a more angular path,
while a higher number will create a sweeping curved
path.
Examples:

Point Tension for only 2 KeyPoints set at “1”.

Customizing KeyPoint Views


There will be times when you will want to alter what is
visible and what is hidden around KeyPoint intersections.
Point Tension set at “1”. Punch! Animator lets you have total control. These controls
operate simply; if there is a red “X” through the icon, that
feature is hidden; if there is not an “X”, that feature is visible.

View all.

Point Tension set at “4”.


Hide all.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 335


Chapter 47 Segment Tab

To hide/view KeyPoints To name an Animation Path


1 On the design window, click a KeyPoint or Animation 1 On the design window, click a KeyPoint or Animation
Path to select it. Segment to select it.
2 On the Segment Tab, click the Show/Hide KeyPoints 2 On the Segment Tab, click the Name icon on the
icon on the “View” section. “Name” section. The Name Animation Path
dialog box will be displayed.

To hide/view Point Elevations


1 On the design window, click a KeyPoint or Animation
3 Type the name in the dialog box, then click OK.
Path to select it.
2 On the Segment Tab, click the Show/Hide Point Note: Path names are restricted to 22 characters, including
Elevations icon on the “View” section. spaces.

To set the order of Animation Paths


1 On the toolbar, click the Order Paths tool. The
Animation Path Order dialog box is displayed.

To hide/view Segment Times


1 On the design window, click a KeyPoint or Animation
Path to select it.
2 On the Segment Tab, click the Show/Hide Segment
Times icon on the “View” section.

2 Click a path name on the Active (export to AVI) section


To hide/view Path Name
to select it.
1 On the design window, click a KeyPoint or Animation
3 Click the Order arrows to change the order of the
Path to select it.
Animation Paths.
2 On the Segment Tab, click the Show/Hide Path Name
4 (optional) Click the arrows between the Active and
icon on the “View” section.
Inactive menus to suppress export of specified Animation
Paths.
5 When you are finished ordering Animation Paths, click
OK.

Note: The Path Name is only displayed on the first


KeyPoint.

Naming and Ordering Animation Paths


Punch! Animator makes it easy to set the exact order of
multiple Animation Paths. Adding descriptive names to each
path will make it easier to set their order in the final video.

336 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Chapter 48

Video Tab
Many of the controls that allow you to customize the way your video is presented are
contained on the Video Tab. Using these tools in Punch! Animator, you take total control over
how your video file exports and plays back.
Each control on the Video Tab will have a global effect for the entire video. They will directly
impact the file size when the video is exported or the time it takes to export.
Punch! Animator keeps track of many details of your video on the Video Properties section.
You can choose which codec, installed on your computer, to use when exporting your AVI file.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 337


Chapter 48 Video Tab

Setting the Display Size will anti-alias (final quality) each frame before exporting it,
which can take considerably more time.
You can select the size of the media player window. Display
size affects file size of the exported AVI file; the larger the
To set the export quality
display, the larger the file.
■ On the Video Tab, click the radio button
To set the display size next to the export quality you want.
■ On the Video Tab, click the radio button Note: These options do not affect file size,
next to the size of the display you want. but greatly impact the time it takes to export
the AVI file. Some codecs export the video
Note: If you have dragged a corner of the
faster and with better quality, but the file size is much larger.
LiveView window to a size you like, you can
In addition, some shareware and freeware codecs are of
set that size by clicking the radio button next to
lower quality and if one of them is being used, it may not
“Current Size”.
matter what export quality is selected.
To set a custom display size
Setting the Blank Frames
1 On the Video Tab, click the Custom
button. The Custom Video Pixel Size You can specify the number of blank frames at the beginning,
dialog box is displayed. end, or both, of your video.

To specify blank frames


■ On the Video Tab, check Beginning
or End on the “Blank Frames”
section. If a checkmark is next to the
word, the specified number of blank frames will be
placed appropriately.
2 Enter, in pixels, the Width and Height you want to set.
3 Click OK. To set the number of blank frames
■ On the Video Tab, click the up or down scroll arrows on
Setting the Frames per Second the “Blank Frames” section.
Frames per second, also refered to as frame rate, is the Note: If you want one second of black before fading into
frequency in which video frames are displayed on a your video, you would set the blank frames the same as your
monitor. High frame rates improve the appearance of “fps” setting.
video motion. For example, the frame rate for
professional motion pictures is 24 fps, television is 30 Assigning a Codec
fps, while your PC processor may only be capable of
playing 10-15 frames per second. Every codec residing on your computer is available for use
with Punch! Animator, although some might not be
To set the frames per second compatible. While some codecs on your computer export to
MPG or other video formats, Punch! Animator only exports
■ On the Video Tab, click the up or down scroll
to AVI format.
arrows on the “fps” section. To increase the depth
in larger increments, click the control shaft, between the
To choose a codec
scroll box and a scroll arrow.
1 On the Video Tab, click the Compression button on the
Setting the Export Quality “Video Properties” section. The Video Compression
dialog box is displayed.
The export quality controls the final quality render of each
scene before exporting to the AVI file. If this is set at
standard quality, the export will not be anti-aliased and the
export will be faster. Any of the other export quality settings

338 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Assigning a Temporary Directory

2 Scroll though the list of installed codecs and choose the


one you want to use. Click OK.
3 (optional) Click Default and the codec will be reset to the
Cinepak codec.

To configure the selected codec


2 Click the folder where you want your working files to be
1 On the Video Tab, click the Compression button on the saved. Click OK.
“Video Properties” section. The Video Compression
dialog box is displayed. Setting the Preview Speed
With Punch! Animator you can set the exact preview speed
you want; this will make previewing your video much
easier. You can also preview with or without shadows.

To set the preview speed


■ On the Video Tab, click the left or
2 Click Configure. The configuration dialog for that right scroll arrows on the “Preview
specific codec is displayed. Speed” section. To increase the speed
in larger increments, click the control
shaft, between the scroll box and a scroll arrow.

To preview with shadows


■ On the Video Tab, check the box next
to Shadows In Preview on the
“Preview Speed” section.

Note: This is just one example of a configuration dialog;


each codec will have a unique set of controls.

Assigning a Temporary Directory


You can specify a directory where all your video files can be
saved.

To set the temporary directory


1 On the Video Tab, click Temp
Directory. The Browse for Folder
dialog box is displayed.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 339


Chapter 48 Video Tab

340 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Part 10

3D Custom
Workshop

Chapter 49: Window Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343


Chapter 50: File Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Chapter 51: Drawing Grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Chapter 52: Drawing in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Chapter 53: Drawing in 2D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Chapter 54: Converting 2D Objects to 3D . . . . . . . . . 375
Chapter 55: Editing 3D Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Chapter 56: Controlling Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Chapter 57: Applying Color and Material . . . . . . . . . 395
Chapter 49

Window Layout
The Punch! 3D Custom Workshop window provides an assortment of features that make it easy to create custom objects.
This chapter describes the basic components.
In most cases, this chapter does not provide detailed information on standard Windows concepts or on specific menu items.
For information on standard Windows concepts, such as the mouse, the control menu, the window border, the maximize
button, dialog box controls and so on, refer to Windows online Help.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 343


Chapter 49 Window Layout

Title Bar Color and Material Toolbar


The title bar extends across the top of the application From the Color and Material Toolbar you can easily choose
window. It displays the name of the program and the name of between all the colors and materials available. You can even
the current drawing file. With the buttons at the right end of control how the colors and materials are applied.
the title bar you can minimize, maximize, close or restore the
window. You can also maximize or restore a window by
double-clicking on the title bar. Double-clicking the Control
menu box at the left end of the title bar is a quick way to exit. Standard Toolbar
If the application is running in a window rather than The Standard Toolbar contains the six most
maximized, dragging the title bar moves the entire window commonly-used tools; namely the Selection, Rotate,
on the desktop. Skew, Extrude, Pan and Zoom tools.

Menu Bar
You can choose menu items using either the mouse or the
keyboard. To use the mouse, click the menu name. When the
menu drops down, click the item you want. Menu items with Viewpoint Toolbar
an arrow to the right display cascading menus when you
place the pointer over one of them. When you highlight a The Viewpoint Toolbar contains the Fly-Around
menu item, a description is displayed on the status bar. Tool and two tools to set the viewpoint. The Set
Rotation Origin tool allows you set the exact point
To use the keyboard, press the ALT key and type the you want the viewpoint to rotate around. Whereas
underlined letter in the menu name, then type the underlined the Center Origin On Object tool allows you an easy
letter in the menu item’s name. If there is a cascading menu, way to center on a specific object, for instance the chair at the
you must type another letter. You can also use the arrow keys head of the dining room table.
to move through menu items and press ENTER to select one.
The ESC key backs out of the menu items one level at a time. Grid Toolbar
There are single-key or key combination shortcuts for certain The Grid Toolbar contains four tools that control the
frequently-used menu items. Each menu lists available grid functions. These tools make it easy to turn the
shortcut keys to the right of the item’s name. You can use the snap grid on and off, to switch between show and
techniques for choosing menu items in combination. hide grid and to keep objects from disappearing
behind an active grid. There is even a button to
Toolbars access the Grid Properties menu.
Clicking a button on a toolbar has the same effect as choosing
the menu item or feature it represents. Position Readout Bar
To find out what a certain tool represents, hold the pointer The position readout bar displays the exact measurements of
over the tool and read the description on the status bar at the your object as you draw. The scale of your drawing is also
bottom of the window. displayed here.

Design Toolbar
The Design Toolbar contains all the drawing tools, plus the Status Bar
2D/3D toggle. In addition, there are tools that control which
The status bar displays prompts and other program messages
drawing grid is active and how the entire design is displayed.
and is a good place to look when you are holding the pointer
over a button or menu item to find its function.

344 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Control Toolbar

Control Toolbar Scroll Bars


The Control Toolbar contains sets of frequently Using the scroll bars, you can pan across the drawing, that is,
used tools; group and ungroup, lock and unlock, to change the part of the drawing visible in the window,
flip, mirror, hide detection, and duplicate are all without changing the level of magnification.
easily accessible at all times.
■ To pan the drawing in small increments, click the scroll
arrow that points in the direction you want to pan.
Preview Bar ■ To pan in larger increments, click the control shaft,
You can click and drag objects from the Preview between the scroll box and a scroll arrow.
Bar onto your design window. The Preview Bar ■ To pan by a custom increment, drag the scroll box in the
changes to reflect the current design mode. For direction you want to pan.
instance, if the color tool is selected, palettes of ■ To position at a specific area of the page, right-click the
colors will appear and if you are using the material scroll bar and click the wanted area on the pop-up menu
tool, collections of materials are available. The that is displayed.
Preview Bar is the easiest and quickest way to
customize your drawing.

Elevation Slider
With the Elevation Slider, you can easily move
selected items vertically off “ground level” without
activating the Floor Grid. This feature makes it a
snap to make sure features are in exactly the
position you want. Simply select the object or
feature to be raised and move the slider by clicking
and dragging with the mouse.
The Elevation Slider works in the unit of measure
that is specified in the home design program.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 345


Chapter 49 Window Layout

346 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Chapter 50

File Management
When you start 3D Custom Workshop, a new blank drawing grid is displayed with the floor grid active. The foreground
and background colors will be those that were assigned in the home design program, as will the unit of measurement
(inches or metric). If you start 3D Custom Workshop by double clicking an object in your home design program, that
object is displayed on the design window.
If you are returning to work on an existing drawing, you must open, or display it, on the screen. Opening a file involves
clicking Open on the File menu and specifying the name of the file you want to open. When you open a file, 3D Custom
Workshop displays it in a new window.
The changes you make to an object occur only in your computer’s memory, until you save them. To preserve a drawing for
later use, you must save it to a file. If you want to save a drawing, using its current name or if you want to save a new,
untitled drawing, use Save. If you want to save a drawing with a new name, use Save As.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 347


Chapter 50 File Management

Opening a New File Saving a File


Opening a new file creates a new blank drawing grid with When you open a file, 3D Custom Workshop copies the file to
the floor grid active. The foreground and background colors your computer’s memory. As you work, you modify the copy
will be those that were assigned in the home design stored in memory. Any system failure or loss of power
program. destroys that copy. To save your work permanently, you must
save it to a file on a disk. A good rule of thumb is to save
To open a new file every 15 minutes or after you’ve completed any work you
■ On the File menu, click New or press CTRL+N. An wouldn’t want to redo.
empty drawing grid is displayed. When you click the Save command, 3D Custom Workshop
Note: If you were working on an object, you will be saves the active drawing, using the name and location you
prompted to save your work. last gave it. You can create more than one version of a
drawing or save copies on another disk for safekeeping. You
can save each version under a different name or you can
Opening an Existing Object save them under the same name in different folders or on
Opening a file copies the data it contains into memory, different disks.
making it available for you to edit or print.
To save an existing file
To open an existing file ■ On the File menu, click Save or press CTRL+S.
1 On the File menu, click Open. The Open dialog box is
displayed. To save a new, unnamed file
2 In the File Name box, type the name of the file you want 1 On the File menu, click Save As. The Save As dialog box
to open or search for the file by switching folders or is displayed.
drives.
2 In the File Name text box, type a name. 3D Custom
3 When you see the name of the file you want to open, Workshop automatically adds the POB extension.
click to select it.
3 Click Save.
4 Click Open.
To save an object to an object library
To open objects using drag-and-drop
1 On the File menu, click Save to Object Library. The Save
1 On the Design Toolbar, click the Object Tool. The to Object Library dialog box is displayed.
Preview Bar displays furnishing objects.
2 (optional) Click the arrow next to
“Objects” at the top of the Preview Bar to
display the object library list, then click
another object library.
3 Scroll to view the available objects.
4 Click the object you want to place; hold
down the mouse button and drag the
object onto your design window. 2 Click the Object Category button, then click the category
where you want the object filed.
5 (optional) Click the object you just placed
to select it; then click and drag it to 3 Type the Object Name in that dialog box. This will
another location on your design window. appear in the status bar when the mouse is held over the
object on the Preview Bar.
4 (optional) Type a description of the object in the Object
Description dialog box.
5 Click Save. The Save As dialog box is displayed.

348 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Closing a File

6 In the File Name text box, type a name. 3D Custom


Workshop automatically adds the POB extension.
7 Click Save.
Note: This process also creates the preview file that is
displayed in the Preview Bar, under the Object Category
selected in Step 2. You can change the appearance of the
preview by changing the position of the object on the design 3 In the File Name text box, type a name. 3D Custom
window. The object will always appear on a light blue Workshop automatically adds the extension, then click
background. OK.

Closing a File Note: The background of the file will be white, regardless
of what color is specified in 3D Custom Workshop.
When you finish working with a file, close it to remove the
window from the screen and to free up your computer’s To export to 2D DXF
memory.
1 On the File menu, click Export>DXF (2D). The Export
To close a file DXF dialog box is displayed.

■ On the File menu, click Close. If you have unsaved 2 In the File Name text box, type a name. 3D Custom
changes in your plan drawing, 3D Custom Workshop Workshop automatically adds the DXF extension.
prompts you to save them before it closes the file. 3 Locate the directory where you want the file exported,
then click Save.
Importing 3DS Files
To export to 3D DXF
With 3D Custom Workshop, you can import 3DS files. After
importing you can alter them to suit your design. 1 On the File menu, click Export>DXF (3D). The Export
DXF dialog box is displayed.
To import a 3DS file 2 In the File Name text box, type a name. 3D Custom
1 On the File menu, click Import 3DS. The Open dialog Workshop automatically adds the DXF extension.
box is displayed. 3 Locate the directory where you want the file exported,
2 In the File Name box, type the name of the file you want then click Save.
to import or search for the file by switching folders or
drives. To export to 7.0 3D Custom Workshop format
3 When you see the name of the file you want to import, 1 On the File menu, click Export>7.0 Custom Workshop
click to select it. Object. The dialog box is displayed.
4 Click OK. 2 In the File Name text box, type a name. 3D Custom
Workshop automatically adds the extension.
Exporting Files 3 Locate the directory where you want the file exported,
With 3D Custom Workshop, you can export your design. then click Save.
Files can be exported to a variety of formats in Textured,
Wire Frame and ClearView modes. Printing Objects
3D Custom Workshop prints using the current Windows
To export a 3D rendering printer. You can, however, print using any installed printer.
1 Click the Rendering Style button or on the Using the Print dialog box you can specify a printer or plotter
View menu, click 3D Rendering Style, then from those currently installed. Your object can be printed in
click the rendering style you want. Textured, Wire Frame, or ClearView modes. In rendered
2 On the File menu, click Export, then click to select the mode, you have the choice of four qualities.
format you want. The Export Image dialog box is
displayed.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 349


Chapter 50 File Management

To print in wire frame mode To print in rendered mode


■ Click the Rendering Style button or on the 1 On the File menu, click Print, then click the Quality you
View menu, click 3D Rendering Style, Wire want to use.
Frame.
1 On the File menu, click Print, then click Print Wire
Frame or press Ctrl+P.

2 On the Print dialog box, click the down arrow next to the
printer name.
3 Click the printer you want to use.
2 On the Print dialog box, click the down arrow next to the 4 Click the Properties button. The Properties menu is
printer name. displayed.
3 Click the printer you want to use. 5 Select the paper orientation.
6 Select the paper size. Typically, this will be either 8.5x11
in (letter) or 8.5x14 in (legal).
7 Click the down arrow next to media type. Then select the
required media.
8 Click either Auto Feeder or Manual Feed as your paper
feed method, then click Print.

4 (optional) Click the Properties button. The Properties


menu is displayed.
5 (opional)
Note: This Properties menu is from a popular color printer.
Refer to your printer’s documentation on the use of its
specific features.
6 Select the paper orientation.
7 Select the paper size. Typically, this will be either 8.5x11
in (letter) or 8.5x14 in (legal).
8 Click the down arrow next to media type. Then select the
required media.
9 Click either Auto Feeder or Manual Feed as your paper
feed method, then click Print.

350 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Chapter 51

Drawing Grids
By using the Drawing Grids in 3D Custom Workshop you can work on any object from three distinct 3D angles. Each grid
controls two axes. You can also draw or edit in 2D from any of six directions, which will make editing and detailed
alignment simple.
The 3D drawing grids are the Front, Floor and Side grids. The X (Width) and Y (Height) dimensions are the dominant axes
when drawing on the Front Grid. While the Floor Grid controls the X (Width) and Z (Depth) dimensions, the Side Grid
controls the Z (Depth) and Y (Height) dimensions. Using these grids in concert will give you the ability to design anything
you want.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 351


Chapter 51 Drawing Grids

Drawing on the Front Grid To draw on the floor grid


Using the Front Grid, you can concentrate on the X (Width) 1 On the Design menu, click Draw on Floor Grid
and Y (Height) dimensions. You can extrude objects along the (X-Z Axis) or click the Floor Grid tool on the
Z (Depth) axis. You will be able to tell by the tighter grid toolbar.
pattern which drawing grid is active. 2 On the Design toolbar, click the Rectangle Tool. The
pointer changes to reflect rectangle drawing mode.
To draw on the front grid
3 Press the mouse button on the design window to define
1 On the Design menu, click Draw on Front Grid the start point of the rectangle. A rubber-band rectangle
(X-Y Axis) or click the Front Grid tool on the is displayed and follows the pointer.
toolbar.
2 On the View menu, click to check 3D Design tools.
3 On the Design toolbar, click the Rectangle Tool. The
pointer changes to reflect rectangle drawing mode.
4 Press the mouse button on the design window to define
the start point of the rectangle. A rubber-band rectangle
is displayed and follows the pointer.

4 Hold the mouse button down, while you extend the


rectangle front to back and left to right (along the X and
Z axes), until it reaches the size you want. Notice that
dimensions appear in the status bar, as you draw.
5 Release the mouse button.
6 Move the cursor to extrude the rectangle along the Y
Axis to the height you want.
5 Hold the mouse button down, while you extend the 7 Click to finish drawing and place the rectangle.
rectangle front to back and left to right (along the X and
Y axes), until it reaches the size you want. Notice that Drawing on the Side Grid
dimensions appear in the status bar, as you draw.
The Side Grid activates the Z (Depth) and Y (Height)
6 Release the mouse button. dimensions. You will be able to extrude objects along the X
7 Move the cursor to extrude the rectangle along the Z Axis (Width) axis.
to the depth you want.
8 Click to finish drawing and place the rectangle. To draw on the side grid
1 On the Design menu, select Draw on Side Grid
Note: If your drawing “snaps” to the bottom of the
(Z-Y Axis) or select the Side Grid icon from the
drawing grid or another specific height, your Elevation
toolbar.
Slider is open and set to 0”. For more information, see
“Elevation Slider”, which begins on page 355. 2 On the Design toolbar, click the Rectangle Tool. The
pointer changes to reflect rectangle drawing mode.
Drawing on the Floor Grid 3 Press the mouse button on the design window to define
the start point of the rectangle. A rubber-band rectangle
From the Floor Grid you concentrate on the X (Width) and Z
is displayed and follows the pointer.
(Depth) dimensions. You will be able to extrude objects
along the Y (Height) axis.

352 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Changing Grid Settings

To change snap grid spacing


1 On the Design menu, click Grid Spacing. The Grid
Spacing dialog box is displayed.
2 (optional) On the Grid Toolbar, click the Grid
4 Hold the mouse button down, while you extend the Spacing Tool. The Grid Spacing dialog box is
rectangle front to back and left to right (along the Z and diaplayed.
Y axes), until it reaches the size you want. Notice that 3 Type Horizontal and Vertical measurements for the Snap
dimensions appear in the status bar, as you draw. Grid, then click OK.
5 Release the mouse button.
6 Move the cursor, to extrude the rectangle along the X
Axis to the height you want.
7 Click to finish drawing and place the rectangle.
Note: If your drawing “snaps” to the bottom of the
drawing grid or another specific height, your Elevation
Slider is open and set to 0”. For more information, see
“Elevation Slider”, which begins on page 355.
To turn off the snap grid

Changing Grid Settings ■ On the Grid Toolbar, click the Snap Grid
On/Off Toggle or on the Design menu, click
By default, the Grid is visible and set at twelve inches. This to uncheck Snap to Grid.
way you can visualize that each large square on the
floorplan is one (1) square foot. By defining a customized To hide the grid from view
Grid, you
can design to fit your specific needs. In addition, by turning ■ On the Grid Toolbar, click the Grid On/Off
the Snap Grid on and off, you will be able to make detailed Toggle or on the Design menu, click to
placement of the components simple. To keep things from uncheck Grid Visible. If Grid Visible is checked it is
slipping behind the active grid, use the Grid Constrain displayed. If unchecked, the grid is hidden from view.
feature.
To toggle the grid constrain
To change grid spacing ■ On the Grid Toolbar, click the Grid
1 On the Design menu, click Grid Spacing. The Grid Constrain Toggle.
Spacing dialog box is displayed.
To change the grid size
2 (optional) On the Grid Toolbar, click the Grid
Spacing Tool. The Grid Spacing dialog box is 1 On the Design menu, click on Grid Size. The Grid Size
diaplayed. dialog box is displayed.

3 Type Horizontal and Vertical measurements, then click 2 Type Width and Depth measurements, then click OK.
OK.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 353


Chapter 51 Drawing Grids

Setting a Nudge Distance


With Nudge, you can move objects in a specific direction and
in definable increments. The up, down, left and right
selections are also available by using the arrow keys on your
keyboard. Through the distance dialog box, distances as
small as one inch may be defined.

To change the nudge distance


1 On the Edit menu, click Nudge, Distance. The Nudge
Distance dialog box is displayed.

5 On the View menu, click 2D View, click Top or right-


click anywhere on the design window, then click 2D Top
View on the pop-up menu that is displayed.
2 Type a new distance, then click OK.

To move an object by nudging


1 Click the object you want to move.
2 On the Design menu, click a drawing grid.
3 On the Edit menu, click Nudge, then click the direction
(up, down, left, or right) or use the arrow keys on your
keyboard.

Using 2D Views
2D Views work in harmony with the 3D Views. The 2D Top
and Bottom Views are used in tandem with the 3D Floor
Grid; the Front and Back Views are used with the 3D Front 6 Click the object to select it.
Grid; the Left and Right Views work with the Side Grid. 7 Click-and-drag a corner of the object to reshape it. The
The 2D Views make complex alignment straightforward and dimensions will appear in the status bar, as you reshape
simple. It is easy to toggle back and forth, using the pop-up the object.
menu. All 2D views work in the same manner.

To edit using 2D view


1 On the Design toolbar, click the Object Tool.
2 At the top of the Preview Bar, click the down arrow
next to “Objects” to display the object libraries, then
click to check Exterior Accessories category. Exterior
Accessories objects are displayed on the Preview Bar.
3 Click to select an object on the Preview Bar. As you
pass the mouse over objects, their names appear on the
status bar.
4 Click-and-drag the object into the design window.
8 Release the mouse button.
9 Right-click, then click Reset View on the pop-up menu
that is displayed to view the resized object.

354 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Elevation Slider

To specify an exact elevation


1 Right-click the Elevation Slider and click Set Elevation
from the pop-up menu that is displayed.

2 Type the necessary elevation in inches, or feet and


inches, separated with a hyphen. Click OK.

To set the working elevation


10 On the File menu, click Exit & Return to Punch! Home 1 Right-click the Elevation Slider at the left side of your
Design. window and click Set Elevation from the pop-up menu
11 Click Yes to place the object in the center of your design. that is displayed.
12 Drag the modified object into position.

Elevation Slider
With the Elevation Slider, objects can easily be moved
vertically, regardless of which grid is active at the time. The 2 Type the necessary elevation in inches, or feet and
Elevation Slider will display in the unit of measure specified inches, separated with a hyphen. Click OK.
in the home design program; for example, measurements will
be displayed in metric automatically, if you are designing in To set the elevation of a group of objects
your home design program, using metric measurements.
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the
Accessing the elevation slider Selection Tool.

■ Click the Show/Hide Elevation Slider Tool. 2 Press SHIFT and click each object you
The Elevation Slider is displayed. want to elevate.
■ Click the Show/Hide Elevation Slider Tool 3 Right-click the Elevation Slider at the
again to hide the Elevation Slider. left side of your window and click Set Elevation from the
pop-up menu that is displayed.
Note: To specify an exact elevation where you
want your object drawn, be sure the Elevation
Slider is open and set to that height. All
subsequent shapes will be set to that elevation.

To use the elevation slider


4 Type the elevation in inches, or feet and inches separated
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection with a hyphen. Click OK.
Tool.
Note: All selected objects will be reset to the elevation
2 Click the object or feature you want to elevate.
specified, even if the objects were originally located at
3 Click the Elevation Slider at the left side of your various elevations.
window and move the elevation control up or
down until the object is in the correct position.
4 Release the mouse. The elevation of the object is
changed.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 355


Chapter 51 Drawing Grids

356 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Chapter 52

Drawing in 3D
3D Custom Workshop is an extremely powerful CAD (computer-aided design) program. Whether you want to draw
angular objects like cabinets, desks and so on, or curved objects like lamps, mirrors and so on, there is a tool to match each
task.
In this chapter, each drawing tool’s function will be explained. You will also learn the Draw from Center, Draw from
Corner, Object Editing and Point Editing techniques, which will make drawing any object you want easier.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 357


Chapter 52 Drawing in 3D

Drawing a 3D Rectangle
In rectangle drawing mode, you can draw cubes and boxes.
You will find this tool useful when drawing tables, cabinets,
counters and so on.
2
To draw a rectangle

1 On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to


access the 3D Design Toolbar. If the 3D Design
Toolbar is already active, please skip to step 2.
Note: Other ways to access the 3D design toolbar are on the
View menu, click 3D Design Tools or press CTRL+3.
8 Click to end.
2 On the Design menu, click a drawing grid. If the
appropriate drawing grid was previously selected, please
skip to step 3. Drawing a 3D Oval
In ellipse drawing mode, you can draw circles and ovals. You
3 Click the Rectangle Tool. The pointer changes to will find this tool useful when drawing lamps, couches,
reflect drawing mode. planters, rugs and so on.
4 Press the mouse button on the design window to define
the start point of the rectangle. A rubber-band rectangle To draw an oval
is displayed and follows the pointer. 1 On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to access
the 3D Design Toolbar. If the 3D Design Toolbar is
already active, please skip to step 2.
Note: Other ways to access the 3D design toolbar are on the
View menu, click 3D Design Tools or press CTRL+3.
2 On the Design menu, click a drawing grid. If the
appropriate drawing grid was previously selected, please
skip to step 3.
12
Drag
3 Click the Oval Tool. The pointer changes to reflect
drawing mode.
4 Press the mouse button on the design window to define
the start point of the oval. A rubber-band oval is
5 Hold the mouse button down as you extend the rectangle displayed and follows the pointer.
to the size you want. Dimensions will appear in the
position readout bar, as you draw.
6 Release the mouse button.
7 Move the mouse in the direction you want to extrude the
rectangle.

12

Drag
358 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide
Drawing a 3D Multigon

5 Hold the mouse button down as you extend the oval to


the size you want. Dimensions will appear in the position
readout bar, as you draw.
6 Release the mouse button.
7 Move the mouse in the direction you want to extrude the
5 Type the number of equal-length sides you want, then
oval. During the extruding process, only the perimeter click OK.
will be visible. The 3D oval is displayed once drawing
mode has ended. 6 Click on the design window to define the start point
(center) of the multigon. A rubber-band multigon is
displayed and follows the pointer.
Note: Although you can define any number of sides, the
more sides you specify, the more the multigon will begin to
look like a circle.

8 Click to end.
12
9 (optional) Press and hold SHIFT, while drawing, to draw
a perfect circle from its centerpoint.
Drag

Drawing a 3D Multigon
In multigon drawing mode, you will be able to draw objects
with a specified number of equal-length sides. You will find
7 Hold the mouse button down while you draw the
this tool useful when drawing mirrors, tabletops, hot tubs
multigon to the size you want. The radius measurement
and so on.
will appear in the position readout bar, as you draw.
To draw a multigon 8 Release the mouse button.
1 On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to access 9 Move the mouse in the direction you want to extrude the
the 3D Design Toolbar. If the 3D Design Toolbar is multigon.
already active, please skip to step 2.
Note: Other ways to access the 3D design toolbar are on the
View menu, click 3D Design Tools or press CTRL+3 or
right-click anywhere on the design window, then click 3D
Design Tools from the pop-up menu that is displayed. 2
2 On the Design menu, click a drawing grid. If the
appropriate drawing grid was previously selected, please
skip to step 3.

3 Click the Multigon Tool. The pointer changes to


reflect drawing mode.
4 On the Options menu, click Custom Options. The
Custom Options dialog box is displayed. 10 Click to end.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 359


Chapter 52 Drawing in 3D

Drawing a 3D Polygon
In polygon drawing mode, you can draw an object with any
number of sides at any angle or length. You will find this
tool useful when drawing corner cabinets, futons and so on. 52

To draw a polygon

1 On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to


access the 3D Design Toolbar. If the 3D Design
Toolbar is already active, please skip to step 2.
Note: Other ways to access the 3D design toolbar are on the
View menu, click 3D Design Tools or press CTRL+3.
8 Click to end.
2 On the Design menu, click a drawing grid. If the
appropriate drawing grid was previously selected, please
Drawing a 3D Closed Arc
skip to step 3.
In closed arc drawing mode, you will be able to draw an
3 Click the Polygon Tool. The pointer changes to elliptical arc, which will automatically close along the
reflect drawing mode. bottom. You will find this tool useful when drawing couches,
4 Click on the design window to define the start point of chairs, drop-leaf tables and so on.
the polygon. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows
the pointer. This line signifies the first side of the To draw a closed arc
polygon. 1 On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to access
the 3D Design Toolbar. If the 3D Design Toolbar is
already active, please skip to step 2.
Note: Other ways to access the 3D design toolbar are on the
View menu, click 3D Design Tools or press CTRL+3.
4 2 On the Design menu, click a drawing grid. If the
2
appropriate drawing grid was previously selected, please
skip to step 3.
32
3 Click the Closed Arc Tool. The pointer changes to
reflect drawing mode.
12
2
4 Press the mouse button on the design window to define
the start point of the closed arc. A rubber-band line is
displayed and follows the pointer.
5 Click and move the mouse to the next cornerpoint.
Repeat until you have drawn the shape.
6 Double-click to end drawing the 2D shape.
7 Move the mouse in the direction you want to extrude the
object.

12

Drag
360 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide
Drawing a 3D Circular Closed Arc

5 Hold the mouse button down while you extend the arc to
the size you want. Dimensions appear in the position
readout bar, as you draw.
6 Release the mouse button.
7 Move the mouse in the direction you want to extrude the
object.

12 Drag

5 Hold the mouse button down while you extend the radius
to the size you want. Dimensions appear in the position
readout bar, as you draw.
2 6 Release the mouse button.
7 Move the mouse clockwise or counter-clockwise to
create the shape you want.
8 Click to end.

9 (optional) Press and hold SHIFT, while drawing, to


constrain the arc to 90 degrees.

Drawing a 3D Circular Closed Arc


In circular closed arc drawing mode, you will be able to
draw closed circular objects that have a cutout area. You
will find this tool useful when drawing mouldings for 2
cabinets and so on.

To draw a circular closed arc


1 On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to access
the 3D Design Toolbar. If the 3D Design Toolbar is 8 Click to end drawing the 2D shape.
already active, please skip to step 2. 9 Move the mouse in the direction you want to extrude the
object.
Note: Other ways to access the 3D design toolbar are on the
View menu, click 3D Design Tools or press CTRL+3.
2 On the Design menu, click a drawing grid. If the
appropriate drawing grid was previously selected, please
skip to step 3.

3 Click the Circular Closed Arc Tool. The pointer


changes to reflect drawing mode. 3
2

4 Press the mouse button on the design window to define


the centerpoint of the arc. A rubber-band line is displayed
and follows the pointer. This line signifies the radius of
your arc.

10 Click to end.
PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 361
Chapter 52 Drawing in 3D

Drawing a 3D Open Arc


In open arc drawing mode, you will be able to draw an
elliptical arc which will remain open along the bottom. You
will find this tool useful when drawing outdoor bridges,
slides and so on.

To draw an open arc


1 On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to access 2
the 3D Design Toolbar. If the 3D Design Toolbar is
already active, please skip to step 2.
Note: Other ways to access the 3D design toolbar are on the
View menu, click 3D Design Tools or press CTRL+3. 8 Click to end.
2 On the Design menu, click a drawing grid. If the 9 (optional) Press and hold SHIFT, while drawing, to
appropriate drawing grid was previously selected, please constrain the arc to 90 degrees.
skip to step 3.
Drawing a 3D Circular Arc
3 Click the Open Arc Tool. The pointer changes to
reflect drawing mode. In circular arc drawing mode, you can draw an arc of any
radius. You will find this tool useful when drawing
4 Press the mouse button on the design window to define
decorative edges, barrel planters and so on.
the start point of the closed arc. A rubber-band line is
displayed and follows the pointer.
To draw a circular arc

1 On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to


access the 3D Design Toolbar. If the 3D Design
Toolbar is already active, please skip to step 2.
Note: Other ways to access the 3D design toolbar are on the
1 View menu, click 3D Design Tools or press CTRL+3.
2
2 On the Design menu, click a drawing grid. If the
Drag
appropriate drawing grid was previously selected, please
skip to step 3.

3 Click the Circular Arc Tool. The pointer changes to


reflect drawing mode.

5 Hold the mouse button down while you extend the arc to 4 Press the mouse button on the design window to define
the shape you want. Dimensions appear in the position the centerpoint of the arc. A rubber-band line is displayed
readout bar, as you draw. and follows the pointer. This line signifies the radius of
your arc.
6 Release the mouse button.
7 Move the mouse in the direction you want to extrude the
object.
362 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide
Drawing a 3D Plane

Drawing a 3D Plane
In plane drawing mode, you will be able to draw flat planes
to the size you want. You will find this tool useful when
adding angular details to cabinets and so on.

Dr To draw a plane
ag
1 On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to access
1
2 the 3D Design Toolbar. If the 3D Design Toolbar is
already active, please skip to step 2.
Note: Other ways to access the 3D design toolbar are on the
View menu, click 3D Design Tools or press CTRL+3.
2 On the Design menu, click a drawing grid. If the
5 Hold the mouse button down while you extend the appropriate drawing grid was previously selected, please
radius to the size you want. Dimensions appear in the skip to step 3.
position readout bar, as you draw.
3 Click the Plane Tool. The pointer changes to reflect
6 Release the mouse button. drawing mode.
7 Move the mouse clockwise or counter-clockwise to 4 Press the mouse button on the design window to define
create the shape you want. the start point of the line. A rubber-band line is displayed
and follows the pointer.

Dr
ag

8 Click to end drawing the 2D shape. 1


2
9 Move the mouse in the direction you want to extrude the
object.
5 Hold the mouse button down while you extend the line in
the direction and to the length you want. Dimensions
appear in the position readout bar, as you draw.
6 Release the mouse button.
7 Move the mouse in the direction you want to extrude the
plane.

32

10 Click to end.
PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 363
Chapter 52 Drawing in 3D

32
2 2
42
1
2

8 Click to end. 5 Double-click to end.


9 (optional) Press and hold the Shift key, while drawing, to 6 Move the mouse in the direction you want to extrude the
constrain the line horizontally or vertically. object.

Drawing a 3D Curve
In curve drawing mode, you will be able to draw an open
curved shape which changes direction. You will find this tool
useful when drawing curved ceilings, outdoor grills and so
on.

To draw a curve

1 On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to 5


access the 3D Design Toolbar. If the 3D Design 2
Toolbar is already active, please skip to step 2.
Note: Other ways to access the 3D design toolbar are on the
View menu, click 3D Design Tools or press CTRL+3. 7 Click to end.
2 On the Design menu, click a drawing grid. If the
appropriate drawing grid was previously selected, please Using Object Selection Mode
skip to step 3. Object Selection Mode is active by default. Object selection,
along with point selection, controls how your edits impact
3 Click the Curve Tool. The pointer changes to reflect your object. If you are in object selection mode, changes
drawing mode.
affect the object as a whole. If you are working in point
4 Click and move the mouse to the next cornerpoint. selection mode, each edge of the object is treated separately,
Repeat until you have drawn the necessary shape. as you edit.
Although the lines will initially appear angular, they will
become curved when you end drawing mode. To use object selection mode

1 On the Options menu, click Object Selection or


click on the Object Selection tool in the lower left
corner of the window.
2 Click the object and drag it into the new position.
364 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide
Using Point Selection Mode

Using Point Selection Mode Note: To restore colors and materials, click the
Rendering Style toggle at the lower left of your
In point selection mode, you are able to move each edge window or on the View menu, click 3D Rendering Style, then
individually in your drawing. While it is easy to move an click Textured.
entire object in object selection mode, it is much more
convenient to handle detailed edits using point selection Drawing from Corner
mode.
Draw from Corner, along with Draw from Center, controls
To use point selection mode the beginning points of objects drawn with the drawing
tools. Draw from Corner makes drawing cabinets, tables and
1 On the Options menu, click Point Selection or most other angular objects much easier. Draw from Corner
click on the Point Selection tool in the lower left works with the rectangle, oval and line/plane tools only.
corner of the window. The design window changes to
reflect wire frame view. To draw from corner

1 On the Options menu, click Draw From Corner or


click on the Draw from Corner Tool.

Note: Draw from Corner mode is the 3D Custom


Workshop’s default drawing style.

2 Click the Rectangle Tool. The pointer changes to


reflect drawing mode.
3 Press the mouse button on the design window to define
the cornerpoint of the rectangle. A rubber-band rectangle
is displayed and follows the pointer.

2 On the Design menu, click a drawing grid.


3 Click a section of the object and drag it into the new
position to reshape it.

1
2
Drag
PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 365
Chapter 52 Drawing in 3D

4 Hold the mouse button down as you extend the opposite


corner of the rectangle to the size you want. Dimensions
will appear in the position readout bar, as you draw.
5 Release the mouse button.
6 Move the mouse in the direction you want to extrude the
rectangle.

12 Drag

2
4 Hold the mouse button down as you extend the rectangle
to the size you want. Dimensions will appear in the
position readout bar, as you draw.
5 Release the mouse button.
6 Move the mouse in the direction you want to extrude the
rectangle.
7 Click to end.

Drawing from Center


Draw from Center, along with Draw from Corner, controls
the beginning points of objects drawn with the drawing tools. 2
Draw from Center makes drawing concentric objects a
breeze. Draw from Center is applicable with the rectangle,
oval and line/plane tools only.

To draw from center

1 On the Options menu, click Draw from Center or


click on the Draw from Center Tool.
7 Click to end.
2 Click the Rectangle Tool. The pointer changes to
reflect drawing mode.
3 Press the mouse button on the design window to define
the centerpoint of the rectangle. A rubber-band rectangle
is displayed and follows the pointer.
366 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide
Chapter 53

Drawing in 2D
You may find it easier to begin your design in 2D and add the third dimension later. You will find the 2D design tools are
extremely useful for this technique. These tools are the counterpart to the 3D drawing tools and work similarly. For more
information on 3D drawing tools, see the chapter titled “Drawing in 3D”, which begins on page 357. The 2D toolset can
be used in 3D view or a 2D view from a specific direction.
In this chapter we will explore the uses of each 2D drawing Tool. In addition, the Curve Tension technique is explained.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 367


Chapter 53 Drawing in 2D

Drawing a 2D Rectangle Drawing a 2D Oval


In rectangle drawing mode you will be able to draw squares In ellipse drawing mode you will be able to draw circles and
and rectangles. You will find this tool useful when drawing ovals. You will find this tool useful when drawing lamps,
tables, cabinets, counters and so on. couches, planters, rugs and so on.

To draw a rectangle To draw an oval


1 On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to access
1 On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to
access the 2D Design Toolbar. If the 2D Design the 2D Design Toolbar. If the 2D Design Toolbar is
already active, please skip to step 2.
Toolbar is already active, please skip to step 2.
Note: Other ways to access the 2D design toolbar are on the
Note: Other ways to access the 2D design toolbar are on the
View menu, click 2D Design Tools or press CTRL+2.
View menu, click 2D Design Tools or press CTRL+2.
2 On the Design menu, click a drawing grid. If the
2 On the Design menu, click a drawing grid. If the
appropriate drawing grid was previously selected, please
appropriate drawing grid was previously selected, please
skip to step 3.
skip to step 3.
3 Click the Oval Tool. The pointer changes to reflect
3 Click the Rectangle Tool. The pointer changes to drawing mode.
reflect drawing mode.
4 Press the mouse button on the design window to define
4 Press the mouse button on the design window to define
the start point of the oval. A rubber-band shape is
the start point of the rectangle. A rubber-band rectangle
displayed and follows the pointer.
is displayed and follows the pointer.

12
12

Dr Drag
ag

5 Hold the mouse button down and extend the rectangle to 5 Hold the mouse button down and extend the oval until it
the size you want. Dimensions appear in the position reaches the size you want. Dimensions appear in the
readout bar, as you draw. position readout bar, as youshift, while drawing, to draw.
6 Release the mouse button. 6 Release the mouse button.
7 (optional) Press and hold SHIFT, while drawing, to draw
a perfect circle.
368 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide
Drawing a 2D Multigon

Drawing a 2D Multigon Drawing a 2D Polygon


In multigon drawing mode you will be able to draw objects In polygon drawing mode you can draw an object with any
with a specified number of equal-length sides. You will find number of sides at any angle or length. You will find this tool
this tool useful when drawing mirrors, tabletops, hot tubs useful when drawing corner cabinets, futons and so on.
and so on.
To draw a polygon
To draw a multigon 1 On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to access
1 On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to access the 2D Design Toolbar. If the 2D Design Toolbar is
the 2D Design Toolbar. If the 2D Design Toolbar is already active, please skip to step 2.
already active, please skip to step 2.
Note: Other ways to access the 2D design toolbar are on the
Note: Other ways to access the 2D design toolbar are on the View menu, click 2D Design Tools or press CTRL+2.
View menu, click 2D Design Tools or press CTRL+2.
2 On the Design menu, click a drawing grid. If the
2 On the Design menu, click a drawing grid. If the appropriate drawing grid was previously selected, please
appropriate drawing grid was previously selected, please skip to step 3.
skip to step 3.
3 Click the Polygon Tool. The pointer changes to
3 Click the Multigon Tool. The pointer changes to reflect drawing mode.
reflect drawing mode.
4 Click on the design window to define the start point of
the polygon. A rubber-band line is displayed and follows
the pointer. This line signifies the first side of your
polygon.

4 On the Options menu, click Custom Options, then type


the number of equal-length sides you need.
5 Press the mouse button on the design window to define
the start point (center) of the multigon. A rubber-band
multigon is displayed and follows the pointer.
12
2
42
3
2

5 Click and move the mouse to the next cornerpoint.


Repeat until you have drawn the needed shape.
Dr 6 Double-click to end drawing mode. Dimensions appear
ag
12 in the position readout bar, as you draw.

6 Hold the mouse button down and extend the multigon to


the size you want. The radius will appear in the position
readout bar, as you draw.
7 Release the mouse button.
PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 369
Chapter 53 Drawing in 2D

Drawing a 2D Closed Arc Drawing a 2D Circular Closed Arc


In closed arc drawing mode you will be able to draw an In circular closed arc drawing mode you will be able to draw
elliptical arc, which will automatically close along the a closed shape of any rounded item. You will find this tool
bottom. You will find this tool useful when drawing couches, useful when drawing cabinet mouldings, decorative edges
chairs, drop-leaf tables and so on. and so on.

To draw a closed arc To draw a circular closed arc


1 On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to access 1 On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to access
the 2D Design Toolbar. If the 2D Design Toolbar is the 2D Design Toolbar. If the 2D Design Toolbar is
already active, please skip to step 2. already active, please skip to step 2.
Note: Other ways to access the 2D design toolbar are on the Note: Other ways to access the 2D design toolbar are on the
View menu, click 2D Design Tools or press CTRL+2. View menu, click 2D Design Tools or press CTRL+2.
2 On the Design menu, click a drawing grid. If the 2 On the Design menu, click a drawing grid. If the
appropriate drawing grid was previously selected, please appropriate drawing grid was previously selected, please
skip to step 3. skip to step 3.

3 Click the Closed Arc Tool. The pointer changes to 3 Click the Circular closed arc Tool. The pointer
reflect drawing mode. changes to reflect drawing mode.
4 Press the mouse button on the design window to define 4 Press the mouse button on the design window to define
the start point of the closed arc. A rubber-band line is the centerpoint of the arc. A rubber-band line is displayed
displayed and follows the pointer. and follows the pointer. This line signifies the radius of
your arc.

12 12 Drag

Drag

5 Hold the mouse button down and extend the arc to the
shape you want. Dimensions appear in the position 5 Hold the mouse button down and extend the radius to
readout bar, as you draw. the size you want. Dimensions appear in the position
readout bar, as you draw.
6 Release the mouse button.
6 Release the mouse button.
7 (optional) Press and hold SHIFT, while drawing, to
constrain the arc to 90 degrees. 7 Move the mouse clockwise or counter-clockwise to
create the shape you want.
370 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide
Drawing a 2D Open Arc

5 Hold the mouse button down and extend the arc to the
shape you want. Dimensions appear in the position
readout bar, as you draw.
6 Release the mouse button.
7 (optional) Press and hold SHIFT, while drawing, to
2 constrain the arc to 90 degrees.

Drawing a 2D Circular Arc


In circular arc drawing mode you will be able to draw an
open shape of any radius. You will find this tool useful when
drawing decorative edges, barrel planters and so on.
8 Click to end drawing mode.
To draw a circular arc

Drawing a 2D Open Arc 1 On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to access
the 2D Design Toolbar. If the 2D Design Toolbar is
In open arc drawing mode you will be able to draw an already active, please skip to step 2.
elliptical arc which will remain open along the bottom. You
will find this tool useful when drawing outdoor bridges, Note: Other ways to access the 2D design toolbar are on the
slides and so on. View menu, click 2D Design Tools or press CTRL+2.
2 On the Design menu, click a drawing grid. If the
To draw an open arc appropriate drawing grid was previously selected, please
skip to step 3.
1 On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to
access the 2D Design Toolbar. If the 2D Design
3 Click the Circular arc Tool. The pointer changes to
Toolbar is already active, please skip to step 2. reflect drawing mode.
Note: Other ways to access the 2D design toolbar are on the 4 Press the mouse button on the design window to define
View menu, click 2D Design Tools or press CTRL+2. the centerpoint of the arc. A rubber-band line is displayed
2 On the Design menu, click a drawing grid. If the and follows the pointer. This line signifies the radius of
appropriate drawing grid was previously selected, please your arc.
skip to step 3.

3 Click the Open Arc Tool. The pointer changes to


reflect drawing mode.
4 Press the mouse button on the design window to define
the start point of the closed arc. A rubber-band line is
displayed and follows the pointer.

Drag
12

1 5 Hold the mouse button down and extend the radius to


2
the size you want. Dimensions appear in the position
readout bar, as you draw.
Dr
ag 6 Release the mouse button.
7 Move the mouse clockwise or counter-clockwise to
create the shape you want.
PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 371
Chapter 53 Drawing in 2D

5 Hold the mouse button down and extend the line to the
length you want. Dimensions appear in the position
readout bar, as you draw.
6 Release the mouse button.
7 (optional) Press and hold SHIFT, while drawing, to
constrain the line horizontally or vertically.

Drawing a 2D Curve
In curve drawing mode you will be able to draw an open
2 curved shape which changes direction. You will find this tool
useful when drawing outdoor grills and so on.
8 Click to end drawing mode. To draw a curve

Drawing a 2D Line 1 On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to


access the 2D Design Toolbar. If the 2D Design
In line drawing mode you will be able to draw straight lines
of any length. You will find this tool useful when drawing Toolbar is already active, please skip to step 2.
angular details to cabinets, tables and so on. Note: Other ways to access the 2D design toolbar are on the
View menu, click 2D Design Tools or press CTRL+2.
To draw a line
2 On the Design menu, click a drawing grid. If the
1 On the Design toolbar, click the Tool Toggle to access
appropriate drawing grid was previously selected, please
the 2D Design Toolbar. If the 2D Design Toolbar is
skip to step 3.
already active, please skip to step 2.
Note: Other ways to access the 2D design toolbar are on the 3 Click the Curve Tool. The pointer changes to reflect
View menu, click 2D Design Tools or press CTRL+2. drawing mode.

2 On the Design menu, click a drawing grid. If the 4 Click and move the mouse to the next cornerpoint.
appropriate drawing grid was previously selected, please Repeat until you have drawn the needed shape.
skip to step 3.

3 Click the Line Tool. The pointer changes to reflect


drawing mode.
4 Press the mouse button on the design window to define
the start point of the line. A rubber-band line is displayed
and follows the pointer.

Note: Although the lines will initially appear to be angular,


they will become curved when you end drawing mode.
5 Double-click to end drawing mode.
12
Changing Curve Tension
Drag
To further control the look of the shapes drawn with any of
the arc or curve tools, you have control over the degree of
curve assigned to them. With the Unsmooth feature it is easy

372 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Changing Curve Tension

to create angular shapes and with Curve Tension you can Curve Tension set at 20:
change the appearance. Curve Tension is measured between
1 and 50. Specifying 1 in the dialog box results in very little
tension being applied, while specifying 50 is the maximum
amount allowed and causes a greatly-exaggerated curve.

To change curve tension


1 Click an object to select it.
2 On the Options Menu, click Curve Smoothing, Curve
Tension. The Curve Tension dialog box is displayed.

Curve Tension set at 30:


3 Type the amount of tension that you want.
4 Click OK. The Curve Tension you specified is applied.

Examples:

Default Curve Tension (5):

Curve Tension set at 10:

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 373


Chapter 53 Drawing in 2D

374 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Chapter 54

Converting
2D Objects to 3D
In the previous chapter you learned how to draw in 2D, now you will learn how to convert two-dimensional objects into
3D. You can create as much depth as you want in any direction necessary.
The Extrude technique adds depth to any object while the powerful Revolve command makes creating intricate objects like
chair legs, table legs and columns very easy.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 375


Chapter 54 Converting 2D Objects to 3D

Extruding a 2D Object Revolving a 2D Object


Once you draw an object in 2D you can add the third Another way to add a third dimension is with the Revolve
dimension at any time. The Extrude tool makes this a command. This command is useful when creating table legs,
straight-forward process. lamps, vases and so on. Radians and degrees are two ways of
measuring circular distances. One radian, sometimes called a
To extrude a 2D object pi radian, equals 180 degrees. Two pie radians equal 360
1 On the View menu, click Reset View or right-click degrees. To convert degrees to radians, multiply degrees by
anywhere on the design window, then click Reset View Pi, divided by 180. To convert radians into degrees, multiply
on the pop-up menu that is displayed. radians by 180, divided by Pi.

2 Click once on the object to be extruded. Selection To revolve a 2D object


handles appear.
1 Click the object to be revolved.
2 On the Edit menu, click Revolve. The Revolve dialog
box is displayed.

12

3 On the Standard toolbar, click the Extrude Tool.


4 Click an object handle; hold down the mouse button
and move the pointer in the direction that you want the
object to extrude. Dimensions appear in the position 3 Type parameters in the dialog box. Measurements are
readout bar as you extrude. from -360 to 360 degrees or -6.28 to 6.28 radians. The
Radius is measured in the scale you have defined.

Drag

5 Release the mouse button to end extrusion mode.

376 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Revolving a 2D Object

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 377


Chapter 54 Converting 2D Objects to 3D

378 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Chapter 55

Editing 3D Objects
3D Custom Workshop makes it extremely easy to change objects once they are drawn. In this chapter, you will find
instructions on techniques that make rotating, resizing and so on, very simple.
You will also learn how to use layers, lock and unlock; in addition, you’ll learn to create groups that will make complex
objects much more manageable. The flip and mirror techniques are also described and are useful when you need perfectly
symmetrical objects.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 379


Chapter 55 Editing 3D Objects

Applying Skew Rotating an Object


To skew an object means to slant it along a selected axis. With the rotate tool you can easily spin an object around any
This is a useful tool for adding beveled edges to counters, point on any drawing grid. This is useful when you want to
diagonal legs to tables and so on. face an object in a different direction from which it was
drawn.
To skew an object
1 Click the object you want to skew. Selection handles To rotate an object
appear around the object. 1 Click the object to be rotated. Selection handles appear
around the object.

12
12

2 On the Design menu, click a drawing grid.


3 On the Standard toolbar, click the Skew Tool. 2 On the Design menu, click a drawing grid.
3 On the Standard toolbar, click the Rotate Tool.
4 Click a cornerpoint of the object; hold down the
mouse button and move the pointer in the direction that 4 Click a cornerpoint of the object; hold down the
you want the object to be slanted. Dimensions appear in mouse button and move the pointer in the direction that
the position readout bar, as you draw. you want to rotate.

Drag

Drag

5 Release the mouse to stop skewing the object. 5 Release the mouse to stop rotating the object.
380 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide
Using Elevation Slider

Using Elevation Slider 2 On the Options menu, click Object Size or double-click
the object you want to resize. Selection handles appear
With the Elevation Slider you can easily move selected items
around the object. The Object Size dialog box is
vertically, regardless of what grid is active. For more
displayed.
information, see “Elevation Slider”, which begins on page
355.

To toggle the Elevation Slider on and off


■ On the Standard Toolbar, click the Show/Hide
Elevation Slider button.

To use the elevation slider


1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection
Tool.
3 Select the absolute size or percent to be scaled and type
2 Click the object you want to elevate. the necessary values.
3 Click the Elevation Slider at the left side of your 4 Click from which part of the object you want to resize.
window and move the elevation control up or
5 Click OK. The object is resized to the exact
down, until the object is in the correct position.
measurements or percentage you specified.
4 Release the mouse. The elevation of the object is
changed. Note: Proportionately resizing an object takes two steps; for
example, resize Width and Height first, then switch to Side
To set the working elevation Grid and resize Depth.

1 Right-click the Elevation Slider at Grouping Objects


the left side of your window and
click Set Elevation from the pop-up By defining a Group, you create a set of selected objects that
menu that is displayed. are then treated as one item. You can have unlimited groups
in a drawing.

To group objects
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Hold down SHIFT and click each object that you want to
2 Type the necessary elevation in inches or feet and inches, be included in the group.
separated with a hyphen. Click OK.
3 (optional) Right-click, while nothing is selected, and 3 On the Control toolbar, click the Group tool or on
the Edit menu, click Group or right-click and click
click Set Elevation from the pop-up menu that is
displayed. Group on the pop-up menu that is displayed.

To ungroup objects
Specifying Object Size
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
With the object size option you can specify exact
measurements for each object, either as a percentage of the 2 Click the group you want to ungroup.
original size or by specifying dimensions in inches. This is
useful if you know how large or small an object must be to fit 3 On the Control toolbar, click the Ungroup tool or on
the Edit menu, click Ungroup.
a specific space in your home.

To change an object’s size Locking Objects in Place


1 Select an object. Many times you will want to lock an object in place after it is
positioned. This avoids accidentally moving the object.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 381


Chapter 55 Editing 3D Objects

To lock an object viewing and working on individual layers easy and


1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. uncluttered.

2 Click to select the object you want to lock. To make complex objects more manageable, break them into
logical layers. If you are drawing a chair, for example, you
3 (optional) Hold down SHIFT and click each object that
may want a separate layer for the back, the legs, the cushion
you want to lock.
and so on.
4 On the Control toolbar, click the Lock tool or on the
Edit menu, click Lock or right-click and click Lock To define a new layer
on the pop-up menu that is displayed.
1 On the Design menu, click Layer Properties. The Layer
Properties dialog box is displayed.
To unlock objects
2 Click New. The New Layer Name dialog box is
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
displayed.
2 Click the objects you want to unlock.

3 On the Control toolbar, click the Unlock tool or on


the Edit menu, click Unlock.

Hiding Detection
3 Type the new layer’s name in the New Layer Name
When you are working in layers, it will be helpful to make dialog box.
some objects unable to be selected, which makes it easier to
select objects underneath. The Hide Detection feature makes 4 Click OK.
this a simple process.

To the hide detection of an object


1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool.
2 Click to select the object you want to lock.
3 (optional) Hold down SHIFT and click each object that
you want to lock.

4 On the Control toolbar, click the Hide Detection


tool or on the Edit menu, click Lock or press 5 Repeat Steps 2-4 for each Layer you need. When you are
CTRL+J. finished creating layers, click OK.

To detect objects To move a part of the drawing to a new layer


1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Selection Tool. ■ Right-click the part of the drawing you want to move to
2 Click the object you want to detect. another layer, then click Move to Layer on the pop-up
menu that is displayed, then click which Layer. The
3 On the Control toolbar, click the Detect tool or on selection is moved to the new layer.
the Edit menu, click Detect All or press CTRL+K.

Working in Layers
Using the Layer option, you can store different information
on different layers of your drawing. The Active Layer’s name
is always displayed on the Design toolbar.
Many of the functions are available through the Layer
Properties dialog box. From the Layer Properties menu, you
can choose to show or hide certain layers, which makes
382 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide
Working in Layers

To rename a layer
1 On the Design menu, click Layer Properties. The Layer
To hide a layer Properties dialog box is displayed.
■ On the Design menu, click Visible Layers, then click the
layer you want to hide. If you select Hide all, only the
active layer will remain visible.

2 Click to select the layer you want to rename, then click


Rename. The Rename dialog box is displayed.

Note: The active layer cannot be hidden.

To hide all layers


■ On the Design menu, click Visible Layers, then click 3 Type the layer’s new name in the Rename Layer dialog
Hide All Layers. box.
4 Click OK.
5 Repeat Steps 2-4 for each Layer you want to rename.
When you are finished, click OK.

To remove a layer
1 On the Design menu, click Layer Properties. The Layer
Properties dialog box is displayed.
2 Click to select the layer you want to delete.
3 Click Remove. A warning will be displayed letting you
Note: The active layer cannot be hidden. know that all objects on that layer will also be deleted.
Click OK to continue.
To show all layers 4 Click OK. All objects on that layer are deleted.
■ On the Design menu, click Visible Layers, then click
Show All Layers.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 383


Chapter 55 Editing 3D Objects

Setting a Nudge Distance


With Nudge, you can move objects in a specific direction and
in definable increments. The up, down, left and right
selections are also available by using the arrow keys on your
keyboard. Through the distance dialog box, distances as
small as one inch may be defined.

To change the nudge distance


1 On the Edit menu, click Nudge, Distance. The Nudge
Distance dialog box is displayed.

To flip an object vertically


1 Click the object you want to flip.
2 Type a new distance, then click OK. 2 On the Design menu, click a drawing grid.
3 On the Control toolbar, click the Flip Vertical Tool
To move an object by nudging
or on the Edit menu, click Flip, Vertical.
1 Click the object you want to move.
2 On the Design menu, click a drawing grid.
3 On the Edit menu, click Nudge, then click the direction
(up, down, left, or right) or use the arrow keys on your
keyboard.

Using Flip
The Flip function takes the original object and reverses it
either horizontally or vertically. Depending on which grid is
active, flipping an object varies.

To flip an object horizontally


1 Click the object you want to flip.
2 On the Design menu, click a drawing grid.
3 On the Control toolbar, click the Flip Horizontal
Tool or on the Edit menu, click Flip, Horizontal.

384 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Using Mirror

Using Mirror
Mirror works much like the Flip function. The difference is
that mirror leaves the original and makes a duplicate. Mirror
creates two identical objects facing one another. Depending
on which grid is active, mirroring an object varies.

To mirror an object horizontally


1 Click the object you want to mirror.
2 On the Design menu, click a drawing grid.
3 On the Control toolbar, click the Mirror Horizontal
Tool or on the Edit menu, click Mirror, Horizontal.
To mirror an object vertically
1 Click the object you want to mirror.
2 On the Design menu, click a drawing grid.
3 On the Control toolbar, click the Mirror Vertical
Tool or on the Edit menu, click Mirror, Vertical.

4 Move the object into position.

4 Move the object into position.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 385


Chapter 55 Editing 3D Objects

Duplicating Objects To create a series of duplicate objects


Similar to cutting and pasting, the duplicate feature creates an 1 Click the object you want to duplicate.
exact copy of the object you select. In the duplicate
properties dialog box, you can specify the number and
specific offset of a series of duplicates.

To create a duplicate
1 Click the object you want to duplicate.
2 On the Design menu, click a drawing grid.

3 On the Control toolbar, click the Duplicate Tool or


on the Edit menu, click Duplicate Object or press
CTRL+D.

2 On the Design menu, click a drawing grid.


3 On the Control toolbar, click the Duplicate
Properties Tool or on the Edit menu, click
Duplicate, Duplicate Properties. The Duplicate
Properties dialog box is displayed.

4 Type the horizontal and vertical offsets and the number


of duplicates.
Note: These variables control the distance apart the
duplicates are placed.
5 Click OK. The object is duplicated at the offset(s) you
defined.

386 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Duplicating Objects

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 387


Chapter 55 Editing 3D Objects

388 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Chapter 56

Controlling Views
You can control the way you see your design in 3D Custom Workshop. These views can make editing much easier or can
simply make it clearer to view specific areas of your drawing.
In this chapter you will learn to use ClearView, perspective, orthographic, textured and wire-frame views. You will also
learn how to zoom in on a specific area and how to set the camera angle.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 389


Chapter 56 Controlling Views

Using Perspective or Orthographic Views Using Different Views


Perspective view is the default view in 3D Custom Textured view gives a more realistic appearance and is the
Workshop. Perspective views give more information about default view in 3D Custom Workshop. In wire frame view
depth and are often easier to view because they are similar to each individual line or arc is visible and able to be changed;
a “real world” view. Orthographic viewpoints make it much detailed editing of the object may be easier in wire frame
easier to compare, for example, two parts of the object, as view. While in ClearView, you can view your design in an
there is no question of how the viewpoint may affect the opaque state. 3D Custom Workshop’s technology includes
perception of distance. anti-aliased, photo-realism. You can even create glass-topped
tables by setting the Translucency of an object.
To view in perspective
■ Click the Viewpoint Tool, then click Perspective or To view wire frame mode
on the View menu, click View in Perspective. ■ Click the Rendering Style button or on the
View menu, click 3D Rendering Style, Wire
Note: Parts of the drawing that are nearest to you will Frame.
appear larger than those further away.

To view shaded mode


To view in orthographic
■ Click the Rendering Style button or on the
■ Click the Viewpoint Tool, then click Orthographic View menu, click 3D Rendering Style, Shaded
or on the View menu, click View in Orthographic. View.

390 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Using Different Views

To view using ClearView To set translucency


1 Click the object or part of an object that you want to alter.
■ Click the ClearView button or on the View menu,
click Render ClearView. Selection handles appear around the object.

2 Click the Translucency Icon. The Object


To render using 3D final quality Translucency Menu is displayed.
■ Click the Render Final Quality button or on the
View menu, click Render 3D Final Quality.

To set 3D render quality


1 On the View menu, click 3D Final Quality, Low. This
results in a fast rendering speed, but lower quality output. 3 Move the slider to the percent of translucency. Click OK.

2 On the View menu, click 3D Final Quality, High. This


results in a moderate rendering speed and average quality
output.
3 On the View menu, click 3D Final Quality, Ultra High.
This results in a slower rendering speed and a high
quality output.
4 On the View menu, click 3D Final Quality, Excellent.
This results in a very slow rendering speed, but a very
high quality, sharp output.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 391


Chapter 56 Controlling Views

Using Zoom
At some point while illustrating your object, you may want a
close-up view of a specific area. By using the zoom and pan
tools in concert with the set zoom feature, you will be able to
view any area of your drawing with pinpoint accuracy. With 2 Type a zoom percentage into the dialog box.
the pan tool, you can move the window to view a different 3 Click OK.
area of the drawing without changing the magnification.
To pan across the drawing
To zoom in or out of your drawing
1 Click the Pan Tool.
1 On the Standard Toolbar, click the Zoom Tool. 2 Click on the design window.
2 Click on the design window. 3 Hold the mouse button down.
3 Hold the mouse button down. 4 Drag the object to the center of the window.
4 Move the pointer up to zoom in and move the pointer
down to zoom out.

5 Release the mouse button.

5 Release the mouse button. To adjust the lighting intensity


1 On the View menu, click 3D Lighting. The 3D Lighting
To set a specific zoom percentage dialog box is displayed.
1 On the View menu, click Set Zoom. The Set Zoom dialog
box is displayed.

392 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Setting the Camera Angle

2 Increase or decrease the overall lighting by clicking and Using Fly-Around


dragging the slider.
In addition to the six preset viewing angles, you can view
3 Click OK. your design from any other angle using the Fly-Around
Tool. The Fly-Around Tool lets you rotate around a point of
Setting the Camera Angle origin that can be defined with a couple clicks. You can
With the 3D Camera Angle options you can view your design easily rotate around the center of any object, again with just
from six preset vantage points. They are particularly useful a click or
when you need to quickly view a specific area of your design two!
or when you want to line up multiple objects.
To use the Fly-Around tool
To view from 3D top view
1 On the Viewpoint Toolbar click the Fly-Around
■ On the View menu, click 3D Camera Angle, Top. button.
2 Hold the mouse button down and move the Fly-Around
To view from 3D bottom view
pointer around inside the window and watch the view
■ On the View menu, click 3D Camera Angle, Bottom. move dynamically.

To view from 3D front view To set the rotation origin


■ On the View menu, click 3D Camera Angle, Front. 1 On the Viewpoint Toolbar click the Set Rotation
Origin Tool.
To view from 3D back view
2 On the design window, click to define the point you want
■ On the View menu, click 3D Camera Angle, Back. to revolve around.

To view from 3D left view To hide the point of rotation origin


■ On the View menu, click 3D Camera Angle, Left. 1 On the Options menu, click to uncheck Rotation Origin
Visible.
To view from 3D right view
2 (optional) Right-click on the design window, then click
■ On the View menu, click 3D Camera Angle, Right. to uncheck Rotation Origin Visible.

To return to the default view To center the rotation on an object


■ On the View menu, click Reset View. 1 Click the Center Origin on Object Tool.
2 Click an object on the design window. The rotation
origin is centered on the object and that object is centered
in the design window.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 393


Chapter 56 Controlling Views

394 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Chapter 57

Applying Color and


Material
Punch! 3D Custom Workshop lets you customize any object by adding color and material. Using drag-and-drop, you can
easily alter anything you design to fit into your color scheme.
Using color and material, you can make decorative changes to objects you have placed in your home as quickly as you
think of them. This makes it easy to experiment with color and material variations without spending a cent!

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 395


Chapter 57 Applying Color and Material

Setting the Object Color 4 Scroll to view the available wood materials.
By default, all objects drawn with 3D Custom Workshop are 5 Click the wood you want to apply; hold down the mouse
painted blue. You can change this default color to any color button and drag the wood material onto the object. The
you want. wood you selected is applied.
Tip: To apply the same texture to the entire object, hold the
To set the default object color Control key down while applying the material.
1 On the Design menu, click Default Object Color. The
Color dialog box is displayed. To apply a custom material
1 On the Design toolbar, click the Custom Material
button. Materials appear in the Preview Bar.
2 (optional) At the top of the
Preview Bar, click the down
arrow next to “Custom” to
display the available material
libraries.
3 Click to select the library you
want.The materials contained in that library are displayed
on the Preview Bar.
4 Click the material you want to apply; hold down the
mouse button and drag the material onto the object. The
material you selected is applied.
2 Click an area on the color spectrum window to select a
color, then adjust the values, if necessary.
Applying Color
3 (optional) Adjust the current Red, Green and Blue values
to create a custom color. Whether you are drawing a fireplace, kitchen cabinets, or a
loveseat, it’s easy to apply the appropriate color. With 3D
4 Click OK. The color you defined will be used for all Custom Workshop you can define your own custom color
subsequently-drawn objects. with the Color dialog box. You can start with one of the basic
colors available, then change its red, blue, or green values, or
Applying Materials click on a color in the color spectrum window to “mix” your
Just like applying colors, it’s easy to apply the appropriate own color. Using these techniques you can find the exact
material. 3D Custom Workshop includes a wide variety of color you want, without restricting yourself to a set palette.
materials, plus you have the ability to create a custom color
palette to suit your needs. With 3D Custom Workshop you To apply color
still have access to all custom materials you have created. 1 Click the Rendering Style button or on the
For more information on creating custom materials, see View menu, click 3D Rendering Style, Shaded View.
“Material Workshop”, which begins on page 183. 2 On the Design toolbar, click the Color button.
Colors appear in the Preview Bar.
To apply material
3 (optional) At the top of the Preview Bar, click the down
1 Click the Rendering Style button or on the arrow next to “Colors” to display the Colors style menu,
View menu, click 3D Rendering Style, Shaded View.
then click to check Fall or whichever category you want.
2 On the Design toolbar, click the Material button. That color palette is displayed on the Preview Bar.
Materials appear in the drag-and-drop Preview Bar.
4 Scroll to view the available colors.
3 (optional) At the top of the Preview Bar, click the down
5 Click the color you want to apply; hold down the mouse
arrow next to “Materials” to display the Materials style
button and drag the color onto the object. The color you
menu, then click to check Wood. Wood options are
selected is applied.
displayed on the Preview Bar.

396 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Controlling Application of Color or Material

To apply a series of the same color Controlling Application of Color or Material


1 Click the Rendering Style button or on the With 3D Custom Workshop you can control how colors and
View menu, click 3D Rendering Style, Shaded View. materials are applied to your design. By default you will be
2 On the Design toolbar, click the Color button. using the Normal Apply function where the color or material
Colors appear in the Preview Bar. is applied only to the place where you click. The Grouped
3 (optional) At the top of the Preview Apply method applies the color or material to all of the
Bar, click the down arrow next to object. While Matching Apply will replace all like colors or
“Colors” to display the Colors style materials with the new one.
menu, then click to check Spring or
whichever category you want. That To use Normal Apply
color palette is displayed on the 1 Click the Rendering Style button or on the
Preview Bar. View menu, click 3D Rendering Style, Shaded View.
4 Right-click the color you want to apply. 2 On the Design toolbar, click the Color or Material button.
Options appear in the Preview Bar.
5 Right-click where you want the chosen color to appear.
6 Click the left mouse button to end. The color you 3 Click the Normal Apply button.
selected is applied.

To define a custom color


1 Click the Rendering Style button or on the
View menu, click 3D Rendering Style, Shaded View.
2 On the Design toolbar, click the Color button.
Colors appear in the Preview Bar.
3 (optional) At the top of the Preview Bar, click the down
arrow next to “Colors” to display the Colors style menu,
then click to check Summer or whichever category you
want. That color palette is displayed on the Preview Bar.
4 Double-click one of the colors on the Preview Bar. The
Color dialog box is displayed.
4 Click the color or material you want to apply; hold
5 (optional) Adjust the current Red, Green and Blue values down the mouse button and drag the color or material
to create a custom color. onto the object. The color or material you selected is
6 (optional) Click an area on the color spectrum window to applied only to the place where you click.
select a color, then adjust the RGB values, if necessary.
7 Click OK. The color you defined is displayed on the
Preview Bar.

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 397


Chapter 57 Applying Color and Material

To use Grouped Apply To use Matching Apply


1 Click the Rendering Style button or on the 1 Click the Rendering Style button or on the
View menu, click 3D Rendering Style, Shaded View. View menu, click 3D Rendering Style, Shaded View.
2 On the Design toolbar, click the Color or Material button. 2 On the Design toolbar, click the Color or Material button.
Options appear in the Preview Bar. Options appear in the Preview Bar.
3 Click the Grouped Apply button. 3 Click the Matching Apply button.

4 Click the color or material you want to apply; hold 4 Click the color or material you want to apply; hold
down the mouse button and drag the color or material down the mouse button and drag the color or material
onto the object. The color or material you selected is onto the object. The color or material you selected is
applied to applied to all places matching the material you are
the entire object. replacing.

Note: To control how shadows are rendered across an


object with many facets, use Planar Mapping on the Options
Menu. Surface Mapping will apply the shadow to each facet
individually.

398 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Index

Numerics lighting 87
material (Fence Designer) 270
2D objects, converting (3D Custom Workshop) 375 material (Material Workshop) 187
2D view multigon topography objects (Topo Designer) 53
in 3D Custom Workshop 354 objects to library (3D Custom Workshop) 348
in Topo Designer 56 points (Site Planner) 194
3D adding shadows 161 railings 81
3D Custom Workshop floor grid 352 rectangle topography objects (Topo Designer) 51
3D Custom Workshop front grid 352 roof points (Roofing Wizard) 114
3D Custom Workshop side grid 352 roofing 102
3D cut-away slider 165 shadows 161
3D fly around view 159 straight-edge topography objects (Topo Designer) 51
3D lighting intensity 161 topography objects (Topo Designer) 50
in 3D Custom Workshop 392 age, customizing plant 176
3D selection tool 166 air conditioner 97
3D view, saving 164 air ducts
3D viewing speed 159 rotating 96
3D walk through 159 air ducts, placing 96
3-point freehand roof tool 104 align text 40
4-point freehand roof tool 104 alter roof size 105
alter roof slope 105
alter topography (Topo Designer) 53
A angle, north (Global Sun Positioning) 321
angled text 40
AC 97
annotation bar 9
ac units, rotating 97
annotations 39
accessories 77
appliance elevation (Cabinet Wizard) 213
applying in Punch! (Material Workshop) 189
apply color 179
accessories, adding 170
apply material 180
accessories, adding (Pool Designer) 237
in Material Workshop 189
accessory organizer 173
applying
in Material Workshop 186
accessories (Material Workshop) 189
add point 147
custom accessories (Material Workshop) 189
adding
custom materials (Material Workshop) 189
air conditioners 97
arc
arc topography objects (Topo Designer) 52
2D circular (3D Custom Workshop) 371
circle/oval topography objects (Topo Designer) 51
2D circular closed (3D Custom Workshop) 370
circular arc topography objects (Topo Designer) 52
2D closed (3D Custom Workshop) 370
color (Fence Designer) 270
2D open (3D Custom Workshop) 371
color (Material Workshop) 187
circular (3D Custom Workshop) 362
color ramp(Fence Designer) 270
arc deck (Deck Designer) 125
curved topography objects (Topo Designer) 51
arc, drawing 143
custom color (Fence Designer) 270
arc, open (3D Custom Workshop) 362
custom material (Fence Designer) 270
auto activate 45
custom material (Material Workshop) 187
auto flooring 70
fences (Fence Designer) 268
Auto Reset Tools (Door Designer) 198
gates (Fence Designer) 268
Auto Reset Tools (Window Designer) 204
heat pumps 97
AutoClick Placement 171
heating 97

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 399


Index

automatic dimensioning, turning off 39, 70 ceiling and floor outlets, placing 86
automatic pool cleaner, adding (Pool Designer) 240 ceiling fan 88
AVI, exporting (Animator) 326, 331 ceiling height 73
AVI, opening (Animator) 326 ceiling/floor options 70
Azimuth (Site Planner) 194 center origin on object (3D Custom Workshop) 393
center text 40
centerpoint, snap to segment 31
B chain link fence 137
in Fence Designer 268
back view (3D Custom Workshop) 393 chamfer 36
background animation, suppress 164 change
background color 155 backsplash height (Cabinet Wizard) 215
in 3D Custom Workshop 347 backsplash thickness (Cabinet Wizard) 216
backsplash height, change (Cabinet Wizard) 215 base cabinet depth (Cabinet Wizard) 214
backsplash thickness, change (Cabinet Wizard) 216 base cabinet height (Cabinet Wizard) 214
baluster (deck), changing spacing 119 base cabinet width (Cabinet Wizard) 214
baluster spacing 119 deck height 118
in Deck Designer 130 deck height (Deck Designer) 129
base cabinet dimensions, change (Cabinet Wizard) 214 door height (Cabinet Wizard) 216
base trim 178, 179 door type 75
baseboard heaters 98 exterior wall length 68
basement, creating 64 font of annotations 39
basic terminology 14 interior wall length 72
basketball goal, adding (Pool Designer) 242 rail height 216
bathroom (Room Wizard) 58 roof pitch 105
bathtubs, placing 93 roof slope 105
bay window 74 stile width (Cabinet Wizard) 216
beam size, specifying (Framing Editor) 279 style of line 145
beam type thickness of line 145
customizing (Framing Editor) 279 toe kick size (Cabinet Wizard) 216
specifying (Framing Editor) 279 top cabinet depth (Cabinet Wizard) 215
beams top cabinet elevation (Cabinet Wizard) 214
dimensioning 64 top cabinet height (Cabinet Wizard) 215
length 64 top cabinet thickness (Cabinet Wizard) 215
stiffener 63 width, pathway 135
Bearing (Site Planner) 194 chimney tab (Fireplace Wizard) 222
bedroom (Room Wizard) 58 chlorinator, adding (Pool Designer) 241
blinds 77, 170 choosing a codec (Animator) 338
bottom view (3D Custom Workshop) 393 circles, drawing 28, 142
break a wall 74 circular arc (3D Custom Workshop) 362
brightness (Material Workshop) 187 circular arc deck (Deck Designer) 126
brightness, scene (Global Sun Positioning) 321 circular arc, 2D (3D Custom Workshop) 371
bring to front 146 circular arc, drawing 144
in Material Workshop 188 circular closed arc (3D Custom Workshop) 361
bring to front (PhotoView Editor) 261 circular closed arc, 2D (3D Custom Workshop) 370
building pad (Topo Designer) 53 circular deck (Deck Designer) 125
built-in oven (Cabinet Wizard) 212 city (Global Sun Positioning) 318
built-in refrigerator (Cabinet Wizard) 212 clear 152
ClearView 159
in 3D Custom Workshop 390
C clipboard 152
cabinet trim (Cabinet Wizard) 214 clock, synchronize (Global Sun Positioning) 320
cabinet, standard measurements (Cabinet Wizard) 209 closed arc (3D Custom Workshop) 360
cable jack 89 closed arc, 2D (3D Custom Workshop) 370
calculate pool volume (Pool Designer) 246 closet (Room Wizard) 58
calculating construction costs 287 closing files 20
calculating square footage 39 closing files (3D Custom Workshop) 349
calendar (Global Sun Positioning) 320 closing files (Animator) 327
calendar, synchronize (Global Sun Positioning) 320 codec, choosing (Animator) 338
camera codec, default (Animator) 339
in Material Workshop 190 color (3D Custom Workshop) 395
in PhotoView 255 color ramp 179
in Plant Editor 225 color ramp (Fence Designer) 270
camera angle 159 color toolbar (3D Custom Workshop) 344
in 3D Custom Workshop 393 color, adding (Fence Designer) 270
cased opening 274 color, applying 179

400 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


color, applying (3D Custom Workshop) 396
color, changing default (3D Custom Workshop) 396 D
color, plan layer 44 date (Global Sun Positioning) 318
color, printing plan in 22 date, synchronize (Global Sun Positioning) 320
colors, custom 180 Daylight Savings Time (Global Sun Positioning) 318
colors, foreground and background (3D Custom Workshop) 347 deactivate undo 152
column deck cut-out 118
material (Framing Editor) 280 deck height, change 118
material, customizing (Framing Editor) 280 deck height, change (Deck Designer) 129
size, specifying (Framing Editor) 280 deck plan tab 117
compass 11 deck properties (Framing Editor) 282
compass (Global Sun Positioning) 321 Deck Wizard 122
connector switches 86 decks
construction costs, calculating (Home Estimator) 287 adding 118
construction materials (RealModel) 294 handrails 118
content folder 257 handrails (Deck Designer) 129
contents, package 4 default codec (Animator) 339
context-sensitive help 5 default object color (3D Custom Workshop) 396
control lighting (Global Sun Positioning) 321 defining slope (Topo Designer) 53
control toolbar (3D Custom Workshop) 345 delete point 147
controlled walk-through view 158 deleting a point (Site Planner) 195
convert, degrees to radians (3D Custom Workshop) 376 deleting roof points (Roofing Wizard) 114
coping (Pool Designer) 234 depth, change base cabinet (Cabinet Wizard) 214
copy 152 depth, change top cabinet (Cabinet Wizard) 215
copying from one floor 78 depth, pool (Pool Designer) 236
copying objects between floors 152, 264 design toolbar (3D Custom Workshop) 344
copying staircases 81 designer palette 162
counter top (Cabinet Wizard) 210 designer palettes 162
country (Global Sun Positioning) 318 detail plan tab 141
crown molding 178 details
crown trim, remove 179 creating (Section Detailer) 310
cues, graphic 14 link properties (Section Detailer) 310
curtains 77, 170 opening (Section Detailer) 310
curve (3D Custom Workshop) 364 printing (Section Detailer) 316
curve a pathway 135 detect all (3D Custom Workshop) 382
curve edging 137 diagonal, walls 72
curve tension 29 diameter dimension 39
in 3D Custom Workshop 372 different color in each room 74
curve, 2D (3D Custom Workshop) 372 digital picture, importing
curved in Material Workshop 190
deck railing 119 in PhotoView 255
deck staircase 79 in Plant Editor 225
edging 136 dimensions
railing 81 adding between walls 37
railing (Deck Designer) 127 change endpoint 39
staircase 120 changing location 63, 70
staircase (Deck Designer) 127 from wall to center 63, 70
wall 73 hiding 39, 62, 70
curves, drawing 29, 145 dimming lights 88
custom accessories, applying in Punch! (Material Workshop) 189 dining room (Room Wizard) 58
custom cabinet features (Cabinet Wizard) 214 display settings 5
custom color 180 diving board, adding (Pool Designer) 242
custom color list (Material Workshop) 187 dollhouse view 165
custom color palette 179 door 274
custom color, adding (Fence Designer) 270 door categories
custom material, applying in Punch! (Material Workshop) 189 creating (Door Designer) 200
customizing colors (Home Estimator) 286 deleting (Door Designer) 200
customizing deck railing 120 renaming (Door Designer) 200
customizing deck staircases 120 Door Designer 197
customizing railing 81 door dimensions, hiding 39, 62, 70
customizing staircases 80 door header size (Framing Editor) 281
in Deck Designer 131 door height, change (Cabinet Wizard) 216
cut 152 door settings 75
cut-away slider 165 doors 74
creating (Door Designer) 200
deleting (Door Designer) 200

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 401


Index

hiding in 3D 163 Elevation Editor 273


importing (Door Designer) 200 elevation slider 9, 156
moving (Door Designer) 200 in 3D Custom Workshop 355
resizing 75 elevation, adjusting 159
viewing in 3D 163 ellipses 28
dormer 105 ellipses, see drawing circles and ovals 142
double doors 75 email plans 21
double oven (Cabinet Wizard) 212 establish true north (Global Sun Positioning) 321
download updates (Punch! Updater) 24 estimation options (Framing Editor) 283
drag-and-drop, objects 170 Estimator 285
drain, adding (Pool Designer) 241 excavate topography 140
drains, floor 92 existing files, opening 20
drapes 77, 170 exiting 20
drawing export
arcs 143 a pricelist (Home Estimator) 288
circles 28, 142 cabinet to 3D Custom Workshop (Cabinet Wizard) 217
circular arcs 144 fireplace to 3D Custom Workshop (Fireplace Wizard) 223
curves 29, 145 export to DXF/DWG (DXF/DWG Import) 263
lines 142 exterior walls 68
multigons 28, 144 extruding, 2D objects (3D Custom Workshop) 376
ovals 28, 142 eyeglasses 160
polygons 28, 143
rectangles 28, 142
squares 28, 142 F
drawing (3D Custom Workshop) 357
drawing animation paths (Animator) 330 face dimensions (Fireplace Wizard) 221
drawing from center (3D Custom Workshop) 366 family room (Room Wizard) 58
drawing from corner fan, ceiling 88
in Section Detailer 315 features, moving between plans 45, 153
in Symbol Editor 307 Fence Designer 267
drawing from corner (3D Custom Workshop) 365 fences
drawing in 2D (3D Custom Workshop) 367 adding (Fence Designer) 268
drawing precision (Door Designer) 199 chain link (Fence Designer) 268
drawing scale, setting 15 drawing 137
driveway 135 ornamental iron (Fence Designer) 268
ducts, placing 96 picket (Fence Designer) 269
duplicate properties (3D Custom Workshop) 386 privacy (Fence Designer) 269
duplicating rail (Fence Designer) 269
in Section Detailer 311 resizing (Fence Designer) 269
in Symbol Editor 304 file format (PhotoView) 256
duplicating (3D Custom Workshop) 386 files
DXF/DWG closing 20
export (DXF/DWG Import) 263 opening 20
import (DXF/DWG Import) 263 printing 22
saving 20
fill 136
E region 134
reshaping 134
edging 136 fillet 36
edit property line 134 fills 145
edit text 40 firebox dimensions (Fireplace Wizard) 221
editing a drawing 151 fireplace, placing in design (Fireplace Wizard) 223
editing a point (Site Planner) 195 flat roof 105
editing material perspective (Material Workshop) 189 flatten gables (Roofing Wizard) 112
editing material perspective (PhotoView Editor) 262 flip 37
editing objects 172 in 3D Custom Workshop 384
editing, 3D objects (3D Custom Workshop) 379 PhotoView image 258
electrical outlet 86 flip room (Room Wizard) 60
electrical plan tab 85 flip, entire plan 153
elevate built-in oven (Cabinet Wizard) 213 float above topography 156
elevating objects 155, 173 floating thermometer, adding (Pool Designer) 241
elevating, PhotoView image 257 flood lights, adding 88
elevation floor cutout
change top cabinet (Cabinet Wizard) 214 adding 82
increasing and decreasing (Roofing Wizard) 115 drawing 82
increasing and decreasing (Topo Designer) 55 floor cutout properties (Framing Editor) 278

402 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


floor drains 92
grouped apply (3D Custom Workshop) 397
floor grid (3D Custom Workshop) 352
grouping objects (3D Custom Workshop) 381
floor options 70
growing, plants 177
floor plan tab 67
guide, about this 14
flooring
automatic 63, 70
drawing 81
joists (Framing Editor) 279 H
reshaping 82 hallway (Room Wizard) 58
FloorPlan Trace 251 handrails (Deck Designer) 130
floors, adding 78 handrails (deck) 119
flowers 175 hardiness zone maps 176
flush right text 40 hearth & mantle tab (Fireplace Wizard) 221
fly around 159 heat pump 97
center of reference 159 heat/vent lights, dimming 88
in 3D Custom Workshop 393 heating units, adding 97
fly around speed 159 height, change backsplash (Cabinet Wizard) 215
follow topography 156 height, change base cabinet (Cabinet Wizard) 214
font 40 height, change door (Cabinet Wizard) 216
foreground and background colors (3D Custom Workshop) 347 height, change rail 216
forum 6 height, change top cabinet (Cabinet Wizard) 215
foundation height, wall 73
defining perimeter 62 help, online 5
piers 64 hide
reshaping 63 doors in 3D 163
width 62 materials in 3D 164
foundation piers 64 objects in 3D 163
foundation slope, changing 64 plumbing in 3D 164
four-point freehand roof tool 104 roofs in 3D 164
fps (Animator) 338 topography in 3D 164
frames per second (Animator) 338 hide detection (3D Custom Workshop) 382
framing beam (Framing Editor) 278 hide layers (3D Custom Workshop) 382
free rotate 154 hide path name (Animator) 336
French doors 75 hide plan layers 44
front grid (3D Custom Workshop) 352 hide point elevations (Animator) 336
front view (3D Custom Workshop) 393 hide segment time (Animator) 336
full cabinet (Cabinet Wizard) 210 hide tools (Home Estimator) 286
full cabinet, standard measurements (Cabinet Wizard) 210 hide topography lines 164
furniture 170 hidie FloorPlan Trace image 253
hiding KeyPoints (Animator) 336
hiding, plan layers 338
G hip roof 102
homeplans, included 20
gable roof 102
horizontally, flip entire plan 153
gambrel roof 107
hose bib, placing 92
garage (Room Wizard) 58 hot water heater 94
gas bib 92 how to estimate materials needed 287
gates 137, 139 hvac tab 95
adding (Fence Designer) 268
ornamental iron (Fence Designer) 268
picket (Fence Designer) 269
privacy (Fence Designer) 269 I
rail (Fence Designer) 269 identify color material in 3D 167
resizing (Fence Designer) 269 identifying which plant has been placed 176
general tab (Fireplace Wizard) 221 import 3DS file (3D Custom Workshop) 349
glow 88 import a DXF/DWG file (DXF/DWG Import) 263
grid 16 importing 21
grid settings (3D Custom Workshop) 353 importing (FloorPlan Trace) 252
grid spacing 16 importing animation paths (Animator) 326
in 3D Custom Workshop 353 importing DXF 141
grid style 16 importing image (Fence Designer) 271
grid toolbar (3D Custom Workshop) 344 importing image (PhotoView) 256
grid, constrain toggle (3D Custom Workshop) 353 importing objects 170
grid, displaying 17 inactive floor color,topography line color 155
grill settings, window 77 insert PhotoView image 256
ground fill region 134 inserting a point (Site Planner) 195
install manager options (Punch! Updater) 25

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 403


Index

install updates (Punch! Updater) 24 renaming (3D Custom Workshop) 383


installation 4 show all (3D Custom Workshop) 383
installing, troubleshooting 5 working in layers (3D Custom Workshop) 382
insulation, specifying in Framing Editor 278 working with (3D Custom Workshop) 382
intensity, lighting 161 Layout Manager 297
in 3D Custom Workshop 392 leader dimension 39
interior walls 69 leaf skimmer, adding (Pool Designer) 241
Internet settings (Punch! Updater) 25 left view (3D Custom Workshop) 393
interrupt rendering 160 length dimension 38
intersection, snap to 34 lengthen interior walls 72
inverse fillet 36 library paneling 178
irregular walls 72 library paneling, remove 179
light switch 86
lighting
J adding interior 87
adding outdoor 161
jacks, phone and cable 89 adjusting intensity (outdoor) 161
join sensitivity (Door Designer) 199 dimming 88
joists lighting controls (Global Sun Positioning) 321
angle, specifying (Framing Editor) 280 lighting settings (Global Sun Positioning) 321
material, customizing (Framing Editor) 280 lighting, adjusting intensity (3D Custom Workshop) 392
material, specifying (Framing Editor) 279 line dimensions (Site Planner) 195
size, specifying (Framing Editor) 280 line style 145
spacing, specifying (Framing Editor) 280 line, 2D (3D Custom Workshop) 372
liner broom, adding (Pool Designer) 241
liner vacuum, adding (Pool Designer) 241
K lines, drawing 142
Keep Tool Selected 28 link properties (Section Detailer) 310
KeyPoint view, customize (Animator) 335 linked 73
kitchen (Room Wizard) 58 LiveView 157
kitchen design, standard measurements (Cabinet Wizard) 209 adding colors to palette 162
kitchen island (Cabinet Wizard) 211 adding materials to palette 162
adding textures to palette 162
collapsing palette groups 162
expanding palette groups 162
L exporting palettes 162
landing, stairway 80 importing palettes 162
landscape plan tab 133 managing palettes 162
landscape, designing 133 opening a window 158
latitude grid (Global Sun Positioning) grid, longitude and latitude (Global palette 162
Sun Positioning) 320 palette groups 162
launch renaming palette groups 162
Door Designer 198 saving palettes 162
Elevation Editor 274 LiveView icons 10
Estimator 286 LiveView, printing 22
Fence Designer 268 living room (Room Wizard) 58
Floorplan Trace 252 load bearing walls,specifying (Framing Editor) 278
Framing Editor 278 locate plant 177
Layout Manager 298 locating PhotoView image 257
Material Workshop 184 location (Global Sun Positioning) 318
PhotoView Editor 260 location indicator (Global Sun Positioning) 320
Plant Editor 226 lock 10
RealModel 294 lock objects (3D Custom Workshop) 381
Roofing Wizard 112 lock roof panels (Roofing Wizard) 112, 115
Room Wizard 58 lock walls (Roofing Wizard) 112
Section Detailer 310 log home components 171
Symbol Editor 302 longitude grid (Global Sun Positioning) 320
Topo Designer 50 lot properties (Topo Designer) 55
Trim Designer 230 lot size, defining 14
Window Designer 204 lot size, setting (Topo Designer) 50
Launch PowerTool Store 11
Launch Punch! Software.com 11
laundry room (Room Wizard) 58 M
layer, viewing plan 44
layers Managing LiveView Palettes 162
hiding (3D Custom Workshop) 382, 383 mantle dimensions (Fireplace Wizard) 222

404 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


manual activate 45
map options (Global Sun Positioning) 320 O
mask (PhotoView Editor) 258 object center, snap to 32
masking, PhotoView image 258 object corner, snap to 33
master bedroom (Room Wizard) 58 object description (3D Custom Workshop) 348
master pricelist, creating in Estimator 287 object organizer 173
matching apply (3D Custom Workshop) 397 Object Organizer, recycle button 174
matching scale (FloorPlan Trace) 252 object selection mode
material estimations (Home Estimator) 287 in 3D Custom Workshop 364
material organizer 173 in Door Designer 199
material organizer (Material Workshop) 185 in Section Detailer 315
material toolbar (3D Custom Workshop) 344 in Symbol Editor 307
Material Workshop 183 in Window Designer 205
tips for using 190 object-level editing 147
material, adding (Fence Designer) 270 in Material Workshop 188
material, attaching (RealModel) 296 objects 21, 170
material, printing template (RealModel) 295 converting 2D to 3D (3D Custom Workshop) 375
materials copying 152
applying 180 copying (DXF/DWG Import) 264
applying in Punch! (Material Workshop) 189 copying between floors 152, 264
hiding in 3D 164 editing 172
viewing in 3D 164 elevating 155, 173
materials, applying (3D Custom Workshop) 396 hiding in 3D 163
mature plants 177 moving 172
measurement tools 9 moving by coordinates 172
measurements, using the Virtual Ruler 39 printing (3D Custom Workshop) 349
menu bar 8 renaming 172
in 3D Custom Workshop 344 rotating 154, 172
metric (3D Custom Workshop) 355 rotating (3D Custom Workshop) 380
mirror 37 selecting (3D Custom Workshop) 364
in 3D Custom Workshop 385 selecting (Door Designer) 199
modifying deck staircases 120 selecting (Section Detailer) 315
in Deck Designer 130 selecting (Symbol Editor) 307
modifying staircases 80 selecting (Window Designer) 205
month (Global Sun Positioning) 318 specifying 3D size (3D Custom Workshop) 381
move to back (Room Wizard) 59 viewing in 3D 163
move to front (Room Wizard) 59 objects, moving between floors 152
move, entire plan 153 office (Room Wizard) 58
moving offset dimension 37
along the grid 17 online help 5
ceiling fan 88 opacity (Material Workshop) 187
features between plans 153 opacity, in ClearView 160
floors 79 open arc (3D Custom Workshop) 362
objects 172 open arc, 2D (3D Custom Workshop) 371
objects between floors 152 open stairway 80
Photoview image 256 opening 274
plants 176 opening a file (3D Custom Workshop) 348
railing (Deck Designer) 123 ornamental iron fences (Fence Designer) 268
sinks 93 ornamental iron gates (Fence Designer) 268
staircases 80 orthographic (3D Custom Workshop) 390
multigon deck (Deck Designer) 126 outdoor hose bib 92
multigon, 2D (3D Custom Workshop) 369 outlets, placing 86
multigon, drawing 28, 144 oval (3D Custom Workshop) 358
in 3D Custom Workshop 359 oval, 2D (3D Custom Workshop) 368
ovals, drawing 28, 142
oven (Cabinet Wizard) 212
N
network options (Punch! Updater) 25
normal apply (3D Custom Workshop) 397 P
north, angle (Global Sun Positioning) 321 paint 179
notations 39 palettes 162
nudge 153 pan (3D Custom Workshop) 392
in 3D Custom Workshop 384 parameters, undo 152
paste 152
paste (Animator) 327

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 405


Index

path name, hide (Animator) 336 point tension, customize (Animator) 335
path name, view (Animator) 336 point-level editing 147
pathway 135 in Material Workshop 188
change width 135 points
straight or curved 135 adding roof points (Roofing Wizard) 114
perimeter, foundation 62 deleting roof points (Roofing Wizard) 114
perpendicular, snap to 35 polygon deck (Deck Designer) 124
perspective (3D Custom Workshop) 390 polygon, 2D (3D Custom Workshop) 369
perspective editing (Material Workshop) 189 polygon, 3D (3D Custom Workshop) 360
perspective editing (PhotoView Editor) 262 polygons, drawing 28, 143
phone jack 89 pond, adding 136
photograph (PhotoView) 255 pool depth (Pool Designer) 236
PhotoView 255 pool options (Pool Designer) 247
file format 256 pool shape (Pool Designer) 235
masking 258 pool support system, adding (Pool Designer) 240
tips for using 255 pool template, create (Pool Designer) 245
PhotoView Editor 260 pool volume (Pool Designer) 246
pi radian (3D Custom Workshop) 376 Pool Wizard 234
picket fences (Fence Designer) 269 position readout bar (3D Custom Workshop) 344
picket gates (Fence Designer) 269 post tension strand 64
picture of my home (PhotoView) 259 PowerTool launch bar 10
piers, foundation 64 PowerTool Store, visit 11
pitch, roof 105 PowerTool-enabled 14
pitch, roof (Roofing Wizard) 112, 113 PowerTools
placing Global Sun Positioning 318
air ducts 96 pre-built steps, adding (Pool Designer) 240
bathtubs 93 preview bar 10
ceiling and floor outlets 86 preview bar (3D Custom Workshop) 345
gas bib 92 preview speed, setting (Animator) 331, 339
hose bib 92 print 294
hot water heater 94 a 3D LiveView rendering (Framing Editor) 284
showers 94 print templates (RealModel) 294
sinks 93 printer setup (RealModel) 294
sprinkler heads 140 printing 3D LiveView 22
toilets 92 printing drawing in color 22
plan layer, viewing a 44 printing floorplans 22
plan scale 22 print to fit page 22
plan tab, selecting 44 in Framing Editor 283
plan tabs 8 in Trim Designer 232
plan views (Topo Designer) 56 print to scale 22
planar mapping 398 in Framing Editor 283
plane (3D Custom Workshop) 363 printing
plans, customizing visible 44 a pricelist (Home Estimator) 289
plant categories 175 floorplans (3D Custom Workshop) 349
plant database 176 in Section Detailer 316
Plant Editor 226 priority (Room Wizard) 59
Plant Fill 147 privacy fences (Fence Designer) 269
plant growth meter 177 privacy gates (Fence Designer) 269
PlantFinder 176 properties bar 10
plants properties tab, selecting 45
adding 175 property line 134
customizing age 176 proxy settings (Punch! Updater) 25
find by name 177 pumps (heat), adding 97
locate on Preview Bar 177 Punch! Cabinet Wizard 209
moving 176 Punch! Home Design
sorting 176 installing 4
plants, growing 177 registering 5
play video after export (Animator) 326, 331 uses for 3
plotter 22 Punch! Online Community 6
plumbing Punch! Software homepage 5
hiding in 3D 164 punchsoftware.com 5, 6
viewing in 3D 164
plumbing tab 91
point elevation, hide (Animator) 336 Q
point elevations, view (Animator) 336
point selection mode (3D Custom Workshop) 365 quarter view 158

406 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


R railing 120
railing (Deck Designer) 130
R12 (DXF/DWG Import) 263 roofing 105
radians (3D Custom Workshop) 376
staircases 120
rafter
staircases (Deck Designer) 130
material, customizing (Framing Editor) 281 steps 119
material, specifying (Framing Editor) 281 steps (Deck Designer) 130
size, specifying (Framing Editor) 281
tubs 93
spacing, specifying (Framing Editor) 281
retaining wall height 140
rafter properties (Framing Editor) 281
retaining walls 139
rail fences (Fence Designer) 269
reversing a staircase 80, 120
rail gates (Fence Designer) 269
reversing a staircase (Deck Designer) 131
rail height, change 216
revolving, 2D objects (3D Custom Workshop) 376
rail, cabinet (Cabinet Wizard) 210
right align text 40
railings
right view (3D Custom Workshop) 393
adding 81, 119
rim joists, specifying (Framing Editor) 280, 281
adding (Deck Designer) 127
roof
modifying 81
adding roof points (Roofing Wizard) 114
rails, adding (Pool Designer) 237
custom roof region (Roofing Wizard) 114
RealModel 293
deleting roof points (Roofing Wizard) 114
attaching template textures & colors 296
freehand hip roof (Roofing Wizard) 114
construction material 294
height policy (Roofing Wizard) 112, 113
scale 294
options (Roofing Wizard) 112, 113
recently opened files 20
pitch (Roofing Wizard) 112, 113
recessed lights, dimming 88
roof cutout 105
rectangle (3D Custom Workshop) 358
roof elevation (Roofing Wizard) 115
rectangle, 2D (3D Custom Workshop) 368
roof pitch (Roofing Wizard) 114
rectangles, drawing 28, 142
roof pitch, change 105
rectangular deck (Deck Designer) 124
roof slope, change 105
recycle button 174
roof trusses (Framing Editor) 281
redo 152
roof, resizing 105
reference grid 16
roofing tab 101
refrigerator (Cabinet Wizard) 212
Roofing Wizard (Roofing Wizard) 112
region, fill 134
roofs
registering the program 5
adding 102
registration 5
constructing templates (RealModel) 295
relative (Site Planner) 194
gambrel 105, 107
remove handrails 118
hiding in 3D 164
remove skirt trim 118
saltbox 108
remove trim 178
viewing in 3D 164
remove wall trim 179
room templates 175
renaming layers (3D Custom Workshop) 383
rotate 154
render final quality (3D Custom Workshop) 390
3D objects (3D Custom Workshop) 380
rendered mode, printing in (3D Custom Workshop) 350
air ducts 96
rendering options 161
hvac units 97
rendering, adjusting quality 160
objects 172
rendering, stopping process 160
walls 72
replacing PhotoView image 257
rotate entire plan 153
replicate tool (Plant Editor) 227
rotate, specified amount 154
requirements, system 4
in PhotoView Editor 261
reshape
rotated text 40
add points 36
rotation origin visible (3D Custom Workshop) 393
decks 118
rules 145
flooring 82
remove points 36
reshaping, fill 134
resize exterior wall 68 S
resize interior wall 72 saltbox roof 108
resize, objects 172 save 3D view 164
resizing save as 20
bathtubs 93 saving animation paths (Animator) 326
doors 75 saving files 20
fences (Fence Designer) 269 saving your property lines (Site Planner) 196
gates 139 scale contours (Topo Designer) 50
gates (Fence Designer) 269 scale, defining (RealModel) 294
PhotoView image 258 scale, setting 15, 22

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 407


Index

scanned image, importing (Material Workshop) 190 smooth 148


scanned image, importing (PhotoView) 255 smoothing tension 148
scene brightness (Global Sun Positioning) 321 snap basics 29
screen colors 154 snap grid, on and off (3D Custom Workshop) 353
scroll bars 10 snap to
scroll bars (3D Custom Workshop) 345 intersection 34
search for updates (Punch! Updater) 24 object center 32
second floor, adding 78 object corner 33
Section Detailer 309 perpendicular 35
segment centerpoint, snap to 31 segment centerpoint 31
segment time, hide (Animator) 336 segment-offset 35
segment time, view (Animator) 336 snap to grid, settings 16
segment-offset, snap to 35 snap to grid, turning off 17
select material/paint tool 167 snaps bar 9
selecting in 3D 166 soffit options 70
selection filter 10 spa tub 93
selection mode, object spacing, baluster 119
in 3D Custom Workshop 364 in Deck Designer 130
in Door Designer 199 speed tips 5
in Section Detailer 315 speed, fly-around 159
in Symbol Editor 307 speed, walk through 159
in Window Designer 205 split view 158
selection mode, point (3D Custom Workshop) 365 split view, 2D and 3D 158
selection, rotating 154 split-level, creating 65
send to back 146 sprinkler head, placing 140
in Material Workshop 188 square footage, calculating 39
send to back (PhotoView Editor) 261 squares, drawing 28, 142
serial number 5 staircases
set lighting (Global Sun Positioning) 321 copying 81
set rotation origin (3D Custom Workshop) 393 customizing 80
setting a nudge distance (3D Custom Workshop) 384 customizing (Deck Designer) 131
setting a temporary directory (Animator) 326, 339 modifying 80
setting display size (Animator) 339 modifying (Deck Designer) 130
setting export quality (Animator) 338 moving 81
setting frames per second (Animator) 338 placing 79
setting roof options (Roofing Wizard) 112, 113 placing straight (Deck Designer) 127
settings (Punch! Updater) 25 resizing 120
settings, display 5 resizing (Deck Designer) 130
shading (Global Sun Positioning) 321 reversing the direction 80, 120
shading intensity (Global Sun Positioning) 321 reversing the direction (Deck Designer) 131
shadows (Global Sun Positioning) 321 straight (Deck Designer) 127
shadows in preview (Animator) 339 staircases (deck)
shadows, adding 161 customizing 120
shape, pool (Pool Designer) 235 modifying 120
shorten interior walls 72 placing straight 120
show FloorPlan Trace image 253 straight 120
show on startup (Deck Designer) 122 stairway landing 80
show tools (Home Estimator) 286 stairway, open 80
show topography lines 164 standard toolbar 7
shrubs 175 standard toolbar (3D Custom Workshop) 344
side grid (3D Custom Workshop) 352 status bar 10
side-by-side refrigerator (Cabinet Wizard) 212 status bar (3D Custom Workshop) 344
sidewalk 135 steps
single oven (Cabinet Wizard) 212 adding (Deck Designer) 130
sinks 93 changing the height 119
Site Planner 194 changing the height (Deck Designer) 130
size, 3D objects (3D Custom Workshop) 381 resizing 119
skewing objects (3D Custom Workshop) 380 resizing (Deck Designer) 130
skirt trim steps, adding 119
editing (Deck Designer) 129 steps, adding (Pool Designer) 237
removing (Deck Designer) 129 steps, adding pre-built (Pool Designer) 240
skirt trim (deck), editing 118 stiffener beams 63
skylight 107 changing length 64
slab foundation 64 dimensioning 64
slide, adding (Pool Designer) 242 stile width, change (Cabinet Wizard) 216
smoke detector 89 stile, cabinet (Cabinet Wizard) 210

408 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


stock cabinets (Cabinet Wizard) 209
time, synchronize (Global Sun Positioning) 320
stop rendering 160
tips & tricks 8
straight deck staircase 120
tips for using (Plant Editor) 225
in Deck Designer 127
title bar 8
straight edging 136
title bar (3D Custom Workshop) 344
straight railing 81, 119
To 236
in Deck Designer 127
toe kick size, change (Cabinet Wizard) 216
straight staircase 79
toekick (Cabinet Wizard) 210
straight staircases 120
toilets, placing 92
in Deck Designer 127
toolbars 8
straighten a curved pathway 135
toolbars (3D Custom Workshop) 344
straighten curved edging 137
tools, measurement 9
stud spacing 62, 70, 115
top cabinet
support column material (Framing Editor) 280
support columns (Framing Editor) 279 depth, change (Cabinet Wizard) 215
elevation, change (Cabinet Wizard) 214
support, technical 6
height, change (Cabinet Wizard) 215
suppress background animation 164
thickness, change (Cabinet Wizard) 215
surface mapping 398
with microwave (Cabinet Wizard) 211
surface skimmer, adding (Pool Designer) 240
top view (3D Custom Workshop) 393
switches, connector 86
topography
symbol categories
alter (Topo Designer) 53
creating (Symbol Editor) 302
hiding in 3D 164
deleting (Symbol Editor) 302
viewing in 3D 164
renaming (Symbol Editor) 302
topography (Topo Designer) 53
Symbol Editor 301
topography objects
symbols
adding (Topo Designer) 50
creating (Symbol Editor) 302
moving (Symbol Editor) 302 arc (Topo Designer) 52
circle/oval (Topo Designer) 51
symbols, 2D 170
circular arc (Topo Designer) 52
synchronize (Global Sun Positioning) 320
curved (Topo Designer) 51
system requirements 4
multigon (Topo Designer) 53
system settings 5
rectangle (Topo Designer) 51
straight-edge (Topo Designer) 51
tracing (Topo Designer) 54
T topography, define 14
tabs trace images (Topo Designer) 54
deck plan 117 tracing (FloorPlan Trace) 252
detail plan 141 tracing, floorplan 252
electrical plan 85 tracking, constraining (Door Designer) 199
floor plan 67 translucency (3D Custom Workshop) 390
foundation 61 translucency slider 160
hvac 95 transparent fill 145
landscape plan 133 transparent, mask (PhotoView Editor) 258
plumbing 91 trees 175
roofing 101 trim categories
technical support 6 creating (Trim Designer) 230
temp directory, setting (Animator) 326, 339 deleting (Trim Designer) 230
template organizer 173 renaming (Trim Designer) 230
template, printing textures 295 Trim Designer 229
template, RealModel wall 294 trim organizer 173
templates 175 trim style, cabinet (Cabinet Wizard) 214
text trim, remove 178
adding 39 trims
alignment 40 creating (Trim Designer) 230
at an angle 40 deleting (Trim Designer) 230
edit 40 importing (Trim Designer) 230
formatting 40 moving (Trim Designer) 230
texture, attaching (RealModel) 296 true north (Global Sun Positioning) 321
textured (3D Custom Workshop) 390 trusses (Framing Editor) 281
thermostat 89 tubs, placing 93
thickness, change backsplash (Cabinet Wizard) 216 two colors on one wall 74
thickness, change top cabinet (Cabinet Wizard) 215 two textures on one wall 178
three-point freehand roof tool 104
time (Global Sun Positioning) 318
time clock (Global Sun Positioning) 320

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 409


Index

U adjusting elevation 159


speed 159
undo 152 view 158
undo parameters 152 wall break tool 74
uninstall content updates (Punch! Updater) 24 wall cabinet (Cabinet Wizard) 210
unit of measurement 15 wall framing properties (Framing Editor) 278
unit of measurement (3D Custom Workshop) 347 wall height (Roofing Wizard) 114
unsmooth 148 wall options 70
update 3D view 164 wall properties (Framing Editor) 278
update topography from previous version 50 wall tab (Room Wizard) 59
URL, Punch 5 wall trace deck (Deck Designer) 127
USDA zone maps 176 wall trim, remove 179
user interface 7 wall width 70
walls
changing length 72
V defining height 73
diagonal 72
vents, placing 96
exact length exterior 68
vertically, flip entire plan 153
exact length interior 69
view
exterior 68
doors in 3D 163
interior 69
materials in 3D 164
irregular 72
objects in 3D 163
retaining 139
plumbing in 3D 164
retaining height 140
roofs in 3D 164
rotating 72
topography in 3D 164
second floor 78
view path name (Animator) 336
slanted 72
view point elevations (Animator) 336 walls tab (Room Wizard) 58
view segment time (Animator) 336 walls, constructing templates (RealModel) 295
view, adding shadows 161
wall-spacing dimensions 37
view, adjusting lighting 161
watch plants grow 177
in 3D Custom Workshop 392
water transparency (Pool Designer) 247
view, camera angle 159
width, change
view, quarter 158 base cabinet (Cabinet Wizard) 214
view, speed 159
stile (Cabinet Wizard) 216
view, split 158
width, foundation 62
viewing
window categories
2D plan (Topo Designer) 56
creating (Window Designer) 206
all floors (Topo Designer) 56
deleting (Window Designer) 206
working floor (Topo Designer) 56
renaming (Window Designer) 206
viewing elevations in ClearView 159
Window Designer 203
viewing, plan layer 44
window dimensions, hiding 39, 62, 70
viewpoint angle 166
window header size (Framing Editor) 281
viewpoint toolbar (3D Custom Workshop) 344
window layout 7
views
window layout (3D Custom Workshop) 343
2D (3D Custom Workshop) 354
window molding 178
ClearView (3D Custom Workshop) 390
window treatments 170
controlled fly-around 159
window, grill settings 77
final quality (3D Custom Workshop) 390 window, LiveView 158
orthographic (3D Custom Workshop) 390 windows 76
perspective (3D Custom Workshop) 390
creating (Window Designer) 206
textured (3D Custom Workshop) 390
importing (Window Designer) 206
translucent (3D Custom Workshop) 390
moving (Window Designer) 206
wire frame (3D Custom Workshop) 390
wire frame (3D Custom Workshop) 390
views, fly-around 159
wire frame, printing in (3D Custom Workshop) 350
virtual ruler 9
Wolfgang Trost Architects 21
hiding 39
working elevation, setting 156
visibility (Room Wizard) 59
in 3D Custom Workshop 355, 381
volleyball net, adding (Pool Designer) 241
working floor
VRML, exporting to 21
button 10
color 154
viewing (Topo Designer) 56
W working in groups (3D Custom Workshop) 381
wainscot, remove 179 working in layers (3D Custom Workshop) 382
wainscotting 178 workshop object, resize 172
walk-through workspace boundary (Door Designer) 199

410 PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide


Z
zero-offset dimension 38
zoom (3D Custom Workshop) 392

PUNCH! Home Design Architectural Series 4000 User’s Guide 411

Das könnte Ihnen auch gefallen